JP7329817B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the problems described above, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A game machine having a first display screen and a second display screen, and comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects on the first display screen and the second display screen ,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined first specific image,
the second effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined second specific image related to the first specific image;
The display means displays the second specific image by adding a predetermined third specific image to the first specific image,
the first effect is a effect in which the second specific image is not displayed;
In the second effect, the second specific image is moved to a predetermined position on the first display screen by moving the first specific image and the third specific image on the first display screen in the first direction . While the first specific image is moved and stopped at the predetermined position, the third specific image is displayed in such a manner that it continues to move in the first direction and moves to a predetermined position on the second display screen. may be
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4 and T10; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a third aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display effect of a sub-display screen 64; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the third movable accessory 18; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending icon-linked effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending icon-linked effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending icon-linked effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending icon-linked effect D; It is an explanatory view for explaining the continuous reach effect A. It is an explanatory view for explaining a continuous reach effect B. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the continuous reach production C. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the continuous reach production D. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo-continue suggestion effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo-continue suggestion effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo-continue suggestion effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo-continue suggestion effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo continuous effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo continuous effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo-continuous effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo-continuous effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a decorative symbol variation effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a decorative symbol variation effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a decorative symbol variation effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a decorative symbol variation effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a ready-to-win effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a ready-to-win effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a ready-to-win effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a ready-to-win effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an interlocking deformation effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an interlocking deformation effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an interlocking deformation effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an interlocking deformation effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer count effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer count effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer count effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer count effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-holds display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-holds display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-holds display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-holds display effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation means image-linked effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation means image-linked effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation means image-linked effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation means image-linked effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific image movement effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific image movement effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific image movement effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific image movement effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending change suggestion effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending change suggestion effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending change suggestion effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending change suggestion effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer countdown effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer countdown effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer countdown effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer countdown effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character image cutting effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character image cutting effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character image cutting effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character image cutting effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role-linked production A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character-linked production B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role-linked production C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role-linked production D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a V-shaped display formation effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a V-shaped display formation effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a V-shaped display formation effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a V-shaped display formation effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a cut-in effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a cut-in effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a cut-in effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a cut-in effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer actuation effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer activation effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer activation effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer activation effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operating means appearance effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operating means appearance effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operating means appearance effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operating means appearance effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a user-customized display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a user-customized display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a user-customized display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a user-customized display effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main-sub-image moving effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main-sub-image moving effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main-sub-image moving effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main-sub-image moving effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sub-display screen corresponding effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sub-display screen corresponding effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sub-display screen corresponding effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sub-display screen corresponding effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the twin identification information effect A; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining twin identification information presentation B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a twin identification information presentation C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the twin identification information effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the twin identification information presentation E; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a twin identification information effect F; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the twin identification information presentation G; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a twin identification information presentation H; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a record update display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a record update display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a record update display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a record update display effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls display effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a multiple screen display presentation A of the number of balls put out; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a multiple screen display effect B of the number of balls put out; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls-out multiple-screen display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls-out multiple-screen display effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls-out movement display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls-out movement display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls-out movement display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-balls-out movement display effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a consecutive win count display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-success-plays display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a consecutive win count display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a number-of-success-plays display effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a direction/place suggestion display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a direction place suggesting display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a direction place suggestion display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a direction place suggestion display effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a direction-suggesting display change effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a direction-suggesting display change effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a direction-suggesting display change effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a direction-suggesting display change effect D; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an expected value suggestion effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an expected value suggestion effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an expected value suggestion effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a modified example of the count display image KHG; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an expectation-suggesting character effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an expectation-suggesting character effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an expectation-suggesting character effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an expectation degree suggesting character effect D;

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Also, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62, effect button 63, sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), frame lamp 66 (right frame lamp 66R, left frame lamp 66L) and a speaker 67. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. As shown in FIG. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp 66R and a left frame lamp 66L, is arranged above the front frame 53, and emits light during a game. The right frame lamp 66R is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp 66L is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a big winning opening opening start opening 17, and a general winning opening 27 ( A normal prize winning port 27), a general prize winning port 29 (ordinary winning prize port 29), an out port 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp 66R and the left frame lamp 66L, and configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a pending digested image display region in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C or the pending icon 9C. The first pending icon and the second pending icon are collectively referred to simply as pending icons.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is also called "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect" or "variation display". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production pattern (the production pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently fluctuating on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b. 2 It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the special figure reservation is digested ("extraction of special figure suspension" described later).

A first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided at the upper right and upper left of the image display device 7 . The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two long plate-shaped light emitting members can move obliquely downward. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the upper right and upper left retracted positions (FIG. 1) of the display device 7, moves (advances) obliquely downward from the retracted position, and moves forward of the display screen 7a. It can rest in the advanced position. The first movable accessory 14 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 . A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10. - 特許庁A stage portion 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which the game balls flow in and an exit part from which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part. A third board movable body 18 (also referred to as a third movable accessory 18), which is a movable so-called gimmick (not shown), is attached below the stage section 11 .

A fixed prize winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting port 21 triggers the lottery of the second special symbol (small winning lottery and big winning lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 that it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the ``special symbol jackpot lottery'' means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a jackpot random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained jackpot random number is used. It refers to a process of determining whether or not a big win is made by comparing with a value corresponding to a predetermined "big win". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the ``special symbol lottery'' means that when a game ball wins in the second start port 21, a small winning random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired small winning random number is set in advance. By comparing with the value corresponding to the "small hit", it refers to the process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. The lottery result of this "small hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of the special symbols is performed on the second special symbol display device 41b described later, and a lottery is drawn after a predetermined variation time has elapsed. A special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance patterns are variably displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols, and by this pattern matching game, the lottery result of the small win is more effectively notified to the player. .

In addition, the "lottery of normal symbols" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big winning hole 30 has an opening/closing member (first special winning hole opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, small winning attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and is the second big winning port (second special A winning opening) 35 is provided. The second big prize winning opening 35 has an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state. This second big winning device is a small winning attacker that is activated when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 and wins a small winning lottery.

The large winning opening opening start opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 .

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize at the first start hole 20 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (changes display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped manner, so that a lottery (jackpot lottery) based on the winning of the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is performed. Notify the results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the jackpot game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 notifies the result of the lottery (small winning lottery) based on the winning to the second starting port 21 by displaying the special symbol (identification information) variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (small winning pattern) of a predetermined small winning stop mode, a special game (small winning game) is performed to open the second big winning hole 35 in a predetermined opening pattern. In addition, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 in the small winning game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. When a small prize is won, a small prize pattern in which the first and second LEDs from the left are lit is displayed, such as "○○●●●●●●" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). If the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be used as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be used as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large winning opening opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the 2 major winning opening sensor 35a, V area sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a, 29a are illustrated. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17 a is provided inside the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 and detects a game ball entering the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 . The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The normal winning opening sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning opening 29 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general pattern reservation. Display control for the display device 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 that stores programs and the like for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 that executes the programs stored in the sub ROM 94. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers and symbols are stored. etc. (including production patterns) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . and so on. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 are connected to the lamp control board 107 to control them. do. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 based on the command received from the main control board 80. FIG. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) for determining the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18, and generates the motion pattern data. According to the above, the operation of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 is controlled. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lighting control of the lamp and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9, and a small win judgment table T10 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A small hit flag, a V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variable counter, a time saving counter and the like are set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-determination command, a pending ball number command, a variation start command, a variation A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Probability variation production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 generates a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)", and a "small hit random number". is acquired at a timing described later. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is variably displayed remains. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The “small hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery (small hit determination) as to whether or not a small hit is made, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. The “jackpot random number”, the “jackpot type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “fluctuation pattern random number” are obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 . A “small hit random number” is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 . The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. ``Random number for look-ahead effect'' is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect at the time of variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and FIG. 8(E) , a diagram for explaining the small hit determination table T10.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximate probability 1/397), and the jackpot random value is "0 to 164 Numerical values other than (165 to 65535)” are determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximate probability 1/101), and the jackpot random number is a number other than "0 to 649 (650 ~65535)” is determined to be “losing”. The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether It should be noted that this reach determination table T2 is not referred to when the obtained jackpot random number value corresponds to "jackpot". In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (any one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

In the small hit determination table T10, the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), the small hit random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired corresponds to "small hit" or "losing". This table is referenced to determine whether to It should be noted that this small hit determination table T10 is not referred to when the obtained big hit random number value corresponds to "big hit". In FIG. 8 (E), in all states (regardless of the game state), if the small hit random value is "0 to 63", it is determined as "small hit" (probability 1/2), If the numerical value is "a numerical value (64 to 127) other than 0 to 63", it is determined to be "losing". It should be noted that the small hit determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when a game ball wins in the second start hole 21 (not referred to when a game ball wins in the first start hole 20). Also, the small win determination table T10 is a table that is not referred to when a "big win" is determined.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 40", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 A stop symbol (a special figure stop symbol) is determined to be a "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is ``41 to 82'', the jackpot type is determined to be ``16RV passage scheduled jackpot'', and the stop pattern of special figure 2 (special figure stop pattern) is determined to be ``jackpot pattern 2''. . When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. .
In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". Also, in a non-time-saving state, digest the hold of the second start-up port 21 (because it is difficult to win the second start-up port 21 in a non-time-saving state, the time-saving state (high probability high base state) ends and the normal state (non- When it becomes a time saving state, a low probability base state), the suspension of the second start port 21 is digested), it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and "16RV passage schedule jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5. , “big hit pattern 2 (21H)”, and when the variation pattern random number is “0 to 127”, the variation pattern is determined to be “P22”. Also, in the non-time saving state, the second start port 21 is held, and it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10. P34" is determined.

In FIG. 11, for example, the first start port 20 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined as "no reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of held balls is "3 to 4” and the fluctuation pattern random number is “0 to 127”, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P56”. Also, in the time-saving state, the second start port 21 is won, and it is determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination table T1, and is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" and "big hit pattern 2 (21H)" in the big hit type determination table T5. , when the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P62". In addition, when the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is "P74". is shown to be determined.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. For example, when the hold of the second starting port 21 is digested in the non-time saving state and it is determined as a small hit, the variation pattern is determined as "P34" and the variation time is determined as 15000 msec. In addition, when winning the second starting port 21 in the time saving state and it is determined as a small hit, the variation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the variation time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, during the time saving state (high probability high base state), it is also during the small hit rush (RUSH) period described later until the next big hit, that is, during the small hit rush period, when entering the second start port 21 Since the fluctuation time is 3000 msec and the small hit probability is 1/2, small hits occur frequently in a short time. During the small win rush period, the player can aim for a big win while increasing the number of game balls on hand. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams. In particular, SP5 is a variation pattern of dedicated reach in which a pseudo-jackpot suggestion effect is performed by winning the second start port 21 during a small hit rush (RUSH) period that occurs in a time-saving state (high-probability high-base state) described later ( "P62"). In addition, SP5 occurs during the pending digestion of the second start port 21 when the time saving state (high probability high base state) ends and becomes normal state (non-time saving state, low probability low base state) In this case also, a pseudo-jackpot suggestive effect can be performed (fluctuation pattern “P22”).

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric tube 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the first big winning opening 30 and The opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", "15H" and "22H", the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening The opening pattern of the mouth 35 is determined as "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first big winning mouth 30 and the second big winning mouth 35 is "opening pattern 23". is shown to be determined. In addition, in FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 is determined as "opening pattern 25" as the big winning opening opening pattern in the small winning game. , When the special figure stop symbol data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 26".
FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of opening pattern 21, opening pattern 22 and opening pattern 23 as the big winning opening opening pattern in the jackpot game. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.
FIG. 13(C) shows the contents of open pattern 25 and open pattern 26 as the large winning opening open pattern in the small winning game. In the opening pattern 25, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened once with an opening time of 1.0 second. In the opening pattern 26, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened 5 times for an opening time of 0.3 seconds. That is, in the small winning game, the first big winning hole 30 is not opened, and only the second big winning hole 35 is opened. It should be noted that the opening pattern 25 is, when the "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" is achieved by the jackpot pattern 1 (20H) of the special figure 2, during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game, and the second after the end of the small hit rush. Reservation of the starting port 21 is performed during digestion. The opening pattern 26 is the second start port during the small winning rush period after the end of the big winning game and after the end of the small winning rush when the "16RV passage scheduled big win" is made by the big winning pattern 2 (21H) of the special figure 2. Twenty-one retentions are made during digestion. That is, the opening pattern 26 is a small winning game that is performed after the big winning game when the big winning is achieved via the fluctuation pattern ("P62") of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which the pseudo-big winning suggestion effect described later is performed. It has an open pattern. In other words, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small winning game is different between when the big win is achieved through the pseudo-big win suggestive performance and when the big win is achieved without the pseudo-big win suggestive performance.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "opening pattern 31", When the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure It is shown that when the stop symbol data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins", "small wins" and "losses" as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "small win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "small win symbol". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When a jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed to open a large winning hole (second big winning hole 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the kind of big win that triggered the generation of a small winning rush, which will be described later. be.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly classified into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot".
The "V passage scheduled jackpot (probable variable jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates 71. In addition, the "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)" is a high-probability base state after the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot game is started, and during that period, the second start port 21 It will be a small hit rush period in which you will win frequently and small hits will occur. Here, special figure stop symbol data 11H ~ 14H, 20H, 21H jackpots correspond to "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates the V opening/closing member 71 . In addition, the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" will be in a low-probability base state after the jackpot game ends, and during that period it will be difficult to win a prize to the second start port 21. A small win rush period does not occur after the end of the big win game. Here, the jackpots with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of the game ball to 39 becomes impossible.
As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage scheduled jackpot" includes "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd prize-winning mouth 35 for 29.5 seconds at the maximum per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 15R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V passing schedule jackpot (jackpot with a small hit rush), V The non-passing schedule jackpot is 60/128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot (jackpot with a small hit rush), and V non-passing schedule The jackpot is 45/128 (about 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation A non-controlled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. Game control microcomputer 81, when in the time-saving state, variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning of the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them. However, in this example, as will be described later, an embodiment is shown in which probability variation control and variation time shortening control are executed simultaneously.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting hole 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, the probability variation control for the normal pattern of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed 10,000 times. That is, the high-probability-high base state is substantially ended by winning the next big win (next big win) and executing the big win game. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability State (low probability state) and non-time saving state and low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is the low-probability-low base state. In addition, although not implemented in this example, there is also a game state of a normal probability state (non-high probability state, ie, low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state (electrical sapo control state). Probability high base state”, “low probability short working hours state” (the state that is controlled to at least one of the high probability state and high base state is referred to as “specific game state”). In addition, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) may be referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning prizes to the second starting port 21) than when hitting left, and to generate small hits frequently. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. This is because in the low electric base state, the electric sapo control is not executed, so it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is difficult to win the second starting port 21. This is because it is easier to win the first starting hole 20 than to win the second starting hole 21 . For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This makes it possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning to the first starting port 20) than hitting to the right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal pattern random number, small hit random number) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a reserved ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls to be described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number in the first to normal symbol reservation storage areas 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value), variation pattern random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-T1 value), small hit random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-K value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reserved balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained according to the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the variable probability flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random number value. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a table for a high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") out of the jackpot determination table T1. It is determined in advance whether or not it is a big hit by referring to it. That is, when the big hit random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a jackpot) and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. In S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, small hit determination, variation pattern selection and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a big hit game or a small hit game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

In the special action process, the process related to the first special symbol display device 41a and the process related to the second special symbol display device 41b are made independent, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. may be configured to allow simultaneous variation of the In this case, the processing for the first special symbol display 41a and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each stage of the "special figure 1 operation status" Call them "1", "2", "3" and "4". In addition, the second special symbol display device 41b and the process related to the big winning device are divided into four stages, and each stage is "1", "2", "3", "4" of "special figure 2 operation status" respectively. call. The initial setting of "special figure 1 operation status" and "special figure 2 operation status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not one of the "special figure 1 operation status" and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4". When either "special figure 1 operation status" and "special figure 2 operation status" is "4", special electric accessary product processing is performed. In the special electric accessary product process, a big hit game or a small hit game is executed. Specifically, when the special figure 1 operation status is "4", the jackpot game by the special figure 1 jackpot is executed. When the special figure 2 operation status is "4", a big hit game or a small hit game by the special figure 2 big hit is executed. When neither the "special figure 1 operation status" nor the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3". ” is determined. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", the special figure 1 standby process is performed. In the special figure 1 standby process, hit determination of special figure 1, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2", perform the special figure 1 changing process. In special figure 1 fluctuating process, the output of fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has elapsed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3", the special figure 1 determination process is performed. In the special figure 1 determination process, the output of the opening command etc. is executed at the time of the big hit or the small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. After determining whether the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2" or "3", the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" or "2". A determination of "3" is made. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1", the special figure 2 standby process is performed. In the special figure 2 standby process, the hit determination of the special figure 2, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2", perform the special figure 2 changing process. In special figure 2 fluctuating process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation time elapses. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3", the special figure 2 determination process is performed. In the special figure 2 determination process, the output of the opening command etc. is executed at the time of the big hit or the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation process of the present embodiment, the standby process of the special figure 1, the process during fluctuation, the confirmation process and the standby process of the special figure 2, the fluctuation process, the confirmation process are executed in parallel be. On the other hand, the jackpot game and the small hit game are executed preferentially over the special figure 1 and special figure 2 standby processing, variation processing, and determination processing.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1400). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes small hit determination processing (step S1401). In the small hit determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the small hit determination with reference to the small hit determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first stores a small hit random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit by reading out and using the read out small hit random value and the small hit determination table T10. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the small winning flag when the result of the small winning determination is "small winning", and sets the special figure stop design data corresponding to the small winning design in the buffer of the main RAM 84. , the process ends. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes big hit determination processing (step S1402) and variation pattern selection processing (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information about the special figure stop design data set in the small hit determination process (step S1401), and the big hit determination process (Step S1402) information on the special figure stop design data set in, information on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information on variation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special Figure 2 big hit determination process (step S1402) and special figure 1 big hit determination process (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described collectively. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high probability state table in the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big hit is determined (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to make the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") among the big hit determination tables T1 determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing" (the result of the small hitting determination is also "losing"), the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is provided in the main RAM84. It is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1520), and the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1610). If the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the small hit flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state small hit among the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to select the variation pattern. (step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as the table for the non-time-saving state small hit, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. (Address is set). "P34" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604). It is done based on the special figure stop design data.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in special figure 2 the fluctuation pattern is “P21”, “P22” part) is set). From the read variation pattern random number, either "P1" ~ "P3" as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P21" or "P22" in the special figure 2 is selected.

When the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. "P4" to "P6" part, the part where the variation pattern is "P23" in Special Figure 2) is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in the special figure 1 as the variation pattern either "P4" to "P6", in the special figure 2 "P23" is selected.

In step S1610, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a reach random number as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number and the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4). Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the part of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is steps S1605, S1606, It is different from S1608, S1609 and S1611. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621 , the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" to "P43" part, and in special figure 2, the variation pattern is "P61" or "P62" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" or "P62" in the special figure 2 is selected. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (special figure In 1, the variation pattern is “P44” to “P46”, and in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is “P63”). From the read variation pattern random number, either "P44" ~ "P46" as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small hit, the portion corresponding to the small hit ("P74" portion) of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is referred to. "P74" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern. (Step S1630) This processing ends. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). If the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808) and terminates this process. As a result, the big winning game and the small winning game are not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) again, and the big winning determination, the small winning determination, etc. for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the big win with the small hit rush (step S1811). . Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "4" (step S1807), and ends this process.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "10000" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). When the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). In addition, when "10000" is set to the variable probability counter, the value of the variable probability counter does not actually become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, "10000" is set to the time-saving counter at the time of transition to the time-saving state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). In addition, when "10000" is set to a time saving counter, the value of a real time saving counter will not become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information (probability variable state or not, probability variable counter value, time saving state or not, time saving counter value, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time-saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the large winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for opening the large winning opening are established (step S2203). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a ball has entered the large winning opening opening start opening 17 as a condition for opening the large winning opening. If there is no entry into the special winning opening opening starting opening 17, it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied. When a ball enters the large winning opening opening start opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 further determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the large winning opening. The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If the above conditions are not satisfied (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When the above conditions are satisfied (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing is finished.

In the above step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the special electric accessory processing, in addition to the opening processing of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) in the big winning game as described above, the big winning opening (first big winning opening 35) in the small winning game The processing for opening the second prize winning port 35) is also performed. Although not shown, specifically, when the small hit flag is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 opens a large winning opening ( After opening the second large prize winning port 35), it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the large prize winning port (Fig. 13) are satisfied. Closes (closes) the big winning opening (finishes the small winning game). After that, the small winning flag is turned OFF, and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning to the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In addition, when the V opening and closing member 71 is short-circuited, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that wins the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and finish this processing.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns OFF the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 advances the process to step S2309. On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "10000" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "10000" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 10,000 times, or the next jackpot is won.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost reached before the 10000 jackpot lottery is performed in the high-probability base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the big hit in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the big hit scheduled to pass through V (special figure stop symbol data 20H, 21H) is the big hit game If V passes in the middle, the game state after the big win will be in a high-probability high base state until the next big win, and it is almost guaranteed that it will be a small win rush.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the game state set just now.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big win, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is transmitted to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning hole or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the game state information included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the prior determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot prior determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type prior determination result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, if the pre-determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A prefetch effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area concerned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "Pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process is terminated.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable effect (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic performance pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, Multiple types of basic production patterns for SP4 production, multiple types of basic production patterns for SP5 production (dedicated reach production pattern for pseudo-jackpot suggestion production described later), and multiple types of basic production for non-reach production. Patterns and multiple types of basic production patterns that perform small hit production are set. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P74", a basic effect pattern for performing a small hit effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, and determines a chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93. - 特許庁

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the part which decides the fluctuation production pattern of special figure 1 at the time of non time saving state among chance up production pattern decision table T53 is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P34", "P41" to "P56", "P61" to "P74". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combinations of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not being executed (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 to inform the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. , the effect contents are switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-fluctuation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A RAM 104 is provided with buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 . FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, even if the pre-variation ending command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notice fade effect of fading the notice image is performed. Do. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a command to end the variation effect from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing ends.

9. Operation of Movable Board and Display Effect of Sub-Display Screen 64 Using FIGS. The operation and display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 drives the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 to operate during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. Take control. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. The first movable accessory 14 has two long plate-shaped light emitting members, each of which is configured to be movable. The two long plate-shaped light emitting members are configured to be able to advance obliquely downward. The first movable accessory 14 can rest at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first mode). At this time, the two long plate-like light-emitting members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, respectively. At this time, the tip side of the first movable accessory 14 is visible to the player. By moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. second aspect). In this second mode, the two light-emitting members are arranged linearly with the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 on the front surface of the image display device 7 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 can move from the advanced position shown in FIG. 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. can.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body with a smiley face drawn on it. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first mode). At this time, a portion of the lower side of the rotating body becomes visible. The rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 advances downward from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can perform a rotating effect in front of the display screen 7a (second mode).

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the third mode of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rotating body on which a smiley face is drawn is divided into two and can be relatively slidably moved. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 includes a first member 15a that is the left half of the smiley face and a second member 15b that is the right half of the smiley face. The first member 15a and the second member 15b are configured to be relatively slidable. Here, in the second movable accessory 15, the first member 15a and the second member 15b are relatively slid at the front position (second mode) of the display screen 7a shown in FIG. The first member 15a and the second member 15b can stand still in a displaced state (third mode).

FIG. 49 is an explanatory view showing an example of the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display an image. Moreover, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the image on the display screen 7a.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the third movable accessory 18. FIG. The third movable accessory 18 includes a rotating body with a smiley face drawn on it. As shown in FIG. 1, the third movable accessory 18 is stored at a retracted position (home position) below the stage section 11, and can rest here (first mode). At this time, the rotating body becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The third movable accessory 18 moves upward as a rotating body from the state shown in FIG. 1, and in front of the display screen 7a, similarly to the second movable accessory 15, can perform a rotating effect (not shown). In addition, the third movable accessory 18 is configured such that a rotating body on which a smiley face is drawn is divided into two parts so as to be relatively slidable. Specifically, the third movable accessory 18 includes a first member 18a that is the right half of the smiley face and a second member 18b that is the left half of the smiley face. The first member 18a and the second member 18b slide relative to each other at a position in front of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 18b and can stand still (second mode).

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modified Examples, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). It should be noted that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect examples, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

51 to 54, the suspension icon interlocking effects A to D will be described below. This suspended icon interlocking effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols (especially during the pseudo-continuous effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon-linked effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is an effect for displaying an image on 7a.

[Hold icon interlocking effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect A. FIG. In the reserved icon interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 51A, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 51(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "2") to form a reach. After reach formation, the hold change of the hold changes the aspect of the hold icon 9C. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of a specific target changes to an image representing the appearance of another specific target. As an example, the suspension change causes the suspension icon 9C to become a (square) image representing the appearance of a single square figure. This square shape suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of a round shape. As will be described later, the pending icon 9C suggests the number of pseudo consecutive times by the number of squares represented. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(C), a pseudo-run start suggesting image suggesting that a pseudo-run will be executed is displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C. Pseudo-continuation is an effect in which temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of decorative symbols are repeated during one variation, and ready-to-win is formed before three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. The number of pseudo-runs is the number of repetitions of temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols. Here, the number of pseudo-runs is equal to the number of times a reach is formed during one fluctuation.

After the pseudo-run start suggesting image of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. The number-of-times suggestive image KS suggests the number of times (number of stages) of the re-variation display to be started next. Here, since the next time is the second time (since the number of pseudo-runs is "2"), "2nd time!!!" is displayed. When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. Aspects change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of one specific target (square figure) changes to an image representing the appearance of two same specific targets. Specifically, due to the pending change, the pending icon 9C changes from a single square figure to an image in which two square figures are superimposed. Since the suspension icon 9C includes two square figures, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the second time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is two. Also, two square shapes suggest that the expectation of a big win is higher than one square shape. A pseudo run number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The number of pseudo-runs display GK displays the current number of pseudo-runs. After the variable display continues for a predetermined period, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "6") to form a reach.

After forming the reach, as shown in FIG. 51(F), a pseudo-continuation start suggesting image is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. After the pseudo consecutive start suggesting image is temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 8C, the screen is switched again and the number of times suggesting image KS is displayed as shown in FIG. 51(G). Here, since the number of pseudo-runs is "3", it is expressed as "3rd time!!!". When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. Aspects change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of two specific objects changes to an image representing the appearance of the same three specific objects. Specifically, the pending change changes the pending icon 9C from an image in which two square figures overlap to an image in which three square figures overlap. Since the hold icon 9C includes three square figures, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the third time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is three. Also, three square shapes suggest that the expectation of a big win is higher than two square shapes. A pseudo run number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 51(I), a special ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, an animation is displayed in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB confront each other. After the ally character CRA wins, a big winning pattern is displayed by decorative patterns as shown in FIG. 51(J).

[Holding icon interlocking effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect B. FIG. In the reserved icon interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "2") to form a reach. After forming the reach, the mode of all the pending icons 9A and the relevant pending icons 9C changes. Here, all the pending icons 9A and the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of the specific target are changed to an image representing the appearance of another specific target. As an example, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C all have a square shape representing the appearance of a square figure. As will be described later, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C indicate the number of pseudo-runs by the number of figures represented by each icon.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(C), when the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Pseudo-continuation is an effect in which temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of decorative symbols are repeated during one variation, and ready-to-win is formed before three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. The number of pseudo-runs is the number of repetitions of temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols. Here, the number of pseudo-runs is equal to the number of times a reach is formed during one fluctuation. The number-of-times suggestive image KS suggests the number of times (number of stages) of the re-variation display to be started next. Here, since the next time is the second time (since the number of pseudo-runs is "2"), "2nd time!!!" is displayed. When the number-of-times suggestion image KS is displayed, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed.

The displayed pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C change in appearance. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C change from a state representing the appearance of one specific object (square figure) to an image representing the appearance of two same specific objects. Specifically, the image changes from one square to an image containing two squares. Each pending icon contains two squares, suggesting that the current pseudo-run is the second, ie, the number of pseudo-runs is two.

After the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. A pseudo consecutive number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The number of pseudo-runs display GK displays the current number of pseudo-runs. After the variable display continues for a predetermined period, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "6") to form a reach. After forming the ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 52(F), after the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. 52(G), the number suggesting image KS is displayed again. Here, since the number of pseudo-runs is "3", it is expressed as "3rd time!!!". When the number-of-times suggestive image KS is displayed, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed.

The displayed pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C change in appearance. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C change from a state representing appearances of two specific objects (rectangular figures) to an image representing appearances of the same three specific objects. Specifically, the image changes from an image containing two squares to an image containing three squares. Each pending icon contains three squares, suggesting that the current pseudo-run is the third, ie, the number of pseudo-runs is three.

After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. A pseudo run number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 52(I), a special ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, an animation is displayed in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB confront each other. After the ally character CRA wins, as shown in FIG. 52(J), a jackpot pattern is displayed using decorative patterns.

[Hold icon interlocking effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect C. As shown in FIG. In the hold icon interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 53(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "2") to form a reach. After reach formation, the hold change of the hold changes the aspect of the hold icon 9C. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of a specific target changes to an image representing the appearance of another specific target. As an example, the pending change causes the pending icon 9C to become an image representing the appearance of the number one. As will be described later, the pending icon 9C suggests the number of pseudo-runs by means of the numbers it represents. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(C), a pseudo-run start suggesting image suggesting that a pseudo-run will be executed is displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C. Pseudo-continuation is an effect in which temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of decorative symbols are repeated during one variation, and ready-to-win is formed before three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. The number of pseudo-runs is the number of repetitions of temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols. Here, the number of pseudo-runs is equal to the number of times a reach is formed during one fluctuation.

After the pseudo-run start suggesting image of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. The number-of-times suggestive image KS suggests the number of times of the re-varying display to be started next. Here, the next time is the second time (because the number of pseudo-runs is "2"), so "2nd time!!!" is displayed. When the number-of-times suggestion image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. Aspects change. Here, the pending change causes the pending icon 9C to change from an image representing the appearance of the number one to an image representing the number two. Since the number 2 is indicated on the hold icon 9C, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the second time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is two. Also, the number 2 suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than the number 1. A pseudo run number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The number of pseudo-runs display GK displays the current number of pseudo-runs. After the variable display continues for a predetermined period, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "6") to form a reach.

After formation of reach, as shown in FIG. 53(F), a pseudo-continuation start suggestion image is displayed as a middle decorative pattern 8C. After the pseudo consecutive start suggesting image is temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 8C, the screen is switched again and the number of times suggesting image KS is displayed as shown in FIG. 53(G). Here, since the number of pseudo-runs is "3", it is expressed as "3rd time!!!". When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the screen switches, and as shown in FIG. Aspects change. Here, the pending change causes the pending icon 9C to change from an image representing the appearance of the number two to an image representing the number three. Since the number 3 is indicated on the hold icon 9C, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the third time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is three. Also, the number 3 suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than the number 2. A pseudo run number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 53(I), a special ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, an animation is displayed in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB confront each other. After the ally character CRA wins, a big winning pattern is displayed by decorative patterns as shown in FIG. 53(J).

[Holding icon interlocking effect D]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect D. FIG. In the holding icon interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 4 is illustrated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 54(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "2") to form a reach. After reach formation, the hold change of the hold changes the aspect of the hold icon 9C. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of the specific target changes to an image representing the appearance of another specific target. As an example, the suspension change causes the suspension icon 9C to become an image showing an appearance in which three square figures are superimposed. This image suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of an image of two overlapping square figures, an image of one square figure, or an image of a round figure. As will be described later, the pending icon 9C suggests in advance the total number of pseudo-runs to be executed during the current one variation by the number of squares represented. That is, here it is suggested that pseudo-runs are finally executed three times during one variation. Pseudo-continuation is an effect in which temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of decorative symbols are repeated during one variation, and ready-to-win is formed before three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. The number of pseudo-runs is the number of repetitions of temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols. Here, the number of pseudo-runs is equal to the number of times a reach is formed during one fluctuation. Before and after this hold change, as shown in FIG. 54(C), a pseudo-run start suggesting image suggesting that a pseudo-run will be executed is displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C.

After the pseudo-run start suggesting image of the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. The number-of-times suggestive image KS suggests the number of times (the number of stages) of the re-variation display to be started next. Here, the next time is the second time (because the number of pseudo-runs is "2"), so "2nd time!!!" is displayed. When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. The form of the pending icon 9C does not change, and continues to be an image representing an appearance in which three square figures are superimposed. A pseudo consecutive number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The number of pseudo-runs display GK displays the current number of pseudo-runs. After the variable display continues for a predetermined period, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "6") to form a reach.

After forming the reach, as shown in FIG. 54(F), a pseudo-continuation start suggesting image is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. After the pseudo consecutive start suggesting image is temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 8C, the screen is switched again and the number of times suggesting image KS is displayed as shown in FIG. 54(G). Here, since the number of pseudo-runs is "3", it is expressed as "3rd time!!!". When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. The form of the pending icon 9C does not change, and continues to be an image representing an appearance in which three square figures are superimposed. A pseudo consecutive number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 54(I), a special ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, an animation is displayed in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB confront each other. After the ally character CRA wins, as shown in FIG. 54(J), a jackpot pattern is displayed using decorative patterns.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon interlocking effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 54, during the pseudo-continuous effect that repeats the temporary stop display and the re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols, the state of the hold icon 9C changes, and the pseudo Suggests the number of pseudo-runs in continuous performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 54, the hold icon indicating the number of pseudo-runs is the hold icon 9C corresponding to the pseudo-run effect being executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the hold icon 9C represents the appearance of a specific target, and when the form of the hold icon 9C changes, the hold icon 9C changes to The number of specific objects represented increases and the number of specific objects represented by the pending icon 9C suggests the number of pseudo-runs. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the number of specific targets represented by the suspension icon 9C is plural, the suspension icon 9C is displayed as an image in which the plurality of specific targets are partially overlapped. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 54, the pseudo-continuous effect is started after the formation of the first reach during one fluctuation, and the holding icon 9C is the first reach formation. Sometimes, it represents an object other than the specific object, and after the start of quasi-reaction, it changes to an image representing the appearance of the specific object. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 54, during the pseudo-continue effect, in addition to the hold icon, a pseudo-continue number display GK indicating the number of pseudo-continues is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the pending icon interlocking effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon interlocking effect A of FIG. 51, the form of the hold icon 9C has been described as suggesting the number of pseudo-runs. However, the pending icon suggesting the number of pseudo runs is not limited to the pending icon 9C. The form of the hold icon 9A may suggest the number of pseudo-runs, and the form of the hold icon 9B may suggest the number of pseudo-runs.

[Modification 2]
In the pending icon interlocking effect B of FIG. 52, it has been described that the modes of all the pending icons 9A and the relevant pending icon 9C are changed to suggest the number of pseudo repetitions. A part of the pending icon 9A and the relevant pending icon 9C may be the pending icon that changes its mode and suggests the number of pseudo-runs.

[Modification 3]
In the suspended icon interlocking effects of FIGS. 51 to 54, the pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of times of pseudo-continuous until confirmation display is 3 has been described. However, the main effect (holding icon-linked effect) can also be applied to a pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of times of pseudo-continuous until confirmation display is other than 3 (for example, 2). In addition, this effect can also be applied to the effect that results in a failure after the pseudo-continuation.

[Modification 4]
51 to 54 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the pending icon interlocking effect D of FIG. 54, the pending icon 9C after the pending change may be a number as shown in FIG.

[Modification 5]
51 to 54 may not include some of the described effects, or may include other effects. For example, in the on-hold icon-linked effects shown in FIGS. 51 to 54, the screen is switched to display the number-of-times suggesting image KS. However, the screen may not be switched and the number-of-times suggesting image KS may not be displayed. Also, the pseudo run number display GK may not be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
A gaming machine characterized in that, during a pseudo-continuous effect that repeats the temporary stop display and the re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols, the mode of the holding icon changes to indicate the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect in the pseudo-continuous effect.
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
A gaming machine, wherein the pending icon indicating the number of times of pseudo-continuation is the pending icon corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect being executed.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
The pending icon represents the appearance of a specific target, and when the aspect of the pending icon changes, the number of the specific targets represented by the pending icon increases, and the number of the specific targets represented by the pending icon A gaming machine, wherein the number of pseudo-runs is suggested by.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-3,
A gaming machine, wherein the reserved icon is displayed as an image in which the plurality of specific targets are partially overlapped when the number of the specific targets represented by the reserved icon is plural.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-3 or aspect A1-4,
The pseudo-continuous effect is started after the first reach formation during one fluctuation,
The holding icon represents an object other than the specific object at the time of the initial reach formation, and changes to an image representing the appearance of the specific object after the start of the pseudo-continuation.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that a number-of-times suggesting image that suggests the number of times of the pseudo-run is displayed in addition to the holding icon during the pseudo-run effect.

Continuous ready-to-win effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIG. This continuous ready-to-win effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (especially during the pseudo-continuous effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the continuous reach effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. This is an effect that displays an image on the .

[Continuous reach performance A]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the continuous reach effect A. FIG. In the continuous ready-to-win effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 4 is illustrated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "2") to form the first reach. After that, a pseudo-run start suggesting image suggesting that a pseudo-run will be executed is displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C. In general, a pseudo-run is an effect in which the temporary stop display and the re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols are repeated during one fluctuation. This is a continuous ready-to-win effect in which the pattern 8R) is temporarily stopped at the ready-to-win, and is then temporarily stopped at the next ready-to-win without being displayed again. The variable display here means a display in which a plurality of different numbers are continuously moved so as to be visible in each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or a display in which a plurality of different numbers become difficult to see. This is a display that shows a mode of moving at high speed. Display that is moving or deforming while the decorative pattern is displaying one number is not included in the variable display. Here, the number of pseudo-runs is the number of temporary stop displays of decorative symbols during one variation. Here, the number of quasi-continues is equal to the number of temporary stops at reach during one variation.

After forming the reach, the hold icon 9C changes in appearance due to the hold change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of a specific target changes to an image representing the appearance of another specific target. As an example, the suspension change causes the suspension icon 9C to become a (square) image representing the appearance of a single square figure. This square shape suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of a round shape. As will be described later, the pending icon 9C suggests the number of pseudo consecutive times by the number of squares represented.

After the pseudo-run start suggesting image of the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. The number-of-times suggesting image KS suggests to what time (how many times) the reach to be formed next corresponds to the reach during one fluctuation. Here, since the next is the second time (because the number of pseudo-runs is "2"), "2nd run!!!" is displayed. When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, when the screen is switched, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with the same number (here, "6"). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are distorted images so as to face the center side of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate laterally so as to face outward. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L rotates around the left vertically extending side as the axis of rotation, and the right decorative pattern 8R rotates around the right side extending vertically as the axis of rotation. As a result, as shown in FIG. 55(E), the numerals of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R face the front, and in this state they are temporarily stopped to form the second reach.

At this time, the mode of the pending icon 9C changes due to the pending change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of one specific target (square figure) changes to an image representing the appearance of two same specific targets. Specifically, due to the pending change, the pending icon 9C changes from a single rectangular graphic to an image in which two rectangular graphics are superimposed. Since the suspension icon 9C includes two square figures, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the second time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is two. Also, two square shapes suggest that the expectation of a big win is higher than one square shape. A pseudo consecutive number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The number of pseudo-runs display GK displays the current number of pseudo-runs.

After forming the second ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 55(F), a pseudo-run start suggesting image is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. After the pseudo consecutive start suggesting image is temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 8C, the screen is switched again and the number of times suggesting image KS is displayed as shown in FIG. 55(G). Here, since the number of pseudo-runs is "3", it is expressed as "3rd run!!!". When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, when the screen is switched, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with the same number (here, "3"). Also in this case, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are distorted images so as to face the center side of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate laterally so as to face outward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 55(I), the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R face the front, and in this state they are temporarily stopped to form the third reach.

At this time, the mode of the pending icon 9C changes due to the pending change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of two specific objects changes to an image representing the appearance of the same three specific objects. Specifically, the pending change changes the pending icon 9C from an image in which two square figures overlap to an image in which three square figures overlap. Since the hold icon 9C includes three square figures, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the third time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is three. Also, three square shapes suggest that the expectation of a big win is higher than two square shapes. A pseudo run number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(J), the jackpot design is displayed by the decorative design.

[Continuous reach performance B]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining continuous ready-to-win effect B. FIG. Continuous ready-to-win effect B has substantially the same content as continuous ready-to-win effect A in FIG. 55, and only different points will be described below. FIG. 56(A) is the same as FIG. 55(C) of continuous reach effect A. FIG. After the number-of-times suggesting image KS in FIG. 56(A) disappears, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed without being performed, and the images are distorted so as to face the center side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to visually recognize the numbers. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate laterally so as to face outward, as shown in FIGS. 56(C) and (D). In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L rotates around the left vertically extending side as the axis of rotation, and the right decorative pattern 8R rotates around the right side extending vertically as the axis of rotation. As a result, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually become visible. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with the same number (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 56(E), the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R face the front, and in this state, the game is temporarily stopped to form the second reach. FIG. 56(E) is the same as FIG. 55(E) of continuous reach effect A. FIG.

After the formation of the second ready-to-win, the pseudo continuous start suggesting image may be temporarily stopped as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, or the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the pseudo continuous start suggesting image may be temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the screen is switched again, and the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed. FIG. 56(F) is the same as FIG. 55(G) of continuous reach effect A. FIG.

After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, when the screen is switched, as shown in FIG. A left decorative pattern 8L and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed, and the images are distorted so as to face the center of the display screen 7a, making the numbers difficult to see. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate laterally so as to face outward, as shown in FIG. 56(H). As a result, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually become visible. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with the same number (here, "3"). Then, as shown in FIG. 56(I), the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R face the front, and in this state they are temporarily stopped to form the third reach. FIG. 56(I) is the same as FIG. 55(I) of continuous reach effect A. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(J), the jackpot design is displayed by the decorative design.

[Continuous reach performance C]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the continuous reach effect C. FIG. Continuous ready-to-win effect C has substantially the same content as continuous ready-to-reach effect B in FIG. 56, and only different points will be described below. FIG. 57(A) is the same as FIG. 56(F) of continuous reach effect B. FIG.

After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, when the screen is switched, as shown in FIG. A left decorative pattern 8L and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed, and the images are distorted so as to face the center side of the display screen 7a, making the numbers difficult to see. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate laterally so as to face outward, as shown in FIGS. 57(C), (D) and (E). In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L rotates around the left vertically extending side as the axis of rotation, and the right decorative pattern 8R rotates around the right side extending vertically as the axis of rotation. As a result, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually become visible. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with the same number (here, "6"). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to rotate horizontally, and as shown in FIG. After that, as the horizontal rotation continues, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually become visible as shown in FIGS. 57(G) and (H). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with different (next) same numbers (here, "7"). As shown in FIGS. 57(I) and 57(J), the continuation of the lateral rotation again makes the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R difficult to see. By repeating this lateral rotation, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R alternately repeat a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state, and when in a visible state, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. is the same number, but a different number from the previous time is displayed. After that, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the same number face the front, and in this state they are temporarily stopped to form a reach. After that, the jackpot pattern is displayed by the decorative pattern.

[Continuous reach production D]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the continuous reach effect D. FIG. In the continuous ready-to-win production D, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), the decorative design variation production (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 4 is illustrated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 58(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "2") to form the first reach. After that, a pseudo-run start suggesting image suggesting that a pseudo-run will be executed is displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C. In general, a pseudo-run is an effect in which the temporary stop display and the re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols are repeated during one fluctuation. This is a continuous ready-to-win effect in which the pattern 8R) is temporarily stopped at the ready-to-win, and then temporarily stopped at the next ready-to-win without being displayed again in a variable manner. The variable display here means a display in which a plurality of different numbers are continuously moved so as to be visible in each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or a display in which a plurality of different numbers become difficult to see. This is a display showing a mode of moving at high speed. Display that is moving or deforming while the decorative pattern is displaying one number is not included in the variable display. Here, the number of pseudo-runs is the number of temporary stop display times of decorative symbols during one variation. Here, the number of quasi-runs is equal to the number of temporary stops at reach during one variation.

After forming the reach, the hold icon 9C changes in appearance due to the hold change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of a specific target changes to an image representing the appearance of another specific target. As an example, the suspension change causes the suspension icon 9C to become a (square) image representing the appearance of a single square figure. This square shape suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of a round shape. As will be described later, the pending icon 9C suggests the number of pseudo-runs by the number of squares represented.

After the pseudo-run start suggesting image of the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. The number-of-times suggesting image KS suggests to what time (how many times) the reach to be formed next corresponds to the reach during one fluctuation. Here, since the next is the second time (because the number of pseudo-runs is "2"), "2nd run!!!" is displayed. When the number-of-times suggestion image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, when the screen is switched, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with the same number (here, "6"). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are distorted images so as to face the center side of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate laterally so as to face outward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58(E), the numerals of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R face the front, and in this state they are temporarily stopped to form the second reach.

At this time, the mode of the pending icon 9C changes due to the pending change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of one specific target (square figure) changes to an image representing the appearance of two same specific targets. Specifically, due to the pending change, the pending icon 9C changes from a single square figure to an image in which two square figures are superimposed. Since the suspension icon 9C includes two square figures, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the second time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is two. Also, two square shapes suggest that the expectation of a big win is higher than one square shape. A pseudo run number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The number of pseudo-runs display GK displays the current number of pseudo-runs.

After forming the second ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 58(F), a pseudo-run start suggesting image is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. After the pseudo consecutive start suggesting image is temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 8C, the screen is switched again and the number of times suggesting image KS is displayed as shown in FIG. 58(G). Here, since the number of pseudo-runs is "3", it is expressed as "3rd run!!!". When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, when the screen is switched, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with the same number (here, "6"). Also in this case, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are distorted images so as to face the center side of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate laterally so as to face outward. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L rotates around the left vertically extending side as the axis of rotation, and the right decorative pattern 8R rotates around the right side extending vertically as the axis of rotation. The modes of FIGS. 58(H) and (I) are the same as those of the continuous reach effect C shown in FIGS. 57(B) to (J). After that, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the same number face the front, and in this state they are temporarily stopped to form a reach. After that, the jackpot pattern is displayed by the decorative pattern.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the continuous reach effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 to 58, during one variation, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the first reach, the second reach is displayed without performing re-variation display. Temporarily stop. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 to 58, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the first reach, the display screen 7a displays the number-of-times suggestion image KS, whereby the first When the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in reach becomes difficult to see and the number-of-times suggestion image KS disappears from the display screen 7a, the decorative pattern is displayed and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in second reach. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 to 58, the number-of-times suggestive image KS includes a number-of-times suggestive image suggesting the number of times of the reach in one fluctuation corresponding to the reach to be formed next. It is included. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 to 58, when the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns display the same number. After rotating horizontally in the displayed state, temporarily stop at the second reach. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 to 58, during one variation, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the second reach, the second reach is displayed without being displayed again, and at the third reach. Temporarily stop. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of continuous reach production is shown.
[Modification 1]
55 to 58, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate horizontally after the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears. However, after the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not have to rotate horizontally. For example, after the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same number.

[Modification 2]
55 to 58, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are rotating sideways or temporarily stopped at the same number after the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the middle decorative pattern 8C was assumed to be displayed in a variable manner. However, the middle decorative pattern 8C may not be displayed after the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, or may be temporarily stopped by displaying one number.

[Modification 3]
Continuous ready-to-win effects A to D in FIGS. 55 to 58 may be combined as appropriate. For example, continuous reach effect C of FIG. 57 may be combined from FIG. 55(G) of continuous reach effect A of FIG.

[Modification 4]
The continuous ready-to-reach effects A to D in FIGS. 55 to 58 may not include some of the described effects, or may include other effects. For example, in continuous reach performances A to D in FIGS. 55 to 58, the screen is switched to display the number-of-times suggesting image KS. However, the screen may not be switched and the number-of-times suggesting image KS may not be displayed. Also, the pseudo run number display GK may not be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
1. A gaming machine characterized in that, during one variation, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the first reach, they are temporarily stopped at the second reach without performing re-variation display.
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
After the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the first reach, a specific image is displayed on the display means, so that the decorative pattern temporarily stopped at the first reach is in a state of being difficult to see, and the specific image is displayed. A gaming machine, wherein when the image disappears from the display means, the decorative pattern is displayed, and the decorative pattern temporarily stops at the second reach.
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific image includes a number-of-times suggesting image that suggests to what number of reach in one fluctuation corresponds to reach to be formed next.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2 or aspect A2-3,
When the specific image disappears from the display means, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern out of the decorative patterns rotate sideways in a state in which the same number is displayed, and then temporarily stop at the second reach. Amusement machine.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the first variation, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the second reach, they are temporarily stopped at the third reach without performing a re-variation display.

The pseudo-continuous suggestion effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. This pseudo-continuous suggestive effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Pseudo-continuous suggestive production A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continue suggestion effect A. FIG. In the pseudo-continue suggestive effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first pseudo-continue suggestion effect is performed. In this first pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is displayed in the variation area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating. The first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A is a character image showing a person laughing. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A may be displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), a second pseudo-continue suggestion effect is performed. In this second pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, and the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image suggests that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. X1B is displayed. Specifically, in the second pseudo-repeat suggestive effect, the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B is included in the slow-varying middle decorative symbol 8C. The second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B is a character image showing a person smiling, and has the same contour shape and size as the first pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1A. However, the second pseudo-run-suggesting image X1B is not limited to this. , may vary in size. Also, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B may have completely different outline shapes. For example, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B may not have a portion where the contour shapes match. In the example of FIG. 59(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as a "6" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed as a "7" pattern. In addition, in the second pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, the first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A is stopped and displayed in the variable regions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A may move. Note that the middle decorative symbol 8C includes the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1B from the start of the above-described decorative symbol variation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(D), pseudo-repeat-suggestive-image merging effect is performed. In this pseudo-repeat suggestive image merging effect, it is determined whether or not the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B (middle decorative pattern 8C) that fluctuates at low speed is to be closely merged (superimposed) with the first pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1A that is statically displayed. It is a performance that represents At this time, the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is positioned behind (behind) the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A. Further, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A has a higher transparency than the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B. In the pseudo-continuation suggestive image superimposition effect, the effect is expressed as to whether or not the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B (medium decorative symbol 8C) that fluctuates at a low speed is closely combined with the first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A that is moving. may be

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), a combination success presentation is performed. In this combination success presentation, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B are successfully combined (superimposed), and the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B overlap each other. Is displayed. In this case, since the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is included in the middle decorative symbol 8C, in this combination success effect, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B are included in the middle decorative symbol 8C. appears to be part of the

After that, the first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B are successfully combined (superimposed) by the combination success effect, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Pseudo-continuous suggestive production B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continue suggestion effect B. FIG. In the pseudo-continue suggestive effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These pending icons 9A and 9C are white pending icons.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60B, a second pseudo-repeat suggestion image addition effect is performed. In this second pseudo-continuation suggestive image addition effect, the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B that appears from the edge of the main display screen 7a flies to the medium decoration pattern 8C that fluctuates at a low speed, and the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B is medium decoration. This is an effect showing how it becomes a part of the pattern 8C. The second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is a character image showing a person smiling, and has the same outline shape and size as the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A. However, the second pseudo-run-suggesting image X1B is not limited to this. , may vary in size. Also, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B may have completely different outline shapes. For example, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B may not have a portion where the contour shapes match. Note that the middle decorative symbol 8C does not include the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1B at the start of the above-described decorative symbol variation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), a first pseudo-continue suggestion effect is performed. In this first pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is displayed in the variation area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating. The first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A is a character image showing a person laughing. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A may be displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), a second pseudo-continue suggestion effect is performed. In this second pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, and the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image suggests that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. X1B is displayed. Specifically, in the second pseudo-repeat suggestive effect, the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B is included in the slow-varying middle decorative symbol 8C. In the example of FIG. 60(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed at "6" design, and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed at "7" design, and the ready-to-win state is not reached. In addition, in the second pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, the first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A is stopped and displayed in the variable regions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A may move.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), a pseudo-rep suggestive image merging effect is performed. In this pseudo-repeat suggestive image merging effect, it is determined whether or not the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B (middle decorative pattern 8C) that fluctuates at low speed is to be closely merged (superimposed) with the first pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1A that is statically displayed. It is a performance that represents At this time, the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is positioned behind (behind) the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A. Further, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A has a higher transparency than the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B. In the pseudo-continuation suggestive image superimposition effect, an effect indicating whether or not the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B (middle decorative symbol 8C) that fluctuates at a low speed is closely combined with the moving first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A. may be

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a combination success effect is performed. In this combination success presentation, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B are successfully combined (superimposed), and the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B overlap each other. Is displayed. In this case, since the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is included in the middle decorative symbol 8C, in this combination success effect, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B are included in the middle decorative symbol 8C. appears to be part of the

After that, the first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B are successfully combined (superimposed) by the combination success effect, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Pseudo continuation suggestion production C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continue suggestion effect C. As shown in FIG. In the pseudo consecutive suggestive effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These pending icons 9A and 9C are white pending icons.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a second pseudo-repeat suggestion image addition effect is performed. In this second pseudo-continuation suggestive image addition effect, the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B that appears from the edge of the main display screen 7a flies to the medium decoration pattern 8C that fluctuates at a low speed, and the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B is medium decoration. This is an effect showing how it becomes a part of the pattern 8C. The second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is a character image showing a person smiling, and has the same outline shape and size as the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A. However, the second pseudo-run-suggesting image X1B is not limited to this. , may vary in size. Also, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B may have completely different outline shapes. For example, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B may not have a portion where the contour shapes match. Note that the middle decorative symbol 8C does not include the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1B at the start of the above-described decorative symbol variation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(C), a first pseudo-continue suggestion effect is performed. In this first pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is displayed in the variation area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating. The first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A is a character image showing a person laughing. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A may be displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Also, in this first pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed behind the middle decorative pattern 8C. This character CRA is a character whose motif is a warrior. The character CRA is displayed behind the first pseudo-representative image X1A and in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The character CRA may be displayed further behind the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), a second pseudo-continue suggestion effect is performed. In this second pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, and the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image suggests that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. X1B is displayed. Specifically, in the second pseudo-repeat suggestive effect, the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B is included in the slow-varying middle decorative symbol 8C. In the example of FIG. 61(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as a "6" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed as a "7" pattern. In the second pseudo-continuation suggestive effect, the first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A and the character CRA are still displayed in the variable regions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The first pseudo-suggestive image X1A and/or the character CRA may move.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), pseudo-rep suggestive image merging effect is performed. In this pseudo-repeat suggestive image merging effect, it is determined whether or not the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B (middle decorative pattern 8C) that fluctuates at low speed is to be closely merged (superimposed) with the first pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1A that is statically displayed. It is a performance that represents At this time, the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is positioned behind (behind) the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A. Further, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A has a higher transparency than the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B. In the pseudo-continuation suggestive image superimposition effect, an effect indicating whether or not the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B (middle decorative symbol 8C) that fluctuates at a low speed is closely combined with the moving first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A. may be Also, the character CRA is displayed behind the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A, the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B, and the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(F), a combination success effect is performed. In this combination success presentation, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B are successfully combined (superimposed), and the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B overlap each other. Is displayed. In this case, since the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is included in the middle decorative symbol 8C, in this combination success effect, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B are included in the middle decorative symbol 8C. appears to be part of the

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(G), a character movement effect is performed. In this accessory movable effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the home position to the deployment position (development position, advanced position), and the front side of the combined first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B are combined. placed in This character object movable effect also suggests that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

After that, the first pseudo-continuation suggesting image X1A and the second pseudo-continuation suggesting image X1B are successfully combined (superimposed) by the combination success effect, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed by performing the character movement effect. It is carried out. The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Pseudo-continuous suggestion production D]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continue suggestion effect D. FIG. In the pseudo-continue suggestive effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These pending icons 9A and 9C are white pending icons.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62B, a second pseudo-repeat suggestion image addition effect is performed. In this second pseudo-continuation suggesting image addition effect, the second pseudo-continuation suggesting image X1B appearing from the edge of the main display screen 7a flies (moves) to the middle decorative pattern 8C that fluctuates at a low speed, and the second pseudo-continuation suggesting image X1B appears. This is an effect showing how the suggestive image X1B becomes a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is a character image showing a person smiling, and has the same outline shape and size as the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A. However, the second pseudo-run-suggesting image X1B is not limited to this. , may vary in size. Also, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B may have completely different outline shapes. For example, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B may not have a portion where the contour shapes match. Note that the middle decorative symbol 8C does not include the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1B at the start of the above-described decorative symbol variation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the first pseudo-continue suggestion effect is performed. In this first pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is displayed in the variation area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating. The first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A is a character image showing a person laughing. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A may be displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Also, in this first pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed behind the middle decorative pattern 8C. This character CRA is a character whose motif is a warrior. The character CRA is displayed behind the first pseudo-representative image X1A and in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The character CRA may be displayed further behind the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), a second pseudo-continue suggestion effect is performed. In this second pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, and the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image suggests that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. X1B is displayed. Specifically, in the second pseudo-repeat suggestive effect, the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B is included in the slow-varying middle decorative symbol 8C. In the example of FIG. 62(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as a "6" pattern, and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed as a "7" pattern. In the second pseudo-continuation suggestive effect, the first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A and the character CRA are still displayed in the variable regions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and/or the character CRA may move.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), pseudo-rep suggestive image merging effect is performed. In this pseudo-repeat suggestive image merging effect, it is determined whether or not the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B (middle decorative pattern 8C) that fluctuates at low speed is to be closely merged (superimposed) with the first pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1A that is statically displayed. It is a performance that represents At this time, the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is positioned behind (behind) the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A. Further, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A has a higher transparency than the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B. In the pseudo-continuation suggestive image superimposition effect, an effect indicating whether or not the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B (middle decorative symbol 8C) that fluctuates at a low speed is closely combined with the moving first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A. may be Also, the character CRA is displayed behind the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A, the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B, and the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a role object movable presentation is performed. In this accessory movable effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the home position to the expanded position (expanded position, advanced position), and the first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A during the pseudo-continuous suggestive image combination effect are displayed. It is arranged on the near side of the suggestive image X1B. This character movement effect suggests that the first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B are successfully combined, and that a pseudo-continuation effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), a combination success presentation is performed. In this combination success presentation, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B are successfully combined (superimposed), and the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B overlap each other. Is displayed. In this case, since the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is included in the middle decorative symbol 8C, in this combination success effect, the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B are included in the middle decorative symbol 8C. appears to be part of the

After that, the first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B are successfully combined (superimposed) by the combination success effect, so that the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Modification]
The above-described pseudo-continue suggestion effect may be performed as follows.
If the first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B are successfully combined, the pseudo-continuation effect may be determined.
Further, when the second movable role product 15 moves to the vicinity of the combined image of the first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1B during the above-mentioned role object movement effect, a predetermined image (for example, , a flashing image) may be displayed. Thereby, the merged image can be emphasized. Also, this predetermined image (for example, a flashing image) may be displayed as if it were emitted from a role different from the second movable role 15 (for example, the first movable role 14).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pseudo-continue suggestive effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the first pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1A is displayed to suggest that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be changed and the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed, the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. A second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B is displayed that suggests that a continuous effect will be performed. According to this configuration, two pseudo-continuation suggestion images are displayed at the same time, so that it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the pseudo-continuation effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B is included in the decorative symbols. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the arrangement of the second pseudo-continuation suggestive images X1B unexpected, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B is displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed with varying effects. Varies with pattern. According to this configuration, the movement of the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1B is interlocked with the movement of the decorative pattern, and the expectation for the pseudo-continuous effect related to the movement of the decorative pattern can be further improved, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be made

[Effect 4]
In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the second pseudo-continue suggestive image X1B changes along with the decorative symbols from the middle of the decorative symbols changing after the decorative symbols start to change. According to this configuration, the movement of the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image X1B is interlocked with the movement of the decorative symbols from the middle of the variation of the decorative symbols, and the pseudo-continuous effect related to the movement of the decorative symbols is expected from the middle of the variation of the decorative symbols. The feeling can be rapidly improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B is displayed behind the first pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1A. According to this configuration, since at least a part of the first pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image X1B can be visually superimposed, the degree of expectation for the pseudo-continuation effect is further increased, and the amusement of the game is improved. can be made

[Effect 6]
In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the first pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1A has a higher transparency than the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image X1B. According to this configuration, even when the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A is displayed in front of the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B, both the first pseudo-run suggestive image X1A and the second pseudo-run suggestive image X1B becomes visible, and it is possible to produce a sense of expectation for the pseudo-continuous effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of varying the decorative pattern,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying a first pseudo-continuous suggestive image suggesting that a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed;
the third display effect is an image suggesting that the pseudo-continuation effect is to be performed, and is a effect of displaying a second pseudo-continuation suggestive image different from the first pseudo-continuous suggestive image;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect are performed, and the third display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed. is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X1-1,
wherein the second pseudo-continuation suggestive image of the third display effect is included in the decorative pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X1-2,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the second pseudo-continue suggestive image of the third display effect is displayed together with the decorative pattern. fluctuate,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X1-3,
In the combination effect, the second pseudo-continue suggestive image of the third display effect changes together with the decorative design from the middle of the decorative design after the start of the variation of the decorative design.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects X1-2 to X1-4,
In the combination effect, the second pseudo-repeat suggestive image of the third display effect is displayed behind the first pseudo-repeat suggestive image of the second display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X1-5,
the first pseudo-run suggestive image has a higher transparency than the second pseudo-run suggestive image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pseudo continuous effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. FIG. This pseudo continuous effect is during the variable display (during one variable display) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"), the game state is the normal state, and the probability is high. state, time saving state, electric chew support (state in which the electric chew 22 is frequently opened to make it easier to win the second start port 21, hereinafter also referred to as "electric support").

[Pseudo continuous performance A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect A. FIG.
In the pseudo continuous effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the pseudo continuous start effect is executed while the special symbols are changing.
Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect (repeating a unit variation of the decorative symbol a predetermined number of times) to make it appear that the variable display of the decorative symbol continues a predetermined number of times during one time of the variable display of the special symbol. It is an effect that can be executed at the start of fluctuation or during reach effect. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect includes an effect that repeats the effect of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative patterns as a unit variation, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols as a unit change, and a predetermined effect. The effect of temporarily stopping the logo (for example, NEXT) is repeated as a unit change, or the unit change of the decorative pattern is performed a predetermined number of times along with a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo". Includes repetitive performances. In addition, the number of repeated effects (the number of executions of the unit variation) is also called the number of pseudo-runs, and if it is two times, it is called "pseudo 2" and "x2", and if it is three times, it is called "pseudo 3" and "x3". can be expressed as
In this pseudo consecutive start effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the right pattern display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 63(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). Although not shown, "x1" may be displayed at a predetermined position on the main display screen 7a to indicate that the number of pseudo-runs is the first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a specific symbol temporary stop effect is executed. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, the probability variable jackpot has more balls in the jackpot game than the normal jackpot (the number of rounds in the jackpot game is increased). In other words, when the jackpot is achieved with the probability variation pattern (specific pattern), the benefit given to the player is set more advantageous than when the jackpot is achieved with the normal pattern. Furthermore, in this example, when reaching reach with the probability variable design (specific design), the probability of becoming a big hit is set higher than when reaching reach with the normal design. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols (specific symbols).
In the specific symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 63(B), first the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the normal symbol "8", and then the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) "7". However, the middle decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is being changed. In other words, the specific pattern temporary stop effect is also a lost pattern temporary stop effect, and when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped, it stops at a loose pattern arrangement that does not become a ready-to-win pattern arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). suggesting to It should be noted that the temporary stop is a state of swinging two or three frames up and down, and does not indicate the result of the fluctuation as a fixed symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the pseudo-continuation second suggestion effect is executed. In this pseudo consecutive second suggestion effect, the left decorative pattern 8L is the normal pattern "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the variable pattern (specific pattern) "7". Characters GS of "Ren" are displayed. By displaying the characters GS of "Ten", the first unit variation in the current pseudo-Ten effect is completed. Here, the character GS is a symbol indicating that the next unit change (the second number of pseudo-runs) will be performed, which is displayed using the pseudo-run “run”. That is, in this pseudo-continuation second-time suggestion effect, the following unit variation is performed by displaying a predetermined symbol at the final stop position of the decorative symbol while the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) and the normal symbol are temporarily stopped. It is designed to perform a production that suggests.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a specific symbol stop effect is executed. In this specific symbol stop effect, after the execution of the pseudo consecutive second suggestive effect shown in FIG. A second unit variation is executed in the pseudo-continuous effect for variably displaying the decorative symbol 8C. In other words, with the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7" stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L changes again from the normal pattern "8", and the character GS of "Ren" displayed in the inner pattern display area Instead, the next unit variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is performed by changing the middle decorative pattern 8C again. Although not shown, "x2" may be displayed at a predetermined position on the main display screen 7a to indicate that the number of pseudo-runs is the second.

That is, in the pseudo-continuous effect A shown in FIG. 63, when either the left decorative symbol 8L or the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops at a specific symbol with a predetermined unit variation in the pseudo-continuous effect, the final stop symbol is selected. A predetermined symbol (letter GS of "Ren") is displayed in the pattern display area where a certain middle decorative pattern 8C stops to suggest that the next unit change will be performed, and then the left decoration is performed while the specific pattern is stopped. By re-varying the pattern 8L or the right decorative pattern 8R (normal pattern) and the middle decorative pattern 8C, the next unit fluctuation is executed.
[Pseudo continuous performance B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect B. FIG.
In the pseudo-continuous performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the pseudo-continuous start performance is executed while the special symbol is fluctuating.
Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect (repeating a unit variation of the decorative symbol a predetermined number of times) to make it appear that the variable display of the decorative symbol continues a predetermined number of times during one time of the variable display of the special symbol. There is, and it is an effect that can be executed at the start of the fluctuation or during the reach effect. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect includes an effect that repeats the effect of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative patterns as a unit variation, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols as a unit change, and a predetermined effect. The effect of temporarily stopping the logo (for example, NEXT) is repeated as a unit change, or the unit change of the decorative pattern is performed a predetermined number of times along with a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo". Includes repetitive performances. In addition, the number of repeated effects (the number of executions of the unit variation) is also called the number of pseudo-runs, and if it is two times, it is called "pseudo 2" and "x2", and if it is three times, it is called "pseudo 3" and "x3". can be expressed as
In this pseudo consecutive start effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the right pattern display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 64(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward). Although not shown, "x1" may be displayed at a predetermined position on the main display screen 7a to indicate that the number of pseudo-runs is the first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a specific symbol temporary stop effect is executed. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, the probability variable jackpot has more balls in the jackpot game than the normal jackpot (the number of rounds in the jackpot game is increased). In other words, when the jackpot is achieved with the probability variation pattern (specific pattern), the benefit given to the player is set more advantageous than when the jackpot is achieved with the normal pattern. Furthermore, in this example, when reaching reach with the probability variable design (specific design), the probability of becoming a big hit is set higher than when reaching reach with the normal design. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols (specific symbols).
In the specific symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 64(B), first the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the normal symbol "8", and then the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) "7". However, the middle decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is being changed. In other words, the specific pattern temporary stop effect is also a lost pattern temporary stop effect, and when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped, it stops at a loose pattern arrangement that does not become a ready-to-win pattern arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). suggesting to It should be noted that the temporary stop is a state of swinging two or three frames up and down, and does not indicate the result of the fluctuation as a fixed symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), the pseudo-continuation second-time suggestion effect is executed. In this pseudo consecutive second suggestion effect, the left decorative pattern 8L is the normal pattern "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the variable pattern (specific pattern) "7". Characters GS of "Ren" are displayed. By displaying the characters GS of "Ten", the first unit variation in the current pseudo-Ten effect is completed. Here, the character GS is a symbol indicating that the next unit change (the second number of pseudo-runs) will be performed, which is displayed using the pseudo-run "run". That is, in this pseudo-continuation second-time suggestive effect, the following unit variation is performed by displaying a predetermined symbol at the final stop position of the decorative symbol while the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) and the normal symbol are temporarily stopped. It is designed to perform a production that suggests.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a specific symbol stop effect is executed. In this specific symbol stop effect, after the execution of the pseudo consecutive second suggestion effect shown in FIG. In addition, while the character GS of "Ren" is displayed in the middle symbol display area and the state is maintained, the normal symbol "8" temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area is erased. A second unit variation is performed. That is, by erasing the normal symbol "8" while the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) "7" and the characters GS of "continuous" are stationary, the next unit variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Although not shown, "x2" may be displayed at a predetermined position on the main display screen 7a to indicate that the number of pseudo-runs is the second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a character display effect is executed. In this character display effect, a predetermined character CRA is displayed in the left symbol display area instead of the normal symbol "8" which was erased in the specific symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 64(D). In other words, in this character display effect, on the main display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed in the left design display area, the probability variation design (specific design) "7" is displayed in the right design display area, and the characters "Ren" are displayed in the middle design display area. GS is displayed. Then, by displaying this character CRA, the second unit variation in the current pseudo-continuous effect ends.

That is, in the pseudo-continuous effect B shown in FIG. 64, when either the left decorative symbol 8L or the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops at a specific symbol in a predetermined unit variation in the pseudo-continuous effect, the last stop symbol is selected. A predetermined symbol (“ren” character GS) is displayed in the pattern display area where a certain middle decorative pattern 8C stops to suggest that the next unit change will be performed, and then the specific pattern and “ren” character GS are displayed. is stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L or the right decorative pattern 8R (normal pattern) is erased to execute the next unit fluctuation (the second unit fluctuation of the pseudo consecutive number). Then, in this second unit variation, a predetermined character CRA is displayed in the left or right design display area in place of the deleted left decorative design 8L or right decorative design 8R (normal design). is displayed, the second unit variation in the current pseudo-continuous effect ends.
[Pseudo continuous performance C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect C. FIG.
In the pseudo-continuous performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the pseudo-continuous start performance is executed while the special symbols are changing.
Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect (repeating a unit variation of the decorative symbol a predetermined number of times) to make it appear that the variable display of the decorative symbol continues a predetermined number of times during one time of the variable display of the special symbol. There is, and it is an effect that can be executed at the start of the fluctuation or during the reach effect. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect includes an effect that repeats the effect of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative patterns as a unit variation, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols as a unit change, and a predetermined effect. The effect of temporarily stopping the logo (for example, NEXT) is repeated as a unit change, or the unit change of the decorative pattern is performed a predetermined number of times along with a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo". Includes repetitive performances. In addition, the number of repeated effects (the number of executions of the unit variation) is also called the number of pseudo-runs, and if it is two times, it is called "pseudo 2" and "x2", and if it is three times, it is called "pseudo 3" and "x3". can be expressed as
In this pseudo consecutive start effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the right pattern display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 65(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). Although not shown, "x1" may be displayed at a predetermined position on the main display screen 7a to indicate that the number of pseudo-runs is the first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), a specific symbol temporary stop effect is executed. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, the probability variable jackpot has more balls in the jackpot game than the normal jackpot (the number of rounds in the jackpot game is increased). In other words, when the jackpot is achieved with the probability variation pattern (specific pattern), the benefit given to the player is set more advantageous than when the jackpot is achieved with the normal pattern. Furthermore, in this example, when reaching reach with the probability variable design (specific design), the probability of becoming a big hit is set higher than when reaching reach with the normal design. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols (specific symbols).
In the specific symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 65(B), first the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the normal symbol "8", and then the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) "7". However, the middle decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is being changed. In other words, the specific pattern temporary stop effect is also a lost pattern temporary stop effect, and when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped, it stops at a loose pattern arrangement that does not become a ready-to-win pattern arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). suggesting to It should be noted that the temporary stop is a state of swinging two or three frames up and down, and does not indicate the result of the fluctuation as a fixed symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), a pseudo-continuation second suggestion effect is executed. In this pseudo consecutive second suggestion effect, the left decorative pattern 8L is the normal pattern "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the variable pattern (specific pattern) "7". Characters GS of "Ren" are displayed. By displaying the characters GS of "Ten", the first unit variation in the current pseudo-Ten effect is completed. Here, the character GS is a symbol indicating that the next unit change (the second number of pseudo-runs) will be performed, which is displayed using the pseudo-run “run”. That is, in this pseudo-continuation second-time suggestion effect, the following unit variation is performed by displaying a predetermined symbol at the final stop position of the decorative symbol while the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) and the normal symbol are temporarily stopped. It is designed to perform a production that suggests.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), a specific symbol stop effect is executed. In this specific symbol stop effect, after the execution of the pseudo consecutive second suggestive effect shown in FIG. In addition, while the character GS of "Ren" is displayed in the middle symbol display area and the state is maintained, the normal symbol "8" temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area is displayed in a pseudo-continuous effect. A second unit variation is performed. That is, with the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7" and "continuation" characters GS stationary, the left decorative pattern 8L changes again from the normal design "8", so that the next unit fluctuation in the pseudo-continuation production It is carried out. Although not shown, "x2" may be displayed at a predetermined position on the main display screen 7a to indicate that the number of pseudo-runs is the second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), a character display effect is executed. In this character display effect, a predetermined character CRA is displayed in the left symbol display area instead of the left decorative symbol 8L changed again in the specific symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 65(D). In other words, in this character display effect, on the main display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed in the left design display area, the probability variation design (specific design) "7" is displayed in the right design display area, and the characters "Ren" are displayed in the middle design display area. GS is displayed. Then, by displaying this character CRA, the second unit variation in the current pseudo-continuous effect ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the third pseudo-run suggestion effect is executed. In this pseudo-continued third suggestive effect, the character CRA in the left symbol display area displayed in the character display effect shown in FIG. In place of the characters GS of "run" in the symbol display area of , characters GSS of "three runs" are displayed on the full screen of the main display screen 7a. Here, the characters GSS are symbols indicating that the next unit change (the third number of pseudo-runs) will be performed, which is displayed using the pseudo-run "runs". That is, in this pseudo-continuation third-time suggestion effect, the character CRA, the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7", and the characters GS of "continuation" are switched to the characters GSS of "three consecutive" to display the following unit fluctuation It is designed to execute a production that suggests that the

That is, in the pseudo-continuous effect C shown in FIG. 65, when either the left decorative symbol 8L or the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at a specific symbol in a predetermined unit variation in the pseudo-continuous effect, the last stop symbol is selected. A predetermined symbol (“ren” character GS) is displayed in the pattern display area where a certain middle decorative pattern 8C stops to suggest that the next unit change will be performed, and then the specific pattern and “ren” character GS are displayed. is stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L or the right decorative pattern 8R (normal pattern) is varied again to execute the next unit variation (the second unit variation of the pseudo consecutive number). Then, in this second unit variation, a predetermined character CRA is displayed in the left or right symbol display area in place of the left decorative symbol 8L or right decorative symbol 8R (normal symbol) that has been changed again. When the CRA is displayed, the second unit variation in the current pseudo-continuous effect ends. After that, the character CRA, the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) “7”, and the characters GS of “Ten” are switched and displayed on the main display screen 7a to the characters GSS of the large “three consecutive eyes”, so that the next unit variation (pseudo unit fluctuation of the third consecutive number) is to be performed.
[Pseudo continuous performance D]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect D. FIG.
In the pseudo continuous effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the pseudo continuous start effect is executed while the special symbols are changing.
Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect (repeating a unit variation of the decorative symbol a predetermined number of times) to make it appear that the variable display of the decorative symbol continues a predetermined number of times during one time of the variable display of the special symbol. There is, and it is an effect that can be executed at the start of the fluctuation or during the reach effect. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect includes a performance that repeats a performance of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative symbols as a unit variation, a performance that repeats a performance of temporarily stopping at least a part of a predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols as a unit variation, and a performance that is determined in advance. A production that temporarily stops the logo (for example, NEXT) is repeated as a unit change, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo", along with a predetermined number of unit changes in the decorative pattern. Includes repetitive performances. In addition, the number of repeated effects (the number of executions of the unit variation) is also called the number of pseudo-runs. can be expressed as
In this pseudo consecutive start effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol is displayed in the right symbol display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 66(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward). Although not shown, "x1" may be displayed at a predetermined position on the main display screen 7a to indicate that the number of pseudo-runs is the first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), a specific symbol temporary stop effect is executed. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, the probability variable jackpot has more balls in the jackpot game than the normal jackpot (the number of rounds in the jackpot game is increased). In other words, when the jackpot is achieved with the probability variation pattern (specific pattern), the benefit given to the player is set more advantageous than when the jackpot is achieved with the normal pattern. Furthermore, in this example, when reaching reach with the probability variable design (specific design), the probability of becoming a big hit is set higher than when reaching reach with the normal design. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols (specific symbols).
In the specific symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 66(B), first the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the normal symbol "8", and then the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) "7". However, the middle decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is being changed. In other words, the specific pattern temporary stop effect is also a losing pattern temporary stop effect, and when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped, it stops at a loose pattern arrangement that does not become a ready-to-win pattern arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). suggesting to It should be noted that the temporary stop is a state of swinging up and down two or three frames, and does not indicate the result of the change as a fixed symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a pseudo-continuation second suggestion effect is executed. In this pseudo consecutive second suggestion effect, the left decorative pattern 8L is the normal pattern "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the variable pattern (specific pattern) "7". Characters GS of "Ren" are displayed. By displaying the characters GS of "Ten", the first unit variation in the current pseudo-Ten effect is completed. Here, the character GS is a symbol indicating that the next unit change (the second number of pseudo-runs) will be performed, which is displayed using the pseudo-run "run". That is, in this pseudo-continuation second-time suggestive effect, the following unit variation is performed by displaying a predetermined symbol at the final stop position of the decorative symbol while the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) and the normal symbol are temporarily stopped. It is designed to execute a production that suggests.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), a specific symbol stop effect is executed. In this specific symbol stop effect, after the execution of the pseudo continuous second suggestive effect shown in FIG. In addition, while the character GS of "Ren" is displayed in the middle symbol display area and the state is maintained, the normal symbol "8" temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area is variably displayed. A second unit variation is performed. That is, with the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7" and "continuation" characters GS stationary, the left decorative pattern 8L changes again from the normal design "8", so that the next unit fluctuation in the pseudo-continuation production It is carried out. Although not shown, "x2" may be displayed at a predetermined position on the main display screen 7a to indicate that the number of pseudo-runs is the second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a character display effect is executed. In this character display effect, a predetermined character CRA is displayed in the left symbol display area instead of the left decorative symbol 8L changed again in the specific symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 66(D). In other words, in this character display effect, on the main display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed in the left design display area, the probability variation design (specific design) "7" is displayed in the right design display area, and the characters "Ren" are displayed in the middle design display area. GS is displayed. Then, by displaying this character CRA, the second unit variation in the current pseudo-continuous effect ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), a third pseudo-run suggestion effect is executed. In this pseudo-continued third suggestive effect, the character CRA in the left symbol display area displayed in the character display effect shown in FIG. In place of the characters GS of "run" in the symbol display area 2, characters GSS of "three runs" are displayed on the full screen of the main display screen 7a. Here, the characters GSS are symbols indicating that the next unit change (the third number of pseudo-runs) will be performed, which is displayed using the pseudo-run "runs". That is, in this pseudo-continuation third-time suggestion effect, the character CRA, the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7", and the characters GS of "continuation" are switched to the characters GSS of "three consecutive" By switching and displaying, the following unit fluctuation It is designed to execute a production that suggests that the

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), a specific symbol stop effect is executed. In this specific symbol stop effect, after the execution of the pseudo consecutive third suggestive effect shown in FIG. A third unit variation is executed in the pseudo-continuous effect for variably displaying the decorative symbol 8C. In other words, while the variable pattern (specific pattern) "7" is stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L changes again instead of the character CRA, and the "continuous" character GS displayed in the inner pattern display area changes. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed again, so that the next unit change in the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Although not shown, "x3" may be displayed at a predetermined position on the main display screen 7a to indicate that the number of pseudo-runs is the third.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(H), a specific symbol ready-to-win effect is executed. In this specific symbol ready-to-win production, after executing the specific symbol stationary production shown in FIG. With "7" stationary, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the same probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7", so that the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7" is reached during the third pseudo-consecutive fluctuation. It indicates that the state has been reached. This pseudo-continuous effect is completed by reaching the ready-to-win state with this probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7". Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters "reach!" are displayed. Then, when the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, although not shown, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is performed, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped, and the pattern arrangement is confirmed and displayed. is reported. In this case, as described above, the probability of winning a big hit is set high when the probability variable pattern (specific pattern) results in a reach, so the player can face the game with high expectations.

That is, in the pseudo-continuous effect D shown in FIG. 66, when either the left decorative symbol 8L or the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops at a specific symbol with a predetermined unit variation in the pseudo-continuous effect, the final stop symbol is selected. A predetermined symbol (“ren” character GS) is displayed in the pattern display area where a certain middle decorative pattern 8C stops to suggest that the next unit change will be performed, and then the specific pattern and “ren” character GS are displayed. is stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L or the right decorative pattern 8R (normal pattern) is varied again to execute the next unit variation (the second unit variation of the pseudo consecutive number). Then, in this second unit variation, a predetermined character CRA is displayed in the left or right symbol display area in place of the left decorative symbol 8L or right decorative symbol 8R (normal symbol) that has been changed again. When the CRA is displayed, the second unit variation in the current pseudo-continuous effect ends. After that, the character CRA, the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) “7”, and the characters GS of “Ten” are switched and displayed on the main display screen 7a to the characters GSS of the large “three consecutive eyes”, so that the next unit variation (pseudo Unit variation of the third consecutive number) is performed, and after that, while the specific design is stopped, the left decorative design 8L or the right decorative design 8R (normal design) and the middle decorative design 8C are changed again, The next unit variation (the third unit variation of the number of pseudo-runs) is executed. Then, in the third unit variation, the stationary specific symbol becomes the ready-to-win state, and the pseudo-continuous effect ends when the specific symbol becomes the ready-to-win state.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pseudo continuous effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 66, in the pseudo-continuous effect, when the decorative symbols include a specific symbol with a high degree of expectation (profitability) with a predetermined unit variation and temporarily stop is configured to perform the next unit variation while this specific symbol is stopped. According to this configuration, when the specific symbol temporarily stops due to the unit variation of the pseudo continuous effect, the specific symbol with a high degree of expectation (profitability) is carried over to the next unit variation. You can face the game with great expectations that reach may occur due to a specific pattern with unit fluctuation of . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 66, in the pseudo continuous effect, when either the left decorative symbol 8L or the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops at a specific symbol in a predetermined unit variation, , to indicate that the next unit change is to be performed by displaying a predetermined symbol (characters GS of "Ren") in the symbol display area where the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol, stops, and then stops the specific symbol. In this state, the left decorative design 8L or right decorative design 8R (normal design) and the middle decorative design 8C are varied again to execute the next unit variation. According to this configuration, when the predetermined symbol (characters GS of "Ten") is displayed in the symbol display area where the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol, is displayed, the player can repeat the unit of the pseudo-Ten effect. It can be predicted that the variation will occur while the specific symbols are stationary. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the pseudo continuous effect, when either the left decorative symbol 8L or the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops at a specific symbol in a predetermined unit variation, , to indicate that the next unit change is to be performed by displaying a predetermined symbol (characters GS of "Ren") in the symbol display area where the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol, stops, and then the specific symbols and " By erasing or changing again the left decorative pattern 8L or the right decorative pattern 8R (normal pattern) while the character GS of "Ren" is stopped, the next unit change (the second unit change of the pseudo-run number) is executed. It has become. Then, in this second unit variation, a predetermined character CRA will be displayed in the left or right symbol display area instead of the erased or re-varied left decorative symbol 8L or right decorative symbol 8R (normal symbol). It has become. According to this configuration, when the predetermined character CRA is displayed in place of the erased or re-varying decoration pattern (normal pattern), the player faces the game with high expectations for the subsequent development. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the pseudo-continuous effect, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the character CRA displayed in the second unit variation, the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7" , ``continuation'' characters GS are switched to large characters ``three consecutive'' characters GSS on the main display screen 7a. It is designed to According to this configuration, by switching and displaying the characters GSS of "three runs" on the full main display screen 7a, the player is strongly reminded that the next unit change (the third unit change of the number of pseudo-runs) will be performed. can appeal to In addition, when a predetermined symbol (characters GSS of "three lines") is displayed, the player can be sure that the unit variation of the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed again while the specific symbols are stationary. . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the main display screen 7a is switched to the characters GSS of "three consecutives", and a unit change is performed for the third pseudo-consecutive number. After it is suggested that the specific pattern is stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L or the right decorative pattern 8R (normal pattern) and the middle decorative pattern 8C are changed again, so that the next unit change (pseudo consecutive number 3rd time unit variation) is executed, and in this third unit variation, the stationary specific symbol is designed to reach. According to this configuration, in the third unit variation of the number of pseudo-runs suggested by the characters GSS of "three runs", the stationary specific pattern becomes a reach, so that the player can win a big win with a high degree of profit. You can go into the game with great expectations that you might get it. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pseudo continuous effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 66, the specific symbols are a plurality of types of odd-numbered symbols (odd-numbered symbols), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific pattern may be a single decorative pattern (for example, "7") among a plurality of types of decorative patterns. In this case, when a single decorative pattern results in a jackpot pattern arrangement, the number of balls in the jackpot game (number of rounds of the jackpot game) is the largest, or when a single decorative pattern results in a reach. is preferably set to have the highest probability of winning the jackpot.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 66, in the pseudo-continuous effect, when the normal symbol and the probability variation pattern (specific symbol) are temporarily stopped, the probability variation pattern (specific symbol) is temporarily stopped The next unit variation is performed by erasing or re-changing the normal symbol while maintaining the state (while the probability variation symbol (specific symbol) is stopped), but the present invention is limited to this. isn't it. For example, if the probability variation pattern and the probability variation pattern are temporarily stopped in a random pattern arrangement (a pattern arrangement that does not become a reach, such as "5 ↓ 7"), the profit is high (when it becomes a jackpot pattern arrangement, the jackpot game The number of balls (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) is high), and the probability variation pattern with high expectation (high probability of hitting the jackpot when reaching reach) is stopped, and the next unit change may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the pseudo-continuous effect, at the second unit variation, instead of the deleted left decorative symbol 8L (normal symbol), the left symbol is displayed. A predetermined character CRA is displayed in the area, but one character CRA may be selected and displayed from a plurality of types of characters having different expectations for big wins. With this configuration, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the displayed character, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 66, in the pseudo-continuation effect, by displaying predetermined symbols such as characters GS of "continuation" and characters GSS of "three consecutives", the following However, the predetermined symbol to be displayed may be displayed by selecting one from a plurality of color schemes with different jackpot expectations. With this configuration, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the displayed predetermined symbol, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the character CRA in the left pattern display area displayed in the character display effect, and the variable pattern (specific Symbol) "7", instead of the characters GS of "Ren" in the inner symbol display area, the characters GSS of "Third run" are displayed on the full main display screen 7a, but "Third run" The character GSS is the character CRA displayed in the character display effect, the variable pattern (specific pattern) “7”, and the character GS of “Ren” in the inner pattern display area. can be Further, the variable probability symbol (specific symbol) "7" may be displayed in a visible manner even when the characters GSS of "three consecutive eyes" are displayed.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a state where the probability variable symbol (specific symbol) "7" stops at the third pseudo-continuous unit variation. By temporarily stopping at the same probability pattern (specific pattern) "7", it was made to reach with probability pattern (specific pattern) "7", but reach with this probability pattern (specific pattern) "7" is compulsory may be performed at In other words, when the third pseudo-consecutive unit variation is performed while the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7" is stationary, the probability variation pattern (specific pattern) "7" may always be a reach. . Also, in this case, the stationary variable probability symbol (specific symbol) "7" may change its display mode (for example, change in color or shape) before becoming a ready-to-win. With this configuration, the degree of expectation for a big win can be increased by changing the display mode of the stationary variable probability symbol (specific symbol) "7", and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns according to the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
with
The display means is a gaming machine that notifies a lottery result as to whether or not a win is achieved by stopping a plurality of the decorative symbols in a row,
The decorative pattern is provided in a plurality of types including specific patterns,
The display means is capable of executing a pseudo-continuous effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the pseudo-continuous effect, when the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a plurality of rows including the specific symbols in a predetermined unit variation, the next unit variation is performed while the specific symbols are stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A4-2]
The decorative patterns include a first pattern group and a second pattern group,
When a big win is achieved with the decorative patterns of the first pattern group, the privilege given to the player is set more advantageous than when a big win is achieved with the decorative patterns of the second pattern group,
The specific pattern is included in the first pattern group,
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1, characterized by:
[Aspect A4-3]
The decorative patterns include a first pattern group and a second pattern group,
When the decorative pattern of the first pattern group becomes ready-to-win, the probability of winning a big hit is set higher than when the decorative pattern of the second pattern group becomes ready-to-win,
The specific pattern is included in the first pattern group,
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1, characterized by:
[Aspect A4-4]
By displaying a predetermined first symbol at the final stop position of the decorative pattern while the specific pattern and the predetermined patterns included in the second pattern group are temporarily stopped, the next unit variation is performed. suggest,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3, characterized by:
[Aspect A4-5]
In the next unit variation, after erasing or changing the predetermined symbol with the specific symbol and the first symbol displayed, a predetermined character is displayed at the display position of the predetermined symbol.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-4, characterized by:
[Aspect A4-6]
By switching and displaying a predetermined second symbol in place of the specific symbol, the first symbol and the character, it is suggested that the next unit variation of the next unit variation will be performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-5, characterized by:

67 to 70 are used to describe the decorative symbol variation effects A to D. FIG. This decorative design variation production can be executed during the decorative design variation production. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation production received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the decorative symbol variation production is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Decorative pattern variation effect A]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect A. FIG. In the decorative design variation production A, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the decorative design variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns. Each of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R is a design including numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), a meteor appearance effect is performed. In this meteor appearance effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a meteor image X2A and a character image X2B are displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with patterns including the same number "7", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a ready-to-win state. The meteor image X2A is a star-shaped image. Seven meteor images X2A are displayed. These meteor images X2A are displayed in the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C and are moving toward the near side (player's side). Character image X2B is a character image showing a person laughing. The character image X2B faces straight toward the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), a decorative symbol low speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative design low speed variation presentation, the middle decorative design 8C is varied at low speed. At this time, the middle decorative design 8C is enlarged and displayed more than the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. This middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at a low speed on the near side (player side) of the meteor image X2A. The meteor image X2A is an image smaller than the middle decorative pattern 8C. In the example of FIG. 67(C), the middle decorative design 8C is a design including the numeral "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), a decorative pattern disappearance effect is performed. In this decorative pattern disappearance effect, the meteor image X2A moving (coming toward) from the back side of the middle decorative pattern 8C to the front side (player side) breaks through the middle decorative pattern 8C that is fluctuating at a low speed, and the middle decoration. This is an effect for forming a disappearing portion X2C in the pattern 8C. As shown in FIG. 67(D), the meteor image X2A in the middle decorative pattern 8C can be made to disappear by penetrating through the number portion (the portion of 6), or by penetrating and disappearing through portions other than the number portion, or , the edge of the middle decorative pattern 8C is lost to form a lost portion X2C. The disappearing portion X2C has the same shape as the meteor image X2A. The background image can be seen from the lost portion X2C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super ready-to-win production, a character image CRB representing an enemy warrior is displayed in a ready-to-reach state in which the medium decorative pattern 8C returns to a high-speed change state, and the character image CRB performs a predetermined action to arouse expectations for a big win. is performed. This super ready-to-win effect is performed when the character image X2B turns from straight to oblique after the decorative pattern disappearance effect. Note that if the character image X2B remains facing straight, the super ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R show the lost pattern arrangement as it is, and the lost is reported.

[Decorative pattern variation production B]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. FIG. In the decorative design variation performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the decorative design variation performance is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns. Each of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R is a design including numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), a meteor appearance effect is performed. In this meteor appearance effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a meteor image X2A and a character image X2B are displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with patterns including the same number "7", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a ready-to-win state. The meteor image X2A is a star-shaped image. Seven meteor images X2A are displayed. These meteor images X2A are displayed in the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C and are moving toward the near side (player's side). Character image X2B is a character image showing a person laughing. The character image X2B faces straight toward the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped in the variation area of the middle decorative design 8C. At this time, the middle decorative design 8C is enlarged and displayed more than the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. The middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped in front of the meteor image X2A (player's side). The meteor image X2A is an image smaller than the middle decorative pattern 8C. In the example of FIG. 68(C), the middle decorative design 8C is a design including the numeral "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), a decorative pattern disappearance effect is performed. In this decorative pattern disappearance effect, the meteor image X2A moving (coming toward) from the back side of the middle decorative pattern 8C to the front side (player side) breaks through the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern 8C and the middle decoration. This is an effect of forming a disappearing portion X2C in the pattern 8C. As shown in FIG. 68(D), the meteor image X2A in the middle decorative pattern 8C can be made to disappear by penetrating through the number portion (the portion corresponding to 6), or by penetrating and disappearing through portions other than the number portion, or , disappears the edge of the middle decorative pattern 8C to form the disappearing part X2C. The disappearing portion X2C has the same shape as the meteor image X2A. The background image can be seen from the lost portion X2C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super ready-to-win production, a character image CRB representing an enemy warrior is displayed in a ready-to-win state in which the medium decorative pattern 8C returns to a high-speed fluctuation state, and the character image CRB performs a predetermined action to fuel expectations for a big win. is performed. This super ready-to-win effect is performed when the character image X2B turns from straight to oblique after the decorative pattern disappearance effect. If the character image X2B remains facing straight, the super ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R display the lost pattern array to inform the player of the lost game.

[Decorative pattern variation effect C]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. FIG. In the decorative symbol change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 69A, the decorative symbol change effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns. Each of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R is a design including numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), a meteor appearance effect is performed. In this meteor appearance effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a meteor image X2A and a character image X2B are displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with patterns including the same number "7", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a ready-to-win state. The meteor image X2A is a star-shaped image. Seven meteor images X2A are displayed. These meteor images X2A are displayed in the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C and are moving toward the near side (player's side). Character image X2B is a character image showing a person laughing. The character image X2B faces straight toward the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped in the variation area of the middle decorative design 8C. At this time, the middle decorative design 8C is enlarged and displayed more than the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. The middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped in front of the meteor image X2A (player's side). The meteor image X2A is an image smaller than the middle decorative pattern 8C. In the example of FIG. 69(C), the middle decorative design 8C is a design including the numeral "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a decorative pattern disappearance effect is performed. In this decorative pattern disappearance effect, the meteor image X2A moving (coming toward) from the back side of the middle decorative pattern 8C to the front side (player side) breaks through the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern 8C and the middle decoration. This is an effect for forming a disappearing portion X2C in the pattern 8C. As shown in FIG. 69(D), the meteor image X2A disappears by penetrating through parts other than the numeral part in the middle decorative pattern 8C, or by disappearing the edge of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Form part X2C. The disappearing portion X2C has the same shape as the meteor image X2A. In this case, the meteor image X2A does not penetrate (disappear) the number portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. In addition, in this decorative design disappearing effect, the character CRA is displayed on the back side (rear) of the middle decorative design 8C. This character CRA can be seen from a part of the lost portion X2C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(E), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super ready-to-win production, a character image CRB representing an enemy warrior is displayed in a ready-to-reach state in which the medium decorative pattern 8C returns to a high-speed change state, and the character image CRB performs a predetermined action to arouse expectations for a big win. is performed. This super ready-to-win effect is performed when the character image X2B turns from straight to oblique after the decorative pattern disappearance effect. Note that if the character image X2B remains facing straight, the super ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R show the lost pattern arrangement as it is, and the lost is reported.

[Decorative pattern variation effect D]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. FIG. In the decorative symbol change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the decorative symbol change effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns. Each of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R is a design including numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a cross appearance effect is performed. In this cross appearance effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a cross image X2D and a character image X2B are displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with patterns including the same number "7", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a ready-to-win state. The cross image X2D is a cross-shaped image. One cross image X2D is displayed. These cross images X2D are displayed in the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C and are moving toward the near side (player's side). Character image X2B is a character image showing a person laughing. The character image X2B faces straight toward the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped in the variation area of the middle decorative design 8C. At this time, the middle decorative design 8C is enlarged and displayed more than the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. The middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped in front of the meteor image X2A (player's side). The cross image X2D is an image smaller than the middle decorative design 8C. In the example of FIG. 70(C), the middle decorative design 8C is a design including the numeral "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a decorative pattern disappearance effect is performed. In this decorative pattern disappearance effect, the cross image X2D moving (coming toward) from the back side of the middle decorative pattern 8C to the front side (player side) breaks through the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern 8C and the middle decoration. This is an effect for forming a disappearing portion X2E in the pattern 8C. As shown in FIG. 70(D), the cross image X2D forms a disappearing part X2E by making the number part and the part other than the number part disappear like a cross in the middle decorative pattern 8C. The erased portions X2E communicate with each other. In addition, in this decorative design disappearing effect, the character CRA is displayed on the back side (rear) of the middle decorative design 8C. This character CRA is visible from some of the lost portions X2E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super ready-to-win production, a character image CRB representing an enemy warrior is displayed in a ready-to-win state in which the medium decorative pattern 8C returns to a high-speed fluctuation state, and the character image CRB performs a predetermined action to fuel expectations for a big win. is performed. This super ready-to-win effect is performed when the character image X2B turns from straight to oblique after the decorative pattern disappearance effect. If the character image X2B remains facing straight, the super ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R display the lost pattern array to inform the player of the lost game.

[Modification]
In the above-described decorative pattern variation effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R include numerals, but may also include alphabets, symbols, hiragana, katakana, kanji, characters, and the like. In this case, in the decorative symbol disappearance effects of the decorative symbol abnormal effects A, B, and D, these may be included in the disappearing portion. In the decorative symbol disappearance effect of the decorative symbol unusual effect C, these may not be included in the disappearing part.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative design variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, an effect is performed in which decorative patterns including characters are varied, and an effect is performed in which at least a part of the decorative patterns disappears by the action of a predetermined image (meteor image X2A, cross image X2D, etc.). be According to this configuration, a part of the decorative patterns that can constitute the jackpot pattern arrangement is lost by the action of the predetermined image. Is it formed in a state in which the pattern array has disappeared?), it is possible to impart a novel image to the player and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the effect of changing the decorative symbols including characters is performed, and when the effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols is being performed, a predetermined image (such as the meteor image X2A or the cross image X2D) is displayed. The effect of disappearing at least a part of the decorative pattern is performed. According to this configuration, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect of disappearing at least a part of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is performed by the action of the predetermined image, so that the scene in which the decorative pattern disappears can be carefully observed. can be expressed, it is possible to give the player a more novel image, and to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the meteor image X2A or the cross image X2D that causes a part of the decorative pattern to disappear is arranged on the back side (rear) of the decorative pattern, and the meteor image X2A or the cross image X2D is located behind the decorative pattern. A part of the decorative pattern disappears from the back side. According to this configuration, the meteor image X2A or the cross image X2D causes part of the decorative pattern to disappear from behind the decorative pattern, so that the decorative pattern suddenly disappears, giving the player a novel image. It can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the character CRA is placed behind the missing portion of the decorative pattern that has been lost by the meteor image X2A or the cross image X2D, and the character CRA is visible from the missing portion. According to this configuration, the decoration pattern is suddenly lost, and the character CRA can be visually recognized from the disappearing part after that, so that a novel image can be imparted to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the meteor image X2A in which a part of the decorative pattern disappears is formed smaller than the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, when a part of the decorative pattern disappears, it disappears with the small meteor image X2A, so that the sense of surprise at the time of disappearance can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

[Effect 6]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the decorative symbols include numbers as identifiers for identifying big wins and losses. According to this configuration, when the identifier near the number or when the number itself disappears due to the action of the meteor image X2A or the cross image X2D, the player feels nervous and excited, which enhances the amusement of the game. be able to.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of varying decorative patterns including characters,
the second display effect is a effect in which at least part of the decorative pattern disappears by the action of a predetermined image;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X2-1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of temporarily stopping the decorative pattern,
The combination effect includes the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the second display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X2-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the predetermined image is arranged behind the decorative pattern, and the predetermined image disappears from the rear side of the decorative pattern. let
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X2-3,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, a predetermined character is displayed in the missing part of the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X2-3 or aspect X2-4,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the predetermined image is formed smaller than the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X2-5,
The characters of the decorative pattern are formed of numbers,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The ready-to-win effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. FIG. This ready-to-win effect can be executed in relation to the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol").

[Reach production A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win effect A. FIG.
In the ready-to-win effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 71(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), on the main display screen 7a, a front ready-to-win pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect is executed. The multiple ready-to-win pattern array simultaneous display effects are performed in which a plurality of ready-to-win pattern arrays are simultaneously displayed on the main display screen 7a during the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 71(A).
Here, in this ready-to-win effect, after displaying various ready-to-win pattern arrangements, the ready-to-win state is determined by a predetermined ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and each of these various ready-to-win pattern arrangements is called a previous ready-to-win pattern arrangement. , The finally displayed ready-to-win pattern arrangement that determines the ready-to-win state after displaying various ready-to-win pattern arrangements is called a post-ready-to-win pattern arrangement.
In this multiple front reach symbol array simultaneous display effect, an example is shown in which three front reach symbol arrays formed by the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (the same symbol) are displayed on the main display screen 7a at the same time. ing. Incidentally, the number of pre-reach symbol arrays to be displayed simultaneously on the main display screen 7a may be two or more.
In the upper part of the main display screen 7a is a front reach pattern array M1 indicating a reach of "7", in the middle part is a front reach pattern array M2 indicating a reach of "6", and in the lower part is a front reach pattern array M2 indicating a reach of "5". A ready-to-win pattern array M3 is displayed. In this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Also, the probability variation pattern and the normal pattern are different in color scheme, for example, the probability variation pattern is displayed in red and the normal pattern is displayed in blue. In the illustration, for ease of explanation, the probability variable pattern is hatched.
Comparing the pre-reach symbol arrays M1, M2, and M3, the display sizes are different, and M2>M1>M3. M2 is the size of a normal decorative pattern, and has the same size as a rear reach pattern array A1 (FIG. 71(D)), which will be described later. Therefore, M1 and M3 are smaller than the rear reach pattern array A1. is displayed. Further, the intervals between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are horizontally arranged to form the front reach pattern array, are M2>M3>M1. M3 has the same interval as the rear reach pattern array A1, therefore M1 has a shorter interval than the rear reach pattern array A1, and M3 has a longer interval than the rear reach pattern array A1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), on the main display screen 7a, a front ready-to-win pattern arrangement enlargement change effect is executed. This front ready-to-win pattern array expansion change production is the front ready-to-win pattern arrangement among the three front ready-to-win pattern arrangements M1, M2, and M3 that were simultaneously displayed in the front ready-to-win pattern array multiple simultaneous display production shown in FIG. 71(B). M2 and M3 are erased, and the previous ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the upper stage is enlarged and changed and displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. The display of the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 shown in FIG. 71(C) is displayed larger than the rear ready-to-win pattern array A1. The front reach pattern array M1 is a reach pattern array of probability variable patterns, and the reach pattern array of probability variation patterns is displayed alone and conspicuously in red color, and is displayed larger than the rear reach pattern array A1, thereby increasing the player's expectation. can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), the rear reach symbol arrangement display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After this ready-to-win pattern array display effect is the finally displayed ready-to-win pattern that determines the ready-to-win state instead of the previous ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the previous ready-to-win pattern array enlargement and change effect shown in FIG. 71(C). Display the rear reach symbol array A1 as an array. In this example, the rear reach symbol array A1 is such that a reach symbol array of normal symbols indicating a reach of "8" is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(D), characters "ready-to-win!" are displayed above the post-reach pattern array A1. Thereby, the player is convinced that the variation has reached the reach state. In place of or in addition to the character "reach!", the character "reach" may be pronounced by voice. After that, after the ready-to-win pattern arrangement display effect is performed, although not shown, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is performed, and by stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, a big hit or a ready-to-win failure is indicated as a result of the variation. It has become.

[Reach effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win effect B. FIG.
In the ready-to-win production B, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the decorative design variation production is executed in synchronization with the special design variation display. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 72(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), on the main display screen 7a, the front ready-to-win pattern arrangement plural simultaneous display effect is executed. The multiple ready-to-win pattern array simultaneous display effects are performed in which a plurality of ready-to-win pattern arrays are simultaneously displayed on the main display screen 7a during the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 72(A).
Here, in this ready-to-win effect, after displaying various ready-to-win pattern arrangements, the ready-to-win state is determined by a predetermined ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and each of these various ready-to-win pattern arrangements is called a previous ready-to-win pattern arrangement. , The finally displayed ready-to-win pattern arrangement that determines the ready-to-win state after displaying various ready-to-win pattern arrangements is called a post-ready-to-win pattern arrangement.
In this multiple front reach symbol array simultaneous display effect, an example is shown in which three front reach symbol arrays formed by the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (the same symbol) are displayed on the main display screen 7a at the same time. ing. Incidentally, the number of pre-reach symbol arrays to be displayed simultaneously on the main display screen 7a may be two or more.
In the upper part of the main display screen 7a is a front reach pattern array M1 indicating a reach of "7", in the middle part is a front reach pattern array M2 indicating a reach of "6", and in the lower part is a front reach pattern array M2 indicating a reach of "5". A ready-to-win pattern array M3 is displayed. In this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Also, the probability variation pattern and the normal pattern are different in color scheme, for example, the probability variation pattern is displayed in red and the normal pattern is displayed in blue. In the illustration, for ease of explanation, the probability variable pattern is hatched.
Comparing the pre-reach symbol arrays M1, M2, and M3, the display sizes are different, and M2>M1>M3. M2 is the size of a normal decorative pattern, and is the same size as a rear reach pattern array A1 (FIG. 72(F)), which will be described later. Therefore, M1 and M3 are smaller than the rear reach pattern array A1. is displayed. Further, the intervals between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are horizontally arranged to form the front reach pattern array, are M2>M3>M1. M3 has the same interval as the rear reach pattern arrangement A1, therefore M1 has a shorter interval than the rear reach pattern arrangement A1, and M3 has a longer interval than the rear reach pattern arrangement A1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the front ready-to-win pattern array enlargement/reduction movement effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this previous ready-to-win pattern array enlargement/reduction movement effect, the display mode of the three previous ready-to-win pattern arrays M1, M2, and M3 that were simultaneously displayed in the previous ready-to-win pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. 72(B) changes. . The front ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the left-right center of the upper stage is enlarged and changed and displayed on the left side of the upper stage. The front ready-to-win pattern array M2 displayed in the left-right center of the middle row is reduced and displayed on the right side of the middle row. The front ready-to-win pattern array M3 displayed in the left-right center of the lower stage is enlarged and changed and displayed in the lower left-right center. Here, the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 has the same size as the front ready-to-win pattern array M2 shown in FIG. 72(B) after being enlarged. The front ready-to-win pattern array M2 has the same size as the front ready-to-win pattern array M3 shown in FIG. 72(B) after being reduced. The front ready-to-win pattern array M3 has the same size as the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 shown in FIG. 72(B) after being enlarged. That is, the display sizes of the pre-reach symbol arrays M1, M2, and M3 are M1>M3>M2, which is a change from M2>M1>M3 shown in FIG. 72(B). Further, the interval between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are horizontally arranged and form the front ready-to-win pattern array, is longer in the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 than the interval shown in FIG. 72(B). The front reach symbol arrays M2 and M3 are shortened, and M1=M2=M3. That is, the interval between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the front reach pattern arrays M1, M2, M3 is changed from M2>M3>M1 shown in FIG. 72(B), and the rear reach pattern array A1 is the same interval as

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), the front ready-to-win pattern arrangement display position change effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this front ready-to-win pattern array display position change effect, the display positions of the three front ready-to-win pattern arrays M1, M2, and M3 that were simultaneously displayed in the front ready-to-win pattern array enlargement/reduction movement effect shown in FIG. 72(C) change. . The front ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed on the upper left is reduced and displayed at the display position of the front ready-to-win pattern array M2 shown in FIG. 72(C). The front ready-to-win pattern array M2 displayed on the middle right side is enlarged and changed and displayed at the display position of the front ready-to-win pattern array M3 shown in FIG. 72(C). The front ready-to-win pattern array M3 displayed in the center of the left and right of the lower row is enlarged and changed to be displayed at the display position of the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 shown in FIG. 72(C). That is, in this pre-reach pattern array display position change effect, the reach of "7" in the pre-reach pattern array scaling movement effect shown in FIG. The reach of "7" and the reach of "5" are replaced with the reach of "6". Therefore, the display sizes of the front ready-to-win pattern arrays M1, M2 and M3 are M3>M2>M1, and the distance between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the front ready-to-win pattern arrays M1, M2 and M3 is as shown in FIG. It is the same as that shown in (C), and has the same spacing as the rear reach pattern array A1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), the front ready-to-win pattern arrangement enlargement change effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This front ready-to-win pattern array expansion change effect is the front reach pattern array among the three front ready-to-win pattern arrays M1, M2, and M3 simultaneously displayed in the front ready-to-win pattern array display position changing effect shown in FIG. 72(D). M2 and M3 are erased, and the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the middle stage is enlarged and changed and displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, the display of the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 shown in FIG. 72(E) is displayed larger than the rear ready-to-win pattern array A1. The front reach pattern array M1 is a reach pattern array of probability variable patterns, and the reach pattern array of probability variation patterns is displayed alone and conspicuously in red color, and is displayed larger than the rear reach pattern array A1, thereby increasing the player's expectation. can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), the rear reach symbol arrangement display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After this ready-to-win pattern array display effect, the ready-to-win pattern finally displayed to determine the ready-to-win state is replaced by the previous ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the previous ready-to-win pattern array enlargement and change effect shown in FIG. 72(E). Display the rear reach symbol array A1 as an array. In this example, the rear reach symbol array A1 is such that a reach symbol array of normal symbols indicating a reach of "8" is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 72(F), a character "ready-to-win!" is displayed above the post-reach pattern array A1. Thereby, the player is convinced that the variation has reached the reach state. In place of or in addition to the character "reach!", the character "reach" may be pronounced by voice. After that, after the ready-to-win pattern arrangement display effect is performed, although not shown, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is performed, and by stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, a big hit or a ready-to-win failure is indicated as a result of the variation. It has become.

[Reach effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win effect C. FIG.
In the ready-to-win production C, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), the decorative design variation production is executed in synchronization with the special design variation display. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 73(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), on the main display screen 7a, a front ready-to-win pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect is executed. This simultaneous display effect of multiple ready-to-win pattern arrays performs an effect in which a plurality of ready-to-win pattern arrays are simultaneously displayed on the main display screen 7a during the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 73(A).
Here, in this ready-to-win effect, after displaying various ready-to-win pattern arrangements, the ready-to-win state is determined by a predetermined ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and each of these various ready-to-win pattern arrangements is called a previous ready-to-win pattern arrangement. , The finally displayed ready-to-win pattern arrangement that determines the ready-to-win state after displaying various ready-to-win pattern arrangements is called a post-ready-to-win pattern arrangement.
In this multiple front reach symbol array simultaneous display effect, an example is shown in which three front reach symbol arrays formed by the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (the same symbol) are displayed on the main display screen 7a at the same time. ing. Incidentally, the number of pre-reach symbol arrays to be displayed simultaneously on the main display screen 7a may be two or more.
In the upper part of the main display screen 7a is a front reach pattern array M1 indicating a reach of "7", in the middle part is a front reach pattern array M2 indicating a reach of "6", and in the lower part is a front reach pattern array M2 indicating a reach of "5". A ready-to-win pattern array M3 is displayed. In this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Also, the probability variation pattern and the normal pattern are different in color scheme, for example, the probability variation pattern is displayed in red and the normal pattern is displayed in blue. In the illustration, for ease of explanation, the probability variable pattern is hatched.
Comparing the pre-reach symbol arrays M1, M2, and M3, the display sizes are different, and M2>M1>M3. M2 is the size of a normal decorative pattern, and is the same size as a rear reach pattern array A1 (FIG. 73(F)), which will be described later. Therefore, M1 and M3 are smaller than the rear reach pattern array A1. is displayed. Further, the intervals between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are horizontally arranged to form the front reach pattern array, are M2>M3>M1. M3 has the same interval as the rear reach pattern arrangement A1, therefore M1 has a shorter interval than the rear reach pattern arrangement A1, and M3 has a longer interval than the rear reach pattern arrangement A1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the front ready-to-win pattern array elimination effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This front ready-to-win pattern array deletion effect is the front ready-to-win pattern array M2 among the three front ready-to-win pattern arrays M1, M2, and M3 that were simultaneously displayed in the multiple front ready-to-win pattern array simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. 73(B). , M3 are erased, and the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the left-right center of the upper stage is enlarged and changed to be displayed on the upper left side of the main display screen 7a. Here, the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 has the same size as the front ready-to-win pattern array M2 shown in FIG. 73(B) after being enlarged. That is, it has the same size as the after-reach pattern array A1 (FIG. 73(F)), which will be described later. In addition, in the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 after the expansion change, the interval between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are horizontally arranged forming the front ready-to-win pattern array, is the expansion change shown in FIG. 73(B). longer than the previous interval.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), the previous ready-to-win pattern array restoration display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this previous ready-to-win pattern array restoration display effect, the previous ready-to-win pattern arrays M2 and M3 that were erased in the previous ready-to-win pattern array erasing effect shown in FIG. 73(C) are displayed again on the main display screen 7a (second display). be done. Here, the displayed front ready-to-win pattern array M1 is reduced and displayed in the same size and at the same position as the front ready-to-win pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. 73(B). In addition, the revived front ready-to-win pattern arrays M2 and M3 are also displayed in the same size and at the same positions as the multiple front ready-to-win pattern array simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. 73(B). That is, the pre-reach pattern array restoration display effect shown in FIG. 73(D) and the pre-reach pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. indicate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), on the main display screen 7a, a front ready-to-win pattern arrangement enlargement change effect is executed. This front ready-to-win pattern array expansion change effect is the front ready-to-win pattern array M2 among the three front ready-to-win pattern arrays M1, M2, and M3 that were simultaneously displayed in the previous ready-to-win pattern array restoration display effect shown in FIG. 73(D). , M3 are erased again (second erasure), and the previous ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the upper stage is enlarged and changed and displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, the display of the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 shown in FIG. 73(E) is displayed larger than the rear ready-to-win pattern array A1. The front reach pattern array M1 is a reach pattern array of probability variable patterns, and the reach pattern array of probability variation patterns is displayed alone and conspicuously in red color, and is displayed larger than the rear reach pattern array A1, thereby increasing the player's expectation. can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the rear reach symbol arrangement display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After this ready-to-win pattern array display effect, the ready-to-win pattern finally displayed to determine the ready-to-win state is replaced by the previous ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the previous ready-to-win pattern array enlargement and change effect shown in FIG. 73(E). Display the rear reach symbol array A1 as an array. In this example, the rear reach symbol array A1 is such that a reach symbol array of normal symbols indicating a reach of "8" is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 73(F), characters "ready-to-win!" are displayed above the post-reach pattern array A1. Thereby, the player is convinced that the variation has reached the reach state. In place of or in addition to the character "reach!", the character "reach" may be pronounced by voice. After that, after the ready-to-win pattern arrangement display effect is performed, although not shown, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is performed, and by stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, a big hit or a ready-to-win failure is indicated as a result of the variation. It has become.

[Reach effect D]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win effect D. FIG.
In the ready-to-win effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 74(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), on the main display screen 7a, a front ready-to-win pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect is executed. This pre-ready-to-win pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect performs an effect in which a plurality of ready-to-win pattern arrays are simultaneously displayed on the main display screen 7a during the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 74(A).
Here, in this ready-to-win effect, after displaying various ready-to-win pattern arrangements, the ready-to-win state is determined by a predetermined ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and each of these various ready-to-win pattern arrangements is called a previous ready-to-win pattern arrangement. , The finally displayed ready-to-win pattern arrangement that determines the ready-to-win state after displaying various ready-to-win pattern arrangements is called a post-ready-to-win pattern arrangement.
In this multiple front reach symbol array simultaneous display effect, an example is shown in which three front reach symbol arrays formed by the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (the same symbol) are displayed on the main display screen 7a at the same time. ing. Incidentally, the number of pre-reach symbol arrays to be displayed simultaneously on the main display screen 7a may be two or more.
In the upper part of the main display screen 7a is a front reach pattern array M1 indicating a reach of "7", in the middle part is a front reach pattern array M2 indicating a reach of "6", and in the lower part is a front reach pattern array M2 indicating a reach of "5". A ready-to-win pattern array M3 is displayed. In this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Also, the probability variation pattern and the normal pattern are different in color scheme, for example, the probability variation pattern is displayed in red and the normal pattern is displayed in blue. In the illustration, for ease of explanation, the probability variable pattern is hatched.
Comparing the pre-reach symbol arrays M1, M2, and M3, the display sizes are different, and M2>M1>M3. M2 is the size of a normal decorative pattern, and has the same size as a rear reach pattern array A1 (FIG. 74(G)), which will be described later. Therefore, M1 and M3 are smaller than the rear reach pattern array A1. is displayed. Further, the intervals between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are horizontally arranged to form the front reach pattern array, are M2>M3>M1. M3 has the same interval as the rear reach pattern arrangement A1, therefore M1 has a shorter interval than the rear reach pattern arrangement A1, and M3 has a longer interval than the rear reach pattern arrangement A1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), the front ready-to-win pattern array elimination effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This front ready-to-win pattern array elimination effect is the front ready-to-win pattern array M2 among the three front ready-to-win pattern arrays M1, M2, and M3 that were simultaneously displayed in the multiple front ready-to-win pattern array simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. 74(B). , M3 are erased, and the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the left-right center of the upper stage is enlarged and changed and displayed on the upper left side of the main display screen 7a. Here, the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 has the same size as the front ready-to-win pattern array M2 shown in FIG. 74(B) after being enlarged. That is, it has the same size as the after-reach pattern array A1 (FIG. 74(G)) which will be described later. In addition, in the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 after the expansion change, the interval between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are horizontally arranged forming the front ready-to-reach pattern array, is the expansion change shown in FIG. 74(B). longer than the previous interval.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), the previous ready-to-win pattern array restoration display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this previous ready-to-win pattern array restoration display effect, the previous ready-to-win pattern arrays M2 and M3 that were erased in the previous ready-to-win pattern array erasing effect shown in FIG. 74(C) are displayed again on the main display screen 7a (second display). be done. Here, the displayed front ready-to-win pattern array M1 is reduced and displayed in the same size and at the same position as the front ready-to-win pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. 74(B). In addition, the revived front ready-to-win pattern arrays M2 and M3 are also displayed in the same size and at the same position as the multiple front ready-to-win pattern array simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. 74(B). That is, the pre-reach pattern array restoration display effect shown in FIG. 74(D) and the pre-reach pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. indicate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), the pre-reach symbol arrangement superimposition effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This pre-reach pattern array superimposition effect is the pre-reach pattern array M3 among the three pre-reach pattern arrays M1, M2, and M3 that were simultaneously displayed in the pre-reach pattern array multiple simultaneous display effect shown in FIG. 74(D). is erased (second erasure), and the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the left and right center of the upper row is enlarged and changed to the same size and same as the front ready-to-win pattern array erasing effect shown in FIG. 74(C). displayed in position. In the front ready-to-win pattern array M2 displayed in the center of the left and right of the middle row, the display positions of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed, and the upper part of the left decorative pattern 8L is to the left of the front ready-to-win pattern array M1. It is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that its upper part overlaps the right decorative pattern 8R of the front ready-to-win pattern array M1. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the front reach pattern array M2 have the same size and the same spacing as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the front reach pattern array M1, and the upper part thereof is the front reach pattern. It is displayed so as to be superimposed under the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R of the array M1. When the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 and the front ready-to-win pattern array M2 overlap each other, the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 is positioned in front of the front ready-to-win pattern array M2, as shown in FIG. 74(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), on the main display screen 7a, a front ready-to-win pattern arrangement enlargement change effect is executed. In this pre-reach pattern array expansion change effect, the pre-reach pattern array M2 is erased ( second erasing), and the previous ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed on the upper left is enlarged and changed and displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. The display of the front ready-to-win pattern array M1 shown in FIG. 74(F) is displayed larger than the rear ready-to-win pattern array A1. The front reach pattern array M1 is a reach pattern array of probability variable patterns, and the reach pattern array of probability variation patterns is displayed alone and conspicuously in red color, and is displayed larger than the rear reach pattern array A1, thereby increasing the player's expectation. can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), the rear reach symbol arrangement display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After this ready-to-win pattern array display effect, the ready-to-win pattern finally displayed to determine the ready-to-win state is replaced by the previous ready-to-win pattern array M1 displayed in the previous ready-to-win pattern array enlargement and change effect shown in FIG. 74(F). Display the rear reach symbol array A1 as an array. In this example, the rear reach symbol array A1 is such that a reach symbol array of normal symbols indicating a reach of "8" is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 74(G), characters "ready-to-win!" are displayed above the post-reach pattern array A1. Thereby, the player is convinced that the variation has reached the reach state. It should be noted that instead of or in addition to the character "reach!", the character "reach" may be pronounced. After that, after the ready-to-win pattern arrangement display effect is performed, although not shown, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is performed, and by stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, a big hit or a ready-to-win failure is indicated as a result of the variation. It has become.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of reach production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, the decorative symbols have a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern. is stopped after the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and a plurality of types of predetermined ready-to-win pattern arrangements can be displayed, and a predetermined fluctuation In the case of reach, after displaying a plurality of types of front reach pattern arrangement, the rear reach pattern arrangement is displayed. According to this configuration, before determining the ready-to-win state with the predetermined ready-to-win pattern arrangement, that is, before displaying the rear-to-win pattern arrangement, it is possible to display a plurality of types of front-to-win pattern arrangements in various display modes, It is possible to arouse the player's expectations by performing novel ready-to-win performances that have never existed before. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, the probability variation pattern is a color scheme that is more conspicuous than the normal symbol, and in the previous reach pattern array expansion change effect, the probability variation pattern reach pattern arrangement is independent. It is configured to be displayed larger than the rear reach pattern array A1. According to this configuration, the ready-to-win pattern array of the probability variable pattern as the front reach-to-win pattern array is displayed alone and conspicuously in red color and larger than the rear reach-to-win pattern array A1, thereby allowing the player to see the reach-to-win pattern array of the probability variable pattern. can make a strong impression. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, the reach pattern array of the specific probability variable pattern displayed as the previous reach pattern array (the reach pattern array of "7" in the reach effect described above) is , After being displayed once, it is configured to be displayed continuously until the rear reach pattern arrangement is displayed in the rear reach pattern arrangement display effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the ready-to-win pattern arrangement of the probability variable symbols during the period from when the front ready-to-win pattern arrangement is displayed to when to display the later ready-to-win pattern arrangement. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, among the plurality of types of front-reach pattern arrangements, a specific front-reach pattern arrangement is displayed in the rear-reach pattern arrangement display effect until the rear-reach pattern arrangement is displayed. Display and erasure are repeated during a predetermined period. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a novel ready-to-win effect that has never existed before and to arouse the player's sense of expectation. For example, when the normal pattern is erased and the definite variable pattern is revived and displayed, the player's expectation is improved, while when the definite variable pattern is erased and the normal pattern is revived and displayed, the player It is possible to make the player happy and sad, such as reducing the expectation of the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, in the front ready-to-win pattern arrangement superimposition production, the front ready-to-win pattern arrangement of the probability variable pattern is positioned in front of the front ready-to-win pattern arrangement of the normal patterns and partly superimposed. It is configured. According to this configuration, the front ready-to-win pattern array of the probability variable pattern with a high degree of expectation is displayed in its entirety even when the front ready-to-win pattern array superimposition effect is performed, and it is never difficult for the player to visually recognize it. . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of reach production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pre-reach pattern array is expanded or reduced as shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pre-reach pattern array expands or contracts, it may be expanded or contracted gradually. In addition, the types of the front reach pattern array ("5", "6", "7" reach pattern array) and the rear reach pattern array ("8" reach pattern array) shown in FIGS. 71 to 74 are examples, Other types of ready-to-win pattern arrangements may be used. Further, the display number of the pre-reach pattern arrays shown in FIGS. 71 to 74 is arbitrary and is not particularly limited.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pre-reach pattern arrangement is repeatedly displayed and erased as shown in FIG. 73, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the previous reach pattern arrangement is erased, it may be erased so as to fade out. In addition, when the pre-reach pattern arrangement is displayed, it may be displayed so as to fade in. In addition, after deleting the front reach pattern array of small display, the front reach pattern array of large display is displayed, or after the front reach pattern array of large display is erased, the front reach pattern array of small display is displayed. The displayed pre-reach pattern array and the large-display pre-reach pattern array may be alternately erased or displayed. Further, when displaying or erasing a plurality of pre-reach symbol arrangements, they may be displayed or erased with a time lag. The number of repetitions of displaying and erasing is arbitrary and is not particularly limited.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the front reach pattern arrangement is a reach pattern arrangement other than the rear reach pattern arrangement (final reach pattern arrangement), as shown in FIGS. It is not something that can be done. For example, the same reach pattern arrangement as the rear reach pattern arrangement may be displayed as the front reach pattern arrangement. For example, in the production (for example, FIG. 71 (C), FIG. 72 (E), FIG. 73 (E), FIG. 74 (F)) immediately before the rear reach pattern arrangement display production in which the rear reach pattern arrangement is displayed alone , the same ready-to-win pattern arrangement as the rear-to-reach pattern arrangement may be displayed as the front-to-win pattern arrangement.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, the front reach pattern arrangement and the rear reach pattern arrangement are displayed as plane images (2D). ) may be displayed. For example, when enlarging the front reach pattern array in the front reach pattern array enlargement change effect shown in FIGS. may be displayed with . In this case, the stereoscopic image (3D) of the front ready-to-win pattern arrangement may be displayed so as to protrude from the display screen. In addition, various effects may be performed in connection with the display of the front ready-to-win pattern array. By doing so, it is possible to display a powerful front ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and to appeal to the player the ready-to-reach of the probability variable pattern. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, in the ready-to-win effect, only the front reach pattern arrangement or the rear reach pattern arrangement is displayed on the main display screen 7a. It is not limited. For example, in addition to the front-reach pattern arrangement or the rear-reach pattern arrangement, images of symbols, marks, patterns, characters, or objects or articles having a specific shape may be appropriately displayed to arouse the player's expectations. can be By doing so, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.
[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, in the ready-to-win effect, decorative patterns scroll vertically (up and down), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative patterns may be scrolled horizontally (right and left) or diagonally. In addition, in the mode in which the decorative patterns are scrolled in the vertical (up and down) direction, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are horizontally arranged and displayed in the front reach pattern arrangement or the rear reach pattern arrangement. It does not have to be limited to the shape. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be diagonally shifted and displayed. When the decorative pattern is scrolled in the horizontal (left and right) direction or diagonal direction, it may be displayed according to this.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns according to the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The decorative design has a first decorative design, a second decorative design, and a third decorative design, and the third decorative design is higher than the first decorative design and the second decorative design. shall stop after
The display means is
a plurality of types of predetermined ready-to-win pattern arrangements can be displayed by stopping the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern,
When reaching reach in a predetermined variation, after displaying a plurality of types of front reach pattern arrays, the rear reach pattern array is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-2]
The display means can simultaneously display at least two of the plurality of types of pre-reach pattern arrangements,
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1, characterized by:
[Aspect A6-3]
The display means can change the number of the plurality of types of pre-reach pattern arrangements to be displayed at the same time.
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2, characterized by:
[Aspect A6-4]
The display means can display at least one of the plurality of types of the pre-reach pattern arrays by changing the size.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3, characterized by:
[Aspect A6-5]
The display means can display at least one of the plurality of types of front reach pattern arrangements smaller or larger than the rear reach pattern arrangement,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4, characterized by:
[Aspect A6-6]
The display means can display at least two of the plurality of types of pre-reach pattern arrangements with different sizes,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-5, characterized by:
[Aspect A6-7]
The display means can repeatedly display and erase at least one of the plurality of types of pre-reach pattern arrangements during a predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-6, characterized by:
[Aspect A6-8]
The display means can partially overlap and display at least two of the plurality of types of the pre-reach pattern arrays.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-7, characterized by:
[Aspect A6-9]
The previous reach pattern array is a reach pattern array other than the final reach pattern array,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-8, characterized by:

The linked deformation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. This interlocking deformation effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the interlocking transformation effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. It is a production that displays an image on the .

[Interlocking transformation effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking deformation effect A. FIG. FIGS. 75A to 75J show the contents displayed in the image area AF, which is a partial image area of the display screen 7a. In the interlocking transformation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed in the image area AF by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. be. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the image area AF. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 4 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75B, in the state where the background image HG is displayed in the image area AF, the timer image TM is further displayed in the image area AF. The background image HG is an image displayed behind the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9C, the timer image TM, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. but includes all things that can be visually recognized by the player, such as abstract haze such as letters, figures, symbols, etc., and conceptual things that are unclear what they represent. The background image HG may have a variable shape, or may have a constant shape that does not change. Further, the background image HG may be an image that occupies the entire display screen 7a, or may be an image that is displayed on a part of the display screen 7a. When the background image HG is displayed on a part of the display screen 7a, the background image HG may move, or may not move and may be displayed at a specific position on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM is an image composed of numerical values, and here, as an effect before the countdown starts, an effect of incrementing the numerical values is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), the specific image included in the image area AF in FIG. 75(B) is the pending icon 9A also included in the image area AF in FIG. A transformation effect is performed in conjunction with 9C. In other words, an effect is executed in which images other than the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C included in the image area AF in FIG. 75B are transformed in conjunction with the deformation of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C. be done. Here, as one aspect of interlocking deformation, deformation in which the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C and the timer image TM are interlocked to alternately repeat reduction and enlargement is performed. FIG. 75(C) shows a mode in which the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9C, and the timer image TM are reduced compared to FIG. 75(B). The frame image WK in FIG. 75(C) corresponds to the image area AF in FIG. 75(B) before being reduced and deformed. The frame image WK may or may not be displayed. Here, the suspended icon 9A and the suspended icon 9C, which are a part of the image included in the image area AF in FIG. ) is not deformed in conjunction with the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C. Here, the background image HG does not change in form.

As shown in FIGS. 75(D) to 75(F), the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C included in the image area AF of FIG. is performed. At this time, the timer image TM continues to increment the numerical value. After that, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the timer image TM is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the numerical values adjacent to each other are partially overlapped and displayed. This suggests that the incrementing of the numerical value is finally over, which can excite the player. Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), the timer image TM is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and the countdown is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(I), when the numerical value of the timer image TM becomes zero, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, and the special ready-to-win effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(J), the decorative symbols stop when the jackpot hits.

[Interlocking deformation effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking transformation effect B. FIG. FIGS. 76A to 76J show the contents displayed in the image area AF, which is a partial image area of the display screen 7a. In the interlocking deformation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 76A, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed in the image area AF by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. be. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the image area AF. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated. The pending icon 9C is displayed as if it is riding on the pedestal image DZ. Inside the pedestal image DZ, a reserved number image NS indicating the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery is displayed. The number of pending number images NS is equal to the number of pending icons 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76B, in the state where the background image HG is displayed in the image area AF, the timer image TM is further displayed in the image area AF. The background image HG is an image displayed behind the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9C, the timer image TM, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. but includes all things that can be visually recognized by the player, such as abstract haze such as letters, figures, symbols, etc., and conceptual things that are unclear what they represent. The background image HG may have a variable shape, or may have a constant shape that does not change. Further, the background image HG may be an image that occupies the entire display screen 7a, or may be an image that is displayed on a part of the display screen 7a. When the background image HG is displayed on a part of the display screen 7a, the background image HG may be moved, or may be displayed at a specific position on the display screen 7a without moving. The timer image TM is an image composed of numerical values, and here, as an effect before the countdown starts, an effect of incrementing the numerical values is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), a specific image included in the image area AF in FIG. An effect of transforming is performed in conjunction with the hold icon 9C. In other words, an effect is executed in which images other than the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C included in the image area AF of FIG. be done. Here, as one aspect of interlocking deformation, deformation that alternately repeats shrinkage and enlargement in conjunction with the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C, the timer image TM, and the pedestal image DZ is performed. FIG. 76(C) shows a mode in which the suspended icon 9A, the suspended icon 9C, the timer image TM, and the pedestal image DZ are reduced compared to FIG. 76(B). Here, the suspended icon 9A, the suspended icon 9C, the timer image TM, and the pedestal image DZ, which are part of the images included in the image area AF in FIG. The background image HG and the pending number image NS, which are other parts included in the image area AF of 76(B), are not deformed in conjunction with the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C. The pedestal image DZ and the reserved number image NS are displayed at the position where the reserved number image NS remains as it is, and the pedestal image DZ is separated therefrom and is repeatedly reduced, enlarged, and deformed. The background image HG does not change in form.

As shown in FIGS. 76(D) to (F), the suspended icon 9A, the suspended icon 9C, the timer image TM, and the pedestal image DZ included in the image area AF of FIG. A production that repeats expansion is performed. At this time, the timer image TM continues to increment the numerical value. After that, as shown in FIG. 76(G), the timer image TM is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the numerical values adjacent to each other are partially overlapped and displayed. This suggests that the incrementing of the numerical value is finally over, which can excite the player. Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), the timer image TM is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and the countdown is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 76(I), when the numerical value of the timer image TM becomes zero, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, and the special ready-to-win effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 76(J), the decorative symbols stop when the jackpot hits.

[Interlocking deformation effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking deformation effect C. As shown in FIG. FIGS. 77A to 77J show the contents displayed in the image area AF, which is a partial image area of the display screen 7a. In the interlocking transformation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed in the image area AF by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. be. At this time, the hold icon 9C is displayed below the image area AF. The pending icon 9C represents the appearance of a particular object. Here, the hold icon 9C has a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77B, the background image HG and the timer image TM are displayed in the image area AF. The background image HG is an image displayed behind the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9C, the timer image TM, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. It is an image. Note that the content represented by the background image HG is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects. Including everything possible. The background image HG may have a variable shape, or may have a constant shape that does not change. Further, the background image HG may be an image that occupies the entire display screen 7a, or may be an image that is displayed on a part of the display screen 7a. When the background image HG is displayed on a part of the display screen 7a, the background image HG may be moved, or may be displayed at a specific position on the display screen 7a without moving. The background image HG of this embodiment moves while changing in size. The timer image TM is an image composed of numerical values, and here, as an effect before the countdown starts, an effect of incrementing the numerical values is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a specific image included in the image area AF in FIG. 77(B) is interlocked with the hold icon 9C also included in the image area AF in FIG. A transformation effect is performed. In other words, an effect is executed in which images other than the pending icon 9C included in the image area AF of FIG. 77(B) are transformed in conjunction with the deformation of the pending icon 9C. Here, as one aspect of interlocking deformation, deformation is performed in which the suspension icon 9C and the timer image TM are interlocked to alternately repeat reduction and enlargement. FIG. 77(C) shows a mode in which the hold icon 9C and the timer image TM are reduced compared to FIG. 77(B). The frame image WK in FIG. 77(C) corresponds to the image area AF in FIG. 77(B) before being reduced and deformed. The frame image WK may or may not be displayed. Here, the suspension icon 9C, which is a part of the image included in the image area AF of FIG. 77(B), and the timer image TM are interlocked and deformed. The background image HG, which is another part included in AF, is not deformed in conjunction with the hold icon 9C. Here, the background image HG is deformed at a timing different from the deformation of the pending icon 9C.

As shown in FIGS. 77(D) to 77(F), the pending icon 9C included in the image area AF of FIG. 77(B) and the timer image TM interlock with each other to produce an effect of repeating reduction and enlargement. At this time, the timer image TM continues to increment the numerical value. After that, as shown in FIG. 77(G), the timer image TM is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the numerical values adjacent to each other are partially overlapped and displayed. This suggests that the incrementing of the numerical value is finally over, which can excite the player. Next, as shown in FIG. 77(H), the timer image TM is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and the countdown is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 77(I), when the numerical value of the timer image TM becomes zero, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, and the special ready-to-win effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 77(J), the decorative symbols stop when the jackpot hits.

[Interlocking transformation effect D]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking deformation effect D. FIG. FIGS. 78A to 78J show contents displayed in a partial image area of the display screen 7a. In the interlocking deformation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 78A, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, a pending icon 9A is displayed below the display screen 7a. A pending icon 9A represents the appearance of a particular object. Here, the hold icon 9A has a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated. The hold icon 9C is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77B, a background image HG and a timer image TM are displayed. The background image HG is an image displayed behind the pending icon 9A, the timer image TM, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is a smile face image here. . Note that the content represented by the background image HG is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects. Including everything possible. The background image HG may have a variable shape, or may have a constant shape that does not change. Further, the background image HG may be an image that occupies the entire display screen 7a, or may be an image that is displayed on a part of the display screen 7a. When the background image HG is displayed on a part of the display screen 7a, the background image HG may be moved, or may be displayed at a specific position on the display screen 7a without moving. The background image HG of this embodiment moves while changing in size. The timer image TM is an image composed of numerical values, and here, as an effect before the countdown starts, an effect of incrementing the numerical values is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), an effect is performed in which other images included in a predetermined range including the hold icon 9A on the display screen 7a are transformed in conjunction with the hold icon 9A. In other words, an effect is executed in which images other than the suspended icon 9A included in the virtual dashed range shown in FIG. 78(C) are transformed in conjunction with the transformation of the suspended icon 9A. Here, as one aspect of interlocking deformation, deformation in which the hold icon 9A and the timer image TM are interlocked to alternately repeat reduction and enlargement is performed. FIG. 78(C) shows a mode in which the pending icon 9A and the timer image TM are reduced compared to FIG. 78(B). Here, the pending icon 9A and the timer image TM, which are part of the image included in the virtual dashed line range, are interlocked and deformed. The background image HG, which is the part, does not deform in conjunction with the hold icon 9A. Here, the background image HG is deformed at a timing different from the deformation of the hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIGS. 78(D) to (F), the pause icon 9A included in the virtual broken line range and the timer image TM are interlocked to produce an effect of repeatedly reducing and enlarging. At this time, the timer image TM continues to increment the numerical value. After that, as shown in FIG. 78(G), the timer image TM is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the numerical values adjacent to each other are partially overlapped and displayed. This suggests that the incrementing of the numerical value is finally over, which can excite the player. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(H), the timer image TM is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and the countdown is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 78(I), when the numerical value of the timer image TM becomes zero, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, and the special ready-to-win effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 78(J), the decorative symbols stop when the jackpot hits.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the interlocking deformation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 78, another image (for example, the timer image TM) included in the predetermined image area AF containing the pending icon in the display screen 7a is displayed as the pending icon. It is possible to execute an effect that transforms in conjunction with the transformation of . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 78, in this effect, the background image HG included in the image area AF is not deformed in conjunction with the deformation of the hold icon. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 78, in this effect, the image area AF includes a plurality of pending icons, and the plurality of pending icons are interlocked and deformed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 78, in this effect, the hold icon and other images (for example, the timer image TM) are contracted and deformed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 78, in this effect, the pending icon and other images (for example, the timer image TM) are repeatedly reduced and enlarged. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 78, other images include images representing numerical values (for example, timer image TM). The numerical value increases while transforming in conjunction with the transformation of the icon. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 78, after this effect, a countdown effect using images representing numerical values is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the interlocking deformation effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
The image area AF indicated by the interlocking deformation effects A to D in FIGS. 75 to 78 and the virtual area may be a partial area of the display screen 7a, and the area may be of any size. can.

[Modification 2]
75 to 78, the image that is not linked with the deformation of the pending icon is not limited to the background image HG and the pending number image NS, and may be any other image. For example, decorative symbols and right-handed display may not be interlocked. Alternatively, they may transform in conjunction with the deformation of the hold icon.

[Modification 3]
The interlocking transformation effects A to D shown in FIGS. 75 to 78 may be combined as appropriate. For example, both the background image of FIG. 75 and the background image of FIG. 77 may be displayed. In this case, neither of the background images may be deformed in conjunction with the deformation of the pending icon, or one of the background images may be associated with the deformation.

[Modification 4]
The interlocking deformation effects A to D shown in FIGS. 75 to 78 may not include some of the effects described above, or may include other effects. For example, in the linked deformation effect A, the enlarged display of the timer image TM in FIG. 75(G) may not be performed. In addition, in FIGS. 75 to 78, the variable display of decorative symbols may be continuously displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
A gaming machine, wherein the display means can execute an effect in which another image included in a predetermined image area including the suspended icon is transformed in conjunction with the deformation of the suspended icon.
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The game machine, wherein in the effect, the background image included in the predetermined image area is not deformed in conjunction with the deformation of the hold icon.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
A game machine, wherein in the effect, a plurality of reserved icons are included in the predetermined image area, and the plurality of reserved icons are interlocked and deformed.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the presentation, the holding icon and the other image are reduced and deformed.
◇[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the presentation, the holding icon and the other image are repeatedly reduced and enlarged.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-5,
the other image includes an image representing a numerical value;
The game machine, wherein in the effect, the numerical value increases while the other image is deformed in association with the deformation of the hold icon.
◇[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-6,
A game machine characterized by starting a countdown effect using an image representing the numerical value after the effect.

The timer count effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 79 to 82. FIG. This timer count effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the timer count effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display screen. This is an effect for displaying an image on 7a or the sub display screen 64. FIG.

[Timer count effect A]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A. FIG. In the timer count effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a timer display set effect is performed. In this timer display set effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced and variably displayed at the upper left end, and the timer display X3A and the character CRA are displayed. This timer display X3A is arranged at a position slightly left of the center of the main display screen 7a. In this timer display set effect, the initial timer value is set for the timer display X3A. That is, "70:00" (70 seconds) is set as the initial timer value. The character CRA moves to various places.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a timer value countdown effect is performed. In this timer value countdown effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted down (the timer value is decreased). This timer value countdown effect is once stopped when it falls to a predetermined value (for example, "30:00"). In the example of FIG. 79(C), a timer value countdown effect is performed and the timer value has decreased to "31:00".

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a timer value count-up effect is performed. In this timer value count-up effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted up (the timer value is increased). This timer value count-up effect is temporarily stopped when the timer value count-up effect reaches a predetermined value (for example, "45:00"). The example of FIG. 79(D) shows a state in which a timer value count-up effect is performed, the timer value is increased to "45:00", and the display is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), a timer value re-countdown effect is performed. In this timer value re-countdown effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is again counted down (the timer value decreases). In this timer value re-countdown effect, when the timer value of the timer display X3A reaches a predetermined value (for example, "00:00"), the display is stopped. In the example of FIG. 79(E), the timer value re-countdown effect is performed and the timer value has decreased to "17:00".
When the timer value reaches a predetermined value (00:00), a predetermined effect is performed. Predetermined effects include, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a pending change effect, a cut-in effect, a specific character appearance effect, and a super ready-to-win effect.

[Timer count effect B]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B. FIG. In the timer count effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a timer display set effect is performed. In this timer display set effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced and variably displayed at the upper left end, and the timer display X3A and the character CRA are displayed. This timer display X3A is arranged at a position slightly left of the center of the main display screen 7a. In this timer display set effect, the initial timer value is set for the timer display X3A. That is, "70:00" (70 seconds) is set as the initial timer value. The character CRA moves to various places.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a timer value count-up effect is performed. In this timer value count-up effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted up (the timer value is increased). This timer value count-up effect is temporarily stopped when the timer value count-up effect reaches a predetermined value (for example, "70:00"). The example of FIG. 80(C) shows a state in which a timer value count-up effect is performed, the timer value is increased to "70:00", and the display is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), a timer value countdown effect is performed. In this timer value countdown effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted down (the timer value is decreased). This timer value countdown effect is stopped and displayed when it falls to a predetermined value (for example, "00:00"). In the example of FIG. 80(D), the timer value countdown effect is performed and the timer value is "17:00".
When the timer value reaches a predetermined value (00:00), a predetermined effect is performed. As the predetermined effects, for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a pending change effect, a cut-in effect, a specific character appearance effect, and a super ready-to-win effect are performed.

[Timer count effect C]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C. FIG. In the timer count effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a timer display set effect is performed. In this timer display set effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are reduced and displayed in a variable manner at the upper left end, and the timer display X3A and the character CRA are displayed. This timer display X3A is arranged at a position slightly left of the center of the main display screen 7a. In this timer display set effect, the initial timer value is set for the timer display X3A. That is, "70:00" (70 seconds) is set as the initial timer value. The character CRA moves to various places.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a timer value count-up effect is performed. In this timer value count-up effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted up (the timer value is increased). This timer value count-up effect is temporarily stopped when the timer value count-up effect reaches a predetermined value (for example, "70:00"). The example of FIG. 81(C) shows a state in which a timer value count-up effect is performed, the timer value is increased to "70:00", and the display is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a timer value countdown effect is performed. In this timer value countdown effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted down (the timer value is decreased). This timer value countdown effect is stopped and displayed when it falls to a predetermined value (for example, "00:00"). In the example of FIG. 81(D), the timer value countdown effect is performed and the timer value becomes "17:00".
When the timer value reaches a predetermined value (00:00), a predetermined effect is performed. Predetermined effects include, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a pending change effect, a cut-in effect, a specific character appearance effect, and a super ready-to-win effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), a timer value re-count-up effect is performed. In this timer value re-count-up effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is again counted up (the timer value is increased). This timer value re-count-up effect is temporarily stopped when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "40:00"). The example of FIG. 81(E) shows a state in which a timer value count-up effect is performed, the timer value is increased to "40:00", and the display is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), a timer value re-countdown effect is performed. In this timer value re-countdown effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is again counted down (the timer value decreases). In this timer value re-countdown effect, when the timer value of the timer display X3A reaches a predetermined value (for example, "00:00"), the display is stopped. In the example of FIG. 81(F), the timer value re-countdown effect is performed and the timer value has decreased to "05:00".
When the timer value reaches a predetermined value (00:00), a predetermined effect is performed. Predetermined effects include, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a pending change effect, a cut-in effect, a specific character appearance effect, and a super ready-to-win effect.

[Timer count effect D]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D. FIG. In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a timer display set effect is performed. In this timer display set effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced and variably displayed at the upper left end, and the timer display X3A and the character CRA are displayed. This timer display X3A is arranged at a position slightly left of the center of the main display screen 7a. In this timer display set effect, the initial timer value is set for the timer display X3A. That is, "70:00" (70 seconds) is set as the initial timer value. The character CRA moves to various places.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a timer value count-up effect A is performed. In this timer value count-up effect A, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted up (the timer value is increased). In this timer value count-up effect A, as the timer display X3A rises, the size of the timer display X3A increases and the position of the timer display X3A moves. In the example of FIG. 82(C), the timer value count-up effect A is performed, the timer value increases to "35:00", the timer display X3A is enlarged, and the position of the timer display X3A is moved. represents the state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), timer value count-up effect B is performed. In this timer value count-up effect B, following the timer value count-up effect A, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted up (the timer value is increased). In this timer value count-up effect B, as the timer display X3A rises, the size of the timer display X3A increases and the position of the timer display X3A moves. This timer value count-up effect B is once stopped when it reaches a predetermined value (for example, "70:00"). In this timer value count-up effect B, the maximum value of the timer value is reached when the timer value is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the timer value count-up effect A and the timer value count-up effect B, when the timer value reaches the maximum value (temporarily stopped display), the maximum display is made. In the example of FIG. 82(D), the timer value count-up effect B is performed, the timer display X3A becomes larger, the position of the timer display X3A moves, and the timer value rises to "70:00". It shows a stopped display state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), a timer value countdown effect A is performed. In this timer value countdown effect A, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted down (the timer value is decreased). In this timer value countdown effect A, as the timer display X3A descends, the size of the timer display X3A decreases and the position of the timer display X3A moves. In the example of FIG. 82(E), the timer value countdown effect A is performed, the timer value decreases to "65:00", the timer display X3A is reduced, and the position of the timer display X3A is moved. represents.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), timer value countdown effect B is performed. In this timer value countdown effect B, following the timer value countdown effect A, the timer value of the timer display X3A is counted down (the timer value is decreased). In this timer value countdown effect B, as the timer display X3A descends, the size of the timer display X3A decreases and the position of the timer display X3A moves. This timer value countdown effect B is once stopped when it falls to a predetermined value (for example, "17:00"). In this timer value countdown effect B, the timer value is the minimum value when the timer value is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the timer value countdown effect A and the timer value countdown effect B, when the timer value becomes the minimum value (when the temporary stop display is performed), the smallest display is made. In the example of FIG. 82(F), the timer value countdown effect B is performed, the timer display X3A becomes smaller, the position of the timer display X3A moves, and the timer value drops to "17:00" and stops temporarily. It represents the displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), a timer value re-count-up effect is performed. In this timer value re-count-up effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is again counted up (the timer value is increased). This timer value re-count-up effect is temporarily stopped when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "40:00"). In this timer value re-counting effect, as the timer display X3A rises, the size of the timer display X3A increases and the position of the timer display X3A moves. In the example of FIG. 82(G), a timer value count-up effect is performed, the timer display X3A becomes larger, the position of the timer display X3A moves, the timer value rises to "40:00" and then stops. It represents the displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(H), a timer value re-countdown effect is performed. In this timer value re-countdown effect, the timer value of the timer display X3A is again counted down (the timer value decreases). In this timer value re-countdown effect, when the timer value of the timer display X3A reaches a predetermined value (for example, "00:00"), the display is stopped. In the example of FIG. 82(F), the timer value re-countdown effect is performed, the timer display X3A is small, the position of the timer display X3A is moved, and the timer value drops to "05:00". there is
When the timer value reaches a predetermined value (00:00), a predetermined effect is performed. As the predetermined effects, for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a pending change effect, a cut-in effect, a specific character appearance effect, and a super ready-to-win effect are performed.

[Modification]
In the timer count effect D, in the timer value count up effect A and the timer value count up effect B, the timer display X3A is displayed in the maximum size when the timer value reaches the maximum value (when the temporary stop display is performed). However, the timer display X3A is not limited to this, and in the timer value count-up effect A and the timer value count-up effect B, the timer value may be displayed in the maximum size before the timer value reaches the maximum value. Further, in the timer count effect D, in the timer value countdown effect A and the timer value countdown effect B, the timer display X3A is displayed in the smallest size when the timer value reaches the minimum value (when it is temporarily stopped). , but not limited to this, in the timer value countdown effect A and the timer value countdown effect B, the timer display X3A may be displayed in the smallest size before the timer value reaches the minimum value.
In addition, in the above timer count effect, the display of the timer value may be doubled.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer count effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the game machine 1, the timer display X3A of the first mode and the timer display X3A of the second mode are performed, and after the timer display X3A of the first mode is performed, the second mode is displayed. timer display X3A is performed. For example, the timer value is increased as the timer display X3A of the first mode, the timer value is decreased as the timer display X3A of the second mode, or the timer value is decreased as the timer display X3A of the first mode. , to increase the timer value as the timer display X3A of the second mode. According to this configuration, since the timer display is performed in different modes, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of timer effects, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, after performing the first mode effect of increasing the timer value of the timer display X3A, the timer display X3A is used to perform the second mode effect different from the first mode. . According to this configuration, since the effect of increasing the timer value is performed before the effect of the second mode, the timer value of the timer effect can be shown in front of the player. , it is possible to improve the interest of the timer performance and, in turn, improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, after performing an effect of increasing the timer value of the timer display X3A, an effect of decreasing the timer value of the timer display X3A is performed. According to this configuration, since the effect of decreasing the timer value is performed after the effect of increasing the timer value, the ups and downs of the timer value can be demonstrated in front of the player, and the timer effect can be enhanced. can be attached. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the game machine 1, after the effect of increasing the timer value of the timer display X3A is performed, the effect of stopping the timer value of the timer display X3A is performed, and then the timer value of the timer display X3A is decreased. According to this configuration, after the effect of increasing the timer value of the timer display X3A, the timer value of the timer display X3A is stopped. It is possible to give a sense of expectation for the production. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the embodiment of the game machine 1, when the timer value of the timer display X3A reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00) due to the countdown effect, the timer value is stopped and displayed without counting down any more. According to this configuration, when the countdown timer value reaches the predetermined value, the display is stopped, so that the player can recognize that the timer effect has changed and enjoy the intonation of the timer effect. . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the above embodiment of the game machine 1, when the timer value of the timer display X3A reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00) due to the countdown effect, the timer value is stopped and displayed without further counting down, and then the predetermined effect is performed. It is carried out. According to this configuration, when the counted-down timer value reaches a predetermined value, the display is stopped and a predetermined effect is performed, so that the player can take over the expectation obtained by the timer effect to the predetermined effect. , the user can enjoy the predetermined performance with great anticipation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying the timer display in a first mode,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying the timer display in a second mode different from the first mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and after the first display effect, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X3-1,
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first mode of the first display effect is a mode of increasing the timer value.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X3-2,
In the combination effect, the timer display of the second mode of the second display effect is a mode of decreasing the timer value.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X3-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of stopping the timer value of the timer display,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the second display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X3-4,
In the combination effect, when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value after the second display effect, the timer value is stopped and displayed at the predetermined value.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X3-5,
In the combination effect, when the timer value of the timer display is stopped at a predetermined value after the second display effect, a predetermined effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending number display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. This pending number display effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending number display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is an effect for displaying an image on 7a.

[Holding number display effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds display effect A. FIG. The number-of-holds display effect A is performed when the game state of the gaming machine is the normal state and the player is hitting left. As shown in FIG. 83(A), when the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R corresponding to the first special design lottery. In addition, the pending icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9C represents the appearance of a particular object. Here, the hold icon 9C has a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 is illustrated. The pending icon 9C is displayed as if it is riding on the pedestal image DZ. Inside the pedestal image DZ, a reserved number image NS suggesting the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved number) is displayed. The number of pending number images NS is equal to the number of pending icons 9A.

As shown in FIG. 83(B), one reservation icon 9A suggesting the reservation number of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation number) is displayed by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20. . Also, "1" is displayed as the number-of-holds image NS. The pending icon 9A, like the pending icon 9C, represents the appearance of a specific object. The shape of the pending icon 9A may be the same as or different from the shape of the pending icon 9C. As shown in FIGS. 83(C) to (E), by repeating the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 20, the number of pending icons 9A increases by one and the numerical value of the number of pending images NS increases by one. . As shown in FIG. 83(F), when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, a special ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 83(G). In this special reach effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C disappear and are not displayed. On the other hand, the pending number image NS inside the pedestal image DZ is displayed at the position as it is, and the pedestal image DZ disappears and is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of confirming the number of pending characters while suppressing the area of the image that blocks the battle effect between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB during the special reach effect. In addition, since the holding number image NS is displayed at the same position before and after the special ready-to-win performance, the player can easily recognize the holding number display position and can suppress the inconvenience of searching for the position where the holding number is displayed. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(H), when the decorative symbols are confirmed and stopped in the manner of losing, as shown in FIG. 83(I), pending digestion is performed. Specifically, the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A among the four pending icons 9A moves above the pedestal image DZ and becomes the pending icon 9C. In addition, the number of pending images NS is decreased by one with the digestion of the pending and becomes 3, which matches the number of pending icons 9A after the digestion of the pending. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(J), the next variable display is executed.

[Holding number display effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds display effect B. FIG. The number-of-holds display effect B is executed when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the time-saving state and the player is hitting to the right. As shown in FIG. 84(A), when the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R corresponding to the second special design lottery. In the lower portion of the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9B suggesting the pending number of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 pending number) and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9B and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the same positions as the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C of the pending number display effect A (FIG. 83). The pending icon 9B and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9B and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the number of special figures 2 pending is 4 is exemplified. The pending icon 9C is displayed as if it is riding on the pedestal image DZ. Inside the pedestal image DZ, a reserved number image NS suggesting the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved number) is displayed. Here, the state in which special figure 1 reservation is 0 is illustrated. The pedestal image DZ and the number-of-holds image NS are displayed at the same positions as the number-of-holds display effect A (FIG. 83).

FIG. 84(B) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 during the time saving. Since the special figure 1 reservation number has become 1, "1" is displayed as the reservation number image NS. The number of pending icons 9B does not change. Next, after a while from the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20, as shown in FIG. be. This suggests that the first special symbol lottery has started. As shown in FIG. 84(D), the variation suggestive image HS alternately changes between the "x" shape and the "o" shape. This suggests that the first special symbol lottery is in progress. When the first special symbol lottery ends and the player loses, as shown in FIG. FIG. 84(F) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state. Since the special figure 1 reservation number has become 1, "1" is displayed as the reservation number image NS.

FIG. 84(G) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 during the special reach effect associated with the reach of the decorative symbol. Since the special figure 1 reservation number has become 2, "2" is displayed as the reservation number image NS. In this special reach effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C disappear and are not displayed. On the other hand, the pending number image NS inside the pedestal image DZ is displayed at the position as it is, and the pedestal image DZ disappears and is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of confirming the number of pending characters while suppressing the area of the image that blocks the battle effect between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB during the special reach effect. In addition, since the holding number image NS is displayed at the same position before and after the special ready-to-win performance, the player can easily recognize the holding number display position and can suppress the inconvenience of searching for the position where the holding number is displayed. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(H), when the decorative symbols are confirmed and stopped in a losing mode, as shown in FIG. 84(I), pending digestion is performed. Specifically, the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A among the four pending icons 9B moves above the pedestal image DZ and becomes the pending icon 9C. Then, in a state where there are three reserved icons 9B, the next variable display is executed as shown in FIG. 84(J).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84(H) and 84(I), a variation suggestive image HS that alternately changes between the "x" shape and the "o" shape is displayed on the right end of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the first special symbol lottery has started and is in the process of lottery. When the first special symbol lottery ends and the player loses, as shown in FIG.

[Holding number display effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds display effect C. FIG. The number-of-holds display effect C is performed when the game state of the gaming machine is the normal state and the player is hitting left. As shown in FIG. 85(A), when the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R corresponding to the first special design lottery. In addition, the pending icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9C represents the appearance of a particular object. Here, the hold icon 9C has a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 is illustrated. The pending icon 9C is displayed as if it is riding on the pedestal image DZ. Inside the pedestal image DZ, a reserved number image NS suggesting the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved number) is displayed. The number of pending number images NS is equal to the number of pending icons 9A. At the lower right of the display screen 7a, the special figure 1 reservation number image H1 and the special figure 2 reservation number image H2 are displayed side by side. The special figure 1 reservation number image H1 displays the number of reservations of the first special symbol lottery (number of special figure 1 reservations). The special figure 2 reservation number image H2 displays the number of reservations of the second special symbol lottery (number of special figure 2 reservations). Here, the reservation number image NS and the special figure 1 reservation number image H1 display the same number.

As shown in FIG. 85(B), one reservation icon 9A suggesting the reservation number of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation number) is displayed by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20. . In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number image NS, and similarly "1" is displayed as the special figure 1 pending number image H1. The pending icon 9A, like the pending icon 9C, represents the appearance of a specific object. The shape of the pending icon 9A may be the same as or different from the shape of the pending icon 9C. In FIG. 85(B), "1" is displayed as the special figure 2 reservation number image H2 by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21.

As shown in FIG. 85 (C) to (E), by repeating the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20, the number of pending icons 9A increases one by one and the number of pending images NS and the number of special figures 1 pending The numerical value of the image H1 is increased by one. After a while from the winning of the game ball to the second start hole 21, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a "○"-shaped variation suggestive image HS is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the second special symbol lottery has started. As shown in FIG. 85(D), the variation suggestive image HS alternately changes between the "x" shape and the "o" shape. This suggests that the second special symbol lottery is in progress. When the second special symbol lottery ends and becomes a loss, the numerical value of the special figure 2 reserved number image H2 returns to 0 as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 85(F), when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, a special ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 85(G). In this special reach effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C disappear and are not displayed. On the other hand, the pending number image NS inside the pedestal image DZ is displayed at the position as it is, and the pedestal image DZ disappears and is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of confirming the number of pending characters while suppressing the area of the image that blocks the battle effect between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB during the special reach effect. In addition, since the holding number image NS is displayed at the same position before and after the special ready-to-win performance, the player can easily recognize the holding number display position and can suppress the inconvenience of searching for the position where the holding number is displayed. . Here, as shown in FIG. 85(F), when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 increases the numerical value of the special figure 2 reserved number image H2 by 1 to "1 ”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(H), when the decorative symbols are confirmed and stopped in a losing mode, pending digestion is performed as shown in FIG. 85(I). Specifically, the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A among the four pending icons 9A moves above the pedestal image DZ and becomes the pending icon 9C. In addition, with the pending digestion, the pending number image NS and the special figure 1 pending number image H1 each decrease by one to become 3, which matches the number of pending icons 9A after pending digestion. Then, as shown in FIG. 85(J), the next variable display is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 85(H) and 85(I), a variation suggestive image HS alternately changing between an "x" shape and a "o" shape is displayed on the right end of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the second special symbol lottery has started and is in the process of lottery. When the second special symbol lottery ends and becomes a loss, as shown in FIG.

[Holding number display effect D]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds display effect D. FIG. The number-of-holds display effect D is executed when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the time-saving state and the player is hitting to the right. As shown in FIG. 86(A), when the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R corresponding to the second special design lottery. In the lower portion of the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9B suggesting the pending number of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 pending number) and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9B and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the same positions as the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C of the pending number display effect C (FIG. 85). The pending icon 9B and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9B and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the number of special figures 2 pending is 4 is exemplified. The pending icon 9C is displayed as if it is riding on the pedestal image DZ. Inside the pedestal image DZ, a reserved number image NS suggesting the reserved number of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserved number) is displayed. The pedestal image DZ and the number-of-holds image NS are displayed at the same positions as the number-of-holds display effect C (FIG. 85). The number of pending number images NS is equal to the number of pending icons 9B. At the lower right of the display screen 7a, the special figure 1 reservation number image H1 and the special figure 2 reservation number image H2 are displayed side by side. The special figure 1 reservation number image H1 displays the number of reservations of the first special symbol lottery (number of special figure 1 reservations). The special figure 2 reservation number image H2 displays the number of reservations of the second special symbol lottery (number of special figure 2 reservations). Here, the number of reservations image NS and the special figure 2 reservation number image H2 display the same number.

As shown in FIG. 86(B), the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 increases the numerical value of the special figure 1 reserved number image H1 by 1 and "1" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 86(C), after a while from the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 21, a "○"-shaped variation suggestive image HS is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the first special symbol lottery has started. As shown in FIG. 86(D), the variation suggestive image HS alternately changes between the "x" shape and the "o" shape. This suggests that the first special symbol lottery is in progress. When the first special symbol lottery ends and becomes a loss, the numerical value of the special figure 1 reserved number image H1 returns to 0 as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 86(F), when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, a special ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 86(G). In this special reach effect, the pending icon 9B and the pending icon 9C disappear and are not displayed. On the other hand, the pending number image NS inside the pedestal image DZ is displayed at the position as it is, and the pedestal image DZ disappears and is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of confirming the number of pending characters while suppressing the area of the image that blocks the battle effect between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB during the special reach effect. In addition, since the holding number image NS is displayed at the same position before and after the special ready-to-win performance, the player can easily recognize the holding number display position and can suppress the inconvenience of searching for the position where the holding number is displayed. . Here, as shown in FIG. 86(F), when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 increases the numerical value of the special figure 1 reserved number image H1 by 1 to "1 ”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(H), when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a losing mode, as shown in FIG. 86(I), pending digestion is performed. Specifically, the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9B among the four pending icons 9B moves above the base image DZ and becomes the pending icon 9C. In addition, with the pending digestion, the pending number image NS and the special figure 2 pending number image H2 are each reduced by one to become 3, which matches the number of pending icons 9B after pending digestion. Then, as shown in FIG. 86(J), the next variable display is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 86(H) and 86(I), a variation suggestive image HS alternately changing between an "x" shape and a "o" shape is displayed on the right end of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the first special symbol lottery has started and is in the process of lottery. When the first special symbol lottery ends and becomes a loss, as shown in FIG.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pending number display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, when the gaming machine is in the normal state, the number of reserved icons 9A corresponding to the number of reservations of the first special symbol lottery and the number of reservations of the first special symbol lottery , and as shown in FIG. 84, when the gaming machine is in the time saving state, the number of pending icons 9B corresponding to the number of pending in the second special symbol lottery, A second effect in which a reserved number image NS representing the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the holding number image NS is displayed at the same position on the display screen 7a in the first effect shown in FIG. 83 and the second effect shown in FIG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect pending icon 9A in FIG. 83 and the second effect pending icon 9B in FIG. 84 are displayed at the same position on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83(G), after the first effect, the pending icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a, and the pending number image NS continues to be displayed. can perform the performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first effect of FIG. 83 and the second effect of FIG. 84, the pending number image NS is displayed below the pending icon 9C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84(C) and (D), in the second production, the number of pending icons 9B corresponding to the number of pending of the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol In a state in which a reserved number image NS representing the reserved number of lotteries is displayed, a variation display of decorative patterns corresponding to the second special pattern lottery is performed, and a variation suggestive image HS corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is displayed. be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the pending number display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the pending number display effect A of FIG. 83, the pending icon 9B may be displayed instead of the pending icon 9A or together with the pending icon 9A. In addition, the reserved number image NS is, instead of the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved number), or together with the special figure 1 reserved number, the reserved number of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserved number ) may be displayed. In the pending number display effect B of FIG. 84, the pending icon 9A may be displayed instead of the pending icon 9B or together with the pending icon 9B. In addition, the reserved number image NS is, instead of the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved number), or together with the special figure 1 reserved number, the reserved number of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserved number ) may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
The display positions of the pending icon 9A or the pending icon 9B of the pending number display effects A to D in FIGS. . Similarly, the display position of the pending icon 9C, the display position of the pedestal image DZ, and the display positions of the pending number image NS may be the same positions on the display screen 7a, or may be at least partially different positions.

[Modification 3]
The pending number display effects A to D in FIGS. 83 to 86 may be combined as appropriate. For example, the pending number display effect B may be executed after the pending number display effect A, or conversely, the pending number display effect A may be executed after the pending number display effect B. In the time-saving state of the number-of-holds display effects B and D, it may be in a high-probability state or may not be in a high-probability state.

[Modification 4]
In the pending number display effects A to D in FIGS. 83 to 86, some of the effects described above may not be provided, and other effects may be added. For example, the special reach effect may not be provided, and the suspension icon 9C may not be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
One of the plurality of types of images is a numerical image representing the number of pending,
When the gaming machine is in the first gaming state, the number of reserved icons corresponding to one of the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery and the reserved number of the second special symbol lottery; A first effect in which the numerical image representing the number of reservations is displayed;
When the gaming machine is in the second game state, the number of the reserved icons corresponding to one of the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery and the reserved number of the second special symbol lottery, and the other reserved icon. A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which the numerical image representing a number is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The gaming machine, wherein the numerical image is displayed at the same position on the display means in the first effect and the second effect.
◇[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1 or aspect B3-2,
The game machine, wherein the holding icon is displayed at the same position on the display means in the first effect and the second effect.
◇ [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
After the first effect, the game machine is capable of executing a third effect in which the holding icon disappears from the display means and the numerical image is continuously displayed.
◇ [Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-4,
The gaming machine, wherein the numerical image is displayed below the pending icon in the first effect and the second effect.
◇ [Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-5,
In the second effect, the number of the reserved icons corresponding to the number of reservations of the second special symbol lottery and the numerical image representing the number of reservations of the first special symbol lottery are displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is performed, and a specific image corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is displayed.

Operation means image interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG. This operating means image interlocking effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation means image-linked effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the screen 7a.

[Operation Means Image Interlocking Effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image-linked effect A. FIG. FIGS. 87A to 87J show contents displayed in a partial image area of the display screen 7a. In the operation means image interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 4 is illustrated.

Next, a challenge effect shown in FIG. 87(B) is executed. Specifically, it is an effect in which the character image CRA pulls a rope and displays an expectation level suggesting image KSG at the end of the pulled rope. Here, as shown in FIG. 87B, a character image CRA, a rope image, a button image BTN, an operation prompting image RND, and an operation valid period suggesting image TBI are displayed. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "repeated hit", and prompts the player to perform an operation (repeated hit operation). The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 .

When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the button image BTN alternately repeats the pressed state and the non-pressed state to change color, as shown in FIGS. 87(C) to (F). Also, the character image CRA pulls the rope to the right as if playing a tug-of-war. At this time, an effect is executed as if the player is being pulled leftward from the opposite side of the robe and is playing a tug-of-war. At this time, the character image CRA reciprocates left and right by repeating a state of being pulled to the right and a state of being pulled back to the left. The button image BTN, the operation facilitating image RND, and the operation effective period suggesting image TBI also move horizontally reciprocally in association with the reciprocating movement of the character image CRA in the horizontal direction. As a result, the effect in which the character image CRA is strenuously pulled to the right and pulled back to the left can be made more intense and hot. When the player continues hitting the effect button 63 repeatedly, as shown in FIG. 87(G), an expectation level suggesting effect is executed in which an expectation level suggesting image KSG is displayed from the opposite side of the rope. Here, the expectation suggesting image KSG is a character image of "chance", and the character contents change according to the degree of expectation of the big win in the variation. It should be noted that the expectation level suggesting image KSG is not limited to a character image, and the content of the character and the color of the character may be changed according to the level of expectation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(H), the expectation level suggestive image KSG is displayed near the center of 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 87(I), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 87(J), the decoration pattern is determined and stopped in a manner corresponding to the suggested content of the expectation level suggestive image KSG. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of failure.

[Operation means image interlocking effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining operation means image-linked effect B. FIG. In the operating means image interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 88A, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 4 is illustrated.

Next, a challenge effect shown in FIG. 88(B) is executed. Specifically, it is an effect in which the character image CRA pulls a rope and displays an expectation level suggesting image KSG at the end of the pulled rope. Here, as shown in FIG. 88B, a character image CRA, a rope image, a button image BTN, an operation prompting image RND, an operation effective period suggesting image TBI, and a frame image WK are displayed. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be alternately switchable between a pressed state and a non-pressed state. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "Consecutive hits" and prompts the player to perform an operation. The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 . The character image CRA, the rope image, the button image BTN, the operation prompting image RND, and the operation effective period suggesting image TBI are displayed inside the frame image WK.

When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the frame image WK reciprocates left and right as shown in FIGS. 88(C) to (F). At this time, the button image BTN, the operation prompting image RND, and the operation valid period suggesting image TBI inside the frame image WK also reciprocate left and right in conjunction with the reciprocating movement of the frame image WK. The reciprocating effect of the character image CRA to the left and right can be made more intense and hot by interlocking the button image BTN with the reciprocating effect. When the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 63, the expectation suggesting image KSG is displayed inside the frame image WK from the opposite side of the rope, as shown in FIG. 88(G). Here, it is a character image of "chance", and the character content changes according to the degree of expectation of the big win in the variation. It should be noted that the expectation level suggesting image KSG is not limited to a character image, and the content of the character and the color of the character may be changed according to the level of expectation. After that, as shown in FIG. 88(H), the frame image WK disappears, and after the expectation level suggestive image KSG is displayed near the center of 7a, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stop. After that, as shown in FIG. 88(J), the decoration pattern is determined and stopped in a mode corresponding to the suggested content of the expectation level suggestive image KSG. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of failure.

[Operating means image interlocking effect C]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image-linked effect C. FIG. FIGS. 89A to 89J show contents displayed in a partial image area of the display screen 7a. In the operating means image interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

Next, a challenge effect shown in FIG. 89(B) is executed. Specifically, it is an effect in which the character image CRA pulls a rope and displays an expectation level suggesting image KSG at the end of the pulled rope. Here, as shown in FIG. 89B, a character image CRA, a rope image, a button image BTN, an operation prompting image RND, and an operation valid period suggesting image TBI are displayed. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "long press" and prompts the player to perform an operation (long press operation). The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 .

If the player does not press the effect button 63 for a long time, the character image CRA stops without performing the tug-of-war motion, as shown in FIGS. 89(B) to (C). Also, the button image BTN is displayed in a state in which it is not pressed. As shown in FIGS. 89(D) to (F), when the player presses the effect button 63 for a long time, the button image BTN is pressed and displayed with its color changed, and the character image CRA appears to be playing tug-of-war. Pull the rope to the right. At this time, an effect is executed as if the player is being pulled leftward from the opposite side of the robe and is playing a tug-of-war. At this time, the character image CRA reciprocates left and right by repeating a state of being pulled to the right and a state of being pulled back to the left. The button image BTN, the operation facilitating image RND, and the operation effective period suggesting image TBI also move horizontally reciprocally in association with the reciprocating movement of the character image CRA in the horizontal direction. As a result, the effect in which the character image CRA is strenuously pulled to the right and pulled back to the left can be made more intense and hot. A part of the expectation suggesting image KSG appears or disappears in conjunction with the reciprocating movement of the character image CRA in the horizontal direction. This makes it possible to raise the expectations of the player. When the player keeps pressing the effect button 63 for a long time, the expectation suggesting image KSG is displayed from the opposite side of the rope, as shown in FIG. 89(G). Here, it is a smiley face image, and the content of the character changes according to the degree of expectation of the big win in the variation. Note that the expectation level suggesting image KSG is not limited to a character, and may be a decorative design or a pending icon. Also, the shape and color may be changed according to the degree of expectation. After that, as shown in FIG. 89(H), after the expectation level suggesting image KSG is displayed near the center of 7a, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 89(J), the decoration pattern is determined and stopped in a manner corresponding to the suggested content of the expectation level suggestive image KSG. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of failure.

[Operation Means Image Interlocking Effect D]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image-linked effect D. FIG. FIGS. 90A to 90J show contents displayed in a partial image area of the display screen 7a. In the operating means image interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 90A, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

Next, a challenge effect shown in FIG. 90(B) is executed. Specifically, it is an effect in which the character image CRA pulls a rope and displays an expectation level suggesting image KSG at the end of the pulled rope. Here, as shown in FIG. 90B, a character image CRA, a rope image, a button image BTN, an operation prompting image RND, an operation effective period suggesting image TBI, and a background image HG are displayed. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "repeated hit", and prompts the player to perform an operation (repeated hit operation). The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 . The background image HG is an image displayed behind images such as the pending icon 9A, the character image CRA, the button image BTN, and the operation prompting image RND. be.

When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the button image BTN alternately repeats the pressed state and the non-pressed state, and the color changes, as shown in FIGS. 90(C) to (F). Also, the character image CRA pulls the rope to the right as if playing a tug-of-war. At this time, an effect is executed as if the player is being pulled leftward from the opposite side of the robe and is playing a tug-of-war. At this time, the character image CRA reciprocates left and right by repeating a state of being pulled to the right and a state of being pulled back to the left. The button image BTN, the operation facilitating image RND, the operation valid period suggesting image TBI, and the background image HG also move horizontally reciprocally in association with the reciprocating movement of the character image CRA in the horizontal direction. As a result, the effect in which the character image CRA is strenuously pulled to the right and pulled back to the left can be made more intense and hot. When the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 90(G), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the other side of the rope as expectations suggestive images. Here, all of them represent the numerical value of "3", and the contents of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change according to the degree of expectation of the big win in the variation. The decoration pattern as the expectation level suggesting image is not limited to the numeric image or the character image, and may be three characters or three characters. After that, as shown in FIG. 90(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move toward the vicinity of the center of 7a, rotate horizontally as shown in FIG. As shown in J), a fixed stop is made. In this case, the game is decided and stopped in a win mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means image interlocking effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the button image BTN is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image CRA included in the predetermined image area including the button image BTN on the display screen 7a. A moving effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, an operation prompting image RND is displayed in a predetermined image area of the display screen 7a to prompt the operation of the effect button 63, and the character image CRA is moved. , the operation prompting image RND moves. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the button image BTN and the character image CRA interlock and reciprocate. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the performance is performed during the variation performance. can perform the performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 89, the above effect is performed when the player operates the effect button 63 . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the operation means image-linked effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
Operation means image interlocking effects A to D in FIGS. may be executed. For example, in the operation means image interlocking effect A of FIG. 87, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the character image CRA and the button image BTN are reciprocally moved left and right. However, the character image CRA and the button image BTN may reciprocate left and right even if the player does not hit the effect button 63 repeatedly. On the other hand, in the operating means image interlocking effect A of FIG. 87, the character image CRA and the button image BTN reciprocate left and right only when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, and the character image CRA and the button image BTN move left and right when the player does not hit the effect button 63 repeatedly. may not reciprocate left and right.

[Modification 2]
87 to 90, all images included in a predetermined image area including the button image BTN on the display screen 7a reciprocate in conjunction with the reciprocating movement of the character image CRA. Supposed to move. However, not all the images included in this image area need to be interlocked. That is, some images included in this image area may be stationary without interlocking, or may be moving without interlocking.

[Modification 3]
In the operation means image-linked productions A to D in FIGS. 87 to 90, in the challenge production, the expectation suggestive image KSG on the opposite side of the rope is displayed after the tug-of-war. However, if the challenge is unsuccessful, at least a part of the expectation level suggesting image KSG may be displayed and an internal effect may be provided.

[Modification 4]
In the operation means image interlocking effects A to D in FIGS. 87 to 90, the operation means image interlocked with the reciprocating movement of the character image CRA is not limited to the button image BTN. It may be an image representing the appearance of other operating means. Further, although the character image CRA and the button image BTN are interlocked to reciprocate, they may be interlocked to move other than the reciprocating movement. For example, they may rotate and move in conjunction with each other, or move in one direction.

[Modification 5]
Operation means image interlocking effects A to D in FIGS. 87 to 90 may be combined as appropriate. for example,. The change mode of the button image BTN can be appropriately applied to other operating means-linked effects.

[Modification 6]
The operation means image-linked effects A to D in FIGS. 87 to 90 may not include some of the described effects, or may include other effects. For example, the character image CRA may move only forward and not backward. In addition, special ready-to-win production may be executed after ready-to-win formation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in which the operation means image moves in conjunction with movement of another image included in a predetermined image area including the operation means image in the display means.
◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation prompting image prompting an operation of the operation means;
A gaming machine, wherein in the effect, the operation prompting image is displayed in the predetermined image area, and the operation prompting image moves in conjunction with movement of the other image.
◇ [Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
A game machine, wherein in the presentation, the operation means image and the other image perform reciprocating movement.
◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3,
The production is performed during the variable production,
A game machine characterized by being capable of executing, after the performance, an expectation level suggesting performance that suggests the level of expectation for winning in the variation.
◇[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-4,
A gaming machine, wherein the presentation is performed when a player operates the operating means.

Specific image movement effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. This specific image moving effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the specific image moving effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Specific Image Movement Effect A]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the specific image movement effect A. FIG. FIGS. 91A to 91J show contents displayed on a portion of the main display screen 7a and a portion of the right sub-display screen 64R. In the specific image movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used on the main display screen 7a to produce a decorative pattern variation effect (variation display). is displayed. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the specific image TG is displayed on the main display screen 7a during the variable effect. Appearance of the specific image TG suggests that the degree of expectation for the big win in the relevant variation or the next variation and thereafter is higher than in the case where the specific image TG does not appear. The specific image TG may come down from above and appear, or may suddenly appear at the display position. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a smile face image. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets.

As shown in FIGS. 91(C) and 91(D), the specific image TG displayed on the main display screen 7a moves rightward and moves from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R. The movement of the specific image TG to the right sub-display screen 64R suggests that the expectation of the big win is higher in the current fluctuation or the next fluctuation and thereafter than in the case of no movement. At this time, the variable effect continues on the main display screen 7a. When the specific image TG moves from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, the specific image TG is once displayed across the main display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. This makes it possible to give the player the feeling that the specific image TG is actually moving. After being moved to the right sub-display screen 64R, the specific object represented by the specific image TG becomes larger than when it is displayed on the main display screen 7a before being moved. As a result, the illusion that the specific image TG is approaching the player can be given.

After the specific image TG moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, it moves below the right sub-display screen 64R as shown in FIG. 91(E), and then moves to the right sub-display screen as shown in FIG. It disappears from the screen 64R. The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win state in FIG. 91(E), and then fixedly stopped in a losing state as shown in FIG. 91(F). In this way, the specific image TG appears during one variation effect, and disappears from the main display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R when the variation ends.

Thereafter, retention digestion is performed as shown in FIG. 91(G). Specifically, the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A among the four pending icons 9A moves upward and right to become the pending icon 9C. The specific image TG is not displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 91(H), the next variable effect is started. When the next variable effect is started, the specific image TG reappears from below the right sub-display screen 64R. The reappearance of the specific image TG suggests that the degree of expectation for the big win in the variation is higher than when the specific image TG does not reappear. In this way, the specific image TG that appeared during the first variable performance reappears during the next variable performance, so that the player can be made to think that something special will happen, and the interest can be improved. can.

The specific image TG reappearing from below the right sub-display screen 64R moves leftward as shown in FIG. 91(I) and moves from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a. When the specific image TG moves to the main display screen 7a, a special ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 91(J). Note that when the specific image TG does not move from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a, the special ready-to-win effect is not executed. In FIG. 91(I), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win mode, and when the specific image TG moves to the main display screen 7a, the decorative symbols disappear from the main display screen 7a and a special ready-to-win effect is executed. .

[Specific Image Movement Effect B]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining specific image movement effect B. FIG. FIGS. 92A to 92J show contents displayed on a portion of the main display screen 7a and a portion of the right sub-display screen 64R. In the specific image movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used on the main display screen 7a to produce a decorative pattern variation effect (variation display). is displayed. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the specific image TG is displayed on the main display screen 7a during the variable effect. Appearance of the specific image TG suggests that the degree of expectation for the big win in the relevant variation or the subsequent variation is higher than when the specific image TG does not appear. The specific image TG may come down from above and appear, or may suddenly appear at the display position. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a smile face image. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets.

As shown in FIGS. 92(C) and 92(D), the specific image TG displayed on the main display screen 7a moves rightward and moves from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R. The movement of the specific image TG to the right sub-display screen 64R suggests that the expectation of the big win is higher in the current fluctuation or the next fluctuation and thereafter than in the case of no movement. At this time, the variable effect continues on the main display screen 7a. When the specific image TG moves from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, the specific image TG is once displayed across the main display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. As a result, the player can feel that the specific image TG is actually moving. After being moved to the right sub-display screen 64R, the specific object represented by the specific image TG becomes larger than when it is displayed on the main display screen 7a before being moved. As a result, the illusion that the specific image TG is approaching the player can be given.

After the specific image TG moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, as shown in FIG. 92(E), it moves below the right sub-display screen 64R, and then, as shown in FIG. displayed continuously. The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win state in FIG. 92(E), and then fixedly stopped in a losing state as shown in FIG. 92(F). In this way, the specific image TG appears during one variation presentation, and continues to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R even after the variation ends.

Thereafter, retention digestion is performed as shown in FIG. 92(G). Specifically, the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A among the four pending icons 9A moves to the upper right and becomes the pending icon 9C. The specific image TG is continuously displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(H), the next variable effect is started. When the next variation performance is started while the specific image TG is continuously displayed, it suggests that the expectation of the big win in the variation or after the next variation is higher than in the case where the specific image TG is not continuously displayed. In this way, the specific image TG appearing at the time of the first variable performance is continuously displayed at the time of the next variable performance, so that the player can be made to think that something special will happen, and the interest is improved. can be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 92(I), the specific image TG is continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and is also displayed on the main display screen 7a. When the specific image TG is displayed on the main display screen 7a, a special ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 92(J). Note that when the specific image TG is not moved to the main display screen 7a, the special ready-to-win effect is not executed. In FIG. 92(I), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win mode, and when the specific image TG is displayed on the main display screen 7a, the decorative symbols disappear from the main display screen 7a and a special ready-to-win effect is executed. be done.

[Specific Image Movement Effect C]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the specific image movement effect C. FIG. FIGS. 93A to 93J show contents displayed on a portion of the main display screen 7a and a portion of the right sub-display screen 64R. In the specific image movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used on the main display screen 7a to produce a decorative design variation effect (variation display). is displayed. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 93(B), one of the pending icons 9A (here, the rightmost pending icon 9A) is changed to pending by prefetching. Here, the pending change causes the pending icon 9A to become a specific image representing the appearance of a specific object. Here, the pending icon 9A becomes an image representing Smiley's face due to the pending change. Note that the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract hazes such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets.

As shown in FIG. 93(C), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in the mode of losing. A pending digestion is then performed. Specifically, the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending changed pending icon 9A among the four pending icons 9A moves to the pending position on the upper right and becomes the pending icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(D), the next variable effect is started. When the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 93(E), an effect is performed in which the specific image TG pops out from the hold icon 9C that is changed to hold. This specific image TG is an image having the same content as the suspension icon 9C changed to suspension, and is larger in size than the suspension icon 9C. Note that the specific image TG may have the same size as the suspension icon 9C changed to suspension. Also, the pending icon 9C may be the specific image TG. That is, the effect may be such that the suspension icon 9C moves upward to become the specific image TG, and the suspension icon 9C is not displayed at the position where the suspension icon 9C was.

After the specific image TG is displayed, a chasing game effect is performed as shown in FIG. 93(F). Here, on the main display screen 7a, a display effect is produced in which the face image AG representing the face wearing sunglasses follows the specific image TG and the specific image TG runs away. The specific image TG displayed on the main display screen 7a moves rightward and moves from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R. When the specific image TG moves from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, the specific image TG is once displayed across the main display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. As a result, the player can feel that the specific image TG is actually moving. After being moved to the right sub-display screen 64R, the specific object represented by the specific image TG becomes larger than when it is displayed on the main display screen 7a before being moved. As a result, the illusion that the specific image TG is approaching the player can be given. If the specific image TG succeeds in moving to the right sub-display screen 64R without being caught by the face image AG, the fluctuation is greater than when the specific image TG is caught by the face image AG and fails to move to the right sub-display screen 64R. Or it suggests that the expectation of a big hit after the next fluctuation is high.

After the specific image TG moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, as shown in FIG. 93(I), the specific image TG moves leftward and moves from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a. When the specific image TG moves to the main display screen 7a, a ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 93(I). Note that when the specific image TG does not move from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a, the ready-to-win effect is not executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(J), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a jackpot mode. In addition, the decorative pattern may be fixed and stopped in the mode of losing.

[Specific Image Movement Effect D]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the specific image movement effect D. FIG. FIGS. 94A to 94J show contents displayed on a portion of the main display screen 7a and a portion of the right sub-display screen 64R. Since the specific image movement effect D is almost the same as the specific image movement effect C of FIG. 93, only different points will be described below. 94(A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. 93(A) to (D) of the specific image movement effect C. When the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 94(E), an effect is performed in which the hold icon 9C, which is changed to hold, moves upward. That is, the hold icon 9C moves upward to become the specific image TG, and the hold icon 9C is not displayed at the position where the hold icon 9C was. The hold icon 9C and the specific image TG may be exactly the same image, or may have different sizes and modes.

After the hold icon 9C moves upward and becomes the specific image TG, FIGS. After the specific image TG moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, the specific image TG moves leftward as shown in FIG. 94(I) and moves from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a. When the specific image TG moves to the main display screen 7a, the game state is switched from the normal state to the high probability state as shown in FIG. 94(I). Note that when the specific image TG does not move from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a, the state is not switched to the high accuracy state. After that, as shown in FIG. 94(J), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a losing mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific image movement rendering will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, a first effect in which the specific image TG is displayed on the main display screen 7a during the variable effect, and after the first effect, the specific image TG moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, and during the next variation effect, a third effect moves the specific image TG from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a. can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, in the second effect, the specific image TG disappears from the right sub-display screen 64R once after moving to the right sub-display screen 64R, and is displayed again on the right sub-display. It is displayed on the screen 64R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, in the second effect, the specific image TG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is displayed rather than the specific image TG displayed on the main display screen 7a. TG has a larger specific target represented by the specific image TG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the special ready-to-win effect is executed after the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the first effect in which the specific image representing the smiley face is displayed as the pending icon 9A, and the specific image representing the smiling face is displayed as the pending icon 9A. After moving to the holding position, a second effect of moving from the holding position to the right sub-display screen 64R can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the specific image movement effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the specific image movement effects A to D in FIGS. 91 to 94, the sub-display screen on which the specific image TG moves from the main display screen 7a is not limited to the right sub-display screen 64R. The destination sub-display screen may be the left sub-display screen 64L or the upper sub-display screen 64U.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 91(I) of the specific image moving effect A, when the specific image TG moves to the main display screen 7a, the special ready-to-win effect is executed. However, it is configured to increase the possibility that the special ready-to-win effect will be executed, and the special ready-to-win effect may not necessarily be executed. In addition, in FIG. 91(I), when the specific image TG moves to the main display screen 7a, it may be a sudden win or a big hit.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image moving effect A of FIG. 91, the degree of expectation for the big win may or may not be changed depending on whether or not the specific image TG appears on the main display screen 7a. Further, depending on whether or not the specific image TG moves from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, the degree of expectation for the big win may or may not be changed. Also, depending on whether or not the specific image TG reappears on the right sub-display screen 64R, the degree of expectation for the big win may or may not be changed. Also, depending on whether or not the specific image TG returns from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a, the degree of expectation for the big win may or may not be changed.

[Modification 3]
The specific image movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 91 to 94 may be combined as appropriate. for example,. 91(B) to (J) of the specific image movement effect A may be executed after the specific image movement effect D of FIGS. 94(A) to (D). At this time, the pending icon 9C may or may not be displayed.

[Modification 4]
The specific image movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 91 to 94 may not include some of the effects described above, or may include other effects. For example, in FIG. 91(B) of the specific image movement effect A, the hold icon 9C may not be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B5-1]
a first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target;
a first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the first display means during the variable effect;
a second effect in which the specific image moves to the second display means after the first effect;
and a third effect in which the specific image moves from the second display means to the first display means during a variable effect subsequent to the variable effect.
◇[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
In the second effect, the specific image disappears from the second display means once after being moved to the second display means, and is displayed again on the second display means. .
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2,
In the second effect, the specific image displayed by the second display means is more sensitive to the specific object represented by the specific image than the specific image displayed by the first display means. A game machine characterized by being large.
◇[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
A gaming machine characterized in that a special ready-to-win effect is executed after the third effect.
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
a first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target;
a first effect in which the specific image is displayed as a pending icon;
and a second effect of moving the specific image from the holding position to the second display means after the specific image moves to the holding position.

The suspension change suggestion effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. FIG. This pending change suggestive effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pending change suggesting effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Pending Change Suggestion Effect A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect A. FIG. In the pending change suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with mutually different number patterns, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a pattern including the first pending change suggesting image CRA. In the example of FIG. 95(B), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a "6" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a "7" symbol. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns. The first pending change suggesting image CRA is an image that suggests the pending change of the pending icon and represents the ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), a first pending change suggestion image display effect is performed. In this first pending change suggesting image display effect, the first pending change suggesting image CRA pops out from the middle decorative pattern 8C, and a predetermined action is performed so that the pending change of the pending icon 9C is performed. As the predetermined action, an action such as cutting the pending icon 9C or sending an aura just in case to the pending icon 9C is performed. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a second pending change suggestion image display effect is performed. In this second suspension change suggesting image display effect, the first suspension change suggesting image CRA disappears and the second suspension change suggesting image CRB is displayed. The second pending change suggestion image CRB is an image that suggests a pending change of the pending icon and represents an enemy character. In this second pending change suggesting image display effect, the second pending change suggesting image CRB performs a predetermined action such that the pending change of the pending icon 9C is performed. As the predetermined action, an action such as cutting the pending icon 9C or an action such as sending an aura just in case to the pending icon 9C is performed. Also, in the second pending change suggestive image display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), a pending change effect is performed. In this pending change effect, the pending change of the pending icon 9C is caused by a predetermined action of the first pending change suggesting image CRA and the second pending change suggesting image CRB. Specifically, the pending icon 9C changes from white to red and changes to a predetermined pattern (for example, a panda pattern, a cheetah pattern, a tiger pattern, a zebra pattern, and a leopard pattern).

[Pending Change Suggestion Effect B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining pending change suggestion effect B. FIG. In the pending change suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a decorative pattern change effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with mutually different number patterns, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a pattern including the first pending change suggesting image CRA. In the example of FIG. 96(B), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a "6" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a "7" symbol. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns. The first pending change suggesting image CRA is an image that suggests the pending change of the pending icon and represents the ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), a first pending change suggestion image display effect is performed. In this first pending change suggesting image display effect, the first pending change suggesting image CRA jumps out of the middle decorative pattern 8C, moves to the rear side (backward) of the pending icon 9C, and the pending change of the pending icon 9C is performed. Take the prescribed action. As the predetermined action, an action such as cutting the pending icon 9C or sending an aura just in case to the pending icon 9C is performed. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a second pending change suggestion image display effect is performed. In this second withholding change suggesting image display effect, the first withholding change suggesting image CRA disappears, and the second withholding change suggesting image CRB is displayed in front of the suspending icon 9C. The second pending change suggestion image CRB is an image that suggests a pending change of the pending icon and represents an enemy character. In this second pending change suggesting image display effect, the second pending change suggesting image CRB performs a predetermined action such that the pending change of the pending icon 9C is performed. As the predetermined action, an action such as cutting the pending icon 9C or sending an aura just in case to the pending icon 9C is performed. Also, in the second pending change suggestive image display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), a pending change effect is performed. In this pending change effect, the pending change of the pending icon 9C is caused by a predetermined action of the first pending change suggesting image CRA and the second pending change suggesting image CRB. Specifically, the pending icon 9C changes from white to red and changes to a predetermined pattern (for example, a panda pattern, a cheetah pattern, a tiger pattern, a zebra pattern, and a leopard pattern).

[Pending Change Suggestion Effect C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect C. FIG. In the pending change suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with mutually different number patterns, and the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a design including the first pending change suggesting image X4A. In the example of FIG. 97(B), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a "6" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a "7" symbol. The first pending change suggesting image X4A is a character image suggesting a pending change of the pending icon and showing a person in despair. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), a first pending change suggestion image display effect is performed. In this first pending change suggesting image display effect, the first pending change suggesting image CRA jumps out of the middle decorative pattern 8C, moves to the rear side (backward) of the pending icon 9C, and the pending change of the pending icon 9C is performed. Take the prescribed action. As the predetermined action, an action such as shaking the pending icon 9C or an action such as sending an aura just in case to the pending icon 9C is performed. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), a second pending change suggestion image display effect is performed. In this second pending change suggesting image display effect, the second pending change suggesting image X4B is displayed on the near side (forward) of the pending icon 9C. The second pending change suggesting image X4B is an image that suggests a pending change of the pending icon and is a change of the first pending change suggesting image X4A. In other words, the second pending change suggesting image X4B is the same character as the first pending change suggesting image X4A, and is a character image showing a person smiling with a different facial expression. In this second pending change suggesting image display effect, the second pending change suggesting image X4B performs a predetermined action such that the pending change of the pending icon 9C is performed. As the predetermined action, an action such as shaking the pending icon 9C or an action such as sending an aura just in case to the pending icon 9C is performed. Also, in the second pending change suggestive image display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), a hold change effect is performed. In this pending change effect, the pending change of the pending icon 9C is caused by a predetermined action of the first pending change suggesting image CRA and the second pending change suggesting image CRB. Specifically, the pending icon 9C changes from white to red and changes to a predetermined pattern (for example, a panda pattern, a cheetah pattern, a tiger pattern, a zebra pattern, and a leopard pattern).

[Pending Change Suggestion Effect D]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect D. FIG. In the pending change suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a decorative symbol change effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with mutually different number patterns, and the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a design including the first pending change suggesting image X4A. In the example of FIG. 98(B), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a "6" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a "7" symbol. The first pending change suggesting image X4A is a character image suggesting a pending change of the pending icon and showing a person in despair. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), a first pending change suggestion image display effect is performed. In this first pending change suggesting image display effect, the first pending change suggesting image CRA jumps out of the middle decorative pattern 8C and moves to the rear side (rearward) of the pending icon 9C so that the pending change is made to the pending icon 9C. Take the prescribed action. As the predetermined action, an action such as shaking the pending icon 9C or an action such as sending an aura just in case to the pending icon 9C is performed. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a second pending change suggestion image display effect is performed. In this second pending change suggesting image display effect, the second pending change suggesting image X4B is displayed on the near side (forward) of the pending icon 9C. The second pending change suggesting image X4B is an image that suggests a pending change of the pending icon and is a change of the first pending change suggesting image X4A. That is, the second pending change suggesting image X4B is the same character as the first pending change suggesting image X4A, and is a character image showing a person smiling with a different facial expression. In this second pending change suggesting image display effect, the second pending change suggesting image X4B performs a predetermined action such that the pending change of the pending icon 9C is performed. As the predetermined action, an action such as shaking the pending icon 9C or an action such as sending an aura just in case to the pending icon 9C is performed. Also, in the second pending change suggestive image display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change. The pending icons 9A and 9C remain white pending icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a pending change effect is performed. In this pending change effect, the pending change of the pending icon 9C is caused by a predetermined action of the first pending change suggesting image CRA and the second pending change suggesting image CRB. Specifically, the pending icon 9C changes from white to red and changes to a predetermined pattern (for example, a panda pattern, a cheetah pattern, a tiger pattern, a zebra pattern, and a leopard pattern).

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo continuous effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with mutually different number patterns, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a pattern including the first pending change suggesting image X4A. This first pending change suggesting image X4A suggests that a pseudo continuous effect will be performed. Further, the middle decorative symbol 8C including the first pending change suggesting image X4A functions as a pseudo-continuous design because it is a symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous effect when stopped and displayed. In this pseudo continuous effect, in the example of FIG. 98(F), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at "6" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at "7" symbol.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned suspension change suggestion productions A and B, in the second suspension change suggestion image display presentation, the second suspension change suggestion image CRB is a character transformed from the first suspension change suggestion image CRA in the first suspension change suggestion image display presentation. There may be.
In the pending change suggesting effects B, C, and D, the first pending change suggesting images CRA and X4A are displayed behind the pending icon 9C, and at least a portion thereof is invisible due to the pending icon 9C.
In the pending change suggesting effects B, C, and D, the second pending change suggesting images CRB and X4B are displayed in front of the pending icon 9C, and hide at least part of the pending icon 9C.
In the above-mentioned suspension change suggestion effects A to D, when the first suspension change suggestion image CRA, X4A is displayed, or when the second suspension change suggestion image CRB, X4B is displayed, the movable role (for example, the first movable role 14 ) may be moved to display a predetermined effect image from the movable accessory toward the reserved icon.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending change suggestion effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the pending change suggesting effect, the effect of displaying the pending icon, the effect of displaying the first pending change suggesting images CRA and X4A suggesting the pending change of the pending icon, and the pending change suggesting effect of the pending icon. An effect of displaying second pending change suggesting images CRB, X4B suggesting a change is performed. According to this configuration, since two pending change suggesting images are displayed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation for the pending change in which the pending icon changes. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the pending change suggesting effect, after the effect of displaying the pending icon, the effect of displaying the first pending change suggesting images CRA and X4A suggesting the pending change of the pending icon is performed. , to display the second suspension change suggesting images CRB, X4B suggesting the suspension change of the suspension icon. According to this configuration, after the display of the pending icon, the two pending change suggesting images are displayed in order, so that the player can gradually have expectations for the pending change in which the pending icon changes. As a result, it is possible to gradually raise the expectation for the hold change, which in turn raises the expectation for the big win and enhances the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the pending change suggesting effect, after the effect of displaying the pending icon, the effect of displaying the first pending change suggesting images CRA and X4A is performed, and then the second pending change suggesting image CRB. , X4B are displayed, and then a suspension change rendering is performed to change the state of the suspension icon. According to this configuration, after the display of the pending icon, the two pending change suggesting images are displayed in order, so that the player can gradually have expectations for the pending change in which the pending icon changes. As a result, it is possible to gradually raise the expectation for the hold change, which in turn raises the expectation for the big win and enhances the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the suspension change suggestion effect, the display of the second suspension change suggestion images CRB, X4B is performed after the display of the first suspension change suggestion images CRA, X4A disappears. According to this configuration, the display of the second suspension change suggesting images CRB, X4B is performed after the display of the first suspension change suggesting images CRA, X4A disappears. is first impressed, and then the second hold change suggesting images CRB, X4B can be impressed, whereby the expectation for the hold change can be gradually increased, and the expectation for the big win can be increased, and the game is played. can improve the interest of

[Effect 5]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the suspension change suggestion effect, the second suspension change suggestion image X4B is formed by changing the first suspension change suggestion image X4A. According to this configuration, since the second suspension change suggesting image X4B is formed by changing the first suspension change suggesting image X4A, the player can feel as if the suspending change suggesting image has been upgraded. As a result, it is possible to further heighten the expectation for the hold change, further heighten the expectation for the big win, and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the hold change suggesting effect, the second hold change suggesting image X4B suggests not only the hold change but also the pseudo-continuous effect. According to this configuration, the second hold change suggesting image X4B suggests that not only the hold change but also the pseudo continuous effect will be performed, so that the appearance of the second hold change suggesting image X4B greatly enhances the expectation for the big win. can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a pending icon,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a first pending change suggesting image suggesting a pending change of the pending icon,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a second pending change suggesting image that is an image suggesting a pending change of the pending icon and is different from the first pending change suggesting image,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X4-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X4-2,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a hold change effect for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X4-3,
In the combination effect, the display of the second pending change suggesting image in the third display effect is performed after the display of the first pending change suggesting image in the second display effect disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X4-4,
In the combination effect, the second pending change suggesting image in the third display effect is formed by changing the first pending change suggesting image in the second display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X4-5,
In the combination effect, the second pending change suggesting image in the third display effect suggests that a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The timer countdown effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102. FIG. This timer countdown effect can be executed in relation to the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"). For example, at the start of variable display of special symbols, at the start of variable performance of decorative symbols, during reach performance (super reach performance), etc., it can be executed.

[Timer countdown effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the timer countdown effect A. FIG.
In the timer countdown effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 99(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a timer battle effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this timer battle effect, an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. A first timer image TM1 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. More specifically, the first timer image TM1 is displayed with a three-digit number, and is displayed in a countdown manner in which 1 is subtracted each time one second elapses. In the timer battle effect shown in FIG. 99B, the first timer image TM1 shows 50 seconds (“050”) as the timer initial value. Also, in this timer battle effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, but they may be displayed. A player's expectation for a big win is increased by displaying a timer image and performing a battle effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 is decremented by 1 as time elapses and the remaining time reaches "004" indicating 4 seconds. When the timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed, the second timer image TM2 is switched to the battle image and displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. Like the first timer image TM1, the second timer image TM2 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. More specifically, the second timer image TM2 is displayed in a one-digit number larger than the first timer image TM1, and is displayed in a countdown manner in which 1 is subtracted each time one second elapses. there is In the timer countdown (4 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 99(C), the second timer image TM2 shows 4 seconds ("4"). That is, in this timer countdown (4 seconds) effect, when the first timer image TM1 displayed in a small size at the upper right of the main display screen 7a becomes "004" indicating the remaining time of 4 seconds, it is displayed almost simultaneously ( At the same time or immediately before/after the display), in the center of the main display screen 7a, the second timer image TM2 displayed larger than the first timer image TM1 is displayed with "4" indicating the remaining time of 4 seconds. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is an effect that is executed when 1 second elapses after the timer countdown (4 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 99(C) is executed. That is, in this timer countdown (3 seconds) effect, when 1 second has passed since "004" was displayed in the first timer image TM1, the first timer image TM1 is switched to "003" indicating the remaining time of 3 seconds. The second timer image TM2 is switched to "3" indicating the remaining time of 3 seconds. That is, "004" of the first timer image TM1 and "4" of the second timer image TM2 displayed in FIG. ”. That is, the timer value of the first timer image TM1 and the timer value of the second timer image TM2 are switched synchronously. Thereby, the player can surely grasp the remaining time until the timer expires.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), a timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is an effect that is executed when one second elapses after the timer countdown (3 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 99(D) is executed. The timer countdown (2 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 99(E) is performed in the same manner as the timer countdown (3 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 99(D). That is, in this timer countdown (2 seconds) effect, when 1 second has passed since "003" was displayed in the first timer image TM1, the first timer image TM1 is switched to "002" indicating the remaining time of 2 seconds. The second timer image TM2 switches to "2" indicating the remaining time of 2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(F), a timer countdown (1 second) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer countdown (1 second) effect is an effect that is executed when 1 second has elapsed after the timer countdown (2 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 99(E) is executed. The timer countdown (1 second) effect shown in FIG. 99(F) is performed in the same manner as the timer countdown (3 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 99(D). That is, in this timer countdown (1 second) effect, when 1 second has passed since "002" was displayed in the first timer image TM1, the first timer image TM1 is switched to "001" indicating the remaining time of 1 second. The second timer image TM2 switches to "1" indicating the remaining time of 1 second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), a timer countdown (0 second) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer countdown (0 second) effect is an effect that is executed when one second elapses after the timer countdown (1 second) effect shown in FIG. 99(F) is executed. The timer countdown (0 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 99(G) is performed in the same manner as the timer countdown (3 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 99(D). That is, in this timer countdown (0 seconds) effect, when 1 second has passed since "001" was displayed in the first timer image TM1, the first timer image TM1 is switched to "000" indicating that the remaining time is 0 seconds. The second timer image TM2 is switched to "0" indicating remaining time 0 second. By performing this timer countdown (0 second) effect, the timer countdown effect from the timer remaining time of 4 seconds using both the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, the displays (“000” and “0”) of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 are erased, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed. That is, in this ready-to-win production, the results of the decorative pattern variation production shown in FIG. 99(A) are the timer battle production (FIG. 99(B)), )), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating (scrolling downward). In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement.

[Timer countdown effect B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the timer countdown effect B. FIG.
In the timer countdown effect B, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped.

Next, on the main display screen 7a, although not shown, a timer battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99(B). In this timer battle effect, an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. A first timer image TM1 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. More specifically, the first timer image TM1 is displayed with a three-digit number, and is displayed in a countdown manner in which 1 is subtracted each time one second elapses. In the timer battle effect, the first timer image TM1 shows 50 seconds (“050”) as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 is decremented by 1 as time elapses and the remaining time reaches "004" indicating 4 seconds. When the first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed, the battle image displayed on the main display screen 7a is erased. That is, in this first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect, only the first timer image TM1 displays "004" indicating the remaining time of 4 seconds at the upper right of the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a second timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 becomes "004". When the second timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 indicating "004" is erased, and almost simultaneously with the erasure (simultaneously or immediately before/after erasure), the main display screen is displayed. In the center of 7a, the second timer image TM2 is displayed with "3". Therefore, the period during which the first timer image TM1 displays "004" is extremely short. Like the first timer image TM1, the second timer image TM2 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. More specifically, the second timer image TM2 is displayed in a one-digit number larger than the first timer image TM1, and is displayed in a countdown manner in which 1 is subtracted each time one second elapses. there is

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is an effect that is executed one second after the first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 100(A) is executed. When the first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a with "003" indicating the remaining time of 3 seconds. Immediately before/after), the displayed second timer image TM2 (“3”) is erased. That is, in this first timer countdown (three seconds) effect, when one second elapses after "004" is displayed in the first timer image TM1, "003" is displayed in the first timer image TM1 and the second timer is displayed. Image TM2 (“3”) is erased. Therefore, "3" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed for about one second after "004" is displayed on the first timer image TM1 until "003" is displayed. In other words, "3" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed until the timer's remaining time reaches 4 seconds to 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a second timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 becomes "003". When the second timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 indicating "003" is erased, and almost at the same time (simultaneously or immediately before/after erasing), the main display screen is displayed. In the center of 7a, the second timer image TM2 is displayed with "2". Therefore, the period during which the first timer image TM1 displays "003" is extremely short.

Next, although illustration is omitted, a first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a in the same manner as in FIG. 100(C). This first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is an effect that is executed one second after the first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 100(C) is executed. When the first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a with "002" indicating the remaining time of 2 seconds, and almost simultaneously with the display (simultaneously or at the same time). Immediately before/after), the displayed second timer image TM2 (“2”) is erased. That is, in this first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect, when 1 second has elapsed after "003" is displayed in the first timer image TM1, "002" is displayed in the first timer image TM1 and the second timer is displayed. Image TM2 (“2”) is erased. Therefore, "2" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed for about one second after "003" is displayed on the first timer image TM1 until "002" is displayed. In other words, "2" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed until the remaining time of the timer reaches 3 seconds to 2 seconds.

Next, although illustration is omitted, a second timer countdown (1 second) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a in the same manner as in FIG. 100(D). This second timer countdown (1 second) effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 becomes "002". When the second timer countdown (1 second) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 indicating "002" is erased, and almost simultaneously with the erasure (simultaneously or immediately before/after erasure), the main display screen is displayed. In the center of 7a, the second timer image TM2 is displayed with "1". Therefore, the period during which the first timer image TM1 displays "002" is extremely short.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a first timer countdown (1 second) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first timer countdown (1 second) effect is an effect that is executed when 1 second has elapsed after the first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed. When the first timer countdown (1 second) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a with "001" indicating the remaining time of 1 second, and almost simultaneously with the display (simultaneously or at the same time). Immediately before/after), the displayed second timer image TM2 (“1”) is erased. That is, in this first timer countdown (1 second) effect, when 1 second has elapsed after "002" is displayed in the first timer image TM1, "001" is displayed in the first timer image TM1 and the second timer is displayed. Image TM2 (“1”) is erased. Therefore, "1" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed for about one second from when "002" is displayed to when "001" is displayed in the first timer image TM1. In other words, "1" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed until the remaining time of the timer reaches from 2 seconds to 1 second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a second timer countdown (0 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (0 seconds) effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 becomes "001". When the second timer countdown (0 seconds) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 indicating "001" is erased, and almost simultaneously with the erasure (simultaneously or immediately before/after erasure), the main display screen is displayed. In the center of 7a, the second timer image TM2 is displayed with "0". Therefore, the period during which the first timer image TM1 displays "001" is extremely short.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a first timer countdown (0 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first timer countdown (0 second) effect is an effect that is executed when one second has passed after the first timer countdown (1 second) effect is executed. When the first timer countdown (0 seconds) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a with "000" indicating that the remaining time is 0 seconds, and almost simultaneously with the display (simultaneously or at the same time). Immediately before/after), the displayed second timer image TM2 (“0”) is erased. That is, in this first timer countdown (0 seconds) effect, when one second has elapsed after "001" is displayed in the first timer image TM1, "000" is displayed in the first timer image TM1 and the second timer is displayed. Image TM2 (“0”) is erased. Therefore, "0" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed for about one second from when "001" is displayed to when "000" is displayed in the first timer image TM1. In other words, "0" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed while the remaining time of the timer is from 1 second to 0 second. By performing this first timer countdown (0 second) effect, the timer countdown effect from the timer remaining time of 4 seconds using both the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, the display ("000") of the first timer image TM1 is erased, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed. In other words, in this ready-to-win effect, the variation result of the decorative pattern is changed to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R through the timer battle effect and the timer countdown effect (FIGS. 100(A) to 100(G)). It stops at the ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and shows that the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating (scrolling downward). In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement.

[Timer countdown effect C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the timer countdown effect C. FIG.
In the timer countdown effect C, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped.

Next, on the main display screen 7a, although not shown, a timer battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99(B). In this timer battle effect, an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. A first timer image TM1 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. More specifically, the first timer image TM1 is displayed with a three-digit number, and is displayed in a countdown manner in which 1 is subtracted each time one second elapses. In the timer battle effect, the first timer image TM1 shows 50 seconds (“050”) as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 is decremented by 1 as time elapses and the remaining time reaches "004" indicating 4 seconds. When the first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed, the battle image displayed on the main display screen 7a is erased. That is, in this first timer countdown (4 seconds) rendering, only the first timer image TM1 displays "004" indicating the remaining time of 4 seconds in the upper right corner of the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a second timer countdown (3 seconds) enlargement effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (3 seconds) expansion effect is a effect that is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 becomes "004". When the second timer countdown (3 seconds) enlargement effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 indicating "004" is erased, and almost at the same time (simultaneously or immediately before/after erasing), the main display is displayed. In the center of the screen 7a, the second timer image TM2 is displayed with "3" in full screen. Therefore, the period during which the first timer image TM1 displays "004" is extremely short. Like the first timer image TM1, the second timer image TM2 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. More specifically, the second timer image TM2 is displayed in a one-digit number larger than the first timer image TM1, and is displayed in a countdown manner in which 1 is subtracted each time one second elapses. there is

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a second timer countdown (3 seconds) reduction effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this second timer countdown (3 seconds) reduction effect, "3" of the second timer image TM2 enlarged and displayed in the second timer countdown (3 seconds) enlargement effect shown in FIG. Perform a production that shrinks in proportion to the progress.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is an effect that is executed one second after the first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 101(A) is executed. When the first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a with "003" indicating the remaining time of 3 seconds. Immediately before/after), the second timer image TM2 (“3”) displayed in reduced size is erased. That is, in this first timer countdown (three seconds) effect, when one second elapses after "004" is displayed in the first timer image TM1, "003" is displayed in the first timer image TM1 and the second timer is displayed. Image TM2 (“3”) is erased. Note that "3" of the second timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 101(C) described above indicates the display mode immediately before one second has passed since "004" was displayed on the first timer image TM1. In this display mode, "3" in the second timer image TM2 is displayed smaller than the first timer image TM1.
Thus, "3" in the second timer image TM2 is proportional to the time elapsed from when "004" is displayed in the first timer image TM1 to when "003" is displayed in the first timer image TM1. It gradually shrinks from the enlarged display mode shown in (B), and finally shrinks to the display mode shown in FIG. 101(C). Then, the second timer image TM2 (“3”) reduced to the display mode shown in FIG. They are erased almost simultaneously (simultaneously or immediately before/after display). Therefore, "3" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed while being reduced for about one second from when "004" is displayed to when "003" is displayed in the first timer image TM1. In other words, "3" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed while being enlarged and reduced in proportion to the passage of time until the remaining time of the timer reaches 4 seconds to 3 seconds. That is, the second timer image TM2 changes its size to suggest an elapsed time of less than 1 second (in proportion to the lapse of 1 second, the size shown in FIG. 101(B) changes to By changing to the indicated size, the second timer image TM2 can indicate the timer's remaining time T (4 seconds>T>3 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), a second timer countdown (2 seconds) enlargement effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (2 seconds) expansion effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 becomes "003". When the second timer countdown (2 seconds) enlargement effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 indicating "003" is erased, and almost at the same time (simultaneously or immediately before/after erasing), the main display is displayed. In the center of the screen 7a, the second timer image TM2 is displayed with "2" in full screen. Therefore, the period during which the first timer image TM1 displays "003" is extremely short.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), a second timer countdown (2 seconds) reduction effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this second timer countdown (2 seconds) reduction effect, "2" of the second timer image TM2 enlarged and displayed in the second timer countdown (2 seconds) enlargement effect shown in FIG. Perform a production that shrinks in proportion to the progress.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), a first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is an effect that is executed one second after the first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 101(D) is executed. When the first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a with "002" indicating the remaining time of 2 seconds, and almost simultaneously with the display (simultaneously or at the same time). Immediately before/after), the second timer image TM2 (“2”) displayed in reduced size is erased. In other words, in this first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect, when 1 second has elapsed after "003" is displayed in the first timer image TM1, "002" is displayed in the first timer image TM1 and the second timer is displayed. Image TM2 (“2”) is erased. Note that "2" of the second timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 101(F) described above indicates the display mode immediately before one second has passed since "003" was displayed on the first timer image TM1. In this display mode, "2" of the second timer image TM2 is displayed smaller than the first timer image TM1.
Therefore, "2" of the second timer image TM2 is proportional to the elapsed time of about one second from when "003" is displayed to when "002" is displayed on the first timer image TM1, as shown in FIG. It gradually shrinks from the enlarged display mode shown in (E), and finally shrinks to the display mode shown in FIG. 101(F). Then, the second timer image TM2 (“2”) reduced to the display mode shown in FIG. They are erased almost simultaneously (simultaneously or immediately before/after display). Therefore, "2" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed while shrinking for about one second from when "003" is displayed to when "002" is displayed in the first timer image TM1. In other words, "2" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed from enlarged display to reduced display in proportion to the passage of time until the remaining time of the timer reaches from 3 seconds to 2 seconds. That is, the second timer image TM2 changes its size to suggest an elapsed time of less than 1 second (in proportion to the elapsed time of 1 second, the size shown in FIG. 101(E) changes to FIG. 101(F). By changing to the indicated size, the second timer image TM2 can indicate the timer's remaining time T (3 seconds>T>2 seconds).

Next, although not shown, a second timer countdown (1 second) enlargement effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (1 second) enlargement effect is the same as that shown in FIGS. Next, although illustration is omitted, a second timer countdown (1 second) reduction effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (1 second) reduction effect is the same as in FIGS. Next, although illustration is omitted, a first timer countdown (1 second) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. Since this first timer countdown (1 second) effect is the same as in FIGS. Next, although not shown, a second timer countdown (0 second) enlargement effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. Since this second timer countdown (0 second) enlargement effect is the same as in FIGS. Next, although not shown, a second timer countdown (0 seconds) reduction effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (0 seconds) reduction effect is the same as in FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(H), a first timer countdown (0 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. Since this first timer countdown (0 seconds) effect is the same as in FIGS. Then, by performing the first timer countdown (0 seconds) effect, the timer countdown effect from the timer remaining time of 4 seconds using both the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 is completed. .

Next, although illustration is omitted, a ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a in the same manner as in FIG. 100(H) described above. In this ready-to-win effect, the display ("000") of the first timer image TM1 is erased, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. In other words, in this ready-to-win effect, the variation result of the decorative pattern is changed to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R through the timer battle effect and the timer countdown effect (FIGS. 101(A) to 101(H)). It stops at the ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and shows that the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating (scrolling downward).

[Timer countdown effect D]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the timer countdown effect D. FIG.
In the timer countdown effect D, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped.

Next, on the main display screen 7a, although not shown, a timer battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99(B). In this timer battle effect, an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. A first timer image TM1 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. More specifically, the first timer image TM1 is displayed with a three-digit number, and is displayed in a countdown manner in which 1 is subtracted each time one second elapses. In the timer battle effect, the first timer image TM1 shows 50 seconds (“050”) as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(A), a first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 is decremented by 1 as time elapses and the remaining time reaches "004" indicating 4 seconds. When the first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect is executed, the battle image displayed on the main display screen 7a is erased. That is, in this first timer countdown (4 seconds) rendering, only the first timer image TM1 displays "004" indicating the remaining time of 4 seconds in the upper right corner of the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a second timer countdown (3 seconds) enlarged rotation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (3 seconds) enlarged rotation effect is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 becomes "004". When the second timer countdown (3 seconds) enlargement rotation effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 indicating "004" is erased, and almost simultaneously with the erasure (simultaneously or immediately before/after erasure), the main timer image TM1 is displayed. At the center of the display screen 7a, the second timer image TM2 fills the entire screen, and is rotated slightly clockwise (approximately 5 to 10 degrees) with "3" colored in blue, which is the normal color (indicated by outline in the figure). ) is displayed. Therefore, the period during which the first timer image TM1 displays "004" is extremely short. Like the first timer image TM1, the second timer image TM2 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. More specifically, the second timer image TM2 is displayed in a one-digit number larger than the first timer image TM1, and is displayed in a countdown manner in which 1 is subtracted each time one second elapses. there is

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a second timer countdown (3 seconds) reduction rotation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this second timer countdown (3 seconds) reduced rotation effect, "3" of the second timer image TM2 enlarged and displayed in the second timer countdown (3 seconds) enlarged rotation effect shown in FIG. , an effect of shrinking while rotating clockwise in proportion to the passage of time (in FIG. 102(C), about 0.5 seconds have passed since the first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect was executed, and the "3" of the two-timer image TM2 indicates a display mode rotated by about 30 degrees and reduced to about half).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a second timer countdown (3 seconds) elimination effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (3 seconds) erasing effect is performed after the "3" of the second timer image TM2 shown in FIG. , 1 second after the first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect shown in FIG. This erasure may be staged, for example, by fading out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is an effect that is executed one second after the first timer countdown (4 seconds) effect shown in FIG. 102(A) is executed. In other words, in the second timer countdown (3 seconds) erasing effect shown in FIG. 102(D), this effect is executed when "3" of the second timer image TM2 is erased.
When the first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 is displayed with "003" indicating the remaining time of 3 seconds on the main display screen 7a. That is, in this first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect, "003" is displayed in the first timer image TM1 one second after "004" is displayed in the first timer image TM1.
Therefore, "3" of the second timer image TM2 is proportional to the elapsed time of about 1 second from when "004" is displayed to when "003" is displayed in the first timer image TM1, as shown in FIG. It gradually rotates clockwise from the enlarged rotated display mode shown in B) and shrinks, and finally disappears in the second timer countdown (3 seconds) erasing effect shown in FIG. 102(D). . Therefore, "3" of the second timer image TM2 is displayed while continuously rotating and shrinking for about one second from when "004" is displayed to when "003" is displayed on the first timer image TM1. . In other words, "3" of the second timer image TM2 is continuously displayed while being rotated and reduced in proportion to the passage of time until the remaining time of the timer reaches 4 seconds to 3 seconds. . That is, the second timer image TM2 changes its size and display angle to suggest an elapsed time of less than 1 second (for example, the size shown in FIG. By changing to the size and display angle shown in Fig. 102(C) , the second timer image TM2 indicates that the timer remaining time T = 3.5 seconds. T (4 sec>T>3 sec) is suggested).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), on the main display screen 7a, a second timer countdown (2 seconds) enlarged rotation effect is executed. This second timer countdown (2 seconds) enlarged rotation effect is an effect that is executed when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 reaches "003". When the second timer countdown (2 seconds) enlarged rotation effect is executed, the first timer image TM1 indicating "003" is erased, and almost simultaneously with the erasure (simultaneously or immediately before/after erasure), the main timer image TM1 is displayed. At the center of the display screen 7a, the second timer image TM2 fills the screen, and is slightly rotated clockwise (approximately 5 to 10 degrees) with "2" colored in highly anticipated red (indicated by hatching lines in the drawing). ) is displayed. Therefore, the period during which the first timer image TM1 displays "003" is extremely short.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), a second timer countdown (2 seconds) reduction rotation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this second timer countdown (2 seconds) reduced rotation effect, "2" of the second timer image TM2 enlarged and displayed in the second timer countdown (2 seconds) enlarged rotation effect shown in FIG. , an effect of shrinking while rotating clockwise in proportion to the passage of time (in FIG. 102 (G), about 0.5 seconds have passed since the first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect was executed, and the "2" of the 2-timer image TM2 indicates a display mode rotated by about 30 degrees and reduced to about half).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), a second timer countdown (2 seconds) elimination effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (2 seconds) erasing effect is performed after the "2" of the second timer image TM2 shown in FIG. , 1 second after the first timer countdown (3 seconds) effect shown in FIG.

Next, although not shown, a first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. Since this first timer countdown (2 seconds) effect is the same as in FIG. Next, although illustration is omitted, a second timer countdown (1 second) enlarged rotation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (1 second) enlarged rotation presentation is the same as in FIG. Next, although illustration is omitted, a second timer countdown (1 second) elimination effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (1 second) erasing effect is similar to that shown in FIG. Next, although illustration is omitted, a first timer countdown (1 second) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. Since this first timer countdown (1 second) effect is the same as that of FIG. Next, although illustration is omitted, a second timer countdown (0 second) enlarged rotation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (0 second) enlarged rotation presentation is the same as in FIG. Next, although illustration is omitted, a second timer countdown (0 second) erasing effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second timer countdown (0 seconds) erasing effect is the same as in FIG. Next, although illustration is omitted, a first timer countdown (0 second) effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. Since this first timer countdown (0 seconds) effect is the same as in FIG. Then, by performing the first timer countdown (0 seconds) effect, the timer countdown effect from the timer remaining time of 4 seconds using both the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 is completed. .

Next, although illustration is omitted, a ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a in the same manner as in FIG. 100(H) described above. In this ready-to-win effect, the display ("000") of the first timer image TM1 is erased, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed. That is, in this ready-to-win production, the variation result of the decorative pattern is changed through the timer battle production and the timer countdown production (illustrated in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(H)), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern. 8R stops at the ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and the decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is fluctuating (scrolling downward).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer countdown effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 102, when the timer value of the first timer image reaches a specific value (for example, 4 seconds), both the first timer image and the second timer image are used. It is configured to execute an effect of displaying the count from the specific value in a countdown manner. According to this configuration, the player can confirm the remaining time of the timer when the timer expires from both the first timer image and the second timer image, and therefore forget the remaining time of the timer. is suppressed. That is, the player can very easily grasp the remaining time of the timer. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 102, the first timer image is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen as a three-digit number, and the second timer image is displayed in the center of the display screen. A one-digit number is displayed larger than the first timer image. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining time of the timer when the timer expires in different display modes. That is, the remaining time of the timer can be notified by an effect that strongly impresses the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the first timer image displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen is erased when the timer value reaches a specific value (for example, 4 seconds), and then is displayed for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) each time a predetermined value is subtracted from the specific value (for example, each time one second elapses). The second timer image to be displayed is displayed at the same time as the first timer image is erased or immediately before/after the erasing of the first timer image, and then erased at the same time as the first timer image is displayed or immediately before/after the display of the first timer image. . That is, the first timer image displayed in a small size in the upper right corner of the display screen is displayed for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the second timer image displayed in the center of the display screen larger than the first timer image is , is displayed for a sufficiently longer time (for example, about 1 second) than the first timer image. According to this configuration, the second timer image, which is displayed larger than the first timer image, is sufficiently longer than the first timer image and is displayed conspicuously in the center of the display screen. It is possible to perform an effect such that the timer image is alternately displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp the remaining time of the timer, and an unprecedented timer effect (timer countdown effect) can be performed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the second timer image is displayed larger than the first timer image, and then reduced in proportion to the passage of time. . According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the elapsed time of the timer by the size of the second timer image. For example, if the unit time is 1 second and the second timer image is reduced and displayed for 1 second in proportion to the passage of time, the size of the second timer image is less than the elapsed time T (0<T <1) can be suggested. This makes it possible to finely inform the player of the remaining time of the timer. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, the second timer image is configured to rotate in proportion to the passage of time. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate the elapsed time of the timer by the tilt angle of the second timer image. For example, if the unit time is 1 second and the second timer image is rotated for 1 second in proportion to the elapsed time, the elapsed time T (0<T <1) can be suggested. This makes it possible to finely inform the player of the remaining time of the timer. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, the color of the second timer image changes during the countdown. According to this configuration, for example, when the second timer image changes color to a highly expected color during the countdown, it is possible to give the player great joy. Also, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for a big win by displaying the second timer image in various colors. As a result, the player can enjoy the color of the displayed second timer image and can improve the interest in the game.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer countdown effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the battle effect is performed before the timer countdown effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of battle effects, story effects (for example, effects of whether or not the main character's wishes are fulfilled) or step-up effects (effects of whether or not the player can step up to the end) may be used.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, after the timer countdown effect is executed, the ready-to-win effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect, a ready-to-win effect or a big hit effect may be performed, and when the enemy character CRB wins in the battle effect, a losing effect may be performed. Furthermore, when the enemy character CRB wins in the battle effect, the countdown effect may not be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the second timer image TM2 is enlarged and displayed to fill the main display screen 7a, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the second timer image TM2 may be displayed so as to protrude from the main display screen 7a. In this case, the protruding portion of the second timer image TM2 may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 102, the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 are displayed on the main display screen 7a, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be displayed simultaneously on the sub display screen 64 in addition to the main display screen 7a. In this way, a plurality of first timer images TM1 and second timer images TM2 can be simultaneously used on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64 to execute the timer countdown effect, and the timer countdown effect can be displayed to the player. You can strongly appeal to the production. As a result, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game by performing a timer/countdown effect that has never existed before.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the second timer image TM2 is enlarged and then gradually reduced in proportion to the passage of time. It is not limited to this. For example, conversely, after being displayed in reduced size, it may be gradually enlarged in proportion to the passage of time. Also, a meter or the like indicating the passage of time may be displayed separately from the second timer image TM2.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, the second timer image TM2 rotates in proportion to the passage of time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second timer image TM2 may move horizontally or in an arc from left to right or from right to left, or vertically or diagonally from top to bottom or bottom to top.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, the color of the second timer image TM2 changes during the countdown, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color of the first timer image TM1 may also change at a predetermined timing. In this case, the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may change to the same color, or may change to different colors.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B7-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect including displaying a first timer image and counting a timer value using the first timer image,
The second effect is a effect including displaying a second timer image and counting the timer value using the second timer image,
The display means further uses both the first timer image and the second timer image as one of the plurality of display effects when the timer value of the first timer image reaches a specific value. can execute a third effect that displays the count from the specific value,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B7-2]
In the third production,
the first timer image is displayed in a first display mode at a first display position on the display screen;
the second timer image is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode at a second display position different from the first display position on the display screen;
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1, characterized by:
[Aspect B7-3]
The timer values in the first timer image and the second timer image are counted by a countdown method in which a predetermined value is subtracted as time elapses,
In the first display mode,
the first timer image is erased when the timer value reaches the specific value, and thereafter is displayed and erased each time a predetermined value is subtracted from the specific value;
In the second display mode,
The second timer image is displayed at the same time as or immediately before/after erasing the first timer image, and is thereafter erased at the same time as or immediately before/after the display of the first timer image.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2, characterized by:
[Aspect B7-4]
at the first display position, the first timer image is displayed on the edge of the display screen;
at the second display position, the second timer image is displayed on the center side of the display screen;
In the first display mode, the size of the first timer image is fixed and displayed,
In the second display mode, after the second timer image is displayed larger than the first timer image, it shrinks in proportion to the passage of time.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-3, characterized by:
[Aspect B7-5]
In the second display mode, the second timer image is shrunk smaller than the first timer image and then erased.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-4, characterized by:
[Aspect B7-6]
The timer values in the first timer image and the second timer image are counted by a countdown method in which 1 is subtracted each time a unit time elapses,
In the second display mode, the size of the second timer image suggests an elapsed time less than the unit time.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-4 or aspect B7-5, characterized by:

Character image cutting effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106. FIG. This character image cutting effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character image cutting effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Character image cutting effect A]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the character image cutting effect A. FIG. In the character image cutting effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 103(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a character display effect is performed. In this character display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced and variably displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a, and the character CRA is displayed near the approximate center of the main display screen 7a. This character CRA is an image representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a wall display effect is performed. In this wall display effect, the wall image X5A is displayed on the entire surface of the main display screen 7a. This wall image X5A is an image representing a brick-like wall. The character CRA is positioned behind the wall image X5A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a wall destruction effect A is performed. In this wall destruction effect A, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys the area X5B of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A. The destroyed area X5B is also called a lost area X5B. The disappearance region X5B is formed in a substantially circular shape. As shown in FIG. 103(D), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), wall destruction effect B is performed. In this wall destruction effect B, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys the area X5C of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A. The destroyed region X5C is also called a lost region X5C. The lost region X5C is formed in a substantially circular shape and is a region different from the lost region X5B. The lost region X5C is larger than the lost region X5B. As shown in FIG. 103(E), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a wall destruction effect C is performed. In this wall destruction effect C, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys the area X5D of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A. The destroyed area X5D is also called a lost area X5D. The lost region X5D is formed in a substantially circular shape and is a region different from the lost regions X5B and X5C. The erased region X5D is about the same size as the erased region X5C and larger than the erased region X5B. As shown in FIG. 103(F), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5D.
The lost region X5B, the lost region X5C, and the lost region X5D are configured so as not to communicate with each other.

[Character image cutting performance B]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the character image cutting effect B. FIG. In the character image cutting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a character display effect is performed. In this character display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced and variably displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a, and the character CRA is displayed near the approximate center of the main display screen 7a. This character CRA is an image representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a wall display presentation is performed. In this wall display effect, the wall image X5A is displayed on the entire surface of the main display screen 7a. This wall image X5A is an image representing a brick-like wall. The character CRA is positioned behind the wall image X5A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a wall destruction effect A is performed. In this wall destruction effect A, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys the area X5B of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A (for example, slashes with a sword). The destroyed area X5B is also called a lost area X5B. The disappearing area X5B has a substantially rectangular shape, and is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction of the main display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 104(D), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), wall destruction effect B is performed. In this wall destruction effect B, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys two regions X5C of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A. The destroyed region X5C is also called a lost region X5C. Each of the lost regions X5C has a substantially rectangular shape. One of the disappearing regions X5C is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is along the diagonal line extending to the upper right on the main display screen 7a, and the other of the disappearing regions X5C is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is to the right of the main display screen 7a. It is arranged so as to be oriented along a downwardly extending diagonal line. Each lost region X5C communicates with the lost region X5B near the center in the longitudinal direction. As shown in FIG. 104(E), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a wall destruction effect C is performed. In this wall destruction effect C, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys the area X5D of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A. The destroyed area X5D is also called a lost area X5D. The disappearance region X5D has a substantially rectangular shape. The disappearing area X5D is arranged such that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the vertical direction of the main display screen 7a. The lost region X5D communicates with the lost regions X5B and X5C near the center in the longitudinal direction. As shown in FIG. 104(F), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5D.

[Character image cutting effect C]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the character image cutting effect C. FIG. In the character image cutting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a character display effect is performed. In this character display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced and variably displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a, and the character CRA is displayed near the approximate center of the main display screen 7a. This character CRA is an image representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a wall display presentation is performed. In this wall display effect, the wall image X5A is displayed on the entire surface of the main display screen 7a. This wall image X5A is an image representing a brick-like wall. The character CRA is positioned behind the wall image X5A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a wall destruction effect A is performed. In this wall destruction effect A, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys the area X5B of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A (for example, slashes with a sword). The destroyed area X5B is also called a lost area X5B. The lost region X5B has a substantially rectangular shape. The disappearing area X5B is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction of the main display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 105(D), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), a wall destruction effect B is performed. In this wall destruction effect B, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys two areas X5C of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A. The destroyed region X5C is also called a lost region X5C. Each of the lost regions X5C has a substantially rectangular shape. One of the disappearing regions X5C is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is along the diagonal line extending to the upper right on the main display screen 7a, and the other of the disappearing regions X5C is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is to the right of the main display screen 7a. It is arranged so as to be oriented along a downwardly extending diagonal line. Each lost region X5C communicates with the lost region X5B near the center in the longitudinal direction. As shown in FIG. 105(E), part of the character CRA is visible from the disappearance area X5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a wall destruction effect C is performed. In this wall destruction effect C, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys the area X5D of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A. The destroyed area X5D is also called a lost area X5D. The disappearance region X5D has a substantially rectangular shape. The disappearing area X5D is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is the vertical direction of the main display screen 7a. The lost region X5D communicates with the lost regions X5B and X5C near the center in the longitudinal direction. As shown in FIG. 105(F), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5D.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), a wall destruction effect is performed. In this wall destruction effect, the wall image X5A is destroyed by the character CRA, and the character CRA is displayed.

[Character image cutting effect D]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the character image cutting effect D. FIG. In the character image cutting effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a character display effect is performed. In this character display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced and variably displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a, and the character CRA is displayed near the approximate center of the main display screen 7a. This character CRA is an image representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a wall display effect is performed. In this wall display effect, the wall image X5A is displayed on the entire surfaces of the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG. This wall image X5A is an image representing a brick-like wall. The character CRA is positioned behind the wall image X5A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a wall destruction effect A is performed. In this wall destruction effect A, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys the area X5B of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A (for example, slashes with a sword). The destroyed area X5B is also called a lost area X5B. The lost region X5B has a substantially rectangular shape. The disappearing region X5B is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction of the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. As shown in FIG. The lost area X5B is formed on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG. As shown in FIG. 106(D), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), wall destruction effect B is performed. In this wall destruction effect B, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys two areas X5C of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A. The destroyed region X5C is also called a lost region X5C. Each of the lost regions X5C has a substantially rectangular shape. One of the disappearing regions X5C is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is along the diagonal line extending to the upper right on the main display screen 7a, and the other of the disappearing regions X5C is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is to the right of the main display screen 7a. It is arranged so as to be oriented along a downwardly extending diagonal line. Each lost region X5C communicates with the lost region X5B near the center in the longitudinal direction. As shown in FIG. 106(E), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5C. Note that the disappearing region X5C may be formed in the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), a wall destruction effect C is performed. In this wall destruction effect C, an effect is performed in which the character CRA destroys the area X5D of the wall image X5A from behind the wall image X5A. The destroyed area X5D is also called a lost area X5D. The disappearance region X5D has a substantially rectangular shape. The disappearing area X5D is arranged such that the longitudinal direction is the vertical direction of the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG. The lost region X5D communicates with the lost regions X5B and X5C near the center in the longitudinal direction. As shown in FIG. 106(F), part of the character CRA is visible from the lost area X5D. Note that the disappearing area X5D may be formed in the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), a wall destruction effect is performed. In this wall destruction effect, the wall image X5A is destroyed by the character CRA, and the character CRA is displayed.
In this character image cutting effect D, the character CRA may be displayed on the sub display screen 64 .

[Modification]
In the character image cutting effect, wall destruction effects A to C are performed in order, but the present invention is not limited to this. may end. At this time, in the character image cutting performance, when the wall destruction performance B is performed, the expectation for the big win is higher when the wall destruction performance B is performed than when the wall destruction performance A is performed, and the wall destruction performance B is performed. The expectation for the big win is higher when the wall destruction performance C is performed than when the wall destruction performance C is performed, and the big win is greater when the wall destruction performance is performed than when the wall destruction performance C is performed. Expectations are high.
It is not limited to the wall image X5A, and various images such as a grassy image, forest image, sea image, sky image, soccer field image, city landscape image, etc. can be used. .
In the character image cutting effect, the wall image X5A is displayed on the main display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64, but is not limited to this, and is displayed on a part of the main display screen 7a and a part of the sub display screen 64. may be

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the character image cutting effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the wall image X5A is displayed, and then the character CRA performs an effect to make the area X5B of the wall image X5A disappear. According to this configuration, since the predetermined area of the wall image X5A disappears, it is possible to attract the player's interest and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the wall image X5A is displayed, and then the character CRA performs an effect to make the area X5B of the wall image X5A disappear from behind the wall image X5A. According to this configuration, since various areas of the wall image X5A disappear unexpectedly from the rear side invisible to the player, it is possible to give an impact to the player and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the character CRA can be visually recognized from the disappearing area X5B of the wall image X5A. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a double surprise of the surprise of the disappearance of the wall image X5A and the surprise of seeing the character CRA from the disappearing area X5B of the wall image X5A caused by the disappearance. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the character CRA erases the area X5B of the wall image X5A, and then erases the area X5C. According to this configuration, since a plurality of areas in the wall image X5A are erased in turn by the character CRA, the interest of the player can be gradually aroused, and the player's expectation for the performance can be heightened. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the character CRA can be visually recognized from the disappearing area X5C of the wall image X5A. According to this configuration, the player is surprised by the fact that the wall image X5A disappears and the surprise that the character CRA can be seen from the disappearing area X5C in addition to the disappearing area X5B. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the embodiment of the game machine 1, in the character image cutting effect, the expectation for the big win is higher when the wall destruction effect B is performed than when the wall destruction effect A is performed. The degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the wall destruction performance C is performed than when the performance B is performed. According to this configuration, the more the wall image X5A disappears, the more the expectation for the big win increases, so that the interest in the character image cutting performance can be improved, and as a result, the interest in the game is improved. be able to.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined image,
the second display effect is a effect in which a first area of a predetermined image disappears by the predetermined character;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and after the first display effect, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X5-1,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the predetermined character causes the first area of the predetermined image to disappear from behind the predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X5-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the predetermined character behind the predetermined image is visually recognized from the first area, which is a disappearing area in the predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X5-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect in which the predetermined character causes a second area different from the first area of the predetermined image to disappear,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X5-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the predetermined character behind the predetermined image is visually recognized from the second region of the predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X5-5,
In the combination effect, the state in which the second region of the predetermined image disappears in the third display effect is the state in which the first region of the predetermined image disappears in the second display effect. It is a state where the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

107 to 110, the character object interlocking effects A to D will be described below. This character interlocking effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command to start the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character-linked effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on 7a and driving data is read out to operate the second movable accessory 15. FIG.

[Character-linked production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked effect A. FIG. In the character interlocking production A, first, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the decorative design variation production (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 4 is illustrated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "2") to form a reach. After reach formation, the hold change of the hold changes the aspect of the hold icon 9C. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of a specific target changes to an image representing the appearance of another specific target. As an example, the suspension change causes the suspension icon 9C to become a (square) image representing the appearance of a single square figure. This square shape suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of a round shape. As will be described later, the pending icon 9C suggests the number of pseudo consecutive times by the number of squares represented. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107(C), a pseudo-run start suggesting image suggesting that a pseudo-run will be executed is displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C. Pseudo-continuation is an effect in which temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of decorative symbols are repeated during one variation, and ready-to-win is formed before three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. The number of pseudo-runs is the number of repetitions of temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols. Here, the number of pseudo-runs is equal to the number of times a reach is formed during one fluctuation.

After the pseudo continuous start suggesting image of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position as shown in FIG. 107(D). Then, the second movable accessory 15 rotates in a state of covering at least part of the pseudo-continuation start suggesting image at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 107(E), the second movable accessory 15 performs a driving performance in which the first member 15a and the second member 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15 move relative to each other. Here, the second member 15b slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the first member 15a. Specifically, while the first member 15a is stationary, the second member 15b moves diagonally (lower left direction) along the boundary line between the first member 15a and the second member 15b. In conjunction with the relative sliding movement of the two members 15a and 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15, the pseudo-continuation start suggesting image is divided into two parts (two image areas) and relatively slid. Here, in the substantially rectangular pseudo-continuation start suggesting image, the lower right triangular portion slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the upper left inverted triangular portion. Specifically, while the upper left inverted triangular portion remains stationary, the lower right triangular portion moves in an oblique direction (lower left direction) along the boundary line between the two triangular portions. In this manner, the second movable accessory 15 and the image suggesting the start of the pseudo-continuation are slid in tandem, so that the player can be given an unexpected and novel impression. Further, in the present embodiment, the relative sliding direction of the second movable accessory 15 and the relative sliding direction of the pseudo-continuation start suggesting image are the same direction (both in the lower left direction). As a result, it is possible to improve the beauty and sense of interlocking effect of the combination of the movable accessory and the display image. It should be noted that the interlocking timings are not limited to the same time. It is sufficient if the timing is continuous to the extent that it is felt to have relevance. As for timing that is continuous enough to be felt to have relevance, for example, if it is within one second, it is felt to have sufficient relevance. At least a portion of the two members 15a and 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15 after the relative slide movement overlaps a portion of the pseudo continuous start suggesting image after the relative slide movement. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that the combination of the movable accessory and the display image is intricately entwined, thereby improving interest.

After this slide presentation, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. 107(F), a number-of-times suggestive image KS suggesting the number of pseudo-runs is displayed. The number-of-times suggestive image KS suggests the number of times (the number of stages) of the re-variation display to be started next. Here, the next time is the second time (because the number of pseudo-runs is "2"), so "2nd time!!!" is displayed. When the number-of-times suggestion image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. Aspects change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of one specific target (square figure) changes to an image representing the appearance of two same specific targets. Specifically, due to the pending change, the pending icon 9C changes from a single square figure to an image in which two square figures are superimposed. Since the suspension icon 9C includes two square figures, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the second time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is two. Also, two square shapes suggest that the expectation of a big win is higher than one square shape. A pseudo run number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The number of pseudo-runs display GK displays the current number of pseudo-runs. After the variable display continues for a predetermined period, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "6") to form a reach.

After forming the ready-to-win, a pseudo-running start suggesting image is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. After the pseudo continuous start suggesting image temporarily stops as the middle decorative pattern 8C, as shown in FIG. 107(H), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position. The mode at this time is the same as in FIG. 107(D). After that, as shown in FIG. 107(I), a driving performance is executed in which the second movable accessory 15 and the image suggesting the start of the pseudo-continuation slide in conjunction with each other. The mode at this time is the same as in FIG. 107(E). After that, as shown in FIG. 107(J), the screen is switched again, and the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed. Here, since the number of pseudo-runs is "3", it is expressed as "3rd time!!!". When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed. After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again variably displayed. After that, a special ready-to-win effect is executed, and a jackpot pattern is displayed by a decorative pattern.

[Character-linked production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked production B. FIG. In the character interlocking production B, first, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the decorative design variation production (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 108(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "2") to form a reach. After reach formation, the hold change of the hold changes the aspect of the hold icon 9C. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of a specific target changes to an image representing the appearance of another specific target. As an example, the suspension change causes the suspension icon 9C to become a (square) image representing the appearance of a single square figure. This square shape suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of a round shape. As will be described later, the pending icon 9C suggests the number of pseudo consecutive times by the number of squares represented. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(C), a pseudo-run start suggesting image suggesting that a pseudo-run will be executed is displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C. Pseudo-continuation is an effect in which temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of decorative symbols are repeated during one variation, and ready-to-win is formed before three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. The number of pseudo-runs is the number of repetitions of temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of the decorative symbols. Here, the number of pseudo-runs is equal to the number of times a reach is formed during one fluctuation.

After the pseudo continuous start suggestive image of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 108(D), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position. Then, the second movable accessory 15 rotates in a state of covering at least part of the pseudo-continuation start suggesting image at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(E), the second movable accessory 15 performs a driving effect in which the first member 15a and the second member 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15 move relative to each other. Here, the second member 15b slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the first member 15a. Specifically, while the first member 15a is stationary, the second member 15b moves diagonally (lower left direction) along the boundary line between the first member 15a and the second member 15b. In conjunction with the relative sliding movement of the two members 15a and 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15, the pseudo-continuation start suggesting image is divided into two parts and relatively slid. Here, in the substantially rectangular pseudo-continuation start suggesting image, the lower right triangular portion slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the upper left inverted triangular portion. Specifically, while the upper left inverted triangular portion remains stationary, the lower right triangular portion moves in an oblique direction (lower left direction) along the boundary line between the two triangular portions. In this manner, the second movable accessory 15 and the image suggesting the start of the pseudo-continuation are slid in tandem, so that the player can be given an unexpected and novel impression. Further, in the present embodiment, the relative slide boundary line of the second movable accessory 15 and the relative slide boundary line of the pseudo-continuation start suggesting image are in the same direction and connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the beauty of the combined effect and the feeling of interlocking between the movable accessory and the display image. It should be noted that the interlocking timings are not limited to the same time. It is sufficient if the timing is continuous to the extent that it is felt to have relevance. As for timing that is continuous enough to be felt to have relevance, for example, if it is within one second, it is felt to have sufficient relevance. At least a portion of the two members 15a and 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15 after the relative slide movement overlaps a portion of the pseudo continuous start suggesting image after the relative slide movement. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that the combination of the movable accessory and the display image is intricately entwined, thereby improving interest.

After this slide presentation, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. 108(F), a number-of-times suggestive image KS suggesting the number of pseudo-runs is displayed. The number-of-times suggestive image KS suggests the number of times (number of stages) of the re-variation display to be started next. Here, since the next time is the second time (since the number of pseudo-runs is "2"), "2nd time!!!" is displayed. When the number-of-times suggestion image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again variably displayed, and as shown in FIG. Aspects change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of one specific target (square figure) changes to an image representing the appearance of two same specific targets. Specifically, due to the pending change, the pending icon 9C changes from a single square figure to an image in which two square figures are superimposed. Since the suspension icon 9C includes two square figures, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the second time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is two. Also, two square shapes suggest that the expectation of a big win is higher than one square shape. A pseudo consecutive number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The number of pseudo-runs display GK displays the current number of pseudo-runs. After the variable display continues for a predetermined period, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "6") to form a reach.

After forming the ready-to-win, a pseudo-running start suggesting image is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. After the pseudo continuous start suggesting image temporarily stops as the middle decorative pattern 8C, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position as shown in FIG. 108(H). The mode at this time is the same as in FIG. 108(D). After that, as shown in FIG. 108(I), a driving performance is executed in which the second movable accessory 15 and the image suggesting the start of the pseudo-continuation are slid in conjunction with each other. The mode at this time is the same as in FIG. 108(E). After that, as shown in FIG. 108(J), the screen is switched again, and the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed. Here, since the number of pseudo-runs is "3", it is expressed as "3rd time!!!". When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed. After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again variably displayed, and the mode of the suspension icon 9C changes due to the suspension change of the suspension. After that, a special ready-to-win effect is executed, and a jackpot pattern is displayed by a decorative pattern.

[Character-linked production C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked effect C. FIG. In the character object interlocking production C, first, as shown in FIG. 109A, the decorative design variation production (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 109B, the specific image TG is displayed during the variable effect. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is an image showing the same smiley face as that of the second movable accessory 15 . The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. A plurality (for example, three) of the specific images TG are displayed on the display screen 7a. The plurality of specific images TG may represent the same target, and may not be the same image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(C), in a state where a plurality of specific images TG are displayed, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position. Then, as shown in FIG. 109(D), a driving effect is executed in which the first member 15a and the second member 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15 move relative to each other at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. be. Here, the second member 15b slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the first member 15a. Specifically, while the first member 15a is stationary, the second member 15b moves diagonally (lower left direction) along the boundary line between the first member 15a and the second member 15b. In conjunction with the relative sliding movement of the two members 15a and 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15, each of the plurality of specific images TG is divided into two parts and relatively slidingly moved. Here, in the specific image TG, as with the second movable accessory 15, the face is split in half and one part slides relative to the other part. Specifically, while the left half of the face remains stationary, the right half of the face moves along the boundary between the right and left halves of the face. In this manner, the second movable accessory 15 and the specific image TG slide in conjunction with each other, so that the player can be given an unexpected and innovative impression. Also, in this embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 and the plurality of specific images TG are linked. As a result, it is possible to improve the beauty and sense of interlocking effect of the combination of the movable accessory and the plurality of display images. It should be noted that the interlocking timings are not limited to the same time. It is sufficient if the timing is continuous to the extent that it is felt to have relevance. As for timing that is continuous enough to be felt to have relevance, for example, if it is within one second, it is felt to have sufficient relevance.

After this slide effect, as shown in FIG. 109(E), a relative slide movement in the opposite direction to return to the original effect is performed. Specifically, while the first member 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is stationary, the second member 15b slides diagonally in the opposite direction (upper right direction). In conjunction with the backward relative slide movement of the second movable accessory 15, the state in which each of the plurality of specific images TG is divided into two parts is returned to the original lump of image by the backward relative slide movement. After that, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper retracted position. After the second movable accessory 15 moves upward, as shown in FIG. 109(F), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop in the reach state (here, 3↓3), and then the middle decoration The pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at a different number (here, 4), and the whole is temporarily stopped in a losing mode (here, 343). Then, suddenly, as shown in FIG. 109(G), the second movable accessory 15 again moves downward toward the advanced position. Then, as shown in FIG. 109(H), at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a, the first member 15a and the second member 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15 are again moved relative to each other. is executed. In conjunction with the relative sliding movement of the two members 15a and 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15, the middle decorative pattern 8C is divided into two parts and relatively slidingly moved. After that, as shown in FIG. 109(I), the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the upper retracted position, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is again variably displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 109(J), after the middle decorative pattern 8C with the same number (here, 3) as the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, it is confirmed and stopped in a jackpot manner. do.

[Character-linked production D]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked effect D. FIG. Here, the gaming machine 1 will be described as further comprising a third movable accessory 18 . Figures 110 (A) to (C) of the character-linked production C are the same as Figures 107 (A) to (C) of the character-linked production A.

After the pseudo continuous start suggesting image of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 110(D), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position. Also, the third movable accessory 18 moves upward toward the advanced position. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(E), the second movable accessory 15 performs a driving effect in which the first member 15a and the second member 15b that constitute the second movable accessory 15 move relative to each other. Here, the second member 15b slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the first member 15a. Further, the third movable accessory 18 performs a driving effect in which the first member 18a and the second member 18b that constitute the third movable accessory 18 move relative to each other. Here, the second member 18b slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the first member 18a. In conjunction with the relative sliding movement of the second movable accessory 15 and the third movable accessory 18, the pseudo continuous start suggesting image is divided into two parts and relatively slid. Here, in the substantially rectangular pseudo-continuation start suggesting image, the lower right triangular portion slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the upper left inverted triangular portion. In this way, the second movable accessory 15, the third movable accessory 18, and the image suggesting the start of the pseudo-continuation are slid in tandem, so that an unexpected and novel impression can be given to the player. . In this embodiment, the relative slide boundary line of the second movable role 15, the relative slide boundary line of the third movable role 18, and the relative slide boundary line of the pseudo continuous start suggesting image are in the same direction, and linked. As a result, it is possible to improve the beauty and sense of interlocking effect of the combination of the movable accessory and the display image. It should be noted that the timing at which the two movable accessories and the display image are linked with each other are not limited to the same time. It is sufficient if the timing is continuous to the extent that it is felt to have relevance. As for timing that is continuous enough to be felt to have relevance, for example, if it is within one second, it is felt to have sufficient relevance. At least a part of each of the second movable role 15 and the third movable role 18 after the relative slide movement overlaps a part of the pseudo continuous start suggesting image after the relative slide movement. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that the combination of the movable accessory and the display image is intricately entwined, thereby improving interest.

After this slide presentation, the screen is switched, and as shown in FIG. 110(F), a number-of-times suggestive image KS that suggests the number of pseudo-runs is displayed. The number-of-times suggestive image KS suggests the number of times (the number of stages) of the re-variation display to be started next. Here, the next time is the second time (because the number of pseudo-runs is "2"), so "2nd time!!!" is displayed. When the number-of-times suggestion image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

After the number-of-times suggestive image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. Aspects change. Here, the pending icon 9C representing the appearance of one specific target (square figure) changes to an image representing the appearance of two same specific targets. Specifically, due to the pending change, the pending icon 9C changes from a single square figure to an image in which two square figures are superimposed. Since the suspension icon 9C includes two square figures, it suggests that the current pseudo-run is the second time, that is, the number of pseudo-runs is two. Also, two square shapes suggest that the expectation of a big win is higher than one square shape. A pseudo consecutive number display GK is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The number of pseudo-runs display GK displays the current number of pseudo-runs. After the variable display continues for a predetermined period, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "6") to form a reach.

After forming the ready-to-win, a pseudo-running start suggesting image is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. After the pseudo continuous start suggestive image temporarily stops as the middle decorative pattern 8C, as shown in FIG. 110(H), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position. At this time, the third movable accessory 18 remains at the retracted position without moving. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(I), a driving effect is executed in which the second movable accessory 15 and the image suggesting the start of the pseudo-continuation slide in conjunction with each other. The mode of the second movable role object 15 and the pseudo continuous start suggesting image is the same as in FIG. 110(E). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110(J), the screen is switched again to display the number-of-times suggesting image KS. Here, since the number of pseudo-runs is "3", it is expressed as "3rd time!!!". When the number-of-times suggesting image KS is displayed, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed. After the number-of-times suggesting image KS disappears, the screen is switched, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again variably displayed, and the mode of the suspension icon 9C changes due to the suspension change of the suspension. After that, a special ready-to-win effect is executed, and a jackpot pattern is displayed by a decorative pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the performance linked to the character will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 107, 108, and 110, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a second movable accessory 15 in which two members (first member 15a and second member 15b) are relatively movable, When the two members 15a and 15b of the second movable accessory 15 move relative to each other, it is possible to perform an effect in which a part of the image suggesting the start of the pseudo-continuation displayed on the display screen 7a moves in conjunction with the relative movement. can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107, 108, and 110, in this effect, the two members (the first member 15a and the second member 15b) of the second movable accessory 15 move relative to each other. Then, the pseudo-continuation start-indicating image is divided into two parts and relatively moved. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107, 108, and 110, in this effect, the two members (the first member 15a and the second member 15b) of the second movable accessory 15 slide relative to each other. When moving, two parts (two image areas) of the pseudo-continuation-start-indicating image undergo relative sliding movement. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. The two portions (two image regions) of the start suggesting image are slid in the same direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107, 108, and 110, the two members (the first member 15a and the second member 15b) of the second movable accessory 15 after the relative sliding movement are At least a part of it overlaps a part of the pseudo continuation start suggesting image after the two parts (two image regions) are relatively slid. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the performance linked to the character is shown below.
[Modification 1]
107, 108, and 110, in the performances A, B, and D of FIG. 107, FIG. 108, and FIG. was explained as moving in conjunction with . 109, it is assumed that the pseudo-continuation start suggesting image moves in conjunction with the relative movement of the two members (the first member 15a and the second member 15b) of the second movable accessory 15. explained. It has been described that the specific image TG showing a smiley face moves in conjunction with the relative movement of the two members 15a and 15b of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. However, the image that moves in conjunction with the relative movement of the two members 15a and 15b of the second movable accessory 15 may be an image other than the pseudo-continuous suggestive image or the smiley face image. Images that move in tandem include, for example, images representing characters, creatures, and objects, as well as images representing abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and images representing conceptual things whose meaning is unclear. There may be. In other words, any image may be used as long as the image can be visually recognized as being moved in conjunction with the image.

[Modification 2]
107 to 110, the two members (the first member 15a and the second member 15b) of the second movable accessory 15 have been described as sliding relative to each other. However, the two members 15a and 15b of the second movable accessory 15 may perform relative movement other than relative sliding movement, and the specific image may move in conjunction with the relative movement. For example, the two members 15a and 15b of the second movable accessory 15 move away from each other, and in conjunction with the movement, the pseudo-repeating suggestive image and the specific image of the smiley face are divided into two parts and separated from each other. You can move to In addition, when the pseudo-representative image or the specific image of the smiley face slides relative to each other, the sliding direction may be different from the sliding direction of the two members 15a and 15b of the second movable accessory 15, or may be in the opposite direction. may be

[Modification 3]
107 to 110, in interlocking performances A to D in Figures 107 to 110, in conjunction with the relative sliding movement of the two members (first member 15a and second member 15b) of the second movable role 15, a pseudo-continuous suggestive image or The description has been given assuming that the specific image of the smiley face is divided into two parts and moved relative to each other. However, the pseudo-representation image and the specific image of the smiley face are not divided into two parts, and the entire image moves in conjunction with the relative sliding movement of the two members 15a and 15b of the second movable accessory 15. good too. Also, the pseudo-continuous suggestive image and the specific image of the smiley face may be divided into three or more parts, and one or more of these parts may be moved in conjunction with each other. Note that when the specific images move together, they are not limited to linear movement in one direction. It may be rotational or reciprocating.

[Modification 4]
The performances A to D shown in FIGS. 107 to 110 may be appropriately combined. for example,. 109, two movable accessories (the second movable accessory 15 and the third movable accessory 18) are interlocked and move relative to each other as in the role linked presentation D of FIG. , the specific image may be relatively moved in conjunction with these linkages.

[Modification 5]
107 to 110, the character object-linked productions A to D may not include some of the explained productions, and other productions may be added. For example, the second movable accessory 15 may be configured such that the relative sliding direction of the two members 15a and 15b changes each time. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates before the relative slide movement, and the subsequent slide movement direction may change depending on the orientation after the rotation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
a movable accessory in which two members can move relative to each other;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target;
When the two members of the movable accessory move relative to each other, an effect can be executed in which at least part of the specific image displayed on the display means moves in conjunction with the relative movement. game machine.
◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
A gaming machine, wherein in the effect, when the two members of the movable accessory relatively move, the specific image is divided into two parts and relatively moves.
◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2,
A gaming machine, wherein in the effect, when the two members of the movable accessory slide relative to each other, the two portions of the specific image slide relative to each other.
◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3,
A gaming machine, wherein the sliding direction of the two members of the movable accessory and the sliding direction of the two parts of the specific image are the same.
◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3 or aspect C1-4,
A gaming machine, wherein at least a part of the two members after the relative sliding movement overlaps a part of the specific image after the two parts have relatively slidingly moved.

111 to 114, the V-shaped display formation effects A to D will be described below. This V-shaped display formation effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and controls the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 when the instruction to execute the V-shaped display forming effect is included. , the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[V-shaped display formation effect A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the V-shaped display formation effect A. FIG. In the V-shaped display formation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 111(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), a game board lamp lighting effect is performed. In this game board lamp lighting effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-win state on the main display screen 7a, and the board lamp 5 emits light (lights up). The board lamp 5 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a, has a parallelogram shape (rhombic shape), and emits light from a plurality of LEDs. In the example of FIG. 111(B), the ready-to-win state is formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R with the same "7" pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), an integral display completion effect is performed. In this integral display completion effect, the V image X6A is displayed on the main display screen 7a. The V image X6A is a luminescence image representing a state of luminescence. In this integral display completion rendering, the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the V image X6A are the same as the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the board lamp 5 . There are various variations of the light emission mode, such as, for example, blinking at high speed or extinguishing momentarily. In this integral display completion effect, an integral display is performed in which the V image X6A and the board lamp 5 form a "V shape". In the example of FIG. 111(D), the "V shape", which is an integral display formed by the V image X6A and the board lamp 5, is indicated by cross hatching. Also, the V image X6A is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.
After this integral display completion effect, the V image X6A and the board lamp 5 are turned off all at once, and a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead effect) is performed.

[V-shaped display formation effect B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the V-shaped display formation effect B. FIG. In the V-shaped display formation production B, first, as shown in FIG. 112(A), a decorative pattern variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), a frame lamp lighting effect is performed. In this frame lamp lighting effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-win state on the main display screen 7a, and the frame lamp 66 emits light (lights up). The frame lamp 66 is arranged adjacent to the board lamp 5, has a parallelogram shape, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs. In the example of FIG. 112(B), the ready-to-win state is formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R with the same "7" pattern and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), a game board lamp lighting effect is performed. In this game board lamp lighting effect, the board lamp 5 emits light (lights up). The board lamp 5 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a, has a parallelogram shape, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs. In this game board lamp lighting effect, the board lamp 5 has the same color, brightness, and lighting mode as the frame lamp 66 . There are various variations of the light emission mode, such as, for example, blinking at high speed or extinguishing momentarily. In this game board lamp lighting effect, the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 emit light, thereby integrally displaying and forming a parallelogram.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(D), an integrated display completion rendering is performed. In this integral display completion effect, the V image X6A is displayed on the main display screen 7a. The V image X6A is a luminescence image representing a state of luminescence. In this integral display completion effect, the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the V image X6A are the same as the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66. FIG. There are various variations of the light emission mode, such as, for example, blinking at high speed or extinguishing momentarily. In this integrated display completion effect, an integrated display is performed in which the V image X6A, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 form a "V shape". In the example of FIG. 112(D), the "V shape", which is an integral display formed by the V image X6A, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66, is indicated by cross hatching. Also, the V image X6A is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.
After this integral display completion effect, the V image X6A, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 are turned off all at once, and a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, and look-ahead effect) is performed.

[V-shaped display formation effect C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the V-shaped display formation effect C. FIG. In the V-shaped display formation production C, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a decorative pattern variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113B, a V image display effect is performed. In this V image display effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the main display screen 7a, and the V image X6A is displayed. The V image X6A is a luminescence image representing a state of luminescence. Also, the V image X6A is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the example of FIG. 113(B), the ready-to-reach state is formed by the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R being temporarily stopped and displayed with the same "7" pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuating at high speed. X6A is shown cross-hatched.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a game board lamp lighting effect is performed. In this game board lamp lighting effect, the frame lamp 66 emits light (lights up). The board lamp 5 is arranged adjacent to the main display screen, has a parallelogram shape, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs. In this game board lamp lighting effect, the color, luminance and lighting mode of the board lamp 5 are the same as the color, luminance and lighting mode of the V image X6A. There are various variations of the light emission mode, such as, for example, blinking at high speed or extinguishing momentarily.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), an integral display completion effect is performed. In this integral display completion rendering, the frame lamp 66 emits light (lights up). The frame lamp 66 is arranged adjacent to the board lamp 5, has a parallelogram shape, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs. In this integral display completion effect, the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 are the same as the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the board lamp 55 and the V-image X6A. There are various variations of the light emission mode, such as, for example, blinking at high speed or extinguishing momentarily. In this once-display-completion rendering, an integral display is performed in which the V image X6A, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 form a "V-shape". In the example of FIG. 113(D), the "V shape", which is an integral display formed by the V image X6A, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66, is indicated by cross hatching. Also, the V image X6A is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.
After this integral display completion effect, the V image X6A, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 are turned off all at once, and a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, and look-ahead effect) is performed.

[V-shaped display formation effect D]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the V-shaped display formation effect D. FIG. In the V-shaped display formation production D, first, as shown in FIG. 114(A), a decorative pattern variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), a frame lamp lighting effect is performed. In this frame lamp lighting effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-win state on the main display screen 7a, and the frame lamp 66 emits light (lights up). The frame lamp 66 is arranged adjacent to the board lamp 5, has a parallelogram shape, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs. In the example of FIG. 114(B), the ready-to-win state is formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R with the same "7" pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), a game board lamp lighting effect is performed. In this game board lamp lighting effect, the board lamp 5 emits light (lights up). The board lamp 5 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a, has a parallelogram shape, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs. In this game board lamp lighting effect, the board lamp 5 has the same color, brightness, and lighting mode as the frame lamp 66 . There are various variations of the light emission mode, such as, for example, blinking at high speed or extinguishing momentarily. In this game board lamp lighting effect, the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 emit light, thereby integrally displaying and forming a parallelogram.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), a movable accessory lighting effect is performed. In this movable role lighting effect, the first movable role 14 moves to the deployment position (development position, development position) on the main display screen 7a and emits light (lights up). When the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the unfolded position, it is arranged adjacent to the board lamp 5, has a trapezoidal shape, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs. In this movable role product light-emitting effect, the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the first movable role product 14 are the same as the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 . There are various variations of the light emission mode, such as, for example, blinking at high speed or extinguishing momentarily. In this movable role object light-emitting effect, the first movable role object 14, the frame lamp 66, and the board lamp 5 emit light, thereby forming an integral display and forming an elongated trapezoidal shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), an integral display completion effect is performed. In this integral display completion effect, the V image X6B is displayed on the main display screen 7a. The V image X6B is a luminescence image representing a state of luminescence. In this integral display completion effect, the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the V image X6B are the same as the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the first movable accessory . There are various variations of the light emission mode, such as blinking at high speed and extinguishing momentarily. In this integrated display completion effect, an integrated display is performed in which the V image X6A, the first movable accessory 14, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 form a "V shape". In the example of FIG. 114(E), the "V shape" which is an integrated display formed by the V image X6A, the first movable accessory 14, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 is indicated by cross hatching. Also, the V image X6A is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.
After this integral display completion effect, the first movable accessory 14 returns to the home position, and the V image X6A, the first movable accessory 14, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 are turned off all at once, and a predetermined effect ( For example, a super reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, and a look-ahead effect) are performed.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned V-character display formation effect, in the integrated display completion effect, the V image X6A (V image X6B), the first movable accessory 14, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 have the same color, brightness, and light emission mode. However, it is not limited to this, and the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the V image X6A may be different from the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66, or the color and brightness of the board lamp 5 may be different. , the light emission mode may be different from the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the V image X6A and the frame lamp 66, and the color, brightness, and light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 may be different from those of the board lamp 5 and the V image X6A. , may be different from the light emission mode. Also, any one or each of the V image X6A, the first movable accessory 14, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 may differ only in color, only brightness, or only in light emission mode. For example, the color of the V image X6A, the color of the board lamp 5, and the color of the frame lamp 66 may be different.
When the frame lamp 66 emits light, then the board lamp 5 emits light, and then the V image X6A is displayed as in the V-shaped display formation effect B, as in the V-shaped display formation effect C described above. , V image X6A are displayed, the board lamp 5 emits light, and the frame lamp 66 emits light. , the frame lamp 66 is illuminated, then the V image X6A is displayed, the board lamp 5 may be illuminated, the board lamp 5 is illuminated, then the V image X6A is displayed, and then the frame The lamp 66 may illuminate, the V image X6A may be displayed, then the frame lamp 66 may illuminate, and then the board lamp 5 may illuminate.
In the V-character display formation effect, after the integrated display formation effect, the V image X6A (V image X6B), the first movable accessory 14, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 are turned off all at once. , the light-emitting objects are not limited to this, and each light-emitting object may be extinguished in order. For example, the frame lamp 66 may be extinguished, then the board lamp 5 may be extinguished, then the first movable accessory 14 may be extinguished, and then the V image X6A (V image X6B) may be extinguished.
In the above-mentioned V-shaped display formation effect, the V-shaped display is formed as an integrated display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed in various manners.
In the V-shaped display formation effect, the V image X6A (V image X6B) forming the integrated display is displayed on the display screen 7a, but is not limited to this, and is displayed on the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64. Alternatively, it may be displayed only on the sub display screen 64 . For example, in the V-shaped display formation effect D, the V image X6B is displayed on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64, and the main display screen 7a, the sub-display screen 64, the first movable accessory 14, the board lamp 5, and the frame A lamp 66 may be used to form an integral display.
In the V-shaped display formation effect D, the first movable accessory 14 is a movable accessory, but is not limited to this.
In the V-shaped display formation effect A, the frame lamp 66 and the V-image X6A are used to form a V-shaped integral display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable accessory 14 and the frame lamp 66 The V-image X6A may be used to form a V-shaped integrated display, or the two movable accessories and the V-image X6A may be used to form a V-shaped integrated display.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the V-shaped display formation effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the effect of displaying the V image X6A on the main display screen 7a is being performed, the effect of emitting (lighting) the board lamp 5 is performed. An integral display is performed to form a V shape with and. According to this configuration, the V image X6A and the board lamp 5 can create a dynamic effect, and can improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the effect of displaying the V image X6A on the main display screen 7a is being performed, the effect of emitting (lighting) the board lamp 5 is performed. , and the V image X6A is a luminescence image representing a state of luminescence. According to this configuration, the light emission effect by the V image X6A and the light emission effect by the board lamp 5 can create a gorgeous and dynamic effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the effect of displaying the luminous V-image X6A on the main display screen 7a is being performed, the effect of emitting (lighting) the board lamp 5 is performed. The V image X6A and the board lamp 5 are adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, the V image X6A and the board lamp 5 can create a brilliant and dynamic performance that is easily visible to the player, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the effect of displaying the V image X6A emitting light on the main display screen 7a and the effect of emitting (lighting) the board lamp 5 are being performed, the front frame 53 (outer frame) The frame lamp 66 arranged in the 1 is illuminated (turned on), and the V image X6A, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 form a "V-shape" integral display. According to this configuration, the V-image X6A, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 can create a dynamic effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the effect of displaying the V image X6A emitting light on the main display screen 7a and the effect of emitting (lighting) the board lamp 5 are being performed, the front frame 53 (outer frame) The V image X6A, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 form an integrated display that forms a "V shape", and the V image X6A is , and a luminescence image showing the state of luminescence. According to this configuration, the V image X6A, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 can create a gorgeous and dynamic performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the effect of displaying the V image X6A emitting light on the main display screen 7a and the effect of emitting (lighting) the board lamp 5 are being performed, the front frame 53 (outer frame) The frame lamp 66 arranged in the frame lamp 66 is illuminated (lighted), and the V image X6A, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 form a "V-shaped" integral display, and the board lamp 5 and It is adjacent to the frame lamp 66 . According to this configuration, the V image X6A, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66 can create a brilliant and dynamic effect that is easily visible to the player, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X6-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of effects,
inner frame and
a game board arranged in the inner frame;
an outer frame arranged outside the inner frame;
a first light-emitting unit arranged on the game board and capable of emitting light;
a display means capable of executing a display effect;
with
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display means,
The second effect is a effect of causing the first light emitting unit to emit light,
A combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed,
In the combined effect, the second effect is performed while the first effect is being performed, and the predetermined image displayed on the display means in the first effect and the second effect. Performing integrated display using the first light emitting unit in
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X6-1,
In the combined effect, when the integrated display is performed with the first effect and the second effect, the predetermined image displayed on the display means in the first effect represents a state of light emission. is a luminescent image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect X6-3]

The gaming machine according to aspect X6-2,
In the combination effect, the predetermined image displayed on the display means in the first effect and the first light emitting unit that emits light in the second effect are adjacent to each other,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X6-3,
The gaming machine further comprises
A second light-emitting unit arranged in the outer frame and capable of emitting light,
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed,
The third effect is a effect of causing the second light emitting unit to emit light,
The combination effect may include the third effect,
In the combination effect, the third effect is performed while the first effect and the second effect are being performed, and the predetermined effect displayed on the display means in the first effect Integrated display is performed using an image, the first light emitting unit that emits light in the second effect, and the second light emitting unit that emits light in the third effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X6-4,
In the combination effect, when the integrated display is performed by the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect, the predetermined image displayed on the display means in the first effect is , is a luminous image showing how it emits light,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X6-5,
In the combination effect, the first light emitting unit that emits light in the second effect and the second light emitting unit that emits light in the third effect are adjacent to each other,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The cut-in effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118. FIG. This cut-in effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the cut-in effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display screen. 7a and the sub-display screen 64 to display an image.

[Cut-in production A]
115 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect A. FIG. In the cut-in effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a, and the background image HK is displayed on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. The background image HK is an image representing the background displayed on the entire surfaces of the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Also, in this cut-in effect, a plurality of areas are set on the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64. FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 115A, the area above the area demarcated by the dashed line on the main display screen 7a is also called a main area X1, and the area below the area demarcated by the dashed line on the main display screen 7a is also referred to as a main area Y1, and the area above the area divided by the dashed line on the right sub-display screen 64 (also referred to as a right sub-display screen 64R) is also referred to as a sub-area X2. The area below the area demarcated by the dashed line is also called a sub-area Y2, and the area above the area demarcated by the dashed line on the left sub-display screen 64 (also referred to as the left sub-display screen 64L) is also called a sub-area X3. The area below the area demarcated by the dashed line on the left sub-display screen 64L is also called a sub-area Y3. Here, the main region X1, the sub-region X2, and the sub-region X3 are collectively referred to as a main sub-upper region. The main area Y1, the sub-area Y2, and the sub-area Y3 are collectively referred to as a main sub-lower area.

Also, in the example of FIG. 115A, the background image HK is indicated by hatching indicating "+". Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, a button image X7C is displayed in the sub-region Y2 of the right sub-display screen 64R. This button image X7C imitates the shape of the effect button 63, and displays a user interface screen for setting predetermined game information (information on the number of rotations, change information on the appearance rate of the chance-up effect, etc.). It is an image for prompting. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115B, the first image display effect is performed. In this first image display effect, the first cut-in image X7A is displayed in the main sub upper area like a cut-in. The first cut-in image X7A has a trapezoidal shape and is a continuous image displayed in the main area X1 and the sub-areas X2 and X3. The first cut-in image X7A is not arranged in the entire main sub-upper region, but is arranged in a part of the main sub-upper region. The area other than the first cut-in image X7A in the main sub-upper area and the main sub-lower area remain the background image HK. Also, in this first image display effect, a second cut-in image X7B, which will be described later, is not displayed. Furthermore, in this first image display effect, the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a ready-to-win state. In this case, the left decorative design 8L is displayed on the background image HK, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. In the example of FIG. 115(B), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same "7" design, and the middle decorative design 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), a second image display effect is performed. In this second image display effect, while the first cut-in image X7A is displayed in the main sub upper area, the second cut-in image X7B is displayed in the main sub lower area like a cut-in. The second cut-in image X7B has a trapezoidal shape and is a continuous image displayed in the main area Y1 and the sub-areas Y2 and Y3. The second cut-in image X7B is not arranged in the entire lower main sub area, but is arranged in a part of the lower main sub area. The area other than the first cut-in image X7A in the main sub-upper area and the area other than the second cut-in image X7B in the main sub-lower area remain the background image HK. In this second image display effect, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B are not adjacent and separated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), an image approach effect is performed. In this image-approaching effect, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B, which are separated from each other, move while enlarging and approach each other. Finally, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B adjoin each other via a boundary line X7D. The first cut-in image X7A is arranged in the entire main sub-upper region, and the second cut-in image X7B is arranged in the main sub-lower region. Further, in this image proximity effect, the decorative pattern 8L forming the ready-to-reach state is displayed on the second cut-in image X7B, and the right decorative pattern 8R forming the ready-to-reach state is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. , and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed near the boundary line X7D.
After this image approaching effect, a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, super ready-to-win effect, anticipation effect, chance-up effect) is performed.

[Cut-in production B]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining cut-in effect B. FIG. In the cut-in effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 116(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a, and the background image HK is displayed on the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64. The background image HK is an image representing the background displayed on the entire surfaces of the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Also, in this cut-in effect, a plurality of areas are set on the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64. FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 116A, the area above the area demarcated by the dashed line on the main display screen 7a is also called a main area X1, and the area below the area demarcated by the dashed line on the main display screen 7a is also referred to as a main area Y1, and the area above the area divided by the dashed line on the right sub-display screen 64 (also referred to as a right sub-display screen 64R) is also referred to as a sub-area X2. The area below the area demarcated by the dashed line is also called a sub-area Y2, and the area above the area demarcated by the dashed line on the left sub-display screen 64 (also referred to as the left sub-display screen 64L) is also called a sub-area X3. The area below the area demarcated by the dashed line on the left sub-display screen 64L is also called a sub-area Y3. Here, the main region X1, the sub-region X2, and the sub-region X3 are collectively referred to as a main sub-upper region. The main area Y1, the sub-area Y2, and the sub-area Y3 are collectively referred to as a main sub-lower area.

Also, in the example of FIG. 116A, the background image HK is indicated by hatching indicating "+". Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, a button image X7C is displayed in the sub-region Y2 of the right sub-display screen 64R. This button image X7C imitates the shape of the effect button 63, and displays a user interface screen for setting predetermined game information (information on the number of rotations, change information on the appearance rate of the chance-up effect, etc.). It is an image for prompting. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116B, the first image display effect is performed. In this first image display effect, the first cut-in image X7A is displayed in the main sub upper area like a cut-in, and the character image CRA is displayed. The first cut-in image X7A has a trapezoidal shape and is a continuous image displayed in the main area X1 and the sub-areas X2 and X3. The first cut-in image X7A is not arranged in the entire main sub-upper region, but is arranged in a part of the main sub-upper region. The area other than the first cut-in image X7A in the main sub-upper area and the main sub-lower area remain the background image HK. Also, the character image CRA is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. In this first image display effect, a second cut-in image X7B, which will be described later, is not displayed. Furthermore, in this first image display effect, the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a ready-to-win state. In this case, the left decorative design 8L is displayed on the background image HK, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. In the example of FIG. 116(B), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same "7" design, and the middle decorative design 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(C), a second image display effect is performed. In this second image display effect, while the first cut-in image X7A (including the character image CRA) is displayed in the main sub-upper region, the second cut-in image X7B is displayed in the main sub-lower region like a cut-in. is displayed, and a character image CRB is displayed. The second cut-in image X7B has a trapezoidal shape and is a continuous image displayed in the main area Y1 and the sub-areas Y2 and Y3. The second cut-in image X7B is not arranged in the entire lower main sub area, but is arranged in a part of the lower main sub area. The area other than the first cut-in image X7A in the main sub-upper area and the area other than the second cut-in image X7B in the main sub-lower area remain the background image HK. The character image CRB represents a character different from the character CRA, and is displayed on the second cut-in image X7B. In this second image display effect, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B are not adjacent and separated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(D), an image approach effect is performed. In this image-approaching effect, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B, which are separated from each other, move while enlarging and approach each other. Finally, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B adjoin each other via a boundary line X7D. The first cut-in image X7A is arranged in the entire main sub-upper region, and the second cut-in image X7B is arranged in the main sub-lower region. Also, in this image proximity effect, the character CRA disappears from the first cut-in image X7A, and the character image CRB displayed on the second cut-in image X7B moves to the first cut-in image X7A, It is displayed on one cut-in image X7A. No characters are displayed in the second cut-in image X7B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character image CRA may be moved to the second cut-in image X7B and displayed on the second cut-in image X7B, and as a result, the character image CRA and the character image CRB may be switched. good. Further, in this image proximity effect, the decorative pattern 8L forming the ready-to-reach state is displayed on the second cut-in image X7B, and the right decorative pattern 8R forming the ready-to-reach state is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. , and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed near the boundary line X7D.
After this image approaching effect, a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, super ready-to-win effect, anticipation effect, chance-up effect) is performed.

[Cut-in production C]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect C. FIG. In the cut-in effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a, and the background image HK is displayed on the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64. The background image HK is an image representing the background displayed on the entire surfaces of the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Also, in this cut-in effect, a plurality of areas are set on the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64. FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 117A, the area above the area demarcated by the dashed line on the main display screen 7a is also called a main area X1, and the area below the area demarcated by the dashed line on the main display screen 7a is also referred to as a main area Y1, and the area above the area divided by the dashed line on the right sub-display screen 64 (also referred to as a right sub-display screen 64R) is also referred to as a sub-area X2. The area below the area demarcated by the dashed line is also called a sub-area Y2, and the area above the area demarcated by the dashed line on the left sub-display screen 64 (also referred to as the left sub-display screen 64L) is also called a sub-area X3. The area below the area demarcated by the dashed line on the left sub-display screen 64L is also called a sub-area Y3. Here, the main region X1, the sub-region X2, and the sub-region X3 are collectively referred to as a main sub-upper region. The main area Y1, the sub-area Y2, and the sub-area Y3 are collectively referred to as a main sub-lower area.

Also, in the example of FIG. 117A, the background image HK is indicated by hatching indicating "+". Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, a button image X7C is displayed in the sub-region Y2 of the right sub-display screen 64R. This button image X7C imitates the shape of the effect button 63, and displays a user interface screen for setting predetermined game information (information on the number of rotations, change information on the appearance rate of the chance-up effect, etc.). It is an image for prompting. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117B, the first image display effect is performed. In this first image display effect, the first cut-in image X7A is displayed in the upper main sub-upper area like a cut-in, and the character image CRA is displayed. The first cut-in image X7A has a triangular shape and is a continuous image displayed in the main area X1 and the sub-areas X2 and X3. The first cut-in image X7A is arranged in the entire main sub-upper region. Also, the character image CRA is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. In this first image display effect, a second cut-in image X7B, which will be described later, is not displayed. Furthermore, in this first image display effect, the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a ready-to-win state. In this case, the left decorative design 8L is displayed on the background image HK, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. In the example of FIG. 117(B), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same "7" design, and the middle decorative design 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), a second image display effect is performed. In this second image display effect, while the first cut-in image X7A (including the character image CRA) is displayed in the main sub-upper area, the second cut-in image X7B appears in the main sub-lower area like a cut-in. is displayed, and a character image CRB is displayed. The second cut-in image X7B has a triangular shape and is a continuous image displayed in the main area Y1 and the sub-areas Y2 and Y3. The second cut-in image X7B is arranged in the entire main sub-lower area. Therefore, the background image HK disappears from the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG. The character image CRB represents a character different from the character CRA, and is displayed on the second cut-in image X7B. In this second image display effect, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B are adjacent to each other, and a boundary line X7D is displayed at their boundary. Further, in this second image display effect, the decorative pattern 8L forming the ready-to-reach state is displayed on the second cut-in image X7B, and the right decorative pattern 8R forming the ready-to-reach state is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. , and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed near the boundary line X7D.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a character movement effect is performed. In this character movement effect, the character CRA displayed on the first cut-in image X7A disappears, and the character image CRB displayed on the second cut-in image X7B moves to the first cut-in image X7A. , is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. No characters are displayed in the second cut-in image X7B. However, it is not limited to this, and the character image CRA may be moved to the second cut-in image X7B and displayed on the second cut-in image X7B, and as a result, the character image CRA and the character image CRB may be switched. good.
After this character movement effect, a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect, super ready-to-win effect, anticipation effect, chance up effect) is performed.

[Cut-in production D]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect D. FIG. In the cut-in effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 118(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a, and the background image HK is displayed on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. The background image HK is an image representing the background displayed on the entire surfaces of the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Also, in this cut-in effect, a plurality of areas are set on the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64. FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 118A, the area above the area demarcated by the dashed line on the main display screen 7a is also called a main area X1, and the area below the area demarcated by the dashed line on the main display screen 7a is also referred to as a main area Y1, and the area above the area divided by the dashed line on the right sub-display screen 64 (also referred to as a right sub-display screen 64R) is also referred to as a sub-area X2. The area below the area demarcated by the dashed line is also called a sub-area Y2, and the area above the area demarcated by the dashed line on the left sub-display screen 64 (also referred to as the left sub-display screen 64L) is also called a sub-area X3. The area below the area demarcated by the dashed line on the left sub-display screen 64L is also called a sub-area Y3. Here, the main region X1, the sub-region X2, and the sub-region X3 are collectively referred to as a main sub-upper region. The main area Y1, the sub-area Y2, and the sub-area Y3 are collectively referred to as a main sub-lower area.

Also, in the example of FIG. 118A, the background image HK is indicated by hatching indicating "+". Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, a button image X7C is displayed in the sub-region Y2 of the right sub-display screen 64R. This button image X7C imitates the shape of the effect button 63, and displays a user interface screen for setting predetermined game information (information on the number of spins, change information on the appearance rate of the chance-up effect, etc.). It is an image for prompting. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118B, the first image display effect is performed. In this first image display effect, the first cut-in image X7A is displayed on the entirety of the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64 in place of the background image HK, and the character image CRA is a continuous image. The character image CRA is the first cut-in image X7A and is displayed in the main sub upper area. In this first image display effect, a second cut-in image X7B, which will be described later, is not displayed. Furthermore, in this first image display effect, the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a ready-to-win state. In this case, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. In the example of FIG. 118(B), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same "7" design, and the middle decorative design 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a second image display effect is performed. In this second image display effect, while the first cut-in image X7A (including the character image CRA) is displayed in the main sub-upper area, the second cut-in image X7B appears in the main sub-lower area like a cut-in. is displayed, and a character image CRB is displayed. The second cut-in image X7B has a triangular shape and is a continuous image displayed in the main area Y1 and the sub-areas Y2 and Y3. The second cut-in image X7B is arranged in the entire main sub-lower area. The character image CRB represents a character different from the character CRA, and is displayed on the second cut-in image X7B. In this second image display effect, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B are adjacent to each other, and a boundary line X7D is displayed at their boundary. Further, in this second image display effect, the decorative pattern 8L forming the ready-to-reach state is displayed on the second cut-in image X7B, and the right decorative pattern 8R forming the ready-to-reach state is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. , and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed near the boundary line X7D.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(D), a character movement effect is performed. In this character movement effect, the character CRA displayed on the first cut-in image X7A disappears, and the character image CRB displayed on the second cut-in image X7B moves to the first cut-in image X7A. , is displayed on the first cut-in image X7A. No characters are displayed in the second cut-in image X7B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character image CRA may be moved to the second cut-in image X7B and displayed on the second cut-in image X7B, and as a result, the character image CRA and the character image CRB may be switched. good.
After this character movement effect, a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect, super ready-to-win effect, anticipation effect, chance-up effect) is performed.

[Modification]
In the cut-in effect, the button image X7C is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R to enable various settings, but other information may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64R. For example, as the other information, a rotation number display indicating the number of fluctuations after a big win, a consecutive winning number display indicating the consecutive winning number, and a winning ball number indicating the winning ball number display may be displayed.
In the cut-in effects B to D, the character image CRB displayed on the second cut-in image X7B moves to the first cut-in image X7A in the image approaching effect and the character movement effect, and the first cut-in image X7A is displayed. Although it is displayed in X7A, after that, an effect using this character image CRB (for example, a super ready-to-win effect or a chance-up effect) may be performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the cut-in effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the cut-in effect, the first cut-in image X7A is displayed using the main area X1 of the main display screen 7a and the sub-areas X2 and X3 of the sub-display screen 64, and the main display is performed. The second cut-in image X7B is displayed using the main area Y1 of the screen 7a and the sub-areas Y2 and Y3 of the sub-display screen 64, and when the first cut-in image X7A is being displayed, the second cut-in Image X7B is displayed. According to this configuration, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B, which are displayed to the player over both the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64, are displayed at the same time. The first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B can impress, and the interest of the production using the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the cut-in effect, the second image display effect is performed after the first image display effect. That is, the first cut-in image X7A is displayed when the second cut-in image X7B is not displayed, and then the second cut-in image X7B is displayed when the first cut-in image X7A is displayed. be. According to this configuration, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B, which are displayed to the player over both the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64, are displayed at the same time. The first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B can give an impression, and when the second cut-in image X7B is not displayed, the first cut-in image X7A is displayed, and then the first cut-in image X7A is displayed. Since the second cut-in image X7B is displayed while the in-image X7A is being displayed, attention can be drawn to each image. It is possible to improve the interest of the production using and. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the cut-in effect D, when the first cut-in image X7A is displayed when the second cut-in image X7B is not displayed in the first image display effect, the main display When a part of the first cut-in image X7A is displayed in the main area Y1 of the screen 7a and the sub-areas Y2 and Y3 of the sub-display screen 64, and the first cut-in image X7A is displayed in the second image display effect. When the second cut-in image X7B is displayed in the main area Y1 and the sub-areas Y2 and Y3, part of the first cut-in image X7A displayed in the main area Y1 and the sub-areas Y2 and Y3 is replaced with the second cut-in image X7B. 2 cut-in image X7B is displayed. According to this configuration, when the first cut-in image X7A is displayed when the second cut-in image X7B is not displayed, the main area Y1 of the main display screen 7a and the sub-area Y2 of the sub-display screen 64 are displayed. , Y3, the first cut-in image X7A can be emphasized, and the second cut-in image X7A can be displayed while the first cut-in image X7A is displayed. When X7B is displayed, part of the first cut-in image X7A displayed in the main area Y1 and the sub-areas Y2 and Y3 is replaced with the second cut-in image X7B. Appearance can be emphasized. Therefore, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B can be emphasized, respectively, and the interest of the production using the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the cut-in effect, the character image CRA is included in the first cut-in image X7A in the first image display effect, and the character image CRB is included in the second cut-in image X7B in the second image display effect. is included. According to this configuration, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B can be further emphasized, and the interest of the production using the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B is improved. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the cut-in effect, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B are displayed adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B can be further emphasized, and the interest of the production using the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B is improved. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the cut-in effect, a boundary line X7D is displayed at the boundary between the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B. According to this configuration, it is possible to clearly distinguish the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B, thereby suppressing misidentification of the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B. It is possible to improve the interest of the production using the first cut-in image X7A and the second cut-in image X7B. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X7-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of display effects using first display means and second display means,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first image using a first area of the first display means and a second area of the second display means,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying a second image using a third area of the first display means and a fourth area of the second display means;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X7-1,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed when the second display effect is not performed, and then the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X7-2,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed when the second display effect is not performed, the third area of the first display means and the second display means part of the first image is displayed in the fourth area of and when the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed replaces a portion of the first image in the third region and the fourth region with the second image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X7-3,
In the combination effect, the first image in the first display effect includes a first character, and the second image in the second display effect is different from the first character. a different second character is included,

[Aspect X7-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X7-4,
In the combination effect, the first image in the first display effect and the second image in the second display effect are adjacent to each other,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X7-5,
a boundary line is displayed on the boundary between the first image in the first display effect and the second image in the second display effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

119 to 122, the timer activation effect will be described below. This timer effect can be executed in relation to the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"). For example, at the start of variable display of special symbols, at the start of variable production of decorative symbols, during ready-to-win production (super ready-to-win production), etc., can be executed.

[Timer activation effect A]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the timer activation effect A. FIG.
In the timer activation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 119(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 119B, the first specific image display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first specific image display effect is an effect of displaying a timer activation suggesting image TMH as a first specific image suggesting that the timer is activated. When this first specific image display effect is executed, a timer activation suggestion image TMH is displayed in the approximate center of the main display screen 7a. The timer activation suggestion image TMH displays characters M1 of "timer activation" suggesting that the timer is activated in a rectangular frame WH. In other words, the timer activation suggesting image TMH indicates in characters that the timer is activated. The inside of the rectangular frame WH is colored black, for example, and the characters M1 of "timer start" are displayed in white (white characters), for example. Note that the timer activation suggestion image TMH is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 5 seconds) and then erased at the displayed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), a timer display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer display effect is executed when the timer activation suggestion image TMH is erased. In this timer display effect, when the timer activation suggesting image TMH is erased, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed again, and during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the timer image TM1 is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a. Is displayed. The timer image TM1 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 119C shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), the timer effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer expiry effect shows the state when the timer value of the timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 119(C) is counted down to zero seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), the second specific image display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second specific image display effect is an effect of displaying an additional timer activation suggesting image TTM as a second specific image which is an image related to the first specific image and suggests that an additional timer is activated. . When this second specific image display effect is executed, an additional timer activation suggestive image TTM is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a. The additional timer activation suggesting image TTM includes the above-described timer activation suggesting image TMH and an additional suggesting image TMT as a third specific image displayed stepwise on the upper left side of the timer activation suggesting image TMH, suggesting the addition of the timer activation. and is displayed. In the additional suggesting image TMT, characters M2 of "additional" suggesting that the timer is additionally activated are displayed in a rectangular frame WT. That is, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM is a combination of the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional timer suggesting image TMT, and suggests in characters that the timer is additionally activated. Further, the inside of the rectangular frame WT is colored red, for example, and the characters M2 of "add" are displayed, for example, in black. The horizontal length of the rectangular frame WT is shorter than the horizontal length of the rectangular frame WH, and the vertical length of the rectangular frame WT is formed longer than the vertical length of the rectangular frame WH. appear large and thick. That is, the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional suggesting image TMT are displayed in different display modes, and in the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, the additional suggesting image TMT is displayed more conspicuously than the timer activation suggesting image TMH. . Note that the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 5 seconds) and then erased at the displayed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), an additional timer display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This additional timer display effect is executed when the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM is erased. In this additional timer display effect, when the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM is erased, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed again, and during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the timer image TM2 is displayed on the main display screen 7a. displayed in the upper right. Here, the timer image TM2 is displayed larger than the timer image TM1 and is displayed more conspicuously than the timer image TM1. Note that the timer image TM2 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value is counted down similarly to the timer image TM1. The timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 119F shows 20 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(G), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win production, when the timer value of the timer image TM2 shown in FIG. ing. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement.

[Timer activation effect B]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the timer activation effect B. FIG.
In the timer activation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 120(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 120(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 120B, the first specific image display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first specific image display effect is an effect of displaying a timer activation suggesting image TMH as a first specific image suggesting that the timer is activated. When this first specific image display effect is executed, a timer activation suggestion image TMH is displayed in the approximate center of the main display screen 7a. The timer activation suggestion image TMH displays characters M1 of "timer activation" suggesting that the timer is activated in a rectangular frame WH. In other words, the timer activation suggesting image TMH indicates in characters that the timer is activated. The inside of the rectangular frame WH is colored black, for example, and the characters M1 of "timer start" are displayed in white (white characters), for example. Note that the timer activation suggestion image TMH is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 5 seconds) and then erased at the displayed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), a timer display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer display effect is executed when the timer activation suggestion image TMH is erased. In this timer display effect, when the timer activation suggesting image TMH is erased, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed again, and during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the timer image TM1 is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a. Is displayed. The timer image TM1 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 120C shows 50 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(D), the timer effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer expiration effect shows the state when the timer value of the timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 120(C) is counted down to 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(E), the second specific image display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second specific image display effect is an effect of displaying an additional timer activation suggesting image TTM as a second specific image which is an image related to the first specific image and suggests that an additional timer is activated. . When this second specific image display effect is executed, an additional timer activation suggestive image TTM is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a. The additional timer activation suggesting image TTM includes the above-described timer activation suggesting image TMH and an additional suggesting image TMT as a third specific image displayed stepwise on the upper left side of the timer activation suggesting image TMH, suggesting the addition of the timer activation. and is displayed. In the additional suggesting image TMT, characters M2 of "additional" suggesting that the timer is additionally activated are displayed in a rectangular frame WT. That is, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM is a combination of the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional timer suggesting image TMT, and suggests in characters that the timer is additionally activated. Further, the inside of the rectangular frame WT is colored red, for example, and the characters M2 of "add" are displayed, for example, in black. The horizontal length of the rectangular frame WT is shorter than the horizontal length of the rectangular frame WH, and the vertical length of the rectangular frame WT is formed longer than the vertical length of the rectangular frame WH. appear large and thick. That is, the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional suggesting image TMT are displayed in different display modes, and in the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, the additional suggesting image TMT is displayed more conspicuously than the timer activation suggesting image TMH. . Note that the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 5 seconds) and then erased at the displayed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(F), an additional timer display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This additional timer display effect is executed when the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM is erased. In this additional timer display effect, when the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM is erased, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed again, and during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the timer image TM2 is replaced with the timer image TM1. is separately displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 7a. That is, the timer image TM1 and the timer image TM2 are simultaneously displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the timer image TM2 is displayed larger than the timer image TM1 and is displayed more conspicuously than the timer image TM1. Note that the timer image TM2 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value is counted down similarly to the timer image TM1. The timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 120(F) shows 99 seconds as the timer initial value. A timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 120(F) shows a state when the timer value of the timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 120(D) is counted down to 20 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(G), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win production, when the timer value of the timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 120(F) is counted down to 70 seconds, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. ing. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Note that when the timer value of the timer image TM2 reaches 70 seconds, the timer image TM1 has already expired and the timer value indicates 0 seconds.

[Timer activation effect C]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the timer activation effect C. FIG.
In the timer activation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 121(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 121(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), the first specific image display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first specific image display effect is an effect of displaying a timer activation suggesting image TMH as a first specific image suggesting that the timer is activated. When this first specific image display effect is executed, a timer activation suggestion image TMH is displayed in the approximate center of the main display screen 7a. The timer activation suggestion image TMH displays characters M1 of "timer activation" suggesting that the timer is activated in a rectangular frame WH. In other words, the timer activation suggesting image TMH suggests in characters that the timer is activated. The inside of the rectangular frame WH is colored black, for example, and the characters M1 of "timer start" are displayed in white (white characters), for example. Note that the timer activation suggestion image TMH is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 5 seconds) and then erased at the displayed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(C), a timer display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer display effect is executed when the timer activation suggestion image TMH is erased. In this timer display effect, when the timer activation suggesting image TMH is erased, the decorative pattern variable effect is performed again, and during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the timer image TM1 is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a. Is displayed. The timer image TM1 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 121C shows 50 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the timer effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer expiration effect shows the state when the timer value of the timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 121(C) is counted down to 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(E), the second specific image display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second specific image display effect is an effect of displaying an additional timer activation suggesting image TTM as a second specific image which is an image related to the first specific image and suggests that an additional timer is activated. . When this second specific image display effect is executed, an additional timer activation suggestive image TTM is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a. The additional timer activation suggesting image TTM includes the above-described timer activation suggesting image TMH and an additional suggesting image TMT as a third specific image displayed stepwise on the upper left side of the timer activation suggesting image TMH, suggesting the addition of the timer activation. and is displayed. In the additional suggesting image TMT, characters M2 of "additional" suggesting that the timer is additionally activated are displayed in a rectangular frame WT. That is, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM is a combination of the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional timer suggesting image TMT, and suggests in characters that the timer is additionally activated. Further, the inside of the rectangular frame WT is colored red, for example, and the characters M2 of "add" are displayed, for example, in black. Further, the horizontal length of the rectangular frame WT is shorter than the horizontal length of the rectangular frame WH, and the vertical length of the rectangular frame WT is formed longer than the vertical length of the rectangular frame WH. appear large and thick. That is, the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional suggesting image TMT are displayed in different display modes, and in the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, the additional suggesting image TMT is displayed more conspicuously than the timer activation suggesting image TMH. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(F), the second specific image movement effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. When the second specific image moving effect is executed, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, which has been stopped substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a, moves leftward so as to rotate in a substantially elliptical shape. Here, the timer activation suggesting image TMH moves from approximately the center of the main display screen 7a to a first position on the approximately lower left side of the main display screen 7a. On the other hand, the additional suggestion image TMT moves from approximately the center of the main display screen 7a to a second position on the approximately lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L adjacent to the left side of the main display screen 7a.
That is, the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, which constitute the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, simultaneously rotate in a substantially elliptical shape from substantially the center of the main display screen 7a. Then, when the timer activation suggesting image TMH reaches the first position on the substantially lower left side of the main display screen 7a, the timer activation suggesting image TMH stops at the first position. On the other hand, the additional suggestive image TMT does not stop moving even when the timer-initiated suggestive image TMH reaches the first position, and further continues to rotate leftward in a substantially elliptical shape separate from the timer-initiated suggestive image TMH. Then, when the additional suggestive image TMT reaches the second position on the substantially lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L, the additional suggestive image TMT stops at the second position. In a state where the timer activation suggesting image TMH is positioned at the first position and the additional suggesting image TMT is positioned at the second position, the timer triggering suggesting image TMH is entirely displayed on the substantially lower left side of the main display screen 7a, and the additional suggesting image is displayed. The TMT is displayed entirely on the lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L, and the additional suggestive image TMT is displayed to the left and above the timer-initiated suggestive image TMH, separated from the timer-initiated suggestive image TMH. Note that the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional suggesting image TMT are erased at the displayed positions (first position and second position) after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(F), an additional timer display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This additional timer display effect is executed when the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM (timer activation suggesting image TMH and additional timer suggesting image TMT) is erased. In this additional timer display effect, when the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM is erased, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed again, and during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the timer image TM2 is replaced with the timer image TM1. is separately displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 7a. That is, the timer image TM1 and the timer image TM2 are simultaneously displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the timer image TM2 is displayed larger than the timer image TM1 and is displayed more conspicuously than the timer image TM1. Note that the timer image TM2 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value is counted down similarly to the timer image TM1. The timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 121(F) shows 99 seconds as the timer initial value. A timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 121(F) shows a state when the timer value of the timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 121(D) is counted down to 20 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(G), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win production, when the timer value of the timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 121(F) is counted down to 70 seconds, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. ing. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Note that when the timer value of the timer image TM2 reaches 70 seconds, the timer image TM1 has already expired and the timer value indicates 0 seconds.

[Timer activation effect D]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the timer activation effect D. FIG.
In the timer activation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 122(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 122(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(B), the first specific image display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This first specific image display effect is an effect of displaying a timer activation suggesting image TMH as a first specific image suggesting that the timer is activated. When this first specific image display effect is executed, a timer activation suggestion image TMH is displayed in the approximate center of the main display screen 7a. The timer activation suggestion image TMH displays characters M1 of "timer activation" suggesting that the timer is activated in a rectangular frame WH. In other words, the timer activation suggesting image TMH suggests in characters that the timer is activated. The inside of the rectangular frame WH is colored black, for example, and the characters M1 of "timer start" are displayed in white (white characters), for example. Note that the timer activation suggestion image TMH is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 5 seconds) and then erased at the displayed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), a timer display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer display effect is executed when the timer activation suggestion image TMH is erased. In this timer display effect, when the timer activation suggesting image TMH is erased, the decorative pattern variable effect is performed again, and during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the timer image TM1 is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a. Is displayed. The timer image TM1 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 122(C) shows 50 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), the timer effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This timer completion effect shows the state when the timer value of the timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 122(C) is counted down to 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(E), the second specific image display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This second specific image display effect is an effect of displaying an additional timer activation suggesting image TTM as a second specific image which is an image related to the first specific image and suggests that an additional timer is activated. . When this second specific image display effect is executed, an additional timer activation suggestive image TTM is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a. The additional timer activation suggesting image TTM includes the above-described timer activation suggesting image TMH and an additional suggesting image TMT as a third specific image displayed stepwise on the upper left side of the timer activation suggesting image TMH, suggesting the addition of the timer activation. and is displayed. In the additional suggesting image TMT, characters M2 of "additional" suggesting that the timer is additionally activated are displayed in a rectangular frame WT. That is, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM is a combination of the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional timer suggesting image TMT, and suggests in characters that the timer is additionally activated. Further, the inside of the rectangular frame WT is colored red, for example, and the characters M2 of "add" are displayed, for example, in black. The horizontal length of the rectangular frame WT is shorter than the horizontal length of the rectangular frame WH, and the vertical length of the rectangular frame WT is formed longer than the vertical length of the rectangular frame WH. appear large and thick. That is, the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional suggesting image TMT are displayed in different display modes, and in the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, the additional suggesting image TMT is displayed more conspicuously than the timer activation suggesting image TMH. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(F), the second specific image movement effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. When the second specific image moving effect is executed, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, which has been stopped substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a, moves leftward so as to rotate in a substantially elliptical shape. Here, the timer activation suggesting image TMH moves from approximately the center of the main display screen 7a to a first position on the approximately lower left side of the main display screen 7a. On the other hand, the additional suggestion image TMT moves from approximately the center of the main display screen 7a to a second position on the approximately lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L adjacent to the left side of the main display screen 7a.
That is, the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, which constitute the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM, simultaneously rotate in a substantially elliptical shape from substantially the center of the main display screen 7a. Then, when the timer activation suggesting image TMH reaches the first position on the substantially lower left side of the main display screen 7a, the timer activation suggesting image TMH stops at the first position. On the other hand, the additional suggestive image TMT does not stop moving even when the timer-initiated suggestive image TMH reaches the first position, and further continues to rotate leftward in a substantially elliptical shape separate from the timer-initiated suggestive image TMH. Then, when the additional suggestive image TMT reaches the second position on the substantially lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L, the additional suggestive image TMT stops at the second position. In a state where the timer activation suggesting image TMH is positioned at the first position and the additional suggesting image TMT is positioned at the second position, the timer triggering suggesting image TMH is entirely displayed on the substantially lower left side of the main display screen 7a, and the additional suggesting image is displayed. The TMT is displayed entirely on the lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L, and the additional suggestive image TMT is displayed to the left and above the timer-initiated suggestive image TMH, separated from the timer-initiated suggestive image TMH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(G), the second specific image erasing effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. When the second specific image erasing effect is executed, the timer activation suggesting image TMH, which has been stopped at the first position on the main display screen 7a, moves to the right so as to rotate in a substantially elliptical shape. The additional suggestive image TMT, which has stopped at the second position on the left sub-display screen 64L, moves rightward so as to rotate in a substantially elliptical shape, similar to the timer activation suggestive image TMH. Then, the timer activation suggestion image TMH is gradually erased while rotating from the lower side of the main display screen 7a. Further, the additional suggestion image TMT is gradually erased while rotating from the right side of the left sub-display screen 64L. Note that in FIG. 122G, the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional suggesting image TMT are displayed in the process of being erased from the main display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. It is displayed on the main display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L in a state where a part and a part of the additional suggestive image TMT remain.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(F), an additional timer display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This additional timer display effect is executed when the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM (timer activation suggesting image TMH and additional timer suggesting image TMT) is erased. In this additional timer display effect, when the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM is erased, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed again, and during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the timer image TM2 is replaced with the timer image TM1. is separately displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 7a. That is, the timer image TM1 and the timer image TM2 are simultaneously displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the timer image TM2 is displayed larger than the timer image TM1 and is displayed more conspicuously than the timer image TM1. Note that the timer image TM2 is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value is counted down similarly to the timer image TM1. The timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 122(F) shows 99 seconds as the timer initial value. A timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 121(F) shows a state when the timer value of the timer image TM1 shown in FIG. 122(D) is counted down to 20 seconds.

Next, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 121(G) described above, the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win production, when the timer value of the timer image TM2 shown in FIG. ing. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Note that when the timer value of the timer image TM2 reaches 70 seconds, the timer image TM1 has already expired and the timer value indicates 0 seconds.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer activation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 122, an effect of displaying the timer activation suggesting image TMH as the first specific image suggesting that the timer is activated is performed, and an additional timer is displayed. is configured to display an additional timer activation suggesting image TTM as a second specific image suggesting that is activated. According to this configuration, when the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM is displayed, the player can approach the game with high expectations. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 122, the additional timer activation suggestion image TTM as the second specific image suggesting that the additional timer is activated indicates that the timer is activated. an additional suggestion image TMT as a third specific image suggesting addition of timer activation to a timer activation suggestion image TMH as a first specific image suggesting a It is configured to be displayed above the activation suggestion image TMH. According to this configuration, the additional suggestive image TMT suggesting the addition of timer activation as the third specific image can be conspicuous, and the player can easily understand that the additional timer activation suggestive image TTM has been displayed. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 122, the first specific image is displayed as a timer activation suggesting character image that suggests with characters that the timer is activated, and the second specific image is displayed as , is displayed as an additional timer activation suggesting character image that suggests in characters that an additional timer is activated, and the third specific image is displayed as a character image that suggests addition in characters. According to this configuration, the player can very easily understand the contents of the displayed first specific image, second specific image, and third specific image. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, after the first specific image is displayed on the main display screen, it is fixed at the displayed position, while the second specific image is displayed on the main display screen, the portion of the first specific image moves to a predetermined position on the main display screen, and the portion of the third specific image is separated from the portion of the first specific image and displayed as a sub-display. It is configured to move to a predetermined position on the screen. According to this configuration, the display of the second specific image suggesting that the additional timer is activated requires more attention than the display of the first specific image that suggests that the timer is activated. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from overlooking the display of the second specific image suggesting that the additional timer is activated. In particular, since the third specific image portion moves from the main display screen to the sub-display screen separately from the first specific image portion, the effect is great. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, the first specific image is erased while being fixedly displayed on the main display screen, and the second specific image is displayed in the main display while the first specific image is displayed. From the position moved to the predetermined position on the screen, the portion of the third specific image is erased while rotating from the position moved to the predetermined position on the sub-display screen. According to this configuration, the display of the second specific image suggesting that the additional timer is activated requires more attention than the display of the first specific image that suggests that the timer is activated. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from overlooking the display of the second specific image suggesting that the additional timer is activated. In particular, since the portion of the third specific image is erased from the sub-display screen while being rotated, the effect is great. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer activation production|presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, after the additional timer display effect is executed, the ready-to-win effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM2 reaches a predetermined value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timer value of the timer image TM2 expires, a ready-to-win effect may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 122, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM is arranged on the upper left side of the timer activation suggesting image TMH in a stepped manner so as not to overlap the timer activation suggesting image TMH. Although the additional suggestive image TMT is displayed by arranging (adjacent to) the additional suggestive image TMT, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM may be displayed such that the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional timer suggesting image TMT partially overlap each other. However, in this case, it is preferable to display the characters M1 of "timer activation" and the characters M2 of "addition" in a visible manner. Alternatively, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM may be displayed in such a manner that the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional timer suggesting image TMT are separated from each other. For example, the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional suggesting image TMT may be displayed with a predetermined gap.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 122, the additional timer activation suggesting image TTM is composed of the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional timer suggesting image TMT. Although the suggestive image TMT is displayed larger (the characters M2 of "add" are larger than the characters M1 of "timer activation"), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional suggesting image TMT (“timer activation” characters M1 and “additional” characters M2) may be displayed in the same size. Further, the colors of the timer activation suggesting image TMH and the additional suggesting image TMT may be changed according to the degree of expectation.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, the additional suggestion image TMT is moved from the main display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L adjacent to the left side of the main display screen 7a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the additional suggestion image TMT may move from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R adjacent to the right side of the main display screen 7a. Alternatively, the additional suggestion image TMT may be moved from the main display screen 7a to the upper sub-display screen 64U adjacent to the upper side of the main display screen 7a. In this case, the timer activation suggestive image TMH may be moved in the same direction as the additional suggestive image TMT within the main display screen 7a.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, the additional suggestion image TMT moves from the main display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L and is displayed entirely on the left sub-display screen 64L. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the additional suggestive image TMT may be displayed entirely across the main display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. Alternatively, only a portion may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, the timer activation suggesting image TMH is displayed in its entirety by moving from approximately the center of the main display screen 7a to approximately the lower left side. , the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the timer activation suggestion image TMH may be displayed in its entirety across the main display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. Alternatively, only a portion may be displayed on the main display screen 7a.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, the additional suggestion image TMT is gradually erased while rotating from the right side of the left sub-display screen 64L, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing For example, the additional suggestion image TMT may be erased from the left side, upper side, or lower side of the left sub-display screen 64L. In addition, it may be erased by linear or irregular movement other than rotation. Alternatively, the additional suggestion image TMT may be moved from the left sub-display screen 64L to another display screen (main display screen 7a, right sub-display screen 64R, or upper sub-display screen 64U) and deleted from the other display screen. can be

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, the timer activation suggestion image TMH is gradually erased while rotating from the lower side of the main display screen 7a, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the timer activation suggestion image TMH may be erased from the left side, top side, or right side of the main display screen 7a. In addition, it may be erased by linear or irregular movement other than rotation. Alternatively, the timer activation suggestion image TMH is moved from the main display screen 7a to another display screen (the left sub-display screen 64L, the right sub-display screen 64R, or the upper sub-display screen 64U) and deleted from the other display screen. You may do so.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined first specific image,
the second effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined second specific image related to the first specific image;
The display means displays the second specific image by adding a predetermined third specific image to the first specific image in a predetermined display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C4-2]
the first specific image is a timer activation suggesting image suggesting that a timer is activated;
the second specific image is an additional timer activation suggestion image that suggests that an additional timer is activated;
The third specific image is an image suggesting addition, and is displayed stepwise above the first specific image.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-3]
the first specific image is a timer activation suggesting text image that suggests in text that the timer is activated;
the second specific image is an additional timer activation suggesting text image that suggests in text that an additional timer is activated;
The third specific image is a character image suggesting addition by characters, and is displayed in a stepped manner above the first specific image, and is displayed in a display mode different from that of the timer activation suggesting character image. ,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-4]
main display screen and
a sub display screen adjacent to the main display screen;
is provided,
after the first specific image is displayed on the main display screen, it is fixed at the displayed position;
After the second specific image is displayed on the main display screen, the portion of the first specific image moves to a predetermined position on the main display screen, and the portion of the third specific image moves to the first specific image. separated from the image portion and moved to a predetermined position on the sub-display screen;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-5]
the first specific image is erased while fixedly displayed on the main display screen;
In the second specific image, the portion of the first specific image is shifted from a position moved to a predetermined position on the main display screen, and the portion of the third specific image is shifted from a position shifted to a predetermined position on the sub display screen. Erased while rotating,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-4, characterized by:

123 to 126, operation means appearance effects A to D will be described below. This operating means appearance effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation means appearance effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Operation means appearance effect A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the operating means appearance effect A. FIG. FIGS. 123A to 123J show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the operating means appearance effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the main display screen 7a to produce a decorative pattern variation effect (variation display). appears, then a reach is formed. After the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative design, the decorative design and the pending icon disappear, and as shown in FIG. 123(B), the special ready-to-win effect is started.

In the special reach effect, first, an image W1 is displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 7a where nothing is displayed. Here, the image W1 is a character image representing the character of "iron". Note that the image W1 is a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters. Specific objects are not limited to letters, characters, creatures, and objects, but also include abstract hazes such as graphics and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), an image W2 is displayed at the lower right of the main display screen 7a, below the image W1. Here, the image W2 is a character image representing the characters "fist". Note that the image W2 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters as in the case of the image W1. Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), an image W3 is displayed on the upper left of the main display screen 7a and to the left of the image W1. In this case, the image W3 is a character image representing the characters of "restriction". Note that the image W3 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters as in the case of the image W1. Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), an image W4 is displayed at the bottom left of the main display screen 7a and at the bottom left of the image W1. In this case, the image W4 is a character image representing the characters of "sa". Note that the image W4 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters as in the case of the image W1. The four images W1 to W4 are sequentially displayed one by one on the main display screen 7a. The four images W1 to W4 are arranged in a rectangular shape on the main display screen 7a, and the four images W1 to W4 constitute the phrase "Tekken Sanction".

After that, as shown in FIG. 123(F), a smoke-like image KG is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a surrounded by the four images W1 to W4 arranged in a square shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 123(G), a button image BTN appears from the smoke-like image KG. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The button image BTN is displayed at a position surrounded by the positions where the four images W1 to W4 were displayed on the main display screen 7a. Almost simultaneously with the appearance of this button image BTN, the images W1 to W4 of ``iron'', ``fist'', ``regulation'', and ``cut'' move to the sub-display screen 64 all at once. Specifically, the image W1 moves rightward and is displayed above the right sub-display screen 64R. Image W2 moves to the right and is displayed below right sub-display screen 64R. The image W3 moves leftward and is displayed above the left sub-display screen 64L. The image W4 moves leftward and is displayed below the left sub-display screen 64L. The images W1 to W4 are displayed across the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 during movement. Next, as shown in FIG. 123(H), in a state where images W1 to W4 are displayed on the sub display screen 64, the image KG disappears on the main display screen 7a, and the button image BTN as well as the operation A promotion image RND and an operation effective period suggestion image TBI are displayed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "Press" and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation). The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 .

When the player presses the production button 63, as shown in FIG. 123(I), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position, and then the first member constituting the second movable accessory 15 A drive effect is executed in which the 15a and the second member 15b are relatively slid. Here, the second member 15b slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the first member 15a. Specifically, while the first member 15a is stationary, the second member 15b moves diagonally (lower left direction) along the boundary line between the first member 15a and the second member 15b. An effect image is displayed on the main display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 123(J), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a jackpot manner.

[Operation Means Appearance Effect B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the operating means appearance effect B. FIG. FIGS. 124A to 124J show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the operation means appearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 124(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the main display screen 7a to produce a decorative pattern variation effect (variation display). appears, then a reach is formed. After the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative design, the decorative design and the pending icon disappear, and as shown in FIG. 124(B), the special ready-to-win effect is started. At the start of the special ready-to-win production, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reduced while forming the ready-to-win, and displayed in reduced size on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a.

An image W1 is displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 7a while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in reduced size on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. Here, the image W1 is a character image representing the characters "iron". Note that the image W1 is a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters. Specific objects are not limited to letters, characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract hazes such as figures and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets. The image W1 is partially covered with the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), an image W2 is displayed at the lower right of the main display screen 7a, below the image W1. Here, the image W2 is a character image representing the characters "fist". Note that the image W2 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters as in the case of the image W1. Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), an image W3 is displayed on the upper left of the main display screen 7a and to the left of the image W1. In this case, the image W3 is a character image representing the characters of "restriction". Note that the image W3 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters as in the case of the image W1. The image W3 is partially covered with the left decorative design 8L. Next, as shown in FIG. 124(E), an image W4 is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a and at the lower left of the image W1. In this case, the image W4 is a character image representing the characters of "sa". Note that the image W4 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters as in the case of the image W1. The four images W1 to W4 are sequentially displayed one by one on the main display screen 7a. The four images W1 to W4 are arranged in a rectangular shape on the main display screen 7a, and the four images W1 to W4 constitute the phrase "Tekken Sanction".

After that, as shown in FIG. 124(F), a smoke-like image KG is displayed in the central portion of the main display screen 7a surrounded by the four images W1 to W4 arranged in a square shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 124(G), a button image BTN appears from the smoke-like image KG. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The button image BTN is displayed at a position surrounded by the positions where the four images W1 to W4 were displayed on the main display screen 7a. Almost simultaneously with the appearance of this button image BTN, the images W1 to W4 of ``iron'', ``fist'', ``regulation'', and ``cut'' are moved to the sub-display screen 64, respectively. Specifically, the image W1 moves rightward and is displayed above the right sub-display screen 64R. Image W2 moves to the right and is displayed below right sub-display screen 64R. The image W3 moves leftward and is displayed above the left sub-display screen 64L. The image W4 moves leftward and is displayed below the left sub-display screen 64L. The images W1 to W4 are displayed across the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 during movement. Next, as shown in FIG. 124(H), while images W1 to W4 are displayed on the sub display screen 64, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. After the reduced display of 8R continues and the image KG disappears, the button image BTN, the operation prompting image RND, and the operation effective period suggesting image TBI are displayed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "Press" and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation). The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 .

When the player presses the production button 63, as shown in FIG. 124(I), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position, and then the first member constituting the second movable accessory 15 A drive effect is executed in which the 15a and the second member 15b are relatively slid. Here, the second member 15b slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the first member 15a. Specifically, while the first member 15a remains stationary, the second member 15b moves diagonally (lower left direction) along the boundary line between the first member 15a and the second member 15b. An effect image is displayed on the main display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 124(J), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a jackpot mode.

[Operation means appearance effect C]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the operating means appearance effect C. FIG. 125(A) to (J) show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the operation means appearance effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the main display screen 7a to produce a decorative pattern variation effect (variation display). appears, then a reach is formed. After the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative design, the decorative design and the pending icon disappear, and as shown in FIG. 125(B), the special ready-to-win effect is started.

In the special reach effect, first, an image W1 is displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 7a where nothing is displayed. Here, the image W1 is a face image representing the face of a person who smiles. Note that the image W1 is a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to a human face. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract hazes such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representations are unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), an image W2 is displayed at the lower right of the main display screen 7a, below the image W1. Here, the image W2 is a face image representing a face with the tongue sticking out and one eye closed. Note that the image W2 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to a human face as in the case of the image W1. Next, as shown in FIG. 125(D), an image W3 is displayed on the upper left of the main display screen 7a and to the left of the image W1. Here, the image W3 is a face image representing the face of a person wearing sunglasses. Note that the image W3 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to a human face as in the case of the image W1. Next, as shown in FIG. 125(E), an image W4 is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a and at the lower left of the image W1. Here, the image W4 is a face image representing the face of a person who is smiling with his mouth open. Note that the image W4 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to a human face as in the case of the image W1. The four images W1 to W4 are sequentially displayed one by one on the main display screen 7a. The four images W1 to W4 are arranged in a rectangular shape on the main display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(F), the light image KG is displayed in the central portion of the main display screen 7a surrounded by the four images W1 to W4 arranged in a square shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 125(G), the button image BTN appears from the light image KG. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The button image BTN is displayed at a position surrounded by the positions where the four images W1 to W4 were displayed on the main display screen 7a. Three images W1, W2, and W4 move to the sub display screen 64 almost at the same time as this button image BTN appears. Image W3 does not move. The image W1 changes its form into a ball of light, moves rightward, and is redisplayed above the right sub-display screen 64R. The image W2 disappears from the main display screen 7a and is redisplayed below the right sub-display screen 64R. The image W4 moves leftward and is displayed below the left sub-display screen 64L. The image W4 is displayed across the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64 during movement. Next, as shown in FIG. 125(H), images W1, W2, and W4 are displayed on the sub display screen 64, and the image W3 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the image KG is displayed on the main display screen 7a. It disappears, and in addition to the button image BTN, an operation prompting image RND and an operation effective period suggesting image TBI are further displayed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "Press" and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation). The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 .

When the player presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 125(I), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position, and then the first member constituting the second movable accessory 15 A driving effect is executed in which the 15a and the second member 15b are relatively slid. Here, the second member 15b slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the first member 15a. Specifically, while the first member 15a remains stationary, the second member 15b moves diagonally (lower left direction) along the boundary line between the first member 15a and the second member 15b. An effect image is displayed on the main display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 125(J), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a jackpot mode.

[Operation Means Appearance D]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the operating means appearance effect D. FIG. FIGS. 126A to 126J show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the operation means appearance effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 126(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the main display screen 7a to produce a decorative pattern variation effect (variation display). appears, then a reach is formed. After the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative design, the decorative design and the pending icon disappear, and as shown in FIG. 126(B), the special ready-to-win effect is started.

In the special reach effect, first, an image W1 is displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 7a where nothing is displayed. Here, the image W1 is a face image representing the face of a person who smiles. Note that the image W1 is a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to a human face. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract hazes such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representations are unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets. After the image W1 is displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 7a, it moves within the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(C), an image W2 is displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the image W2 is a face image representing a face with the tongue sticking out and one eye closed. Note that the image W2 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to a human face as in the case of the image W1. After being displayed on the main display screen 7a, the image W2 moves within the main display screen 7a. The image W1 continues to move within the main display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 126(D), an image W3 is displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the image W3 is a face image representing the face of a person wearing sunglasses. Note that the image W3 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to a human face as in the case of the image W1. After being displayed on the main display screen 7a, the image W3 moves within the main display screen 7a. The image W1 occasionally stops within the main display screen 7a. The image W2 continues to move within the main display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 126(E), an image W4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the image W4 is a face image representing the face of a person who is smiling with his mouth open. Note that the image W4 is also a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to a human face as in the case of the image W1.
After being displayed on the main display screen 7a, the image W4 moves within the main display screen 7a. The images W1 and W2 are partially protruding from the main display screen 7a. The image W3 occasionally stops within the main display screen 7a. The four images W1 to W4 are sequentially displayed one by one on the main display screen 7a. After that, the four images W1 to W4 stop in a rectangular arrangement on the main display screen 7a by each movement.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(F), the light image KG is displayed in the central portion of the main display screen 7a surrounded by the four images W1 to W4 arranged in a square shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 126(G), the button image BTN appears from the light image KG. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The button image BTN is displayed at a position surrounded by the positions where the four images W1 to W4 were displayed on the main display screen 7a. Almost simultaneously with the appearance of this button image BTN, four images W1 to W4 are also displayed on the sub-display screen 64 as shown in FIG. 126(H). That is, the four images W1 to W4 are continuously displayed on the main display screen 7a, and are newly displayed on the sub display screen 64 as well. The image W1 is displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 7a and above the right sub-display screen 64R. The image W2 is displayed in the lower right of the main display screen 7a and in the lower part of the right sub-display screen 64R. The image W3 is displayed on the upper left of the main display screen 7a and above the left sub-display screen 64L. The image W4 is displayed at the bottom left of the main display screen 7a and at the bottom of the left sub-display screen 64L. On the main display screen 7a, the image KG disappears, and in addition to the button image BTN, an operation prompting image RND and an operation valid period suggesting image TBI are further displayed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "Press" and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation). The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 .

When the player presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 126(I), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the advanced position, and then the first member constituting the second movable accessory 15 A driving effect is executed in which the 15a and the second member 15b are relatively slid. Here, the second member 15b slides in an oblique direction (lower left direction) with respect to the first member 15a. Specifically, while the first member 15a remains stationary, the second member 15b moves diagonally (lower left direction) along the boundary line between the first member 15a and the second member 15b. An effect image is displayed on the main display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 126J), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a jackpot manner.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means appearance effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 126, a first effect in which the images W1 and W2 are displayed on the main display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the images W1 and W2 are displayed on the right side. A second effect in which the button image BTN is displayed on the sub display screen 64R and the main display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 126, a plurality of images W1 to W4 are displayed on the main display screen 7a in the first effect, and a plurality of images W1 are displayed in the second effect. A portion of W4 (images W1 and W2) is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, and the rest (images W3 and W4) are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 126, in the first effect, a plurality of images W1 to W4 are displayed in order one by one. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 126, in the second effect, the button image BTN is displayed at a position surrounded by the positions where the four images W1 to W4 were displayed. be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124, in the first effect, the decorative symbols are displayed on the first display means in a state of forming reach, and the decorative symbols are part of the images W1 to W4. cover the According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the images W1 to W4 are character images. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the operation means appearance effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
123 and 124, the images W1 to W4 of ``iron'', ``fist'', ``regulation'', and ``cut'' are moved to the sub-display screen 64 almost at the same time as the button image BTN appears. I assumed. However, the timing at which the images W1 to W4 move to the sub display screen 64 is not limited to this. For example, after the button image BTN appears on the main display screen 7a, the images W1 to W4 may move to the sub-display screen 64 after a while, or the images W1 to W4 may move to the sub-display screen 64 before the button image BTN appears on the main display screen 7a. W1 to W4 may move to the sub display screen 64 respectively. Further, the timings at which the images W1 to W4 move to the sub-display screen 64 do not have to be simultaneous, and may be different timings.

[Modification 2]
123 to 126, the operation means appearance effects A to D are described assuming that the four images W1 to W4 are displayed. However, the number of images W displayed on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64 is not limited to four. The number of images W displayed in the operation means appearance effects A to D may be one, or may be two or three. Also, the number may be four or more. Further, when a plurality of images W are displayed, the plurality of images W may be displayed all at once on the main display screen 7a. Moreover, after being displayed on the main display screen 7a, the plurality of images W may all be displayed once on one of the sub-display screens 64 and then displayed on the other. After the image W is displayed on the main display screen 7a, the image W may disappear once, be displayed again on the main display screen 7a, and then be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG. The image W may change its appearance after being displayed on the main display screen 7a. That is, after the image W is displayed, if the player can identify the image, the shape, color, and the like may be changed. Moreover, you may divide into two or more on the way. In this case, at least one divided image may be moved to the sub-display screen 64 as in the operation means appearance effects A to D. FIG.

[Modification 3]
Operation means appearance effects A to D in FIGS. 123 to 126 may be combined as appropriate. For example, when the images W1 to W4 move from the main display screen 7a to the sub-display screen 64 in the operating means appearance effect A, the mode changes like the image W1 shown in FIG. may

[Modification 4]
123 to 126, operation means appearance effects A to D may not include some of the described effects, or may include other effects. for example. In the operating means appearance effect A, the effects of 123(I) and 123(J) may not be provided. Further, in the operating means appearance effect A, after 123(A), 123(E) may be executed without executing 123(B) to (D).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C5-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target;
a first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the first display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the specific image is displayed on the second display means and the operation means image is displayed on the first display means can be executed. game machine.
◇ [Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1 further comprises
A third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided,
In the first effect, a plurality of the specific images are displayed on the first display means,
A gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, part of the plurality of specific images are displayed on the second display means, and the rest are displayed on the third display means.
◇ [Aspect C5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the plurality of specific images are displayed one by one in order.
◇ [Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-2 or aspect C5-3,
In the second effect, the operating means image is displayed at a position surrounded by positions where the plurality of specific images were displayed.
◇ [Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In the first effect, the decorative pattern is displayed on the first display means in a state of forming a reach, and the decorative pattern covers a part of the specific image.
◇ [Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-5,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific image is a character image.

User-customized display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. FIG. In this user customized display effect, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol") is displayed during fluctuation (during one fluctuation display), while fluctuation is stopped, and the game state is the standby state. (Predetermined period, state in which special symbols are not changed), normal state, high probability state, time saving state, electric chew support (electric chew 22 is frequently opened to make it easier to win the second starting port 21) (hereinafter also referred to as "power supply").

[User customized display effect A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the user-customized display effect A. FIG.
In the user customization display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 127(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). On the lower left side of the main display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a pending icon (holding digested image) 9C related to the above-described first special symbol, and a pedestal image 9D on which these pending icons 9A and 9C are placed are displayed. It is designed to be In this figure, as an example, a first pending icon and a second pending icon are displayed as the pending icon 9A, indicating that there are two pending memories related to the first special symbol (excluding the pending memory).
A user customized display YC is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L adjacent to the left side of the main display screen 7a. This user-customized display YC is always displayed after the game machine 1 is powered on until the power is shut off. Normally, the user customized display YC is displayed on the lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L, as shown in FIG. 127(A). The user customization display YC is a display for notifying that predetermined settings of the gaming machine can be changed by operating the select button 68 (FIG. 1) described above. , and a second image MH suggesting that the setting of the gaming machine can be changed by characters (“user customization”). The second image MH is displayed above the first image SH. The predetermined setting changes (setting of predetermined items) in the gaming machine include, for example, changing the background image (stage), changing the display mode of decorative patterns, changing the production pattern (production mode), changing the main character, volume control, light emission control, and the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(B), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. 127(A), the suspended icon 9C and the first suspended icon 9A are digested, and the second suspended icon 9A is replaced by the suspended icon 9C as the decorative symbol 8L, 8C and 8R show that the results of the variable display are lost. In this example, "958" is shown in this losing pattern array. It should be noted that the pending icon 9C is erased almost at the same time that the "958" stops in the losing pattern arrangement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(C), a user-customized display position change effect is executed. This user-customized display position change effect is executed when a predetermined time (for example, about 10 to 30 seconds) elapses after "958" is stop-displayed in the failing pattern array shown in FIG. 127(B). In other words, in the user customized display position change effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed without the game ball entering the above-described first starting port 20 even after a predetermined time has passed since "958" was stopped and displayed in the losing pattern array. , 8R is executed when the variable display of 8R is not performed. When the user customization display position change effect is executed, the user customization display YC displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is erased, and at the same time, the user customization display YC is displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the display position of the user customized display YC is on the lower left side of the main display screen 7a, covering a part of the pedestal image 9D related to the pending icon 9A and not overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(D), a user-customized display position return effect is executed. In this user customization display position return effect, a game ball enters the first start hole 20 in a state where the user customization display YC is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (" 958”) is executed when it starts to oscillate. That is, in the user customized display position return effect, when the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the user customized display YC displayed on the main display screen 7a is erased, and at the same time, the user customized display is displayed. YC is displayed in its original position on the left sub-display screen 64L. When the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change, the pending icon 9C is displayed.

[User customized display effect B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining user-customized display effect B. FIG.
In the user customization display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 128(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). On the lower left side of the main display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a pending icon (holding digested image) 9C related to the above-described first special symbol, and a pedestal image 9D on which these pending icons 9A and 9C are placed are displayed. It is designed to be In this figure, as an example, a first pending icon and a second pending icon are displayed as the pending icon 9A, indicating that there are two pending memories related to the first special symbol (excluding the pending memory).
A user customized display YC is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L adjacent to the left side of the main display screen 7a. This user-customized display YC is always displayed after the game machine 1 is powered on until the power is shut off. Normally, the user customized display YC is displayed on the lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L, as shown in FIG. 128(A). The user customization display YC is a display for notifying that predetermined settings of the gaming machine can be changed by operating the select button 68 (FIG. 1) described above. , and a second image MH suggesting that the setting of the gaming machine can be changed by characters (“user customization”). The second image MH is displayed above the first image SH. The predetermined setting changes (setting of predetermined items) in the gaming machine include, for example, changing the background image (stage), changing the display mode of decorative patterns, changing the production pattern (production mode), changing the main character, Examples include volume control and light emission control.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. 128(A), the suspended icon 9C and the first suspended icon 9A are digested, and the second suspended icon 9A is replaced by the suspended icon 9C as the decorative symbol 8L, 8C and 8R show that the results of the variable display are lost. In this example, "958" is shown in this losing pattern array. It should be noted that the pending icon 9C is erased almost at the same time when the "958" stops in the losing pattern arrangement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), a user-customized display position change effect is executed. This user-customized display position change effect is executed when a predetermined time (for example, about 10 to 30 seconds) elapses after "958" is stop-displayed in the failing pattern array shown in FIG. 128(B). In other words, in the user customized display position change effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed without the game ball entering the above-described first starting port 20 even after a predetermined time has passed since "958" was stopped and displayed in the losing pattern array. , 8R is executed when the variable display of 8R is not performed. When the user customization display position change effect is executed, the user customization display YC displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is erased, and at the same time, the user customization display YC is displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the display position of the user customized display YC is on the lower left side of the main display screen 7a, covering a part of the pedestal image 9D related to the pending icon 9A and not overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(D), a user-customized enlarged display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This user-customized enlarged display effect is executed when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 to 60 seconds) elapses after the user-customized display YC shown in FIG. 128(C) is displayed on the main display screen 7a. In other words, this user-customized enlarged display effect is executed when a predetermined time (for example, about 40 to 90 seconds) elapses after "958" is stop-displayed in the failing pattern array shown in FIG. 128(B). In other words, in the user customized enlarged display effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed without the game ball entering the above-described first start hole 20 even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the user customized display YC was displayed on the main display screen 7a. , 8R is executed when the variable display of 8R is not performed. When the user-customized enlarged display effect is executed, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“958”) and the base image 9D is switched, and the main display screen 7a becomes a standby screen. Although omitted, demonstration images such as animation are displayed. Then, the user customized display YC displayed on the lower left side of the main display screen 7a is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a which is the standby screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(E), a user-customized display position return effect is executed. In this user-customized display position return effect, the game ball wins the first start hole 20 in a state where the user-customized display YC is enlarged and displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed again. Executed when the change starts. In other words, in the user customized display position return effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, the user customized display YC enlarged and displayed on the main display screen 7a is erased, and at the same time, the user customized display YC is displayed. , is displayed at its original position on the left sub-display screen 64L. Note that when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed again and start to change, the pending icon 9C and the pedestal image 9D are displayed.

[User customized display effect C]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the user-customized display effect C. FIG.
In the user customized display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), a time-saving (electrical support) start effect is executed when a jackpot game with a specific jackpot ends. In this time-saving (electrical sapo) start production, the characters “Time-saving start!” A hitting right arrow YR is displayed to encourage hitting to the right. A message MU consisting of characters "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YR. The player is urged by the display of this right-handed arrow YR to hit right-handedly, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball is easily thrown into the second starting port 21 (electrical sapo) where winning is facilitated. can win a prize.
A user customized display YC is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L adjacent to the left side of the main display screen 7a. This user-customized display YC is always displayed after the game machine 1 is powered on until the power is shut off. Normally, the user customized display YC is displayed on the lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L, as shown in FIG. 129(A). The user customization display YC is a display for notifying that predetermined settings of the gaming machine can be changed by operating the select button 68 (FIG. 1) described above. , and a second image MH suggesting that the setting of the gaming machine can be changed by characters (“user customization”). The second image MH is displayed above the first image SH. The predetermined setting changes (setting of predetermined items) in the gaming machine include, for example, changing the background image (stage), changing the display mode of decorative patterns, changing the production pattern (production mode), changing the main character, Examples include volume control and light emission control.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(B), when the game ball wins in the second starting port 21, the main display screen 7a starts the variable display of the decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. be done. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 129(B) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolling downward). On the lower right side of the main display screen 7a, there are a pending icon 9B and a pending icon (holding digested image) 9C related to the above-described second special symbol, and a pedestal image 9D on which these pending icons 9B and 9C are placed. It is now displayed. In this figure, as an example, a first pending icon and a second pending icon are displayed as the pending icon 9B, indicating that there are two pending memories related to the second special symbol (excluding the pending memory). Further, instead of the right-handed arrow YR and the message MU, a right-handed arrow SYR for prompting the player to hit right-handed and "Right-handed" below the right-handed arrow SYR are displayed in the upper center of the main display screen 7a. A message SMU consisting of the characters is displayed. The right arrow YR and the message SMU are continuously displayed during the time saving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), the time saving final fluctuation stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In the time saving game, the number of fluctuations of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is predetermined (for example, 100 times), and in this time saving final fluctuation stop effect, the last decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the time saving game are changed. and the fluctuation result indicates that it was lost. In this example, "958" is shown in this losing pattern array. Incidentally, in this time-saving final fluctuation stop production, as an example, a first reserved icon, a second reserved icon, a third reserved icon, and a fourth reserved icon are displayed as the reserved icon 9B, and four reserved memories related to the second special symbol are displayed. (full, excluding the relevant reserved memory). In addition, the pending icon 9C is erased almost at the same time that "958" stops in the losing pattern arrangement. A rightward arrow SYR and a message SMU are displayed in the upper center of the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(D), a user-customized display position change effect is executed. This user customized display position change effect is executed when the losing pattern array "958" shown in FIG. 129(C) is stopped and displayed and the time saving game is finished. When the user customized display position change effect is executed, the missing pattern array “958” is erased, and on the main display screen 7a, the characters “time saving end!” , a left-handed arrow YL is displayed to urge the player to hit left-handed. Inside and outside the display area of the left-handed arrow YL, a message HU consisting of characters "Please return to left-handed" is displayed. The player is prompted by the display of the left-handed arrow YL and the message HU to hit left-handed, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the first start hole 20 . Note that the right-handed arrow SYR and the message SMU displayed in the upper center of the main display screen 7a are erased when the time-saving game ends.
Further, when the user-customized display position change effect is executed, the pending icon 9C, the pending icon 9B, and the pedestal images 9D related to the pending icons 9C and 9B displayed on the lower right side of the main display screen 7a are erased. Instead, a pedestal image 9D related to the pending icon 9A is displayed on the lower left side of the main display screen 7a. Here, this example is a gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate at the same time, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the first Only the variable display related to the special design is performed and only the reserved icon 9A is displayed, and in the time saving state (low probability high base state), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R perform only the variable display related to the second special design and are reserved. Only the icon 9B is displayed. Therefore, when the time saving game ends, the four reserved memories (holding icon 9B) related to the second special symbol shown in FIG. is not displayed, and the pending memory (holding icon 9A) related to the first special symbol is hardly generated during the time-saving game because the right-handed hit is performed and it is a simultaneous change, therefore, the user customized display position In the change effect, the pending icon 9A is not displayed, and only the pedestal image 9D related to the pending icon 9A is displayed.
When the user customization display position change effect is executed, the user customization display YC displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is erased, and at the same time, the user customization display YC is displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the display position of the user customized display YC is on the lower left side of the main display screen 7a, covers part of the pedestal image 9D related to the hold icon 9A, and is near the left of the left arrow YL and the message HU. It is displayed so as not to overlap the left arrow YL and the message HU. That is, the user customized display YC, the left arrow YL, and the message HU are displayed close together at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(E), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this decorative pattern stop effect, in the user customized display position change effect shown in FIG. ) is displayed again on the main display screen 7a. That is, the left-handed arrow YL and the message HU are displayed for a predetermined period (for example, about 5 to 10 seconds) after the time-saving game ends. When the lost pattern array "958" is redisplayed on the main display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R (the lost pattern array "958") are displayed so as not to overlap the user customized display YC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(F), a user-customized display position return effect is executed. In this user customization display position return effect, a game ball enters the first start hole 20 in a state where the user customization display YC is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (" 958”) is executed when it starts to oscillate. That is, in the user customized display position return effect, when the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the user customized display YC displayed on the main display screen 7a is erased, and at the same time, the user customized display is displayed. YC is displayed in its original position on the left sub-display screen 64L. When the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change, the pending icon 9C is displayed.

[User customized display effect D]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the user-customized display effect D. FIG.
In the user customized display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 130(A), a time-saving (power support) start effect is executed when the jackpot game with a specific jackpot ends. In this time-saving (electrical sapo) start production, the characters “Time-saving start!” A right-handed arrow YR is displayed for prompting right-handed players. A message MU consisting of characters "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YR. The player is urged by the display of this right-handed arrow YR to hit right-handedly, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball is easily thrown into the second starting port 21 (electrical sapo) where winning is facilitated. can win a prize.
A user customized display YC is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L adjacent to the left side of the main display screen 7a. This user-customized display YC is always displayed after the game machine 1 is powered on until the power is shut off. Normally, the user customized display YC is displayed on the lower left side of the left sub-display screen 64L, as shown in FIG. 130(A). The user customization display YC is a display for notifying that predetermined settings of the gaming machine can be changed by operating the select button 68 (FIG. 1) described above. , and a second image MH suggesting that the setting of the gaming machine can be changed by characters (“user customization”). The second image MH is displayed above the first image SH. The predetermined setting changes (setting of predetermined items) in the gaming machine include, for example, changing the background image (stage), changing the display mode of decorative patterns, changing the production pattern (production mode), changing the main character, volume control, light emission control, and the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), when the game ball wins the second starting port 21, the main display screen 7a starts the variable display of the decorative design synchronized with the variable display of the second special design in the time saving state. be done. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 130(B) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). On the lower right side of the main display screen 7a, there are a pending icon 9B and a pending icon (holding digested image) 9C related to the above-described second special symbol, and a pedestal image 9D on which these pending icons 9B and 9C are placed. It is now displayed. In this figure, as an example, a first pending icon and a second pending icon are displayed as the pending icon 9B, indicating that there are two pending memories related to the second special symbol (excluding the pending memory). In addition, instead of the right-handed arrow YR and the message MU, a right-handed arrow SYR for prompting the player to hit right-handed is displayed at the upper center of the main display screen 7a, and "Right-handed" is displayed below the right-handed arrow SYR. A message SMU consisting of the characters is displayed. The rightward arrow YR and the message SMU are continuously displayed until the time-saving final variable stop effect, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(C), the time reduction final fluctuation stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In the time saving game, the number of fluctuations of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is predetermined (for example, 100 times), and in this time saving final fluctuation stop effect, the last decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the time saving game are changed. and the fluctuation result indicates that it was lost. In this example, "958" is shown in this losing pattern array. In addition, in this time-saving final fluctuation stop effect, as an example, a first pending icon, a second pending icon, a third pending icon, and a fourth pending icon are displayed as the pending icon 9B, and four pending memories related to the second special symbol are displayed. (full, excluding the relevant reserved memory). In addition, the pending icon 9C is erased almost at the same time that "958" stops in the losing pattern arrangement. Here, in this time-saving final fluctuation stop effect, instead of the right-handed arrow SYR and message SMU displayed in the upper center of the main display screen 7a, the player is prompted to hit left-handed on the upper left side of the main display screen 7a. A left-throwing arrow SYL is displayed for the purpose, and a message SHU composed of characters "left-throwing" is displayed below the left-throwing arrow SYL. That is, the left arrow SYL and the message SHU are displayed even though the time saving state has not ended. The player is prompted by the display of the left-handed arrow SYL and the message SHU to hit left-handed, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the first start hole 20 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(D), a result display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This result display effect is executed when the losing pattern array "958" shown in FIG. When the result display effect is executed, the losing pattern array "958" is erased, and on the main display screen 7a, the characters "time saving end!" The display showing the number of hits and the number of hits obtained in this rush (the period in which the jackpot and probability variation or time reduction continues) is displayed on the result screen. In this example, the display related to the number of balls put out is "3580 hits", and the display related to the number of big wins is "3 big wins". Note that the left arrow SYL and the message SHU are continuously displayed even in the result display effect. Further, when the result display effect is executed, the pending icon 9C, the pending icon 9B, and the pedestal image 9D related to the pending icons 9C and 9B displayed on the lower left side of the main display screen 7a are also erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(E), a user-customized display position change effect is executed. This user-customized display position change effect is executed when the result screen shown in FIG. 130(D) is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 to 10 seconds). When the user customized display position change effect is executed, on the main display screen 7a, the lost pattern array "958" stopped and displayed in the time saving final fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. A left-handed arrow YL for urging the player to hit left and a message HU are displayed in front of the lost pattern array "958" so as to partially overlap the lower part of the lost pattern array "958". be. The message HU is composed of characters "Please return to left-handed hitting", and is displayed inside and outside the display area of the left-handed arrow YL. By looking at the display of this left-handed arrow YL and the message HU, the player reconfirms that he will hit left-handed, and the player who has not hit left-handed immediately hits left-handed and enters the first starting port. It is possible to win a game ball at 20.
Further, when the user-customized display position change effect is executed, a pedestal image 9D related to the pending icon 9A is displayed on the lower left side of the main display screen 7a. Here, this example is a gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate at the same time, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the first Only the variable display related to the special design is performed and only the reserved icon 9A is displayed, and in the time saving state (low probability high base state), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R perform only the variable display related to the second special design and are reserved. Only the icon 9B is displayed. Therefore, when the time saving game ends, the four reserved memories (holding icon 9B) related to the second special symbol shown in FIG. is not displayed, and the pending memory (holding icon 9A) related to the first special symbol is hardly generated during the time-saving game because the right-handed hit is performed and it is a simultaneous change, therefore, the user customized display position In the change effect, the pending icon 9A is not displayed, and only the pedestal image 9D related to the pending icon 9A is displayed.
When the user customization display position change effect is executed, the user customization display YC displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is erased, and at the same time, the user customization display YC is displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the display position of the user customized display YC is on the lower left side of the main display screen 7a, covers part of the pedestal image 9D related to the hold icon 9A, and is near the left of the left arrow YL and the message HU. It is displayed so as not to overlap the left arrow YL and the message HU. That is, the user customized display YC, the left arrow YL, and the message HU are displayed close together at the same time. Also, the user customized display YC is displayed so as not to overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (the lost pattern array "958").

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(F), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the left arrow YL and the message HU are deleted in the user customized display position change effect shown in FIG. 130(E). That is, the left arrow YL and the message HU are displayed for a predetermined period (for example, about 5 to 10 seconds) after the result screen is switched and the user-customized display position change effect is executed on the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(G), a user-customized display position return effect is executed. In this user customization display position return effect, a game ball enters the first start hole 20 in a state where the user customization display YC is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (" 958”) is executed when it starts to oscillate. That is, in the user customized display position return effect, when the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the user customized display YC displayed on the main display screen 7a is erased, and at the same time, the user customized display is displayed. YC is displayed in its original position on the left sub-display screen 64L. When the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change, the pending icon 9C is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the user-customized display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the user customization display is normally displayed on the sub display screen, and displayed on the main display screen when the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped. It is configured to According to this configuration, by displaying the user-customized display on the main display screen when the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped, the user-customized display can be made conspicuous without interfering with the game of the player. As a result, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the user-customized display, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the user-customized display is normally displayed on the sub-display screen, and when the decoration pattern is not displayed, it is enlarged on the standby screen of the main display screen or the like. It is configured to According to this configuration, by enlarging and displaying the user customized display on the main display screen when the decorative pattern is not displayed, the user customized display can be made more conspicuous without interfering with the game of the player. Also, it is possible to make the user-customized display conspicuous to a player who is about to play the game machine. As a result, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the user-customized display, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the user customized display displayed on the main display screen is displayed at the original position on the sub display screen when the decorative symbols start to change. It is configured to be According to this configuration, when the variation of the decorative pattern is started, the original sub-display screen is displayed, so that the user-customized display can be made conspicuous without interfering with the game of the player. As a result, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the user-customized display, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, while the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped until the time saving state ends and returns to the normal state, on the main display screen, left-handed It is configured to display the user customization display at the same time as displaying the left-handed display that prompts. According to this configuration, at the end of the time-saving state, which is a scene in which the player is highly interested, the user customized display can be displayed on the main display screen at the same time as the left-handed display prompting the left-handed player. As a result, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the user-customized display, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the user customization display includes a first image simulating an operation means for performing user customization and characters indicating that the settings of the gaming machine can be changed. and the second image suggested by . According to this configuration, the player can easily find the operating means and perform user customization. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, when the user customized display is displayed on the main display screen, it is displayed at the position where the pending icon is displayed at the timing when the pending icon is not displayed. It is configured to According to this configuration, even if the user customized display is displayed in the display area of the pending icon, the player's game is not hindered. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the limited display area of the main display screen to display the user-customized display. As a result, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the user-customized display, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 7]
As shown in FIG. 130, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is configured to display a left-handed display prompting a left-handed player even though the time saving state has not ended. According to this configuration, it is possible to urge the player to hit left as soon as possible and prevent the player from shooting useless game balls. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, the display positions of the right-handed arrow SYR and the left-handed arrow SYL on the main display screen are different. According to this configuration, the right-handed arrow SYR and the left-handed arrow SYL can impress the player, and the player's failure to overlook the right-handed arrow SYR and the left-handed arrow SYL is prevented from shooting a game ball in vain. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the user-customized display effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the user customization display includes a first image simulating an operation means for performing user customization and characters indicating that the settings of the gaming machine can be changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second image may be displayed using symbols other than characters.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the user-customized display is displayed as a plane image (2D), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the user-customized display may be displayed as a stereoscopic image (3D). In this case, only the first image simulating the operating means may be displayed as a stereoscopic image (3D). By doing so, it is possible to display the first image imitating a realistic operation means, and to make the user customized display stand out.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, on the main display screen, the left-handed display prompting the left-handed player is displayed, and at the same time, the user customized display is displayed, and the left-handed player display is displayed first. Although erased, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the decorative symbols start to change before the display time of the left-handed display elapses, the user-customized display and the left-handed display may be erased from the main display screen at the same time.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the user customized display is displayed in the same display mode on the sub display screen and the main display screen, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the user-customized display may display the first image or the second image in different shades on the sub display screen and the main display screen. Furthermore, in the user-customized display, the display mode such as the color and the positional relationship between the first image and the second image may be changed according to the degree of expectation for a big win such as a ready-to-win effect.
[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the user customized display is normally displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L adjacent to the left side of the main display screen 7a. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the user customized display may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or may be displayed on the upper sub-display screen 64U. Alternatively, it may be displayed across the main display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L, right sub-display screen 64R, or upper sub-display screen 64U.
[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the user customized display is displayed on the main display screen at the same time as it is deleted from the sub display screen, or at the same time it is deleted from the main display screen. Although displayed on the display screen, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the user customized display may be moved from the sub display screen to the main display screen or from the main display screen to the sub display screen. Furthermore, when moving from the left sub-display screen to the main display screen, the main display screen may be moved to the right sub-display screen or the upper sub-display screen other than the left sub-display screen. When moving and displaying, the moving display may be performed together with a predetermined sound effect.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C6-1]
display means provided with a main display screen and a sub-display screen adjacent to the main display screen, and capable of executing a plurality of display effects on the main display screen and the sub-display screen;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a user-customized display for notifying that a predetermined setting change of the gaming machine can be performed by operating the operating means,
The display means performs the first effect on the sub display screen, and performs the first effect on the main display screen when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C6-2]
A pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns is provided,
The display means is
a variable display of decorative patterns can be displayed at least on the main display screen according to the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
When the decorative pattern is not displayed on the main display screen, the first effect can be performed on the main display screen,
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C6-3]
A pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns is provided,
The display means is
a variable display of decorative patterns can be displayed at least on the main display screen according to the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
When the variation of the decorative pattern on the main display screen is stopped, the first effect can be performed on the main display screen,
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C6-4]
The display means is
When the variation of the decorative pattern on the main display screen is started, the execution of the first effect on the main display screen is stopped, and the first effect is performed on the sub display screen;
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C6-5]
a jackpot game executing means for executing the jackpot game by changing the game state to a jackpot when the symbols variably displayed by the pattern display means are jackpot patterns;
a time-saving game executing means for executing the time-saving game by changing the game state after the big-hit game executed by the jackpot game executing means to a time-saving game;
with
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined third effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second effect is a effect of displaying a right-handed display prompting right-handed hitting,
The third effect is a effect of displaying a left-handed display prompting left-handed,
The display means is
During the time saving game, the second effect is performed at least on the main display screen, and when the time saving game ends, the third effect is performed at least on the main display screen for a predetermined period, and the third effect is displayed. The user customized display displayed in the first effect can be displayed at the same time as the left-handed display that
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-5, characterized by:
[Aspect C6-6]
The user customization display includes a first image imitating the operation means and a second image suggesting that the setting of the gaming machine can be changed,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-5, characterized by:

131 to 134, the main sub image movement effect A to D will be described below. This main-sub-image moving effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the main sub image moving effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Main sub image movement effect A]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the main sub-image movement effect A. FIG. In the main sub-image movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 131(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(B), a character display effect is performed. In this character display effect, the character image CRA is displayed on the main display screen 7a, the character image CRB is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, and the character image CRC is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The character image CRA is an image representing an ally character, the character image CRB is an image representing an enemy character, and the character image CRC is an image representing a person laughing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(C), character movement effect A is performed. In this character movement effect A, the character image CRA displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, and the character image CRB displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R moves to the main display screen 7a. At the same time, the character image CRC displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L moves to the main display screen 7a. In this case, when the character image CRA moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, the character image CRB moves to the main display screen 7a and the character image CRC moves to the main display screen 7a. That is, these movements are performed simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(D), character movement effect B is performed. In this character movement effect B, the character image CRA displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R moves to the main display screen 7a again, and the character image CRB displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the left sub-display screen 64L. Along with the movement, the character image CRC displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the right sub-display screen 64R. In this case, when the character image CRA moves to the main display screen 7a, the character image CRB moves to the left sub-display screen 64L and the character image CRC moves to the right sub-display screen 64R. That is, these movements are performed simultaneously.
After that, a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead effect, pending change effect) is performed.

[Main sub image movement effect B]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the main sub-image movement effect B. FIG. In the main-sub-image moving effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 132(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(B), an effect display presentation is performed. In this effect display effect, the effect image X8A is displayed on the main display screen 7a, the effect image X8B is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, and the effect image X8C is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The effect images X8A, X8B, and X8C are images representing red effects, and are elongated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(C), an effect movement presentation A is performed. In this effect movement presentation A, the effect images X8A, X8B, and X8C move clockwise so as to draw an ellipse. That is, part of the effect image X8A displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, and part of the effect image X8B displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R moves to the main display screen 7a. Along with the movement, part of the effect image X8C displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L moves to the main display screen 7a. In this case, when the effect image X8A moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, the effect image X8B moves to the main display screen 7a and the effect image X8C moves to the main display screen 7a. That is, these movements are performed simultaneously. In addition, in this effect movement production A, a lightning image X8E is projected from the tip of the effect image X8B moved to the main display screen 7a toward the end of the effect image X8C displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. be At this time, the effect image X8B and the lightning image X8E are adjacent (communicating).

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(D), effect movement presentation B is performed. In this effect moving effect B, part of the effect image X8A displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R moves to the main display screen 7a again, and part of the effect image X8B displayed on the main display screen 7a Along with moving to the left sub-display screen 64L, part of the effect image X8C displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the right sub-display screen 64R. In this case, when part of the effect image X8A moves to the main display screen 7a, part of the effect image X8B moves to the left sub-display screen 64L and part of the effect image X8C moves to the right sub-display. Move to screen 64R. That is, these movements are performed simultaneously. Note that the effect images X8A, X8B, and X8C are displayed in front of predetermined information such as the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display image of the winning streak, the pending icon, the number of obtained balls, and the button display.
After that, a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead effect, pending change effect) is performed.

[Main sub image movement effect C]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the main sub-image movement effect C. FIG. In the main-sub-image moving effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 133(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(B), an effect display presentation is performed. In this effect display presentation, the effect image X8D is displayed on the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the right sub-display screen 64R. This effect image X8D is red and elongated. Among the effect images X8D, the effect image displayed on the main display screen 7a is also called the first effect image X8D1, the effect image displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is also called the second effect image X8D2, and the effect image displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is also called the first effect image X8D1. The displayed effect image is also called a third effect image X8D3. In the example of FIG. 133(B), the ends of the effect image X8D are arranged on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, respectively. In the effect image X8D displayed in FIG. 133(B), the edge displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is hereinafter referred to as the leading edge, and the edge displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is referred to as the trailing edge. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(C), effect movement presentation A is performed. In this effect movement presentation A, the effect image X8D moves clockwise so as to draw an ellipse. That is, part of the second effect image X8D2 displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R moves to the main display screen 7a, and part of the first effect image X8D1 displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the right sub-display screen 64R. Along with moving to the display screen 64R, part of the third effect image X8D3 displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L moves to the main display screen 7a. When the second effect image X8D2 moves to the main display screen 7a, the first effect image X8D1 moves to the right sub-display screen 64R and the third effect image X8D3 moves to the main display screen 7a. That is, these movements are performed simultaneously. Also, in this effect movement production A, a lightning image X8E is projected from the tip of the effect image X8D that has moved to the main display screen 7a toward the end of the effect image X8D. At this time, the effect image X8D and the lightning image X8E are adjacent (connected).

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(D), effect movement production B is performed. In this effect moving effect B, part of the first effect image X8D1 displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the left sub-display screen 64L, and the second effect image X8D2 displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is displayed. moves to the main display screen 7a. In this case, when the first effect image X8D1 moves to the left sub display screen 64L, the second effect image X8D2 moves to the main display screen 7a. These movements are performed simultaneously. The effect image X8D is displayed in front of predetermined information such as decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, consecutive chan display images, pending icons, acquired ball number display, button display, and the like.
After that, a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead effect, pending change effect) is performed.

[Main sub image movement effect D]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the main sub-image movement effect D. FIG. In the main sub-image movement effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 134(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), an effect display presentation is performed. In this effect display presentation, the effect image X8F is displayed on the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the right sub-display screen 64R. This effect image X8F is red and formed in a ring shape with a part missing. Among the effect images X8F, the effect image displayed on the main display screen 7a is also called a first effect image X8F1, the effect image displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is also called a second effect image X8F2, and the effect image displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is also called a first effect image X8F1. The displayed effect image is also called a third effect image X8F3. In the example of FIG. 134(B), the ends of the effect image X8F are arranged on the left sub-display screen 64L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), an effect movement presentation A is performed. In this effect movement presentation A, the effect image X8F moves clockwise so as to draw an ellipse. That is, part of the third effect image X8F3 displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L moves to the main display screen 7a, and part of the lower first effect image X8F1 displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the main display screen 7a. moves to the left sub-display screen 64L, a part of the second effect image X8F2 displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R moves to the main display screen 7a, and the upper side Part of the first effect image X8F1 moves to the right sub-display screen 64R. When the third effect image X8F3 moves to the main display screen 7a, the first effect image X8F1 on the lower side moves to the left sub-display screen 64L, the second effect image X8F2 moves to the main display screen 7a, and moves to the upper side. , the first effect image X8F1 moves to the right sub-display screen 64R. That is, these movements are performed simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(D), effect movement presentation B is performed. In this effect movement production B, part of the upper first effect image X8F1 displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, and the second effect image X8F1 displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R Part of the image X8F2 moves to the main display screen 7a, and the lower first effect image X8F1 displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the left sub-display screen 64L and is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The third effect image X8F3 that has been displayed moves to the main display screen 7a. These movements are performed simultaneously. Note that the effect image X8F is displayed in front of predetermined information such as decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, consecutive chan display images, pending icons, acquired ball number display, button display, and the like.
After that, a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead effect, pending change effect) is performed.

[Modification]
In the main sub-image moving effects B to D, the effect image is moved between display screens (for example, from the main display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a, from the main display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen). Although the color does not change when moving to the display screen 64L), the present invention is not limited to this, and the color may change. For example, in the main sub-image moving effect B, when the effect image X8A displayed on the main display screen 7a moves to the right sub-display screen 64R in the effect moving effect A, the color of the effect image X8A changes from red to blue. You can let it run.
In the above-mentioned main sub image moving effects B to D, the effect image rotates clockwise, but the color of the effect image may be changed each time it rotates. In this case, the more the effect image circulates and the more the color of the effect image changes, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win may be. Also, the main sub image moving effect may be performed between the pseudo-continuous effects. In this case, the more the effect image moves, the more the number of pseudo-continuous effects may increase.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the main-sub-image moving effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, for example, a display for moving a predetermined image (character image CRA, effect image X8A, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the main display screen 7a to the right sub display screen 64R. , and a display for moving the predetermined images (character image CRB, effect image X8B, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a. According to this configuration, a display in which a predetermined image is moved from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R and a display in which a predetermined image is displayed from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a are performed. It is possible to provide a dynamic effect as the image moves. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, for example, there is a display for moving the predetermined images (character image CRA, effect image X8A, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R. During this time, a display is performed to move the predetermined images (character image CRB, effect image X8B, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the display of moving the predetermined image from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R and the display of displaying the predetermined image from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a are performed simultaneously. It can provide a dynamic presentation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, for example, a display for moving a predetermined image (character image CRA, effect image X8A, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the main display screen 7a to the right sub display screen 64R. , a display for moving the predetermined images (character image CRB, effect image X8B, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a; A display for moving the predetermined images (character image CRC, effect image X8C, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) to the main display screen 7a is performed. According to this configuration, a display for moving the predetermined image from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, a display for displaying the predetermined image from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a, and a display for displaying the predetermined image on the main display screen 7a from the left sub-display screen 64L. Since the predetermined image is displayed on the main display screen 7a, a dynamic effect can be provided as the three images move. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, for example, a display for moving a predetermined image (character image CRA, effect image X8A, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the main display screen 7a to the right sub display screen 64R. , a display for moving the predetermined images (character image CRB, effect image X8B, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a; Display for moving predetermined images (character image CRC, effect image X8C, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) to the main display screen 7a is simultaneously performed. According to this configuration, a display for moving the predetermined image from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, a display for displaying the predetermined image from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a, and a display for displaying the predetermined image from the left sub-display screen 64L. Since the display of the predetermined images on the main display screen 7a is performed at the same time, it is possible to provide a more dynamic effect as the three images move simultaneously. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, a display for moving the predetermined images (character image CRA, effect image X8A, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, and When the predetermined images (character image CRB, effect image X8B, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R are displayed to move to the main display screen 7a, a lightning bolt appears on the main display screen 7a. An image X8E is displayed, and the lightning image X8E is adjacent to the predetermined image that is moved and displayed from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a. According to this configuration, when the predetermined image is moved and displayed from the right sub-display screen 64R to the main display screen 7a, the predetermined image and the lightning image X8E are adjacent to each other. The movement of the image can be emphasized, and the image movement effect can be gorgeously attractive. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the predetermined images (character image CRA, effect image X8A, effect image X8D, effect image X8F) displayed on the main display screen 7a are moved to the right sub-display screen 64R, The color of the predetermined image displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R differs from the color displayed on the main display screen 7a. According to this configuration, when the predetermined image moves between the two display screens, the color changes, so that the player can be made to emphasize the movement of the predetermined image and to give the player a sense of expectation for the future performance. , As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X8-1]
A gaming machine comprising first display means and second display means and capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying the first image on the first display means and moving the first image to the second display means,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying the second image on the second display means and moving the second image to the first display means,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X8-1,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X8-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect X8-1 or aspect X8-2,
The gaming machine further comprises third display means,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of displaying a third image on the third display means and moving the third image to the first display means,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X8-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X8-3,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed while the first display effect and the second display effect are being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects X8-2 to X8-5,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fourth display effect is a effect of displaying the fourth image on the first display means;
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the first display effect and the second display effect are being performed, and the fourth image is displayed in the fourth display effect. is adjacent to the second image moved and displayed from the second display means to the first display means in the second display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects X8-2 to X8-5,
In the combination effect, when the first image displayed on the first display means moves to the second display means in the first display effect, the image is displayed on the second display means. The color of the first image displayed is different from the color when displayed on the first display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

135 to 138, the effects A to D corresponding to the sub display screen will be described below. This sub-display screen corresponding effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a sub-display screen corresponding effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Production for sub display screen A]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the effect A corresponding to the sub display screen. 135(A) to (J) show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the sub-display screen corresponding effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 135(A), on the main display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used for the decorative pattern fluctuation production (variation display). ) is displayed, after which a reach is formed. A pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated. The pending icon 9C is displayed as if it is riding on the pedestal image DZ. Inside the pedestal image DZ, a reserved number image NS indicating the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery is displayed. The number of pending number images NS is equal to the number of pending icons 9A.

On the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, an image SL and an image SR showing a smiling person's face are displayed. Since the image SR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image SL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are the same image, they correspond to each other. Here, "images corresponding to each other" means that one image and the other image have some kind of relationship. This includes images that represent a portion of one object, images that together make one sense, images that represent the same type of content, and so on. An image that makes one meaning with two images is, for example, an image that shows one side and the other side of a word that makes one meaning, such as "muscle", "departure", and "vertical", or an image that shows the first half of a sentence and the second half. It contains an image that represents Images representing the same kind of content include images both representing human names, images both representing human faces, images both representing animals, and images both representing actual images.

After the ready-to-win is formed by the decorative design, the decorative design and the pending icon disappear, and as shown in FIG. 135(B), the special ready-to-win effect is started. In the special reach effect, first, an image W1 is displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a where nothing is displayed. Here, the image W1 is a character image representing the characters "Departure". Note that the image W1 is a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters. Specific objects are not limited to letters, characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract hazes such as figures and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), an image G1 is displayed above the main display screen 7a. Here, the image G1 is a graphic image representing a part of a radially expanding annular graphic. Note that the image G1 is a specific image representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to a ring-shaped figure. As shown in FIGS. 135(C) and 135(D), the ring-shaped figure represented by the image G1 on the main display screen 7a spreads radially, both ends protruding from the main display screen 7a, and the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-screen 64R. It is displayed on the display screen 64L. The image GR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is the right portion of the ring-shaped graphic, and is continuous with the right end of the ring-shaped graphic represented by the image G1 on the main display screen 7a. The image GL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is the left portion of the ring-shaped graphic, and is continuous with the left end of the ring-shaped graphic represented by the image G1 on the main display screen 7a. That is, the image GR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the image G1 displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the image GL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are the portions corresponding to the layout positions of the respective screens. , and are continuous. The image GR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image GL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are on both sides of the ring-shaped figure, respectively, and are images that correspond to each other.

When the ring-shaped figure represented by the image G1 on the main display screen 7a spreads radially and disappears from the main display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. , corresponding images are displayed. Specifically, the image WR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image WL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are both character images representing the characters "Departure". Note that the image WR and the image WL are specific images representing the appearance of a specific target, and the specific target is not limited to characters. Next, as shown in FIG. 135(F), a button image BTN, an operation prompting image RND, and an operation valid period suggesting image TBI are displayed on the main display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "Press" and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation). The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 . The image GR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image GL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L move vertically in conjunction with each other.

When the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BTN disappears and the timer image TM and the pending icon are displayed on the main display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 135(G). The timer image TM is an image composed of numerical values, and here, as an effect before the countdown starts, an effect of incrementing the numerical values is performed. Next, as shown in FIG. 135(H), part of the image displayed on the main display screen 7a of FIG. is performed. Here, the suspension icon 9A and the suspension icon 9C, the timer image TM, and the pedestal image DZ are interlocked to alternately repeat reduction and enlargement. The pending number image NS is not deformed in conjunction with the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C. The pedestal image DZ and the reserved number image NS are displayed at the position where the reserved number image NS remains as it is, and the pedestal image DZ is separated therefrom and is repeatedly reduced, enlarged, and deformed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135(I), the timer image TM is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the numerical values adjacent to each other are partially overlapped and displayed. This suggests that the incrementing of the numerical value is finally over, which can excite the player. Images corresponding to each other are displayed again on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. Specifically, the image WR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image WL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are both character images representing the characters "Departure". Next, as shown in FIG. 135(J), the timer image TM is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a, and the countdown is started. Then, when the numerical value of the timer image TM becomes zero, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped at the ready-to-win state, and the special ready-to-win effect is executed.

[Sub Display Screen Corresponding Effect B]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the effect B corresponding to the sub display screen. The sub-display screen corresponding effect B is a subsequent effect of the sub-display screen corresponding effect A. FIG. 136(A) is the same as FIG. 135(J) of the effect A corresponding to the sub display screen. At the start of the special ready-to-win production, as shown in FIG. 136(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reduced while forming the ready-to-win, and displayed in reduced size on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. The countdown of the timer image TM continues. Background images HG, HGR, and HGL representing mountains in the photograph are displayed from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L on both sides. The background image HGR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the background image HG displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the background image HGL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L correspond to the layout positions of the respective screens. It represents a part and is continuous. The background image HGR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the background image HGL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L both represent actual mountains, and therefore correspond to images corresponding to each other.

As shown in FIG. 136(C), when the numerical value of the timer image TM becomes zero due to the countdown, as shown in FIG. 136(D), an image SM showing a smiling face is displayed on the main display screen 7a. . In addition, an image TGL representing characters of "strong" is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, the right sub-display screen 64R displays an image TGR representing the characters "heat". Combining these two images TGL and TGR constitutes the word "extreme heat". Therefore, they correspond to images corresponding to each other. Next, as shown in FIG. 136(E), the two images TGL and TGR are linked and displayed in reduced size. After that, as shown in FIG. 136(F), the two images TGL and TGR are enlarged and displayed. At this time, a part of each of the two images TGL and TGR protrudes from the sub-display screen 64 . A button image BTN, an operation prompting image RND, and an operation effective period suggesting image TBI are displayed on the main display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "Press" and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation). The operation valid period suggestion image TBI is a timer bar representing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 63 .

When the player presses the effect button 63, the losing pattern effects shown in FIGS. 136(G) and (H) or the winning pattern effects shown in FIGS. 136(I) and (J) are executed. In the losing pattern effects shown in FIGS. 136(G) and (H), as shown in FIG. 136(G), the main display screen 7a displays numerical values different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R forming reach. The middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed. The left sub-display screen 64L displays an image ZGL representing the characters "remaining". In addition, the right sub-display screen 64R displays an image ZGR representing the character "nen". Together these two images ZGL and ZGR constitute the word "sorry". Therefore, they correspond to images corresponding to each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 136(H), the decorative symbols are decided and stopped in a lost state.

136(I) and (J), as shown in FIG. 136(I), the main display screen 7a displays the same left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R forming reach. A decorative symbol 8C with a numerical value is temporarily stopped and displayed. The left sub-display screen 64L displays an image XGL representing the characters "sei". In addition, the right sub-display screen 64R displays an image XGR representing the character of "success". Together these two images ZGL and XGR constitute the word "success". Therefore, they correspond to images corresponding to each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 136(J), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a win mode.

[Production for sub display screen C]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the effect C corresponding to the sub display screen. FIGS. 137A to 137J show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the sub-display screen corresponding effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 137(A), on the main display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used for the decorative design fluctuation production (fluctuation display). ) is displayed, after which a reach is formed. A pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated. The pending icon 9C is displayed as if it is riding on the pedestal image DZ. Inside the pedestal image DZ, a reserved number image NS indicating the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery is displayed. The number of pending number images NS is equal to the number of pending icons 9A. On the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, an image SL and an image SR showing a smiling person's face are displayed. Since the image SR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image SL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are the same image, they correspond to each other.

After the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative design, the decorative design and the pending icon disappear, and as shown in FIG. 137(B), the special ready-to-win effect is started. In the special ready-to-win effect, first, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reduced while forming the ready-to-win, and displayed in reduced size on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. A friend image MK and an enemy image TK are displayed on the main display screen 7a to suggest that a battle effect is to be started. On the right sub-display screen 64R, an image MR showing characters of "Everyone's Friend, Friend Man" is displayed. The image MR includes the name "friend man" of the friend image MK displayed on the main display screen 7a. On the left sub-display screen 64L, an image ML showing characters of "very bad guy enemy monster" is displayed. The image ML includes the name "enemy monster" of the enemy image TK displayed on the main display screen 7a. Since the image MR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image ML displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are images including the name of the character displayed on the main display screen 7a, they are images corresponding to each other. It's becoming

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(C), a battle effect is executed. In the battle production, an image of a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. The right sub-display screen 64R continues to display an image MR including the name of the ally character CRA, "Friendly Man". Further, the left sub-display screen 64L continues to display an image ML including the name "enemy monster" of the enemy character CRB. Here, as shown in FIG. 137(D), if the ally character CRA loses in the battle effect, the decoration pattern is confirmed and displayed in a lost mode as shown in FIG. 137(E). At this time, the image SL and the image SR showing the smiling person's face are displayed again on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(F), after the holding is completed, the next decorative design variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the main display screen 7a. appears, then a reach is formed. The pending number image NS and the number of pending icons 9A are decremented by one. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L continuously display an image SL and an image SR showing the face of a smiling person.

After the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative design, the decorative design and the pending icon disappear, and as shown in FIG. 137(G), the special ready-to-win effect is started. In the special ready-to-win effect, first, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reduced while forming the ready-to-win, and displayed in reduced size on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. A self image HRS and a friend image TKS are displayed on the main display screen 7a to suggest that the challenge effect is to be started. On the right sub-display screen 64R, an image PR showing the characters "Always smiling Hiroshi" is displayed. The image PR includes the name "Hiroshi" of the self image HRS displayed on the main display screen 7a. On the left sub-display screen 64L, an image PL showing characters of "a little crybaby Takeshi" is displayed. The image PL includes the name "Takeshi" of the friend image TKS displayed on the main display screen 7a. Since the image PR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image PL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are images including the name of the character displayed on the main display screen 7a, they are images corresponding to each other. It's becoming

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(H), a challenge effect is executed. In the challenge effect, an image is displayed as to whether or not the self image HRS can catch the falling friend image TKS. The right sub-display screen 64R continues to display the image PR including the name "Hiroshi" of the self image HRS. In addition, the image PL including the name "Takeshi" of the friend image TKS is continuously displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. Here, as shown in FIG. 137(I), if the challenge fails in the challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 137(J), the decorative pattern is determined and displayed in a failed mode. At this time, the image SL and the image SR showing the smiling person's face are displayed again on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Production for sub display screen D]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the effect D corresponding to the sub display screen. FIGS. 138A to 138J show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the sub-display screen corresponding effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 138(A), on the main display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used for the decorative design fluctuation production (fluctuation display). ) is displayed, after which a reach is formed. The right sub-display screen 64R displays an image SR showing a smiling face and the pending icon 9C. The hold icon 9C has a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The pending icon 9C is displayed as if it is riding on the pedestal image DZ. Inside the pedestal image DZ, a reserved number image NS indicating the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery is displayed. The number of pending number images NS is equal to the number of pending icons 9A, and here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 4 is exemplified. An image SL showing a smiling face and a pending icon 9A are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The hold icon 9A has a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated. Since the image SR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image SL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are the same image, they correspond to each other.

After the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative design, the decorative design and the pending icon disappear, and the special ready-to-win effect is started as shown in FIG. 138(B). In the special ready-to-win effect, first, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reduced while forming the ready-to-win, and displayed in reduced size on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. A friend image MK and an enemy image TK are displayed on the main display screen 7a to suggest that a battle effect is to be started. On the right sub-display screen 64R, an image HR showing the characters "now is the time to hold a grudge" is displayed. The left sub-display screen 64L displays an image HL in which the characters "Hareshite" are displayed. The image HR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image HL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are images representing the first and second halves of a single sentence "now is the time to settle your grudge". Therefore, the images correspond to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(C), a battle effect is executed. In the battle production, an image of a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. On the right sub-display screen 64R, an image MR representing characters of the name of the ally character CRA, "Friendly Man" is displayed. In addition, an image SL showing a smiling person's face is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. These images MR and SL are moved up and down in conjunction with each other. Images whose movement modes correspond to each other are also included in the images corresponding to each other. Here, as shown in FIG. 138(D), if the ally character CRA loses in the battle effect, the decoration pattern is confirmed and displayed in a lost mode as shown in FIG. 138E). As shown in FIG. 138(D), the image MR is continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, and the image SL is continuously displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The two images MR and SL are magnified and displayed, and a part of each of the two images TGL and TGR protrudes from the sub-display screen 64 . As shown in FIG. 138(E), when the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed in a failing mode, the right sub-display screen 64R displays an image SR showing a smiling person's face, a pedestal image DZ, and a pending number image. NS is displayed again. The suspension icon 9C disappears due to suspension digestion. The left sub-display screen 64L redisplays the image SL showing the smiling face and the pending icon 9A. Since the image SR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image SL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are the same image, they correspond to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(F), after the holding is completed, the next decorative design variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the main display screen 7a. appears, then a reach is formed. A pending icon 9A, a pending icon 9C, a pedestal image DZ, and a pending number image NS are displayed below the main display screen 7a. The pending number image NS and the number of pending icons 9A are decremented by one. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L continuously display an image SL and an image SR showing the face of a smiling person.

After the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative design, the decorative design and the pending icon disappear, and the special ready-to-win effect is started as shown in FIG. 138(G). In the special ready-to-win effect, first, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reduced while forming the ready-to-win, and displayed in reduced size on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. A self image HRS and a friend image TKS are displayed on the main display screen 7a to suggest that the challenge effect is to be started. A button image BTN and an operation prompting image RND are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "Press" and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation). Here, an operation effective period suggestion image TBI, which is a timer bar indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the effect button 63, may be displayed. A select image KEY representing the appearance of the select button 68 is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. Since both the button image BTN displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the select image KEY displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are images representing the appearance of the operation unit, they are images that correspond to each other.

Next, when the performance button 63 or the select button 68 is operated, as shown in FIG. 138(H), the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed in the winning mode. After that, when the jackpot game is started, the images MGU, MGR, and MGL representing arrows prompting the player to hit to the right are displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. The image MGR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the image MGU displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the image MGL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are continuous, and the arrow as a whole points from left to right. The image appears to move in any direction. The image MGR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image MGL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L both represent a part of the arrow prompting the player to hit to the right, and thus correspond to each other. After that, an image KKT representing the number of balls acquired this time is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. An image GKT representing the total number of acquired balls is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. Since the image KKT displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image GKT displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are both images representing the number of balls won, they correspond to each other.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the sub-display screen corresponding effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 135 to 138, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a main display screen 7a, a right sub-display screen 64R, and a left sub-display screen 64L. Images corresponding to each other (image SL, image SR, etc.) are displayed on the display screen 64L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 135 to 138, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs via the main display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136, the images corresponding to each other are one and the other of words having one meaning, such as "strong" and "heat." According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the mutually corresponding images are one character name and the other character name in the battle presentation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136, the images corresponding to each other are the actual image HGL and the image HGR corresponding to their arrangement positions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modified examples of sub-display screen corresponding effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the sub-display screen corresponding effects A to D in FIGS. 135 to 138, even if the image displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are completely different in shape and concept, If the modes of movement are related, the images correspond to each other. Moreover, even if the shapes and concepts are completely different, the images correspond to each other as long as the mode of enlargement or reduction is related.

[Modification 2]
In the sub-display screen corresponding effects A to D in FIGS. 135 to 138, the image displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are different in some way. As long as they are related, they are images that correspond to each other even if the timing of displaying and the timing of disappearing are different.

[Modification 3]
The effects A to D corresponding to the sub-display screens shown in FIGS. 135 to 138 may be combined as appropriate. For example, after the sub-display screen corresponding effect A, the sub-display screen corresponding effect C may be executed.

[Modification 4]
135 to 138, sub-display screen corresponding effects A to D may not include some of the described effects, and other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C8-1]
a first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A gaming machine, wherein images corresponding to each other are displayed on the second display means and the third display means.
◇ [Aspect C8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
A gaming machine, wherein the second display means and the third display means are arranged in pairs via the first display means.
◇ [Aspect C8-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C8-1 or aspect C8-2,
A gaming machine, wherein the images corresponding to each other are one and the other of a word having one meaning.
◇ [Aspect C8-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect C8-1 or aspect C8-2,
A gaming machine, wherein the mutually corresponding images are the name of one character and the name of the other character in a battle presentation.
◇ [Aspect C8-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect C8-1 or aspect C8-2,
A gaming machine, wherein the images corresponding to each other are actual images corresponding to respective arrangement positions.

The twin identification information presentations A to H will be described below with reference to FIGS. 139 to 146. FIG. This twin identification information effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols in the time saving game state (time saving state). In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the twin identification information effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG. Note that the twin identification information presentation is not limited to the time-saving game state, and may be executed in the normal game state.

[Twin identification information presentation A]
139 is a diagram for explaining the twin identification information effect A. FIG. In the twin identification information effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 139(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(B), a left decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, respectively.

Each of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 represents any number from 1 to 9. Combining the first identification information 8L1, the first identification information 8C1, and the first identification information 8R1, a winning array (losing pattern array) representing a winning, a small winning array representing a small winning ( A small winning pattern array) or a big winning array (big winning pattern array) representing a big win can be formed. When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all odd numbers and are in a predetermined combination. For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, it is "7", "7" and "5". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all the same number (double order). For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, it is "7", "7", and "7". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a losing arrangement, it is an arrangement other than the small winning arrangement and the big winning arrangement (for example, "7", "8", "5"). .

Each of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is formed in a circular shape, each of which can be lit, and the character "S" is displayed inside the circle when lit. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 have the same shape. A combination of the second identification information 8L2, the second identification information 8C2, and the second identification information 8R2 is a winning arrangement (losing pattern arrangement) representing a loss, or a small winning representing a small winning An array (small winning pattern array) can be formed. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 does not form a jackpot arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are lit respectively, and the character "S" is displayed when lit. is. For example, when a small winning arrangement is formed by combining the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up, and the character strings "S", "S", "S ” is when it becomes. When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a misalignment array, an array other than the small winning array (for example, the second identification information 8C2 does not light up, the character string "S" "no" "S"). "None" in the character string indicates that the character is not displayed. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are also called lighting units 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 because they are lit.

In addition, when a small winning arrangement is formed by one of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the other identification information causes a misalignment arrangement Even if is formed, it will be a small win. That is, if even one small winning arrangement is formed by the identification information, it becomes a small winning.

In the example of FIG. 139(B), the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed has the first identification information 8L1 of "7", the second identification information 8L2 is lit, and the character "S" is displayed. . In FIG. 139B, the state of lighting of the second identification information 8L2 is indicated by hatching. Below, when the second identification information is lit, it is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(C), a middle decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed. The right decorative pattern 8R is changing. In the example of FIG. 139(C), the stopped middle decorative pattern 8C has the first identification information 8C1 of "7", the second identification information 8C2 is not lit, and the character "S" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(D), a right decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this right decorative design temporary stop effect, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed. In the example of FIG. 139(D), the stopped right decorative pattern 8R has the first identification information 8R1 of "5", the second identification information 8R2 is illuminated, and the character "S" is displayed. .
As described above, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are "7", "7", and "5", forming a small winning arrangement. Further, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are the character strings "S", "None", and "S", with the second identification information 8C2 not lit, forming a displaced array. That is, since the small winning arrangement is formed by the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1, it is reported that the winning is a small winning.
After that, a small winning game is executed.

[Twin identification information presentation B]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining twin identification information effect B. FIG. In the twin identification information effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 140(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(B), a silhouette effect is performed. In this silhouette effect, silhouette images 8LL, 8CC and 8RR are displayed. These silhouette images are images representing the silhouette of the decorative pattern. Specifically, the silhouette image 8LL is an image representing the silhouette of the left decorative design 8L, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the left decorative design 8L. Also, the silhouette image 8LL includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8LL1. This lighting part silhouette image 8LL1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8L2 (described later) of the left decorative pattern 8L, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . The silhouette image 8CC is an image representing the silhouette of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Also, the silhouette image 8CC includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8CC1. This lighting part silhouette image 8CC1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8C2 (described later) of the middle decorative pattern 8C, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . The silhouette image 8RR is an image representing the silhouette of the right decorative design 8R, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the right decorative design 8R. Also, the silhouette image 8RR includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8RR1. This lighting part silhouette image 8RR1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8R2 (described later) of the right decorative pattern 8R, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . These silhouette images 8LL, 8CC, 8RR are images suggesting a small prize. In the example of FIG. Each of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (described later) lights up, indicating that the letter "S" is displayed, suggesting a small win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(C), a left decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, respectively.

Each of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 represents any number from 1 to 9. Combining the first identification information 8L1, the first identification information 8C1, and the first identification information 8R1, a winning array (losing pattern array) representing a winning, a small winning array representing a small winning ( A small winning pattern array) or a big winning array (big winning pattern array) representing a big win can be formed. When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all odd numbers and are in a predetermined combination. For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, it is "7", "7" and "5". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all the same number (double order). For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, it is "7", "7", and "7". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a losing arrangement, it is an arrangement other than the small winning arrangement and the big winning arrangement (for example, "7", "8", "5"). .

Each of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is formed in a circular shape, each of which can be lit, and when lit, the character "S" is displayed inside the circle. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 have the same shape. A combination of the second identification information 8L2, the second identification information 8C2, and the second identification information 8R2 is a winning arrangement (losing pattern arrangement) representing a loss, or a small win representing a small win An array (small winning pattern array) can be formed. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 does not form a jackpot arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are lit, and the character "S" is displayed when lit. is. For example, when a small winning arrangement is formed by combining the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up, and the character strings "S", "S", "S ” is when it becomes. When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a misalignment array, an array other than the small hit array (for example, the second identification information 8C2 does not light up, the character string "S" "no" "S"). The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are also called lighting units 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 because they are lit.

In addition, when a small winning arrangement is formed by one of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the other identification information causes a displaced arrangement Even if is formed, it will be a small win. That is, if even one small winning arrangement is formed by the identification information, it becomes a small winning.

In the example of FIG. 140(C), the left decorative pattern 8L displayed stopped has the first identification information 8L1 of "7", the second identification information 8L2 lit up, and the character "S" displayed. . In FIG. 140(C), the state of lighting of the second identification information 8L2 is indicated by hatching. Below, when the second identification information is lit, it is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(D), a medium decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed. The right decorative pattern 8R is changing. In the example of FIG. 140(D), the medium decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed has the first identification information 8C1 of "8", the second identification information 8C2 lit up, and the character "S" displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(E), a right decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this right decorative design temporary stop effect, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed. In the example of FIG. 140(E), the stopped right decorative pattern 8R has the first identification information 8R1 of "5", the second identification information 8R2 is illuminated, and the character "S" is displayed. .
As described above, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are "7", "8", and "5", forming a displaced array. In addition, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up and become character strings "S", "S", and "S", forming a small winning array. That is, since the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 forms a small winning arrangement, it is reported that the winning is a small winning.
After that, a small winning game is executed.

[Twin identification information presentation C]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the twin identification information effect C. FIG. In the twin identification information effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 141(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(B), a silhouette effect is performed. In this silhouette effect, silhouette images 8LL, 8CC and 8RR are displayed. These silhouette images are images representing the silhouette of the decorative pattern. Specifically, the silhouette image 8LL is an image representing the silhouette of the left decorative design 8L, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the left decorative design 8L. Also, the silhouette image 8LL includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8LL1. This lighting part silhouette image 8LL1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8L2 (described later) of the left decorative pattern 8L, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . The silhouette image 8CC is an image representing the silhouette of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Also, the silhouette image 8CC includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8CC1. This lighting part silhouette image 8CC1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8C2 (described later) of the middle decorative pattern 8C, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . The silhouette image 8RR is an image representing the silhouette of the right decorative design 8R, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the right decorative design 8R. Also, the silhouette image 8RR includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8RR1. This lighting part silhouette image 8RR1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8R2 (described later) of the right decorative pattern 8R, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . These silhouette images 8LL, 8CC, 8RR are images suggesting that a small prize will be won. In the example of FIG. Each of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (described later) lights up, indicating that the character "S" is displayed, that is, suggesting a small win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(C), a left decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, respectively.

Each of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 represents any number from 1 to 9. Combining the first identification information 8L1, the first identification information 8C1, and the first identification information 8R1, a winning array (losing pattern array) representing a winning, a small winning array representing a small winning ( A small winning pattern array) or a big winning array (big winning pattern array) representing a big win can be formed. When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all odd numbers and are in a predetermined combination. For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, it is "7", "7", and "5". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all the same number (double order). For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot array, it is "7", "7", and "7". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is combined to form a losing arrangement, it is an arrangement other than the small winning arrangement and the big winning arrangement (for example, "7", "8", "5"). .

Each of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is formed in a circular shape, each of which can be lit, and when lit, the character "S" is displayed inside the circle. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 have the same shape. A combination of the second identification information 8L2, the second identification information 8C2, and the second identification information 8R2 is a winning arrangement (losing pattern arrangement) representing a loss, or a small win representing a small win An array (small winning pattern array) can be formed. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 does not form a jackpot arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are lit, and the character "S" is displayed when lit. is. For example, when a small winning arrangement is formed by combining the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up, and the character strings "S", "S", "S ” is when it becomes. When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a misalignment array, an array other than the small hit array (for example, the second identification information 8C2 does not light up, the character string "S" "no" "S"). The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are also called lighting units 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 because they are lit.

In addition, when a small winning arrangement is formed by one of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the other identification information causes a misalignment arrangement Even if is formed, it will be a small win. That is, if even one small winning arrangement is formed by the identification information, it becomes a small winning.

In the example of FIG. 141(C), the left decorative pattern 8L displayed stopped has the first identification information 8L1 of "7", the second identification information 8L2 lit up, and the character "S" being displayed. . In FIG. 141(C), the state of lighting of the second identification information 8L2 is indicated by hatching. Below, when the second identification information is lit, it is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(D), a medium decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed. The right decorative pattern 8R is changing. In the example of FIG. 141(D), the medium decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed has the first identification information 8C1 of "7", the second identification information 8C2 is lit, and the character "S" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(E), a right decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this right decorative design temporary stop effect, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed. In the example of FIG. 141(E), the stopped right decorative pattern 8R has the first identification information 8R1 of "5", the second identification information 8R2 is lit, and "S" is displayed.
As described above, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are "7", "7", and "5", forming a small winning arrangement. In addition, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up and become character strings "S", "S", and "S", forming a small winning arrangement. That is, since the small winning arrangement is formed by the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the small winning is notified.
After that, a small winning game is executed.

[Twin identification information presentation D]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the twin identification information effect D. FIG. In the twin identification information effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 142(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(B), a silhouette effect is performed. In this silhouette effect, silhouette images 8LL, 8CC and 8RR are displayed. These silhouette images are images representing the silhouette of the decorative pattern. Specifically, the silhouette image 8LL is an image representing the silhouette of the left decorative design 8L, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the left decorative design 8L. Also, the silhouette image 8LL includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8LL1. This lighting part silhouette image 8LL1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8L2 (described later) of the left decorative pattern 8L, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . The silhouette image 8CC is an image representing the silhouette of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Also, the silhouette image 8CC includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8CC1. This lighting portion silhouette image 8CC1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting portion) 8C2 (described later) of the middle decorative pattern 8C, is formed in a circular shape, and the characters "SS" are shown inside the circle. . The silhouette image 8RR is an image representing the silhouette of the right decorative design 8R, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the right decorative design 8R. Also, the silhouette image 8RR includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8RR1. This lighting part silhouette image 8RR1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8R2 (described later) of the right decorative pattern 8R, is formed in a circular shape, and the characters "SSS" are shown inside the circle. . These silhouette images 8LL, 8CC, 8RR are images suggesting that a small prize will be won. In the example of FIG. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (described later) are respectively lit, the second identification information 8L2 is the character "S", the second identification information 8C2 is the character "SS", and the second identification information 8R2 is It indicates that the characters "SSS" are displayed, that is, it suggests that a small prize will be awarded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(C), a left decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, respectively.

Each of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 represents any number from 1 to 9. Combining the first identification information 8L1, the first identification information 8C1, and the first identification information 8R1, a winning array (losing pattern array) representing a winning, a small winning array representing a small winning ( A small winning pattern array) or a big winning array (big winning pattern array) representing a big win can be formed. When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all odd numbers and are in a predetermined combination. For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, it is "7", "7", and "5". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all the same number (double order). For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot array, it is "7", "7", and "7". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is combined to form a losing arrangement, it is an arrangement other than the small winning arrangement and the big winning arrangement (for example, "7", "8", "5"). .

The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are each formed in a circular shape and can be lit respectively, and when the second identification information 8L2 is lit, the character "S" is displayed inside the circle, The characters "SS" are displayed inside the circle when the second identification information 8C2 is lit, and the characters "SSS" are displayed inside the circle when the second identification information 8R2 is lit. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 have the same shape. A combination of the second identification information 8L2, the second identification information 8C2, and the second identification information 8R2 is a winning arrangement (losing pattern arrangement) representing a loss, or a small win representing a small win An array (small winning pattern array) can be formed. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 does not form a jackpot arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are respectively lit, and the second identification information 8L2 is the character "S". is displayed, the characters "SS" are displayed in the second identification information 8C2, and the characters "SSS" are displayed in the second identification information 8R2. For example, when the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up, and the character strings "S", "SS", and "SSS" are displayed. ” is when it becomes. When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a misalignment array, an array other than the small hit array (for example, the second identification information 8C2 does not light up, the character string "S" "no" "SSS"). The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are also called lighting units 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 because they are lit.

In addition, when a small winning arrangement is formed by one of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the other identification information causes a misalignment arrangement Even if is formed, it will be a small win. That is, if even one small winning arrangement is formed by the identification information, it becomes a small winning.

In the example of FIG. 142(C), the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed has the first identification information 8L1 of "7", the second identification information 8L2 is lit, and the character "S" is displayed. . In FIG. 142(C), the state of lighting of the second identification information 8L2 is indicated by hatching. Below, when the second identification information is lit, it is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(D), a medium decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed. The right decorative pattern 8R is changing. In the example of FIG. 142(D), the stopped middle decorative pattern 8C has the first identification information 8C1 of "7", the second identification information 8C2 is lit, and the characters "SS" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(E), a right decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this right decorative design temporary stop effect, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed. In the example of FIG. 142(E), the stopped right decorative pattern 8R has the first identification information 8R1 of "5", the second identification information 8R2 is lit, and the characters "SSS" are displayed. .
As described above, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are "7", "7", and "5", forming a small winning arrangement. In addition, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up and become character strings "S", "SS", and "SSS", forming a small winning array. That is, since a small winning arrangement is formed by the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the small winning is notified.
After that, a small winning game is executed.

[Twin identification information presentation E]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the twin identification information effect E. FIG. In the twin identification information effect E, first, as shown in FIG. 143(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), a silhouette effect is performed. In this silhouette effect, silhouette images 8LL, 8CC and 8RR are displayed. These silhouette images are images representing the silhouette of the decorative pattern. Specifically, the silhouette image 8LL is an image representing the silhouette of the left decorative design 8L, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the left decorative design 8L. Also, the silhouette image 8LL includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8LL1. This lighting part silhouette image 8LL1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8L2 (described later) of the left decorative pattern 8L, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . The silhouette image 8CC is an image representing the silhouette of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Also, the silhouette image 8CC includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8CC1. This lighting part silhouette image 8CC1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8C2 (described later) of the middle decorative pattern 8C, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . The silhouette image 8RR is an image representing the silhouette of the right decorative design 8R, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the right decorative design 8R. Also, the silhouette image 8RR includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8RR1. This lighting part silhouette image 8RR1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8R2 (described later) of the right decorative pattern 8R, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . These silhouette images 8LL, 8CC, and 8RR are images suggesting a small prize, and in the example of FIG. Each of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (described later) lights up, indicating that the character "S" is displayed, that is, suggesting a small win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), a left decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, respectively.

Each of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 represents any number from 1 to 9. Combining the first identification information 8L1, the first identification information 8C1, and the first identification information 8R1, a winning array (losing pattern array) representing a winning, a small winning array representing a small winning ( A small winning pattern array) or a big winning array (big winning pattern array) representing a big win can be formed. When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all odd numbers and are in a predetermined combination. For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, it is "7", "7", and "5". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all the same number (double order). For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot array, it is "7", "7", and "7". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is combined to form a losing arrangement, it is an arrangement other than the small winning arrangement and the big winning arrangement (for example, "7", "8", "5"). .

Each of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is formed in a circular shape, each of which can be lit, and when lit, the character "S" is displayed inside the circle. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 have the same shape. A combination of the second identification information 8L2, the second identification information 8C2, and the second identification information 8R2 is a winning arrangement (losing pattern arrangement) representing a loss, or a small win representing a small win An array (small winning pattern array) can be formed. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 does not form a jackpot arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are lit, and the character "S" is displayed when lit. is. For example, when a small winning arrangement is formed by combining the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up, and the character strings "S", "S", "S ” is when it becomes. When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a misalignment array, an array other than the small hit array (for example, the second identification information 8C2 does not light up, the character string "S" "no" "S"). The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are also called lighting units 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 because they are lit.

In addition, when a small winning arrangement is formed by one of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the other identification information causes a displaced arrangement Even if is formed, it will be a small win. That is, if even one small winning arrangement is formed by the identification information, it becomes a small winning.

In the example of FIG. 143(C), the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed has the first identification information 8L1 of "7", the second identification information 8L2 is not lit, and the character "S" is displayed. there is Below, when the second identification information is lit, it is indicated by hatching. In FIG. 143(C), the second identification information 8L2 is not lit up, so it is not hatched.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), a medium decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed. The right decorative pattern 8R is changing. In the example of FIG. 143(D), the medium decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed has the first identification information 8C1 of "7", the second identification information 8C2 is not lit, and the character "S" is displayed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(E), a right decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this right decorative design temporary stop effect, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed. In the example of FIG. 143(E), the stopped right decorative pattern 8R has the first identification information 8R1 of "5", the second identification information 8R2 is not illuminated, and the character "S" is displayed. there is

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(F), simultaneous lighting effect is performed. In this simultaneous lighting effect, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are lit all at once. In the example of FIG. 143(F), hatching indicates that the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are lit.
As described above, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are "7", "7", and "5", forming a small winning arrangement. In addition, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up and become character strings "S", "S", and "S", forming a small winning arrangement. That is, since a small winning arrangement is formed by the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the small winning is notified.
After that, a small winning game is executed.

[Twin identification information production F]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the twin identification information effect F. FIG. In the twin identification information effect F, first, as shown in FIG. 144(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), a silhouette effect is performed. In this silhouette effect, silhouette images 8LL, 8CC and 8RR are displayed. These silhouette images are images representing the silhouette of the decorative pattern. Specifically, the silhouette image 8LL is an image representing the silhouette of the left decorative design 8L, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the left decorative design 8L. Also, the silhouette image 8LL includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8LL1. The lighting portion silhouette image 8LL1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting portion) 8L2 (described later) of the left decorative pattern 8L, is formed in a circular shape, and no characters are shown inside the circle. The silhouette image 8CC is an image representing the silhouette of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Also, the silhouette image 8CC includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8CC1. This lighting portion silhouette image 8CC1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting portion) 8C2 (described later) of the middle decorative pattern 8C, is formed in a circular shape, and no characters are shown inside the circle. The silhouette image 8RR is an image representing the silhouette of the right decorative design 8R, and is formed in the same rectangular shape as the outer contour of the right decorative design 8R. Also, the silhouette image 8RR includes a lighting portion silhouette image 8RR1. This lighting part silhouette image 8RR1 represents the silhouette of the second identification information (lighting part) 8R2 (described later) of the right decorative pattern 8R, is formed in a circular shape, and the character "S" is shown inside the circle. . These silhouette images 8LL, 8CC, 8RR are images suggesting that a small prize will be won. In the example of FIG. The second identification information 8R2 (described later) lights up, indicating that the character "S" is displayed, that is, suggesting a small win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), a left decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, respectively.

Each of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 represents any number from 1 to 9. Combining the first identification information 8L1, the first identification information 8C1, and the first identification information 8R1, a winning array (losing pattern array) representing a winning, a small winning array representing a small winning ( A small winning pattern array) or a big winning array (big winning pattern array) representing a big win can be formed. When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all odd numbers and are in a predetermined combination. For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, it is "7", "7", and "5". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all the same number (double order). For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot array, it is "7", "7", and "7". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is combined to form a losing arrangement, it is an arrangement other than the small winning arrangement and the big winning arrangement (for example, "7", "8", "5"). .

Each of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is formed in a circular shape, each of which can be lit, and the character "S" is displayed inside the circle when lit. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 have the same shape. A combination of the second identification information 8L2, the second identification information 8C2, and the second identification information 8R2 is a winning arrangement (losing pattern arrangement) representing a loss, or a small winning representing a small winning An array (small winning pattern array) can be formed. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 does not form a jackpot arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). When the small winning arrangement is formed by combining the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, one or more of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is lit, and when lit That is when the letter "S" is displayed. For example, when a small winning arrangement is formed by combining the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, when the second identification information 8R2 lights up and the character string "None" "None" "S" is. When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a losing array, an array other than the small winning array (all of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are not lit, "None" " It is when it becomes "no" "no" (no character string). The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are also called lighting units 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 because they are lit.

In addition, when a small winning arrangement is formed by one of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the other identification information causes a displaced arrangement Even if is formed, it will be a small win. That is, if even one small winning arrangement is formed by the identification information, it becomes a small winning.

In the example of FIG. 144(C), the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed has the first identification information 8L1 of "7", the second identification information 8L2 is not lit, and the character "S" is indicated. do not have. Below, when the second identification information is lit, it is indicated by hatching. In FIG. 144(C), the second identification information 8L2 is not lit and is not hatched.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), a medium decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed. The right decorative pattern 8R is changing. In the example of FIG. 144(D), the stationary display of the middle decorative pattern 8C has the first identification information 8C1 of "8", the second identification information 8C2 is not lit, and the character "S" is indicated. do not have.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(E), a right decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this right decorative design temporary stop effect, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed. In the example of FIG. 144(E), the stopped right decorative pattern 8R has the first identification information 8R1 of "5", the second identification information 8R2 is illuminated, and the character "S" is displayed. .
As described above, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are "7", "8", and "5", forming a displaced array. Further, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 has the second identification information 8R2 turned on and the character string "None", "None", and "S", forming a small winning arrangement. That is, since the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 forms a small winning arrangement, it is notified that the winning is a small winning.
After that, a small winning game is executed.

[Twin identification information presentation G]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the twin identification information effect G. FIG. In the twin identification information effect G, first, as shown in FIG. 145(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), a left decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, respectively.

Each of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 represents any number from 1 to 9. Combining the first identification information 8L1, the first identification information 8C1, and the first identification information 8R1, a winning array (losing pattern array) representing a winning, a small winning array representing a small winning ( A small winning pattern array) or a big winning array (big winning pattern array) representing a big win can be formed. When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all odd numbers and are in a predetermined combination. For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, it is "7", "7", and "5". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all the same number (double order). For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot array, it is "7", "7", and "7". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is combined to form a losing arrangement, it is an arrangement other than the small winning arrangement and the big winning arrangement (for example, "7", "8", "5"). .

The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are formed in the shape of a rectangular frame, and are arranged on the outline of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, respectively. Further, each of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 can be lit. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 have the same shape. A combination of the second identification information 8L2, the second identification information 8C2, and the second identification information 8R2 is a winning arrangement (losing pattern arrangement) representing a loss, or a small win representing a small win An array (small winning pattern array) can be formed. The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 does not form a jackpot arrangement (jackpot pattern arrangement). When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are lit. When the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a misalignment array, an array other than the small winning array (for example, any one or more of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is lit not). The second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are also called lighting units 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 because they are lit.

In addition, when a small winning arrangement is formed by one of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the other identification information causes a misalignment arrangement Even if is formed, it will be a small win. That is, if even one small winning arrangement is formed by the identification information, it becomes a small winning.

In the example of FIG. 145(B), the stopped left decorative pattern 8L has the first identification information 8L1 of "7" and the second identification information 8L2 is lit. In FIG. 145(B), the state of lighting of the second identification information 8L2 is represented by black painting. In the following, when the second identification information is lit, it is indicated by black painting.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), a medium decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this left decorative design temporary stop effect, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed. The right decorative pattern 8R is changing. In the example of FIG. 145(C), the medium decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed has the first identification information 8C1 of "8" and the second identification information 8C2 is lit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), a right decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this right decorative design temporary stop effect, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed. In the example of FIG. 145(D), the stopped right decorative pattern 8R has the first identification information 8R1 of "5" and the second identification information 8R2 is lit.
As described above, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are "7", "8", and "5", forming a displaced array. Further, the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up, forming a small winning arrangement. That is, since the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 forms a small winning arrangement, it is notified that the winning is a small winning.
After that, a small winning game is executed.

[Twin identification information presentation H]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the twin identification information effect H. FIG. In the twin identification information effect H, first, as shown in FIG. 146(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and a ready-to-win state is formed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1, respectively. However, at this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R do not have the second identification information shown in the twin identification information effects A to G.

Each of the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 represents any number from 1 to 9. Combining the first identification information 8L1, the first identification information 8C1, and the first identification information 8R1, a winning array (losing pattern array) representing a winning, a small winning array representing a small winning ( A small winning pattern array) or a big winning array (big winning pattern array) representing a big win can be formed. When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all odd numbers and are in a predetermined combination. For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, it is "7", "7", and "5". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot arrangement, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are all the same number (double order). For example, when the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are combined to form a jackpot array, it is "7", "7", and "7". When the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is combined to form a losing arrangement, it is an arrangement other than the small winning arrangement and the big winning arrangement (for example, "7", "8", "5"). .
In the example of FIG. 146(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(C), a big hit notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot pattern array is formed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same pattern. In the example of FIG. 146(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all become the number "7" and form the number string "7", "7", and "7".
After that, a jackpot game is executed.

[Modification]
In the twin identification information productions A to G, the decorative pattern has the second identification information, but is not limited to this. For example, a decorative pattern having first identification information and second identification information (also referred to as a first decorative pattern) and a decorative pattern having only the first identification information and not having the second identification information (second 2) may be mixed. In this case, when the jackpot pattern array is formed using the first decorative patterns, the situation may be more advantageous to the player than when the jackpot pattern array is formed using the second decorative patterns. good. For example, when the jackpot pattern array is configured using the first decorative pattern (for example, the array of the first identification information is "7", "7", and "7"), the transition to the variable probability game state after the jackpot game. And when the jackpot pattern array is configured using the second decorative pattern (for example, the array of the first identification information is "4", "4", "4"), the normal game state (non-variable game state).
In this way, when the second decorative symbol is statically displayed, the formation of the small winning arrangement is denied, that is, it is determined that the small winning will not occur.

In the twin identification information productions A to F above, the second identification information of the decorative pattern is a letter when it is lit, but it is not limited to this. may be shown or nothing may be shown.

In the twin identification information effect H, the second identification information is not displayed in the decoration pattern during the ready-to-win effect, but the second identification information may be displayed without being limited to this.

In the twin identification information effect A, when the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are combined to form a small winning arrangement, the second identification information (lighting portions) 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all lit up, When the character string becomes "S", "S", and "S", the second identification information 8C2 is not already lit in the middle decorative design 8C during the middle decorative design stop effect, and the character "S" is displayed. Since it is not displayed, the possibility of a small win is denied at this point. However, after this, when the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed in the right decorative design stop effect, the second identification information 8R2 is illuminated and the character "S" is displayed. In this case, when the possibility of winning a small prize is denied, that is, when the decorative design is stopped, the second identification information of the decorative design is not illuminated and the letter "S" is not displayed. When the decorative symbols are stopped thereafter, the second identification information of the stopped decorative symbols may not be lit and the character "S" may not be displayed. According to this configuration, the more the second identification information (lighting portion) lights up, the higher the possibility of winning a small prize can be, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned twin identification information production, the lighting units 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are lit to notify a small win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a big win may be announced, or a probability variable big win may be announced. may Further, although the lighting portions 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 have the same circular shape, they are not limited to this, and may have different shapes. For example, the lighting portion 8L2 may be circular, the lighting portion 8C2 may be square, and the lighting portion 8R2 may be triangular.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of twin identification information presentation Ver1 is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the twin identification information effects A to G include first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 (numerical portions) and second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (lighting portions). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped so that the combinations of the respective first identification information in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R form a small winning pattern arrangement. At least one of an effect to be displayed and an effect to stop and display the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R so that the combinations of the respective second identification information in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R form a small winning pattern arrangement. is performed. According to this configuration, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed so that the combination of the first identification information becomes a small winning pattern arrangement, or the second patterns are displayed in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Since an effect is performed such that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed so that the combination of the identification information becomes a small winning pattern arrangement, the player can enjoy the performance when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped. , the two pieces of identification information, the first identification information and the second identification information, can be noticed, and the interest in the stop effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effects 2 and 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the twin identification information presentation H, the decorative pattern 8L including the first identification information 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 (numbers) and the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (lighting portions) , 8C and 8R are variably displayed, and thereafter, in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, the combination of the respective first identification information becomes a jackpot pattern arrangement (parallel arrangement). to stop displaying. According to this configuration, by combining the first identification information of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, it is possible to notify the big win in addition to the small prize, so that the player pays attention when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped. It is possible to improve the interest of the stop performance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the twin identification information effects A to G, the combinations of the second identification information 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (lighting portions) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R form a jackpot pattern arrangement. I don't get it. According to this configuration, for example, in a mode with a high probability of a small hit (time-saving state, etc.), when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped, a strong interest in the second identification information can be given to the player, It is possible to improve the interest of the stop performance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the twin identification information effects B to F, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed, the small winning pattern array is displayed according to the first identification information or the second identification information. Silhouette images 8LL, 8CC, 8RR representing the silhouettes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and suggesting a small win are stop-displayed in the variable regions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the small winning before the small winning pattern arrangement is displayed by the first identification information or the second identification information, and the stop performance of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R can be enhanced. Interest can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the twin identification information effects B to G, the first identification information 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 are indicated by numerals in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R, and the second identification information 8L2 is indicated by numbers. , 8C2, 8R2 are indicated by non-numeric characters. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress confusion between the first identification information and the second identification information, and when a small hit is notified by the first identification information or the second identification information, The information can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the stop performance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X9-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of variably displaying a plurality of decorative patterns,
The decorative pattern may include first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information,
The second display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of decorative symbols so that the combination of the respective first identification information in the plurality of decorative symbols becomes the first win,
The third display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of decorative symbols so that the combination of the respective second identification information in the plurality of decorative symbols becomes the first win,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect with the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, at least one of the second display effect and the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X9-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the fourth display effect, the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped so that the combination of the first identification information of each of the plurality of decorative symbols results in a second win different from the first win. It is a production to display,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the second display effect and the third display effect are not performed, and the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X9-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X9-2,
The first hit is a small hit,
The second win is a jackpot,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X9-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X9-3,
In the plurality of decorative patterns, the combination of each of the second identification information cannot constitute a second win,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X9-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X9-4,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a first win suggestive image suggesting that the first win will occur in the variable display region of the decorative pattern,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the fifth display effect is performed before the second display effect or the third display effect. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X9-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X9-5,
The first identification information is indicated by a number,
wherein the second identification information is non-numeric;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Effect example]
In addition, an example of the effect of twin identification information presentation Ver2 is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R including the lighting portions 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are variably displayed in the twin identification information effects A to G, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped. When displaying, the lighting part of at least one decorative pattern is lit to notify a predetermined win (for example, a small win). According to this configuration, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped, a predetermined win (for example, a small win) can be recognized by lighting the lighting part, and the effect of stopping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is interesting. can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in the twin identification information presentations B to E and G, the respective lighting portions 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are lit to achieve a predetermined win. (For example, a small hit) is reported. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped, the respective lighting portions are lit, so that the player can quickly recognize a predetermined win (for example, a small win). It is possible to improve interest in the stop performance of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the twin identification information effects B to D and G, each time the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the lighting portion of the decorative pattern is turned on. Then, the lighting units 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are finally lit to inform a predetermined hit (for example, a small hit). According to this configuration, every time a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the lighting portion of the decorative symbol is lit, so that the lighting of the lighting portion can be emphasized to the player, and finally the respective lighting portions 8L2 and 8C2 can be emphasized. , 8R2 are lit to inform the player of a predetermined win (for example, a small win). It is possible to improve the interest of the stop performance. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, characters are displayed in the lighting portions 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the twin identification information effects B to E, respectively. In the case of the stop display, each lighting part is lit and a character is displayed on each lighting part to notify a predetermined win (for example, a small win). According to this configuration, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the respective lighting portions are lit and characters are displayed on the respective lighting portions to notify a predetermined win (for example, a small win). Therefore, by displaying the characters of the lighting part, it is possible for the player to recognize a predetermined win (for example, a small win) in an easy-to-understand manner, and to improve the interest of the stop performance of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the twin identification information effects B to E, the lighting portions 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are of the same shape, respectively, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped. When displaying, while lighting each lighting part, the lighting part of the same shape is displayed in each decorative pattern to notify a predetermined win (for example, a small win). According to this configuration, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the lighting portions of the same shape are displayed in the respective decorative patterns while lighting the lighting portions of the respective decorative patterns. Since the winning is notified, the shape of the lighting part enables the player to recognize the predetermined winning (for example, small winning) in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby improving the interest of the stop performance of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. can be made As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the twin identification information productions A to G, the lighting portions 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are lit so as to notify a small win. there is According to this configuration, since the notification of the jackpot is generally performed by displaying the number patterns in a double-order arrangement, the lighting portions 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are lit. By announcing the small win, the player can be prevented from confusing the small win with the big win, and the interest of the stop performance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X10-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of variably displaying a plurality of decorative patterns,
The decorative pattern may include a lighting part,
The second display effect is a effect of notifying a predetermined hit by lighting the lighting portion of at least one of the decorative symbols when the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X10-1,
The second display effect is, when the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the respective lighting units are lit to notify the predetermined hit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X10-2,
In the second display effect, when the plurality of decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, each time the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the lighting portion of the decorative pattern is lit, and finally the lighting portions are lit. It is a production to notify the predetermined hit by letting
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X10-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect X10-2 or aspect X10-3,
A character is displayed in each of the lighting portions of the plurality of decorative patterns,
The second display effect is an effect in which, when the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, each of the lighting portions is lit and a character is displayed on each of the lighting portions to notify the predetermined win. be,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects X10-2 to X10-4,
The lighting portions of the plurality of decorative patterns have the same shape,
In the second display effect, when the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the lighting portions of the respective decorative symbols are lit while the lighting portions of the same shape are displayed in the respective decorative symbols to achieve the predetermined hit. It is a performance to inform,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X10-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects X10-3 to X10-5,
The predetermined hit is a small hit,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The record update display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150. FIG. This record update display effect can be executed by the image control microcomputer 101 during the variation effect of decorative symbols or during the jackpot game. This record update display effect is a effect of displaying an image on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Record update display effect A]
147 is a diagram for explaining the record update display effect A. FIG. In the record update display effect A, after the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, as shown in FIG. 147(A), the big hit notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern array. In the example of FIG. 147(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(B), the acquired ball number display effect is performed. This winning ball number display effect is performed during a jackpot game (particularly during a round game), and includes a round display X11A, a consecutive winning number display X11B, a right hitting suggestion display X11C, and a winning ball number display X11D. is displayed. The round display X11A is displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a. The number of consecutive wins display X11B is displayed below the round display X11A. The indication X11C suggesting hitting to the right is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a. The winning ball number display X11D is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a.

The round display X11A is a display showing the number of round games played during the jackpot game, that is, the number of rounds. The number of consecutive games display X11B is a display showing the number of consecutive games (RUSH number). The number of consecutive wins is represented by the sum of the first hit (jackpot from non-time-saving state and non-variable state) and the number of jackpots in the time-saving state after the first hit. For example, after the first win, a big win is achieved in the next time-saving state, and the number of consecutive wins at the time of the next big win in the time-saving state is three times. The right-handed suggestion display X11C is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to turn the handle 60 clockwise to eject the game ball to the right of the game board 2, that is, to hit right. It is a display that suggests (prompts) to Acquired ball number display X11D is a display showing the number of game balls acquired during a consecutive game. During consecutive chan, the game state becomes a non-time-saving state when the special symbol changes It's between now and then. When the special symbols fluctuate during continuous chan, the game state is a time saving state. The number of balls acquired during the consecutive win indicated by the number of acquired balls display X11D is the number of acquired balls acquired during the jackpot game (also called the number of acquired balls acquired by the jackpot), as well as the number of acquired balls acquired during the small winning game (small winning Also called number of balls). In addition to this, the number of winning balls in the winning ball number display X11D indicates the number of winning balls in the chain, in addition to the number of winning balls and the number of winning small winning balls, to the general winning opening, the first starting opening, and the second starting opening. It may include the number of balls acquired by winning a prize. In addition, in the round game, the first big winning hole 30 closes when the specified number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30, but the number of jackpot winning balls is the specified number in the first big winning hole 30 in the round game. Also includes game balls acquired when game balls win over (so-called over win). Similarly, the number of winning small winning balls includes game balls acquired when game balls enter the second big winning hole 35 in excess of a prescribed number (so-called over winning).

In the example of FIG. 147(B), the round display X11A is displayed as "1R", indicating that the round game is 1R, and the number of consecutive wins display X11B is displayed as "RUSH 10 times", indicating that the consecutive It shows that the number of chances is 10, and the indication X11C indicating "hit to the right" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball are shown. , "16300" is displayed, indicating that 16300 game balls have been acquired during the consecutive game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(C), a new record display effect is performed. This new record display effect is performed during a jackpot game (particularly during a round game), and a new record suggestion display X11E is displayed. The new record suggestion display X11E is displayed below the acquired ball number display X11D and adjacent to the acquired ball number display X11D. The new record suggestion display X11E indicates that the number of acquired balls in the consecutive game represented by the acquired ball number display X11D is a new record. In this case, the new record of the number of balls obtained in the consecutive game is stored in the sub-RAM 94, and the number of obtained balls in the consecutive game exceeds the new record of the number of obtained balls in the consecutive game saved in the sub-RAM 94. In this case, this new record display effect is performed, and the acquired ball number display X11D is displayed. The number of obtained balls in the new record, which has become a new record, is stored in the sub-RAM 94 as the number of obtained balls of the new record. In the example of FIG. 147(C), the new record suggestion display X11E displays "New record!", suggesting that a new record has been achieved and that a new record is in progress.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(D), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect performed immediately after the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R after the new record display effect, that is, after the jackpot game. Since this decorative design variation start effect is performed immediately after the start of variation of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are in a stopped state. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 147(D), the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are displayed below the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(E), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation production, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to vary, and the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varying. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 147(E), the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are displayed below the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(F), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the same decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stop-displayed, and the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates to create a ready-to-win state. In this ready-to-win effect, the new record suggestion display X11E is not displayed.
After that, a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead effect, pending change effect) is performed.

[Record update display effect B]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the record update display effect B. FIG. In the record update display effect B, after the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, as shown in FIG. 148(A), the big hit notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern array. In the example of FIG. 148(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(B), the acquired ball number display effect is performed. This winning ball number display effect is performed during a jackpot game (particularly during a round game), and includes a round display X11A, a consecutive winning number display X11B, a right hitting suggestion display X11C, and a winning ball number display X11D. is displayed. The round display X11A is displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a. The number of consecutive wins display X11B is displayed below the round display X11A. The indication X11C suggesting hitting to the right is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a. The winning ball number display X11D is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a.

The round display X11A is a display showing the number of round games played during the jackpot game, that is, the number of rounds. The number of consecutive games display X11B is a display showing the number of consecutive games (RUSH number). The number of consecutive wins is represented by the sum of the first hit (jackpot from non-time-saving state and non-variable state) and the number of jackpots in the time-saving state after the first hit. For example, after the first win, a big win is achieved in the next time-saving state, and the number of consecutive wins at the time of the next big win in the time-saving state is three times. The right-handed suggestion display X11C is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to turn the handle 60 clockwise to eject the game ball to the right of the game board 2, that is, to hit right. It is a display that suggests (prompts) to Acquired ball number display X11D is a display showing the number of game balls acquired during a consecutive game. Continuous Chan is a period from the first hit (non-time-saving state and non-probability variable state jackpot) until the game state becomes a non-time-saving state at the time of fluctuation of special symbols. When the special symbols fluctuate during continuous chan, the game state is a time saving state. The number of balls acquired during the consecutive win indicated by the number of acquired balls display X11D is the number of acquired balls acquired during the jackpot game (also called the number of acquired balls acquired by the jackpot), as well as the number of acquired balls acquired during the small winning game (small winning Also called number of balls). It should be noted that, not limited to this, the number of winning balls in the winning ball number display X11D indicates the number of winning balls in the consecutive game, in addition to the number of winning balls and the number of winning small winning balls, to the general winning opening, the first starting opening, and the second starting opening. It may include the number of balls acquired by winning a prize. In addition, in the round game, the first big winning hole 30 closes when the specified number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30, but the number of jackpot winning balls is the specified number in the first big winning hole 30 in the round game. Also includes game balls acquired when game balls win over (so-called over win). Similarly, the number of winning small winning balls includes game balls acquired when game balls enter the second big winning hole 35 in excess of a prescribed number (so-called over winning).

In the example of FIG. 148(B), the round display X11A is displayed as "1R", indicating that the round game is 1R, and the number of consecutive wins display X11B is displayed as "RUSH 10 times", indicating that the consecutive It indicates that the number of chances is 10, and the indication X11C indicating "hit to the right" indicates "hit to the right" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. , "16300" is displayed, indicating that 16300 game balls have been acquired during the consecutive game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(C), a new record display effect is performed. This new record display effect is performed during a jackpot game (particularly during a round game), and a new record suggestion display X11E is displayed. The new record suggestion display X11E is displayed below the acquired ball number display X11D and adjacent to the acquired ball number display X11D. The new record suggestion display X11E indicates that the number of acquired balls in the consecutive game represented by the acquired ball number display X11D is a new record. In this case, the new record of the number of balls obtained in the consecutive game is stored in the sub-RAM 94, and the number of obtained balls in the consecutive game exceeds the new record of the number of obtained balls in the consecutive game saved in the sub-RAM 94. In this case, this new record display effect is performed, and the acquired ball number display X11D is displayed. The number of obtained balls in the new record, which has become a new record, is stored in the sub-RAM 94 as the number of obtained balls of the new record. In the example of FIG. 148(C), the new record suggestion display X11E displays "Updating!", suggesting that the new record is being achieved and that the new record is still being updated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(D), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect performed immediately after the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R after the new record display effect, that is, after the jackpot game. Since this decorative design variation start effect is performed immediately after the start of variation of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are in a stopped state. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 148(D), the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are displayed below the main display screen 7a. In addition, the new record suggesting display X11E displays "Updating!", as in the new record display effect, suggesting that the new record is being achieved and that the new record is still being updated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(E), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation production, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to vary, and the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varying. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 148(E), the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are displayed below the main display screen 7a. In addition, the new record suggesting display X11E, like the new record display effect and the decoration pattern fluctuation start effect, displays "Updating!" suggesting.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(F), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a ready-to-win state. In this ready-to-win effect, the new record suggestion display X11E is not displayed.
After that, a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead effect, pending change effect) is performed.

[Record update display effect C]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the record update display effect C. FIG. In the record update display effect C, after the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, as shown in FIG. 149(A), the big hit notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 149(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), the acquired ball number display effect is performed. This winning ball number display effect is performed during a jackpot game (particularly during a round game), and includes a round display X11A, a consecutive winning number display X11B, a right hitting suggestion display X11C, and a winning ball number display X11D. is displayed. The round display X11A is displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a. The number of consecutive wins display X11B is displayed below the round display X11A. The indication X11C suggesting hitting to the right is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a. The winning ball number display X11D is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a.

The round display X11A is a display showing the number of round games played during the jackpot game, that is, the number of rounds. The number of consecutive games display X11B is a display showing the number of consecutive games (RUSH number). The number of consecutive wins is represented by the sum of the first hit (jackpot from non-time-saving state and non-variable state) and the number of jackpots in the time-saving state after the first hit. For example, after the first win, a big win is achieved in the next time-saving state, and the number of consecutive wins at the time of the next big win in the time-saving state is three times. The right-handed suggestion display X11C is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to turn the handle 60 clockwise to eject the game ball to the right of the game board 2, that is, to hit right. It is a display that suggests (prompts) to Acquired ball number display X11D is a display showing the number of game balls acquired during a consecutive game. Continuous Chan is a period from the first hit (non-time-saving state and non-probability variable state jackpot) until the game state becomes a non-time-saving state at the time of fluctuation of special symbols. In other words, when the special symbols fluctuate during consecutive chances, the game state is the time-saving state. The number of balls acquired during the consecutive win indicated by the number of acquired balls display X11D is the number of acquired balls acquired during the jackpot game (also called the number of acquired balls acquired by the jackpot), as well as the number of acquired balls acquired during the small winning game (small winning Also called number of balls). It should be noted that, not limited to this, the number of winning balls in the winning ball number display X11D indicates the number of winning balls in the consecutive game, in addition to the number of winning balls and the number of winning small winning balls, to the general winning opening, the first starting opening, and the second starting opening. It may include the number of balls acquired by winning a prize. In addition, in the round game, the first big winning hole 30 closes when the specified number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30, but the number of jackpot winning balls is the specified number in the first big winning hole 30 in the round game. Also includes game balls acquired when game balls win over (so-called over win). Similarly, the number of winning small winning balls includes game balls acquired when game balls enter the second big winning hole 35 in excess of a prescribed number (so-called over winning).

In the example of FIG. 149(B), the round display X11A is displayed as "1R", indicating that the round game is 1R, and the number of consecutive wins display X11B is displayed as "RUSH 10 times", indicating that the consecutive It indicates that the number of chances is 10, and the indication X11C indicating "hit to the right" indicates "hit to the right" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. , "16300" is displayed, indicating that 16300 game balls have been acquired during the consecutive game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), a new record display effect is performed. This new record display effect is performed during a jackpot game (particularly during a round game), and a new record suggestion display X11E is displayed. The new record suggestion display X11E is displayed so as to be superimposed on the acquired ball number display X11D. The new record suggestion display X11E indicates that the number of acquired balls in the consecutive game represented by the acquired ball number display X11D is a new record. In this case, the new record of the number of balls obtained during the consecutive game is stored in the sub-RAM 94, and the number of obtained balls during the consecutive game exceeds the new record of the number of obtained balls during the consecutive game saved in the sub-RAM 94. In this case, this new record display effect is performed, and the acquired ball number display X11D is displayed. The number of obtained balls in the new record, which has become a new record, is stored in the sub-RAM 94 as the number of obtained balls of the new record. In the example of FIG. 149(C), the new record suggestion display X11E displays "Updating!", suggesting that the new record is being achieved and that the new record is still being updated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(D), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect performed immediately after the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R after the new record display effect, that is, after the jackpot game. Since this decorative design variation start effect is performed immediately after the start of variation of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are in a state of being stopped and displayed. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are continuously displayed, and the new record suggestion display X11E is displayed so as to overlap the acquired ball number display X11D. In the example of FIG. 149(D), the new record suggesting display X11E is similar to the new record display effect, displaying "Updating!" It suggests.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(E), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation production, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to vary, and the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varying. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are continuously displayed, and the new record suggestion display X11E is displayed so as to overlap with the acquired ball number display X11D. In the example of FIG. 149(E), the new record suggestion display X11E displays "Updating!" It suggests that it is still being updated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(F), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a ready-to-win state. In this ready-to-win effect, the new record suggestion display X11E is not displayed.
After that, a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead effect, pending change effect) is performed.

[Record update display effect D]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the record update display effect D. FIG. In the record update display effect D, after the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, as shown in FIG. 150(A), the big hit notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern array. In the example of FIG. 150(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), the acquired ball number display effect is performed. This winning ball number display effect is performed during a jackpot game (particularly during a round game), and includes a round display X11A, a consecutive winning number display X11B, a right hitting suggestion display X11C, and a winning ball number display X11D. is displayed. The round display X11A is displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a. The number of consecutive wins display X11B is displayed below the round display X11A. The indication X11C suggesting hitting to the right is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a. The acquired ball number display X11D is displayed substantially in the center of the right sub-display screen 64R.

The round display X11A is a display showing the number of round games played during the jackpot game, that is, the number of rounds. The number of consecutive games display X11B is a display showing the number of consecutive games (RUSH number). The number of consecutive wins is represented by the sum of the first hit (jackpot from non-time-saving state and non-variable state) and the number of jackpots in the time-saving state after the first hit. For example, after the first win, a big win is achieved in the next time-saving state, and the number of consecutive wins at the time of the next big win in the time-saving state is three times. The right-handed suggestion display X11C is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to turn the handle 60 clockwise to eject the game ball to the right of the game board 2, that is, to hit right. It is a display that suggests (prompts) to Acquired ball number display X11D is a display showing the number of game balls acquired during a consecutive game. Continuous Chan is a period from the first hit (non-time-saving state and non-probability variable state jackpot) until the game state becomes a non-time-saving state at the time of fluctuation of special symbols. In other words, when the special symbols fluctuate during consecutive chances, the game state is the time-saving state. The number of balls acquired during the consecutive win indicated by the number of acquired balls display X11D is the number of acquired balls acquired during the jackpot game (also called the number of acquired balls acquired by the jackpot), as well as the number of acquired balls acquired during the small winning game (small winning Also called number of balls). It should be noted that, not limited to this, the number of winning balls in the winning ball number display X11D indicates the number of winning balls in the consecutive game, in addition to the number of winning balls and the number of winning small winning balls, to the general winning opening, the first starting opening, and the second starting opening. It may include the number of balls acquired by winning a prize. In addition, in the round game, the first big winning hole 30 closes when the specified number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30, but the number of jackpot winning balls is the specified number in the first big winning hole 30 in the round game. Also includes game balls acquired when game balls win over (so-called over win). Similarly, the number of winning small winning balls includes game balls acquired when game balls enter the second big winning hole 35 in excess of a prescribed number (so-called over winning).

In the example of FIG. 150(B), the round display X11A is displayed as "1R", indicating that the round game is 1R, and the number of consecutive wins display X11B is displayed as "RUSH 10 times", indicating that the consecutive It shows that the number of chances is 10, and the indication X11C indicating "hit to the right" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball are shown. , "16300" is displayed, indicating that 16300 game balls have been acquired during the consecutive game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), a new record display effect is performed. This new record display effect is performed during the jackpot game (particularly during the round game), and the new record suggestion display X11E is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. The new record suggestion display X11E is displayed so as to overlap the obtained ball number display X11D. The new record suggestion display X11E indicates that the number of acquired balls in the consecutive game represented by the acquired ball number display X11D is a new record. In this case, the new record of the number of balls obtained in the consecutive game is stored in the sub-RAM 94, and the number of obtained balls in the consecutive game exceeds the new record of the number of obtained balls in the consecutive game saved in the sub-RAM 94. In this case, this new record display effect is performed, and the acquired ball number display X11D is displayed. The number of obtained balls in the new record is stored in the sub-RAM 94 as the number of obtained balls of the new record. In the example of FIG. 150(C), the new record suggestion display X11E displays "Updating!", indicating that the new record is being achieved and that the new record is still being updated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(D), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect performed immediately after the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R after the new record display effect, that is, after the jackpot game. Since this decorative design variation start effect is performed immediately after the start of variation of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are in a stopped state. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are continuously displayed on the sub-display screen 64, and the new record suggestion display X11E is displayed so as to overlap the acquired ball number display X11D. . In the example of FIG. 150(D), the new record suggestive display X11E is similar to the new record display effect, displaying "Updating!" It suggests.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(E), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation production, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R start to vary, and the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are varying. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the new record suggestion display X11E and the acquired ball number display X11D are continuously displayed, and the new record suggestion display X11E straddles the left sub-display screen 64L and the main display screen 7a. , is displayed so as to overlap with the acquired ball number display X11D. In the example of FIG. 150(E), the new record suggesting display X11E is similar to the new record display effect and the decoration pattern fluctuation start effect, and displays "Updating!" It suggests that it is still being updated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(F), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the same decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stop-displayed, and the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates to create a ready-to-win state. In this ready-to-win effect, the new record suggestion display X11E is not displayed.
After that, a predetermined effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead effect, pending change effect) is performed.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned record update display effect, when the number of balls obtained in the consecutive game indicated by the obtained ball number display X11D is a new record, the new record suggestion display X11E is displayed, and the new record of the number of obtained balls in the consecutive game is Although stored in the sub-RAM 94, the new record of the number of winning balls during the consecutive game may be reset at a predetermined timing. For example, it may be reset at the end of the day, the end of the week, the end of the month, when the RAM is cleared, when the game machine 1 is turned off, and the like. This predetermined timing may be set by the manager of the game arcade where the game machine 1 is installed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the new record of the number of obtained balls from being set as an unattainable target during the consecutive wins, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game. can be improved. In addition, for example, the new record of the number of winning balls during the consecutive chance may be reset at any timing by the player. In this case, for example, the player may reset at the start of the game. In this way, when the player experiences the consecutive chances multiple times, the player can use the gaming machine with the goal of breaking the new record for the number of winning balls during the consecutive chances set by the player in the second and subsequent consecutive chances. It can be performed and can provide motivation to play. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the record update display effect, the new record suggesting display X11E is turned off during the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the new record suggesting display X11E may be displayed during the ready-to-win effect.

In the above-mentioned record update display effect, when the number of balls obtained during the consecutive game is a new record, a new record suggestion display X11E indicating that the number of obtained balls during the consecutive game is a new record (updating) is displayed. However, not limited to this, if the number of consecutive chances is a new record (updating), if the number of jackpots per day is a new record (updating), if the number of rotations is a new record (updating), the probability of entering In the case where the rate (continuous-challenge rush rate, RUSH rush rate) is a new record (currently being updated), a new record suggestion display may be made to suggest that they are new records (currently being updated).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the record update display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when a predetermined record (for example, the number of obtained balls display X11D) is displayed, a new record suggestion display X11E that suggests that the predetermined record is a new record is displayed. . According to this configuration, when the predetermined record is being displayed, the new record suggestion display X11E that suggests that the predetermined record is a new record is displayed, so that the player can feel a sense of superiority. can. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the acquired ball number display X11D is displayed, a new record suggestion display X11E is displayed to suggest that the acquired ball number represented by the acquired ball number display X11D is a new record. . According to this configuration, when the acquired ball number display X11D is displayed, the new record suggestion display X11E that suggests that the acquired ball number indicated by the acquired ball number display X11D is a new record is displayed. A person can indulge in a sense of superiority and increase the joy of getting a ball. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the acquired ball number display X11D is displayed, indicating that the acquired ball number represented by the acquired ball number display X11D is a new record. A new record suggestion display X11E is displayed. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbols are variably displayed, the acquired ball number display X11D is displayed, and a new record indicating that the acquired ball number represented by the acquired ball number display X11D is a new record. Since the suggestive display X11E is displayed, the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority even while the decorative symbols are fluctuating, and can increase the joy of getting the ball. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the acquired ball number display X11D is displayed while the decorative symbols are stopped, indicating that the acquired ball number represented by the acquired ball number display X11D is a new record. A new record suggestion display X11E is displayed, and the new record suggestion display X11E is displayed so as to overlap with the decoration pattern and is displayed in front of the decoration pattern. According to this configuration, the new record suggestive display X11E is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, so that the new record suggestive display X11E can be easily visually recognized and conspicuous, and the new record suggestive display X11E overlaps the decorative pattern. , the decoration symbol can be associated with the new record suggestion display X11E, and the player can be motivated to play until he or she hits the jackpot. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the winning ball number display X11D is displayed during the jackpot game, a new record indication that the number of winning balls represented by the winning ball number display X11D is a new record. Display X11E. According to this configuration, during the jackpot game, the new record suggestion display X11E that suggests that the number of obtained balls indicated by the obtained ball number display X11D is a new record is displayed. By aiming to update the number, the player can be motivated to play. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the new record suggestion display X11E suggests that the new record is being updated. According to this configuration, the player can be made aware that not only has a new record been set, but also that the new record is being updated in the current progress system, thereby motivating the player to play the game. can do. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X11-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined record,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying a new record suggestion display suggesting that the predetermined record is a new record;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed at the time of the first display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X11-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X11-1,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying the number of acquired game media as the predetermined record,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying, as the new record suggestive display, a win count new record suggestive display suggesting that the number of game media acquired is a new record.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X11-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X11-2,
The third display effect is a effect in which decorative patterns fluctuate,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed while the third display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X11-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X11-3,
In the combination effect, when the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the third display effect, the acquisition number new record suggestion display is displayed in the second display effect, and the acquisition number new record suggestion display includes: Displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern and displayed in front of the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X11-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X11-4,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed at the time of the first display effect during the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X11-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X11-5,
The new record suggestion display suggests that a new record is being updated;
A gaming machine characterized by:

151 to 154, the presentation of the number of pitches displayed will be described below. This number-of-balls display performance is a performance executed in relation to the winning of game balls, especially during a small winning rush (RUSH) period from after the big winning game to the next big winning after the probability variable big winning. can be executed in connection with the winning of the game ball.

[Pitch number display effect A]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls display effect A. FIG.
In the number-of-putting-balls display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 151(A), the main display screen 7a executes a big win confirmation effect as a first hit. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the game has stopped at the jackpot pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot, the game state becomes a time-saving state (high-probability high base state), and during the time-saving state, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened. By making the game ball enter the second starting port 21 (electric sapo) which is easier to win, it becomes a small hit rush (RUSH) period in which small hits occur frequently. During the small winning rush period, the small winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is frequently opened, and by allowing the game ball to enter the opened large winning opening, the player can easily The number of game balls can be increased. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the game state becomes a time-saving state (low-probability base state), but a small hit rush does not occur. In the example shown in FIG. 151(A), the jackpot pattern array shows the probability variable jackpot "777", and above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "big hit!" It has become so. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), the main display screen 7a displays the number of balls put out for a big hit. In this jackpot ball number display effect, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game, the number of balls played) is displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot number display DE to be displayed is displayed. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won". Also, in the jackpot number display DE, numbers and kanji characters are displayed in the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), a reduction in working hours (power supply) start effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. When this time-saving (electric sapo) start effect is executed, the screen for displaying the number of hit balls displayed is erased, and on the main display screen 7a, the characters "Time-saving start!" A right-handed arrow YR for prompting the player to hit right-handed is displayed under the character of . A message MU consisting of the characters "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YR. The player is urged by the display of this right-handed arrow YR to hit right-handedly, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball is easily thrown into the second starting port 21 (electrical sapo) where winning is facilitated. can be made to win a prize, and small wins can be generated frequently.
It should be noted that, during the small hit rush period, unlike general time saving without a small hit rush, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of game balls on hand. In other words, the number of game balls on hand gradually decreases during the general time saving without the small hit rush, while the number of game balls on hand gradually increases during the time saving of the small hit rush. Therefore, the longer the small win rush lasts, in other words, the less the next big win (usually a big win) is drawn, the more profitable the player is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(D), the main display screen 7a executes a rush total number of pitches display effect. In this rush total number of balls display effect, the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this variable display of decorative patterns, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the right pattern display area. A symbol 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 151(D) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). In addition, when this rush total number of balls display effect is executed, the current rush period (big hit and short time (small hit rush A rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed, which displays the number of balls won by the player during the period in which ) continues. In this example, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed as "2430 total wins". Also, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters. Here, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE and the above-mentioned jackpot number of balls displayed DE are the same number of balls. This is because the display of In other words, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE here is displayed after 2430 balls are released in the first big hit and before the next game ball wins. It should be noted that if this big hit is the second big hit during the rush, in the rush total ball number display effect shown in FIG. The total number of balls played in the rush added to the number of balls won in the second jackpot will be displayed. If the second big hit is 2430 shots, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is 4430 shots).

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), the main display screen 7a executes the effect of counting up the total number of balls put out (first digit). This total number of put-out ball count-up (first digit) effect is an effect performed when a game ball enters one of the winning openings after the start of time saving and the game ball is paid out. In this example, the most probable variation result of decorative symbols is a small win, and the game ball enters the big winning hole and is paid out. In addition, in this example, the small winning (small winning pattern arrangement) is displayed in a mode in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are all stopped at probability variable patterns (odd numbered patterns) (except for the probability variable big winning pattern arrangement). Then, when the small winning pattern array (in this example, the small winning pattern array "135") stops on the main display screen 7a, the total number of pitches counted up (first digit) effect is executed, and the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE. is counted up in a predetermined manner according to the number of balls put out. That is, when game balls are paid out as prize balls during time saving (small win rush), the total number of rush balls displayed SDE is counted up by the number of game balls paid out. At this time, the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE counts up while displaying the variable digits of the displayed numbers of the number of played balls in a large size. For example, if the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball wins a small prize and wins one game ball in the big prize opening is 15, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE "total win" shown in FIG. 151 (D) 2430 shots", the number of the first digit (1 to 9) is larger than the numbers of the other digits (2 to 4 digits) by the count-up (first digit) effect shown in Fig. 151 (E). It fluctuates while being displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 151(E), this example shows an example in which "1" is displayed large as the first digit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(F), an effect of counting up the total number of balls put out (second digit) is executed on the main display screen 7a. This total number of pitches counted up (second digit) production is the total number of pitches counted up (first digit) production shown in FIG. This is an effect in which the changing second digit is displayed in a large size when the digit is carried up after being displayed in a large size up to "9". In other words, in the total number of pitches counted up (second digit) effect, the rush total number of pitches display SDE "total winning 2430 shots" is displayed with the number of the first digit enlarged to "9", and then the number of the second digit is displayed. "3" is incremented by 1 to become "4" (the first digit becomes "0"). At this time, the second digit "4" is displayed larger than the other digits (1st, 3rd, and 4th digits).

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(G), the main display screen 7a executes a count-up completion rendering of the total number of balls put out. After the effect of counting up the total number of pitched balls (second digit) shown in FIG. An effect is executed, and the rush total number display SDE "total winning 2440 shots" fluctuates while the first digit (1 to 5) is displayed larger than the other digits (2 to 4 digits). Then, when the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is counted up to "total winning 2445 shots", the total number of balls counted up is completed. In other words, in this total number of balls counted up end effect, the rush total number of balls display SDE ("total winning 2430 shots") shown in FIG. is counted up ("2445 shots total"), it is executed. Here, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, after the number "5" in the first digit is displayed in a large size, the total number of balls counted up returns to its original size as shown in FIG. 151(G). As shown, "total 2445 shots won" is displayed with all four digits of the same size.

[Ball number display effect B]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls display effect B. FIG.
In the number-of-putting-balls display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 152(A), the main display screen 7a executes a big win confirmation effect as the first win. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the game has stopped at the jackpot pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot, the game state becomes a time-saving state (high-probability high base state), and during the time-saving state, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened. By making the game ball enter the second starting port 21 (electric sapo) which is easier to win, it becomes a small hit rush (RUSH) period in which small hits occur frequently. During the small winning rush period, the small winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is frequently opened, and by allowing the game ball to enter the opened large winning opening, the player can easily The number of game balls can be increased. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the game state becomes a time-saving state (low-probability base state), but a small hit rush does not occur. In the example shown in FIG. 152(A), the jackpot pattern array indicates the probability variable jackpot "777", and above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. It has become so. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(B), the main display screen 7a displays the number of balls put out for a big hit. In this jackpot ball number display effect, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game, the number of balls played) is displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot number display DE to be displayed is displayed. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won". Also, in the jackpot number display DE, numbers and kanji characters are displayed in the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(C), a reduction in working hours (power supply) start effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. When this time-saving (electric sapo) start effect is executed, the screen for displaying the number of hit balls displayed is erased, and on the main display screen 7a, the characters "Time-saving start!" A right-handed arrow YR for prompting the player to hit right-handed is displayed under the character of . A message MU consisting of characters "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YR. The player is urged by the display of this right-handed arrow YR to hit right-handedly, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball is easily thrown into the second starting port 21 (electrical sapo) where winning is facilitated. can be made to win a prize, and small wins can be generated frequently.
It should be noted that, during the small hit rush period, unlike general time saving without a small hit rush, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of game balls on hand. In other words, the number of game balls on hand gradually decreases during the general time saving without the small hit rush, while the number of game balls on hand gradually increases during the time saving of the small hit rush. Therefore, the longer the small win rush lasts, in other words, the less the next big win (usually a big win) is drawn, the more profitable the player is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(D), the main display screen 7a executes a rush total number of pitches display effect. In this rush total number of balls display effect, the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this variable display of decorative patterns, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the right pattern display area. A symbol 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 152(D) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). In addition, when this rush total number of balls display effect is executed, the current rush period (big hit and short time (small hit rush A rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed, which displays the number of balls won by the player during the period in which ) continues. In this example, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed as "2430 total wins". Also, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters. Here, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE and the above-mentioned jackpot number of balls displayed DE are the same number of balls. This is because the display of In other words, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE here is displayed after 2430 balls are released in the first big hit and before the next game ball wins. It should be noted that if the current big win is the second big win during the rush, in the rush total ball count display effect shown in FIG. The total number of balls played in the rush added to the number of balls won in the second jackpot will be displayed. If the second big hit is 2430 shots, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is 4430 shots).

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(E), an effect of counting up the total number of balls put out (first digit) is executed on the main display screen 7a. This total number of put-out ball count-up (first digit) effect is an effect performed when a game ball enters one of the winning openings after the start of time saving and the game ball is paid out. In this example, the most probable variation result of decorative symbols is a small win, and the game ball enters the big winning hole and is paid out. In addition, in this example, the small winning (small winning pattern arrangement) is displayed in a mode in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are all stopped at probability variable patterns (odd numbered patterns) (except for the probability variable big winning pattern arrangement). Then, when the small winning pattern array (in this example, the small winning pattern array "135") stops on the main display screen 7a, the total number of pitches counted up (first digit) effect is executed, and the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE. is counted up in a predetermined manner according to the number of balls put out. That is, when game balls are paid out as prize balls during time saving (small win rush), the total number of rush balls displayed SDE is counted up by the number of game balls paid out. At this time, the total number of pitches displayed in the rush display SDE displays the entire number of the number of pitches displayed in a large size, and counts up while displaying the numbers of the changing digits of the number of the display of the number of pitches displayed in a larger size. For example, if the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball wins in the big winning hole is 15 as a result of a small win, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE "total win" shown in FIG. 152(D) 2430 shots", the total number of pitches counted up (first digit) shown in FIG. It fluctuates while being displayed larger than the number of digits (2 to 4 digits). As shown in FIG. 152(E), this example shows an example in which "1" is displayed in a larger size as the first digit. Also, when this total number of pitches counted up (first digit) effect is executed, the kanji notation in the rush total number of pitches display SDE is erased, and only numbers are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(F), the main display screen 7a executes the effect of counting up the total number of balls put out (second digit). This total number of pitches counted up (second digit) production is the total number of pitches counted up (first digit) production shown in FIG. This is an effect in which the changing second digit is displayed in a large size when the digit is carried up after being displayed in a large size up to "9". In other words, in the total number of pitches counted up (second digit) effect, the rush total number of pitches display SDE "total winning 2430 shots" is displayed with all digits enlarged and the first digit number "9". After that, the second digit "3" is incremented by 1 to become "4" (the first digit becomes "0"). At this time, the second digit "4" is displayed larger than the other digits (1st, 3rd, and 4th digits). Also in this production of counting up the total number of pitches played (second digit), the kanji notation in the rush total number of pitches display SDE is deleted, and only numbers are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(G), the main display screen 7a executes a count-up completion effect for the total number of balls put out. After the effect of counting up the total number of pitched balls (second digit) shown in FIG. The effect is executed, and the total number of rush balls displayed SDE "Total winning 2440 shots" is displayed with all digits enlarged and the first digit (1 to 5) other digits (2 to 4 digits) ) fluctuates while being displayed even larger than the numbers in . Then, when the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is counted up to "total winning 2445 shots", the total number of balls counted up is completed. In other words, in this total number of balls counted up end effect, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE ("total winning 2430 shots") shown in FIG. is counted up ("2445 shots total"), it is executed. Here, in the rush total number of pitches display SDE, after the number "5" in the first digit is displayed in a large size, all digits return to their original size due to this total number of pitches count-up end effect, and the figure is displayed. As shown in 152 (G), all four digits are of the same size and "total 2445 shots won" is displayed.

[Pitch number display effect C]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls display effect C. FIG.
In the number-of-putting-balls display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 153(A), the main display screen 7a executes a big win confirmation effect as the first win. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the game has stopped at the jackpot pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot, the game state becomes a time-saving state (high-probability high base state), and during the time-saving state, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened. By making the game ball enter the second starting port 21 (electric sapo) which is easier to win, it becomes a small hit rush (RUSH) period in which small hits occur frequently. During the small winning rush period, the small winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is frequently opened, and by allowing the game ball to enter the opened large winning opening, the player can easily The number of game balls can be increased. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the game state becomes a time-saving state (low-probability base state), but a small hit rush does not occur. In the example shown in FIG. 153(A), the jackpot pattern array shows the probability variable jackpot "777", and above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. It has become so. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(B), the main display screen 7a displays the number of balls put out for a big hit. In this jackpot ball number display effect, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game, the number of balls played) is displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot number display DE to be displayed is displayed. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won". Also, in the jackpot number display DE, numbers and kanji characters are displayed in the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(C), a reduction in working hours (power supply) start effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. When this time-saving (electric sapo) start effect is executed, the screen of the jackpot ball number display effect is erased, and on the main display screen 7a, the characters "time-saving start!" are displayed in the center, and "time-saving start!" A right-handed arrow YR for prompting the player to hit right-handed is displayed under the character of . A message MU consisting of characters "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YR. The player is urged by the display of the right-handed arrow YR to hit the right, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 21 (electrical sapo) where it is easy to win a prize. can be made to win a prize, and small wins can be generated frequently.
It should be noted that during the small hit rush period, unlike the general time-saving medium without a small hit rush, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of game balls on hand. That is, the number of game balls on hand gradually decreases during the general time saving without the small hit rush, while the number of game balls on hand gradually increases during the time saving of the small hit rush. Therefore, the longer the small win rush lasts, in other words, the less the next big win (usually a big win) is drawn, the more profitable the player is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(D), the main display screen 7a executes a rush total number of pitches displayed. In this rush total number of balls display effect, the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this variable display of decorative patterns, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the right pattern display area. A symbol 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 153(D) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). In addition, when this rush total number of balls display effect is executed, the current rush period (big hit and short time (small hit rush A rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed, which displays the number of balls won by the player during the period in which ) continues. In this example, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed as "2430 total wins". Also, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters. Here, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE and the above-mentioned jackpot number of balls displayed DE are the same number of balls. This is because the display of In other words, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE here is displayed after 2430 balls are released in the first big hit and before the next game ball wins. It should be noted that if the current big win is the second big win during the rush, in the rush total ball count display effect shown in FIG. The total number of balls played in the rush added to the number of balls won in the second jackpot will be displayed. If the second big hit is 2430 shots, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is 4430 shots).

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(E), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This losing pattern stop effect is executed by stopping (including temporary stop) the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in a predetermined pattern display mode after scrolling in relation to the stop of the special pattern (special pattern 2). . Here, in this predetermined pattern display mode, all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a mode in which they are stopped at predetermined normal patterns (even-numbered patterns). In FIG. 153(E), "8" stops at the left decorative symbol 8L which is the first stop symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R which is the second stop symbol stops at "6", which is the last stop symbol. A state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at "4" is shown ("846"). That is, all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped as normal patterns (even-numbered patterns). By confirming that all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have stopped as normal patterns (even-numbered patterns), the player knows that the result of the change is a loss, and the small winning rush continues. I know. In addition, the losing design stop effect is when all the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the pattern arrangement of the normal patterns (even-numbered patterns), as well as the patterns in which the normal patterns (even-numbered patterns) and the odd-numbered patterns (odd-numbered patterns) are mixed. It may be a case where it stops at an array (for example, "546", etc.). Further, when this losing symbol stop effect is executed, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed as "2650 total wins". That is, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the total number of balls that increased mainly due to small hits from "2430 total wins" when the time-saving game was started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(F), the ready-to-win announcement effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win announcement effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R ("846") stopped in the losing pattern array displayed in the losing pattern stop effect shown in FIG. The numerical display SDE (“2650 shots in total”) is displayed in an enlarged manner. However, in the rush total number of pitches display SDE, the kanji notation is erased and only the numerical notation is enlarged and displayed. That is, in this ready-to-win announcement effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the losing symbols and the next variation display after stopping is the ready-to-win, the losing symbols are enlarged and displayed, and the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is enlarged. indicate. That is, by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the losing symbols and the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, it is predicted that the next variable display will be a reach. In addition, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (“846”) of the missing symbols and the total number of rush balls displayed SDE (“2650”) are enlarged and displayed, part of the middle decorative symbol 8C (“4”) is visible. A rush total number display SDE is displayed to cover it in a possible manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(G), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation effect is executed by switching from the ready-to-win notice effect screen shown in FIG. 153(F). This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation display in the rush total number of balls display effect shown in FIG. However, in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 153(G), the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win performance is related to the variable display of the special symbols (mainly to special symbols 2), and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the ready-to-win pattern arrangement usually associated with the jackpot. Here, "8↓8" is shown as this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Since the small win rush usually ends when the player wins a big win, the player hopes that this reach result will be lost.

[Pitch number display effect D]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls display effect D. FIG.
In the number-of-balls display effect D, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 153(A), on the main display screen 7a, a big win confirmation effect is executed as the first win. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the game has stopped at the jackpot pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot, the game state becomes a time-saving state (high-probability high base state), and during the time-saving state, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened. By making the game ball enter the second starting port 21 (electric sapo) which is easier to win, it becomes a small hit rush (RUSH) period in which small hits occur frequently. During the small winning rush period, the small winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is frequently opened, and by allowing the game ball to enter the opened large winning opening, the player can easily The number of game balls can be increased. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the game state becomes a time-saving state (low-probability base state), but a small hit rush does not occur. In the example shown in FIG. 153(A), the jackpot pattern array shows the probability variable jackpot "777", and above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. It has become so. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(A), the main display screen 7a displays the number of balls put out for a big hit. In this jackpot ball number display effect, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game, the number of balls played) is displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot number display DE to be displayed is displayed. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won". Also, in the jackpot number display DE, numbers and kanji characters are displayed in the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(B), a reduction in working hours (power supply) start effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. When this time-saving (electric sapo) start effect is executed, the screen for displaying the number of hit balls displayed is erased, and on the main display screen 7a, the characters "Time-saving start!" A right-handed arrow YR for prompting the player to hit right-handed is displayed under the character of . A message MU consisting of characters "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YR. The player is urged by the display of this right-handed arrow YR to hit right-handedly, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball is easily thrown into the second starting port 21 (electrical sapo) where winning is facilitated. can be made to win a prize, and small wins can be generated frequently.
It should be noted that, during the small hit rush period, unlike general time saving without a small hit rush, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of game balls on hand. That is, the number of game balls on hand gradually decreases during the general time saving without the small hit rush, while the number of game balls on hand gradually increases during the time saving of the small hit rush. Therefore, the longer the small win rush lasts, in other words, the less the next big win (usually a big win) is drawn, the more profitable the player is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(C), the main display screen 7a executes a rush total number of pitches display effect. In this rush total number of balls display effect, the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this variable display of decorative patterns, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the right pattern display area. A symbol 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 154(C) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). In addition, when this rush total number of balls display effect is executed, the current rush period (big hit and short time (small hit rush A rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed, which displays the number of balls won by the player during the period in which ) continues. In this example, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed as "2430 total wins". Also, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters. Here, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE and the above-mentioned jackpot number of balls displayed DE are the same number of balls. This is because the display of In other words, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE here is displayed after 2430 balls are released in the first big hit and before the next game ball wins. It should be noted that if the current big win is the second big win during the rush, in the rush total ball count display effect shown in FIG. The total number of balls played in the rush added to the number of balls won in the second jackpot will be displayed. If the second big hit is 2430 shots, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is 4430 shots).

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(D), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This losing pattern stop effect is executed by stopping (including temporary stop) the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in a predetermined pattern display mode after scrolling in relation to the stop of the special pattern (special pattern 2). . Here, in this predetermined pattern display mode, all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a mode in which they are stopped at predetermined normal patterns (even-numbered patterns). In FIG. 154(D), "8" is stopped at the left decorative symbol 8L, which is the first stop symbol, and "6" is stopped at the right decorative symbol 8R, which is the second stop symbol, which is the last stop symbol. A state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at "4" is shown ("846"). That is, all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped as normal patterns (even-numbered patterns). By confirming that all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have stopped as normal patterns (even-numbered patterns), the player knows that the result of the change is a loss, and the small winning rush continues. I know. In addition, the losing design stop effect is when all the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the pattern arrangement of the normal patterns (even-numbered patterns), as well as the patterns in which the normal patterns (even-numbered patterns) and the odd-numbered patterns (odd-numbered patterns) are mixed. It may be a case where it stops at an array (for example, "546", etc.). Further, when this losing symbol stop effect is executed, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed as "2650 total wins". That is, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the total number of balls that increased mainly due to small hits from "2430 total wins" when the time-saving game was started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(E), the ready-to-win announcement effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win announcement production, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R ("846") stopped in the losing pattern arrangement displayed in the losing pattern stop production shown in FIG. The numerical display SDE (“2650 shots in total”) is displayed in an enlarged manner. However, in the rush total number of pitches display SDE, the kanji notation is erased and only the numerical notation is enlarged and displayed. That is, in this ready-to-win announcement effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the losing symbols and the next variation display after stopping is the ready-to-win, the losing symbols are enlarged and displayed, and the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is enlarged. indicate. That is, by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the losing symbols and the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, it is predicted that the next variable display will be a reach. In addition, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (“846”) of the missing symbols and the total number of rush balls displayed SDE (“2650”) are enlarged and displayed, part of the middle decorative symbol 8C (“4”) is visible. A rush total number display SDE is displayed to cover it in a possible manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(F), an effect of erasing the display of the total number of pitched balls is executed on the main display screen 7a. This total number-of-balls display erasing effect is the total number of rush-balls out of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the losing patterns that were enlarged and displayed in the advance notice effect shown in FIG. By moving the display SDE as indicated by the arrow TY, it is erased so as to be ejected from the lower side of the main display screen 7a (as if jumping down toward the front).

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(G), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation effect is executed by switching from the screen of the total number of pitches display erasing effect shown in FIG. 154(F). This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation display in the rush total number of balls display effect shown in FIG. However, in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 154(G), the rush total number of pitches display SDE is already erased by the total number of pitches display erasing effect shown in FIG. 154(F), so it is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win performance is related to the variable display of the special symbols (mainly to special symbols 2), and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the ready-to-win pattern arrangement usually related to the jackpot. Here, "8↓8" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Since the small win rush usually ends when a big win is achieved, the player hopes that this reach result will be lost.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of displaying the number of balls put out is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, when there is a ball (payout of the game ball) while the game state is short time (small hit rush), rush Display the number of pitches played while displaying the number of the fluctuating digits larger than the other digits, or display the number of pitches played related to the rush in a larger size. It is configured to count up. According to this configuration, the player does not overlook the characteristic count-up display mode of the display of the number of put-out balls. It is possible to easily grasp that there was a payout of game balls. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, when there is a ball due to a small hit (payout of game balls) while the game state is a short time (small hit rush), , Of the number of pitches displayed related to the rush, the number of the fluctuating digits is displayed larger than the other digits, or the entire number of the number of pitches displayed related to the rush is displayed larger. It is configured to display the number of balls played by counting up the number display. According to this configuration, when the number-of-balls display effect is performed during the small-hit rush period, the player can know that the current fluctuation result was a small-win just by looking at the number-of-balls display effect. As it becomes clear, it becomes clear that the small winning rush will continue. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153 and 154, when the decorative symbol is a losing symbol and the next variable display after stopping is a ready-to-win, the decorative symbol is a losing symbol and is displayed when the decorative symbol stops. Along with enlarging the display of the number of balls, it is configured to enlarge the decorative symbols stopped by the losing symbols. According to this configuration, by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols of the losing symbols and the display of the number of balls put out, it is possible to predict that the next variable display will be a ready-to-win game. In addition, the player can understand that the next variable display will be a ready-to-win game simply by visually recognizing either the decorative pattern of the enlarged lost pattern or the display of the number of balls put out. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153 and 154, when the game state is short time (small hit rush), the decorative pattern is a losing pattern and the next variation display after stopping is reach. When it becomes , the display of the number of balls put out related to the rush is enlarged when the decorative symbols stop at the losing symbols, and the decorative symbols stopped at the losing symbols are enlarged. According to this configuration, the player can know that the next variable display will be a ready-to-win game simply by visually recognizing either the decorative symbol of the enlarged lost symbol or the display of the number of balls put out. If the next variable display is the reach related to the probability variable jackpot, the small win rush will continue (reacquire), while if it becomes the reach related to the normal jackpot, the small win rush may end. Therefore, when the decorative pattern of the losing pattern or the display of the number of balls put out is displayed in an enlarged manner, the player will be overjoyed, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153 and 154, when the game state is short time (small hit rush), the decorative pattern is a losing pattern and the next variation display after stopping is reach. When it becomes, it is configured to erase the display of the display of the number of balls related to the rush when the decorative pattern stops at the losing pattern. According to this configuration, the player can know that the next variable display will be a ready-to-win game only by visually confirming that the display of the number of balls put out has been erased. If the next variable display is the reach related to the probability variable jackpot, the small win rush will continue (reacquire), while if it becomes the reach related to the normal jackpot, the small win rush may end. Therefore, when the display of the number of balls put out is erased, the player will be happy and sad, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the number-of-balls display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the small hit is shown in the case where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped in the probability variation pattern (odd number symbol) (however, the probability variation excluding the jackpot pattern arrangement), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stops at a predetermined symbol, it may be a small win. Alternatively, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stop in a predetermined pattern display mode (for example, all the decorative patterns are of the same color), a small win may be given.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 151 to 154, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is horizontally displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE may be displayed obliquely (upward to the right or upward to the left). In this case, the size may be changed one digit at a time and displayed (for example, when the number is rising to the right, the numbers to the right may be displayed larger).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the numbers of the number of balls put out in the same color, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the rush total number of pitches display SDE counts up while displaying the number of the number of pitches that fluctuates in the display of the number of pitches in a large size. may be displayed in a color different from the color of the digits.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 151 to 154, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the total number of rush balls played SDE are both displayed in Arabic numerals. It is not limited to this. For example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed with patterns other than Arabic numerals (for example, Chinese numerals) so as to be different from the rush total number of balls displayed SDE. By doing so, the difference between the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the rush total number of balls displayed SDE becomes clearer.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the losing symbols and the rush total number of balls displayed SDE are enlarged and displayed, part of the middle decorative symbol 8C is visible. Although the total number of rush pitches displayed SDE is displayed so as to cover it in such a manner, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the total number of rush pitches displayed SDE may be displayed so as to cover all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a visible manner. In short, the display of the total number of rushed balls SDE may be of any display mode as long as it covers the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R in a visible manner.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153 and 154, when the ready-to-win advance notice effect is performed when the losing pattern stops, the ready-to-win related to the normal jackpot is performed in the next variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the display mode of the total number of rush balls displayed SDE changes to a predetermined display mode (for example, the total number of rush balls displayed SDE changes to a predetermined color) in the ready-to-win announcement effect, the next variable display shows the reach related to the probability variable jackpot. may be performed. Alternatively, when the total number of pitches display erasing effect shown in FIG. 154(F) is executed, the next fluctuation display is performed for normal jackpot, and the total number of pitches display erasing effect shown in FIG. 154(F) is performed. If it is not executed, the reach related to the probability variable jackpot may be performed in the next variable display.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first production is a production in which the display of the number of put-out balls is displayed in numbers, and when a ball is put out, the number of the display of the number of put-out balls is counted up,
The display means performs the first effect when the game state is in a predetermined state, and in the first effect, counts up while changing the size of the number displayed for the number of balls put out.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D4-2]
When counting up the display of the number of pitched balls, the display means displays, in the number of the display of the number of pitched pitches, the numbers of the digits that fluctuate in a larger size.
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1, characterized by:
[Aspect D4-3]
When the display of the number of pitched balls is counted up, the display means displays the entire number of the displayed number of pitched pitches in a large size.
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1 or aspect D4-2, characterized by:
[Aspect D4-4]
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
a jackpot game executing means for executing the jackpot game by changing the game state to a jackpot when the symbols variably displayed by the pattern display means are jackpot patterns;
a time-saving game executing means for executing the time-saving game by changing the game state after the big-hit game executed by the jackpot game executing means to a time-saving game;
with
The display means performs the first effect when the gaming state is a time-saving game,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3, characterized by:
[Aspect D4-5]
a small winning game executing means for executing the small winning game by setting the game state to a small winning when the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display means are small winning symbols;
The display means performs the first effect when a small win is achieved while the gaming state is a time-saving game.
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-4, characterized by:
[Aspect D4-6]
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns according to the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
with
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second effect is a effect of displaying the number of balls played,
The display means performs the second effect when the game state is in a predetermined state, and in the second effect, when the decorative pattern is the losing pattern and the next variable display after the stop is the ready-to-win, changing the display mode of the display of the number of balls put out when the decorative pattern stops at a losing pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D4-7]
In the second effect, when the decorative pattern is a losing pattern and the next variation display after stopping is a ready-to-win, the display means displays the number of balls displayed when the decorative pattern stops with a losing pattern. and enlarging the decorative pattern stopped at the losing pattern,
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-6, characterized by:

155 to 158, the effect of displaying the number of pitches on multiple screens will be described below. This performance of displaying the number of balls put out is a performance executed in relation to the winning of game balls, especially during a time-saving game during a big win, after a big win and before the next big win, or during a small win rush (RUSH) period. It can be executed in relation to the winning of game balls such as.

[Multi-screen display of the number of balls thrown A]
FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls multiple-screen display effect A. FIG.
In the number-of-balls multiple screen display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 155(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 155(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(B), on the main display screen 7a, a big win confirmation effect is executed as a first win. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the game has stopped at the jackpot pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this example, the jackpot pattern array shows "777", and this jackpot pattern array "777" is a probability variable jackpot with 16 rounds (16R). Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot, the game state becomes a time-saving state (high-probability high base state), and during the time-saving state, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened. By making the game ball enter the second starting port 21 (electric sapo) which is easier to win, it becomes a small hit rush (RUSH) period in which small hits occur frequently. During the small winning rush period, the small winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is frequently opened, and by allowing the game ball to enter the opened large winning opening, the player can easily The number of game balls can be increased. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the game state becomes a time-saving state (low-probability base state), but a small hit rush does not occur. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(C), a round number display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This number-of-rounds display effect is performed during the big win game related to the big win symbol arrangement "777" shown in FIG. 155(B). When the jackpot game is started, 16 round games are performed, and in this round game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) during the round. When a prize is won, the game is shifted to the next round game. The number-of-rounds display effect shown in FIG. 155(C) shows the display mode of the main display screen 7a when the number of rounds is ten (10R). On the main display screen 7a, a first round display RSH displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game in characters is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and a second round display displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game in graphics (squares) is displayed on the right end of the screen. RZH is displayed. In addition, a rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed at the lower left of the screen.
The first round display RSH displays "ROUND10" indicating that the number of rounds is 10R. The second round display RZH displays 16 squares indicating that the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and by changing the display mode of 10 squares (black squares in this figure), the current It shows that the number of rounds is 10R. The rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the number of game balls (balls put out) "1524" obtained by the player in the current jackpot game because the current jackpot is the first hit. Also, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters. Here, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the number of balls won by the player during the rush period (the period during which the big win and short time (small win rush) continue). Since it is the first big win in the rush), the number of game balls that the player has obtained so far in the big win game is displayed in the number-of-rounds display effect shown in FIG. 155(C). It should be noted that if this big win is the second big win during the rush, in the round number display effect shown in FIG. The number of balls played will be displayed in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, which is added to the number of balls won so far in the second jackpot (for example, 1000 hits in the first jackpot, and then in a short time 1000 shots, if the number of hits obtained so far in the second jackpot is 1524, the rush total hits display SDE is 3524 shots).

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(D), the effect of displaying the total number of balls played on multiple screens is executed. This total number of put-out multiple screen display effect is an effect that is performed when the number of put-out balls acquired by the player reaches a predetermined number during the rush period. 155(C), the number of rounds reaches 13R as the jackpot game progresses from the 10R round game shown in FIG. 155(C). Executed when the number of balls reaches 2000. When the total number of pitches displayed on multiple screens is executed, the rush total number of pitches display SDE is displayed as "2000 shots" at the lower left of the main display screen 7a, and the rush number of predetermined pitches display STE is displayed on the main display screen 7a. , and "2000" is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. On the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R, a predetermined display mode (for example, the entire A strip-shaped display area HR colored in a predetermined color is displayed, and the rush predetermined number of pitches displayed STE is displayed in this display area HR. In the predetermined rush number display STE, the first number (fourth digit) "2" is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, and the last number (first digit) "0" is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. All the numbers (second and third digits) "0" other than the first and last digits are displayed on the main display screen 7a. That is, the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE and the rush number of predetermined pitches displayed STE are displayed at the same time. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the number of game balls obtained in the current rush (the first big win in the rush) has reached 2000. Further, the first round display RSH displays "ROUND13" indicating that the number of rounds is 13R, and the second round display RZH displays 16 squares indicating that the jackpot game is 16 rounds. The current number of rounds is 13 by changing the display mode of 13 squares (black squares in this figure). The predetermined rush number of balls displayed STE is displayed behind the display of the first round display RSH and the second round display RZH. In other words, the predetermined rush number of balls displayed STE is displayed so as not to interfere with the display of the game information related to the jackpot game. As a result, even when the predetermined number of rushed balls display STE is displayed in a large size over substantially the center of the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the right sub-display screen 64R, the player does not need to display the game information. can be easily verified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(E), the main display screen 7a displays the number of balls put out for a big hit. In this jackpot ball number display effect, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game, the number of balls played) is displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot number display DE to be displayed is displayed. Unlike the rush total number of balls display SDE, this jackpot number display DE only displays the number of game balls paid out in the big win game. Since the display DE and the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE are the same, the display of the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE is omitted in this jackpot display effect. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won". Also, in the jackpot number display DE, numbers and kanji characters are displayed in the same size.

[Multi-screen display of the number of balls thrown B]
FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls multiple-screen display effect B. FIG.
In the number-of-balls multiple-screen display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 156(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 156(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(B), on the main display screen 7a, a big win confirmation effect is executed as a first win. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the game has stopped at the jackpot pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this example, the jackpot pattern array shows "777", and this jackpot pattern array "777" is a probability variable jackpot with 16 rounds (16R). Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot, the game state becomes a time-saving state (high-probability high base state), and during the time-saving state, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened. By making the game ball enter the second starting port 21 (electric sapo) which is easier to win, it becomes a small hit rush (RUSH) period in which small hits occur frequently. During the small winning rush period, the small winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is frequently opened, and by allowing the game ball to enter the opened large winning opening, the player can easily The number of game balls can be increased. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the game state becomes a time-saving state (low-probability base state), but a small hit rush does not occur. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(C), a round number display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This number-of-rounds display effect is performed during the big win game related to the big win symbol arrangement "777" shown in FIG. 156(B). When the jackpot game is started, 16 round games are performed, and in this round game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) during the round. When a prize is won, the game is shifted to the next round game. The number-of-rounds display effect shown in FIG. 156(C) shows the display mode of the main display screen 7a when the number of rounds is ten (10R). On the main display screen 7a, a first round display RSH displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game in characters is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and a second round display displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game in graphics (squares) is displayed on the right end of the screen. RZH is displayed. In addition, a rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed at the lower left of the screen.
The first round display RSH displays "ROUND10" indicating that the number of rounds is 10R. The second round display RZH displays 16 squares indicating that the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and by changing the display mode of 10 squares (black squares in this figure), the current It shows that the number of rounds is 10R. The rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the number of game balls (balls put out) "1524" obtained by the player in the current jackpot game because the current jackpot is the first hit. Also, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters. Here, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the number of balls won by the player during the rush period (the period during which the big win and short time (small win rush) continue). 156(C), the number of game balls that the player has obtained so far in the relevant jackpot game is displayed in the round number display effect shown in FIG. It should be noted that if this big win is the second big win during the rush, in the round number display effect shown in FIG. The number of balls played will be displayed in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, which is added to the number of balls won so far in the second jackpot (for example, 1000 hits in the first jackpot, and then in a short time 1000 shots, if the number of hits obtained so far in the second jackpot is 1524, the rush total hits display SDE is 3524 shots).

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(D), the effect of displaying the total number of balls played on multiple screens is executed. This total number of put-out multiple screen display effect is an effect that is performed when the number of put-out balls acquired by the player reaches a predetermined number during the rush period. 156(C), the number of rounds becomes 13R as the jackpot game progresses from the round game of 10R shown in FIG. 156(C). Executed when the number of balls reaches 2000. When the total number of pitches displayed on multiple screens is executed, the rush total number of pitches display SDE is displayed as "2000 shots" at the lower left of the main display screen 7a, and the rush number of predetermined pitches display STE is displayed on the main display screen 7a. , and "2000" is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. On the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R, a predetermined display mode (for example, the entire A strip-shaped display area HR colored in a predetermined color is displayed, and the rush predetermined number of pitches displayed STE is displayed in this display area HR. In the predetermined rush number display STE, part of the leading number (fourth digit) "2" is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, and part of the last number (first digit) "0" is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64L. Displayed on the display screen 64R, a portion of the first number (fourth digit) "2", a portion of the last number (first digit) "0", and numbers other than the first and last numbers (second digit, 3rd digit) The entire "0" is displayed on the main display screen 7a. That is, the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE and the rush number of predetermined pitches displayed STE are displayed at the same time. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the number of game balls obtained in the current rush (the first big win in the rush) has reached 2000. Further, the first round display RSH displays "ROUND13" indicating that the number of rounds is 13R, and the second round display RZH displays 16 squares indicating that the jackpot game is 16 rounds. The current number of rounds is 13 by changing the display mode of 13 squares (black squares in this figure). The predetermined rush number of balls displayed STE is displayed behind the display of the first round display RSH and the second round display RZH. That is, the predetermined number of rushed balls displayed STE is displayed so as not to interfere with the display of the game information related to the jackpot game. As a result, even if the predetermined number of rushed balls display STE is displayed in a large size over substantially the center of the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the right sub-display screen 64R, the player does not need to display the game information. can be easily verified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(E), the main display screen 7a displays the number of balls put out for a big hit. In this jackpot ball number display effect, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game, the number of balls played) is displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot number display DE to be displayed is displayed. Unlike the rush total number of balls display SDE, this jackpot number display DE only displays the number of game balls paid out in the big win game. Since the display DE and the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE are the same, the display of the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE is omitted in this jackpot display effect. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 hits won". Also, in the jackpot number display DE, numbers and kanji characters are displayed in the same size.

[Multi-screen display of the number of balls played C]
FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls multiple-screen display effect C. FIG.
In the number-of-balls multiple-screen display effect C, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 156(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 156(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(A), the main display screen 7a executes a big win confirmation effect as a first win. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the game has stopped at the jackpot pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this example, the jackpot pattern array shows "777", and this jackpot pattern array "777" is a probability variable jackpot with 16 rounds (16R). Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot, the game state becomes a time-saving state (high-probability high base state), and during the time-saving state, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened. By making the game ball enter the second starting port 21 (electric sapo) which is easier to win, it becomes a small hit rush (RUSH) period in which small hits occur frequently. During the small winning rush period, the small winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is frequently opened, and by allowing the game ball to enter the opened large winning opening, the player can easily The number of game balls can be increased. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the game state becomes a time-saving state (low-probability base state), but a small hit rush does not occur. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(B), a round number display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This number-of-rounds display effect is performed during the big win game related to the big win symbol arrangement "777" shown in FIG. 157(A). When the jackpot game is started, 16 round games are performed, and in this round game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) during the round. When a prize is won, the game is shifted to the next round game. The number-of-rounds display effect shown in FIG. 157(B) shows the display mode of the main display screen 7a when the number of rounds is ten (10R). On the main display screen 7a, a first round display RSH displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game in characters is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and a second round display displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game in graphics (squares) is displayed on the right end of the screen. RZH is displayed. In addition, a rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed at the lower left of the screen.
The first round display RSH displays "ROUND10" indicating that the number of rounds is 10R. The second round display RZH displays 16 squares indicating that the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and by changing the display mode of 10 squares (black squares in this figure), the current It shows that the number of rounds is 10R. The rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the number of game balls (balls put out) "1524" obtained by the player in the current jackpot game because the current jackpot is the first hit. Also, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters. Here, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the number of balls won by the player during the rush period (the period during which the big win and short time (small win rush) continue). Since it is the first big hit in the rush), the number of game balls that the player has won so far in the big win game is displayed in the round number display effect shown in FIG. 157(B). It should be noted that if this big win is the second big win during the rush, in the round number display effect shown in FIG. The number of balls played will be displayed in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, which is added to the number of balls won so far in the second jackpot (for example, 1000 hits in the first jackpot, and then in a short time 1000 shots, if the number of hits obtained so far in the second jackpot is 1524, the rush total hits display SDE is 3524 shots).

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(C), on the main display screen 7a, a big hit number display effect is executed. In this jackpot ball number display effect, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game, the number of balls played) is displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot number display DE to be displayed is displayed. Unlike the rush total number of balls display SDE, this jackpot number display DE only displays the number of game balls paid out in the big win game. Since the display DE and the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE are the same, the display of the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE is omitted in this jackpot performance. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won". Also, in the jackpot number display DE, numbers and kanji characters are displayed in the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(D), the main display screen 7a executes a rush total number of pitches displayed. In this rush total number of balls display effect, the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the main display screen 7a. This variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the same manner as the variable display of the decorative symbols in the above-described decorative symbol variable performance shown in FIG. 156(A). In addition, when this rush total number of pitches display effect is executed, a rush total number of pitches display SDE is displayed on the lower center of the main display screen 7a (below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R). In this example, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed as "19630 shots in total". Although not shown, after the first big hit (probable variable big win) shown in FIG. The rush total ball count display effect shown in (D) is performed during the time-saving state after the fourth big win. Therefore, in the rush total ball count display effect shown in FIG. 157(D), the rush total ball count display SDE displays the result of the number of game balls acquired in the four big win games and the time-saving game (small win rush). there is In the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This jackpot fixed effect indicates that the fifth jackpot (variable probability jackpot) has been counted from the first jackpot (variable probability jackpot) shown in FIG. 157(A). In this example, the jackpot pattern array for the fifth jackpot indicates "777", and this jackpot pattern array "777" is a variable jackpot with 16 rounds (16R) as described above. . Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Big Win!" are displayed, and to the right of them, the characters "5th time" indicating that this is the fifth big win in this rush. is displayed larger. By this big win fixing performance, the player is convinced of the probability variable big win and grasps that the current rush is the fifth big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(F), a round number display effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This number-of-rounds display effect is performed during the big win game related to the big win symbol arrangement "777" shown in FIG. 157(E). The round number display effect shown in FIG. 157(F) is the same as the round number display effect shown in FIG. is 2 (2R), and both the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE and the jackpot number of pitches displayed DE are displayed.
The first round display RSH displays "ROUND2" indicating that the number of rounds is 2R. The second round display RZH displays 16 squares indicating that the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and by changing the display mode of two of them (black squares in this figure), the current It shows that the number of rounds is 2R. The total number of rush balls put out display SDE displays the number of game balls (balls put out) acquired by the player from the first big win to the present, “19850 total wins”. The jackpot ball count display DE displays the game ball count (ball count) "220 shots" that the player has acquired so far in the fifth jackpot game. The total number of rushed balls displayed SDE is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a, and the number of displayed big hits DE is displayed substantially below the center of the main display screen 7a and displayed in parallel with the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(G), the effect of displaying the total number of balls played on multiple screens is executed. This total number of put-out multiple screen display effect is an effect that is performed when the number of put-out balls acquired by the player reaches a predetermined number during the rush period. 157(F), the number of rounds becomes 3R as the jackpot game progresses from the 2R round game shown in FIG. 157(F). Executed when the number of balls reaches 20,000. When the total number of pitches displayed on multiple screens is executed, the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE is displayed as "20000 shots" on the lower left of the main display screen 7a, and the rush pitches displayed STE is displayed on the main display screen 7a. , and "20000" is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. On the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R, a predetermined display mode (for example, the entire A strip-shaped display area HR colored in a predetermined color is displayed, and the rush predetermined number of pitches displayed STE is displayed in this display area HR. In the predetermined rush number display STE, the entire leading number (fifth digit) "2" is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, and the entire last number (first digit) "0" is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. Of the numbers (2nd to 4th digits) "0" other than the first and last digits displayed, part of the 4th digit "0" is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, and the second digit is displayed. A part of "0" is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, a part of the fourth digit "0", a part of the second digit "0", and a third digit "0". The whole is displayed on the main display screen 7a. That is, the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE and the rush number of predetermined pitches displayed STE are displayed at the same time. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the number of game balls obtained in the current rush has reached 20,000. Further, the first round display RSH displays "ROUND3" indicating that the number of rounds is 3R, and the second round display RZH displays 16 squares indicating that the jackpot game is 16 rounds. The current number of rounds is 3 by changing the display mode of 3 squares (black squares in this figure). The predetermined rush number of balls displayed STE is displayed behind the display of the first round display RSH and the second round display RZH. In other words, the predetermined rush number of balls displayed STE is displayed so as not to interfere with the display of the game information related to the jackpot game. As a result, even when the predetermined number of rushed balls display STE is displayed in a large size over substantially the center of the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the right sub-display screen 64R, the player does not need to display the game information. can be easily verified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(H), on the main display screen 7a, a big hit number display effect is executed. In this jackpot number display performance, the jackpot number display DE and the rush total number of balls display SDE are displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. The total number of rushed balls displayed SDE is displayed below the number of displayed balls displayed for big win DE and is larger than the displayed number of displayed balls for big win DE. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won", and the rush total number display SDE is displayed as "22060 total shots". That is, this "total acquisition 22060 shots" is obtained by the fifth jackpot game in addition to the "total acquisition 19630 shots" acquired before the fifth jackpot game shown in Fig. 157 (D) is started. It is a value obtained by adding "2430 shots acquired".

[Multi-screen display of the number of balls thrown D]
FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls multiple-screen display effect D. FIG.
157(A) to 157(D), and then, as shown in FIG. 158(A), On the main display screen 7a, a jackpot determination effect is executed. This jackpot fixed effect indicates that the fifth jackpot (variable probability jackpot) has been counted from the first jackpot (variable probability jackpot). In this example, the jackpot pattern array for the fifth jackpot shows "777", and this jackpot pattern array "777" is a variable jackpot with 16 rounds (16R) as described above. . Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Big win~!" are displayed, and further to the right of them, the characters "5th time" indicating that this is the fifth big win in this rush. is displayed larger. By this big win confirmation performance, the player is convinced of the probability variable big win and grasps that the current rush is the fifth big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(B), on the main display screen 7a, a big hit number display effect is executed. In this jackpot number display effect, the jackpot number display DE and the rush total number of balls display SDE are displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. The number of game balls put out in a big win display DE displays only the number of game balls put out in one big win game. The total number of balls put out in the rush display SDE displays the number of balls put out by the player during the rush period (the period during which the big win and short time (small win rush) continue). The rush total number of put-out balls display SDE is displayed below the number of put-out big hits display DE and is larger than the number of put-out big hits display DE. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won", and the rush total number display SDE is displayed as "total 19860 shots".

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(C), a reduction in working hours (power supply) start effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. When this time-saving (electric sapo) start effect is executed, the screen for displaying the number of hit balls displayed is erased, and on the main display screen 7a, the characters "Time-saving start!" A right-handed arrow YR for prompting the player to hit right-handed is displayed under the character of . A message MU consisting of characters "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YR. The player is urged by the display of this right-handed arrow YR to hit right-handedly, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball is easily thrown into the second starting port 21 (electrical sapo) where winning is facilitated. can be made to win a prize, and small wins can be generated frequently.
It should be noted that, during the small hit rush period, unlike general time saving without a small hit rush, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of game balls on hand. In other words, the number of game balls on hand gradually decreases during the general time saving without the small hit rush, while the number of game balls on hand gradually increases during the time saving of the small hit rush. Therefore, the longer the small win rush lasts, in other words, the less the next big win (usually a big win) is drawn, the more profitable the player is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(D), the main display screen 7a executes a rush total number of pitches display effect. In this rush total number of balls display effect, the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this variable display of decorative patterns, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the right pattern display area. A symbol 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 158(D) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). In addition, when this rush total number of balls display effect is executed, the current rush period (big hit and short time (small hit rush A rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed, which displays the number of balls won by the player during the period in which ) continues. In this example, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed as "19860 shots in total". Also, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(E), the main display screen 7a executes the effect of counting up the total number of balls put out. This total number of put-out ball count-up effect is an effect that is performed when a game ball enters one of the winning holes and the game ball is paid out after the start of time saving. In this example, the most probable variation result of decorative symbols is a small win, and the game ball enters the big winning hole and is paid out. In addition, in this example, the small winning (small winning pattern arrangement) is displayed in a mode in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are all stopped at probability variable patterns (odd numbered patterns) (except for the probability variable big winning pattern arrangement). Then, when the small winning pattern array (in this example, the small winning pattern array "135") stops on the main display screen 7a, the total number of pitches counted up effect is executed, and the rush total number of pitches display SDE increases to the number of pitches. counted up accordingly. That is, when game balls are paid out as prize balls during time saving (small win rush), the total number of rush balls displayed SDE is counted up by the number of game balls paid out. In this example, the display SDE of the total number of rush balls put out is displayed as "19995 shots in total".

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(F), the effect of displaying the total number of balls played on multiple screens is executed. This total number of put-out multiple screen display effect is an effect performed when the number of put-out balls acquired by the player reaches a predetermined number during the rush period. In other words, in this effect of displaying the total number of balls on the screen, the display SDE of the total number of rush balls shown in FIG. , is executed when the number of balls obtained by the player in this rush reaches 20,000 in this time-saving game. When the total number of pitches displayed on multiple screens is executed, the rush total number of pitches display SDE is displayed as "20,000 shots in total" at the bottom center of the main display screen 7a, and the rush predetermined number of pitches display STE is displayed as the main display. "20000" is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the right sub-display screen 64R. On the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R, a predetermined display mode (for example, the entire A strip-shaped display area HR colored in a predetermined color is displayed, and the rush predetermined number of pitches displayed STE is displayed in this display area HR. In the predetermined rush number display STE, the entire leading number (fifth digit) "2" is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, and the entire last number (first digit) "0" is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. The entire number (2nd to 4th digits) "0" other than the first and last digits is displayed on the main display screen 7a. That is, the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE and the rush number of predetermined pitches displayed STE are displayed simultaneously, and in this case, the rush predetermined number of pitches displayed STE is displayed much larger than the rush total number of pitches displayed SDE. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the number of game balls obtained in the current rush has reached 20,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(G), the main display screen 7a executes an effect of ending the display of the total number of balls on multiple screens. 158(F), the display region HR, the main display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The predetermined rush number display STE that was displayed as "20000" is erased, and the main display screen 7a displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, and 8C. 8R is switched and displayed. In addition, under the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the total number of rush balls put out SDE is displayed as "20010 total wins".
That is, as shown in FIG. 158(E), from the state where the total number of rush balls displayed SDE is displayed as "19995 total wins", 15 game balls are paid out due to small hits, and the total number of rush balls is displayed. When the SDE is counted up from "19,995 total hits" to "20,000 total hits," the effect of displaying the total number of pitched balls on multiple screens shown in FIG. "20000" is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R for a predetermined time. Further, the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE is counted up while the predetermined number of rushed balls displayed STE is displayed as "20000", and is stopped when "total winning 20010" is reached. Then, when the display time of "20000" in the predetermined rush number of pitches display STE has passed, the effect of ending the display of the total number of pitches on multiple screens is executed, the rush predetermined number of pitches display STE is erased, and the main display screen 7a shows: The decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R showing the original small winning pattern array "135" are switched and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(H), on the main display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In other words, the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 158(H) is the decorative symbols 8L and 8C in a state where the rush total number of balls displayed SDE shown in FIG. , 8R start to oscillate. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the rush total number of pitches display effect shown in FIG. 158(D), so detailed description is omitted here.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of displaying the number of balls played on multiple screens is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 155 to 158, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment has a configuration in which the display of the number of balls put out is displayed across the main display screen and the sub display screen when the number of balls put out reaches a predetermined number. It has become. According to this configuration, the player does not overlook the display of the number of put-out balls, and thus can easily grasp that the number of put-out balls has reached the predetermined number. In addition, when the number of balls put out reaches a predetermined number, it can be appealed not only to the player playing the game machine, but also to the surrounding players, giving the player a sense of superiority. can give. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 157, when the number of balls put out reaches a predetermined number during a jackpot game, the display of the number of balls put out is displayed across the main display screen and the sub display screen. , it is configured to be displayed behind the display of the game information related to the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the player can easily check the game information even when the display of the number of balls played is displayed in a large size across the main display screen and the sub display screen. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 158, the first number-of-balls-balls display that continuously displays the number of balls-balls-out for a predetermined period and the and a second display of the number of put-out balls that temporarily displays the number of put-out balls that has reached the predetermined number. It is configured to be displayed across the display screen and the sub-display screen. According to this configuration, the player can continuously grasp the number of balls put out during the predetermined period, and can easily grasp that the number of balls put out has reached the predetermined number. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 158, when displaying the number of put-out balls across the main display screen, the left sub-display screen, and the right sub-display screen, the display of the number of put-out balls is displayed. Display all or part of the first number on the left sub-display screen, display all or part of the last number of the number of pitches displayed on the right sub-display screen, and display numbers other than the first and last numbers of the number of pitches displayed. is configured to display all or part of the information on the main display screen. According to this configuration, it is possible to display the number of balls put out to give a strong impression to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 158, when the number of balls put out reaches a predetermined number during the small winning rush, the display of the number of balls put out is displayed across the main display screen and the sub display screen. It is configured to According to this configuration, the player can confirm that the number of game balls in his hand is increasing due to the small winning rush. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the number-of-balls multiple-screen display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 158, when the number of put out balls reaches a predetermined number, the display of the number of put out balls is displayed across the main display screen and the sub display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of put-out balls reaches a predetermined number, the number of put-out balls may be displayed over the sub-display screen after being displayed on the main display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 158, the predetermined rush number display STE and the rush total number display SDE are displayed horizontally. It is not limited. For example, the predetermined number of rushed balls displayed STE and the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE may be displayed diagonally (upward to the right or upward to the left). In this case, the size may be changed one digit at a time and displayed (for example, when the number is rising to the right, the numbers to the right may be displayed larger).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 158, the predetermined rush number display STE displays the numbers of the number of balls displayed in the same color. It is not limited. For example, the predetermined rush number of balls displayed STE may be displayed in a different color for each digit. Further, the color of the predetermined rush number display STE may be changed depending on the contents of the display of the number of balls played. For example, when the number of pitches displayed is 10,000, it is red, when it is 20,000, it is gold, and when it is 30,000, it is rainbow.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 158, the predetermined rush number display STE displays the numbers of the number of balls displayed in the same size. is not limited to For example, only the first number may be displayed larger, or the number may be displayed so as to decrease in order from the first number (downward to the right).

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 158, when the number of put out balls reaches a predetermined number, the display of the number of put out balls is displayed across the main display screen and the sub display screen. However, in this case, a character or the like may appear on the main display screen or the sub-display screen, and a congratulatory effect may be performed.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 158(F) and (G), the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is counted even while the rush predetermined number of balls displayed STE is displayed as "20000". However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rush total number display SDE displays "20000 total" while the predetermined rush number display STE is displayed as "20000", and displays "20000" in the predetermined rush number display STE. When the display time elapses, it is counted up, and it may be stopped when it reaches "20010 shots in total".

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D5-1]
the main display screen and
a display unit provided with a sub display screen adjacent to the main display screen and capable of executing a plurality of display effects on the main display screen and the sub display screen;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect of displaying the number of put-out balls by numbers,
When the number of put-out balls reaches a predetermined number, the display means displays the display of the number of put-out balls across the main display screen and the sub-display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D5-2]
The number of balls displayed is
a first pitch display that continuously displays the number of pitches played for a predetermined period;
a second number-of-balls display for temporarily displaying the number of put-out balls that reaches the predetermined number when the number of put-out balls reaches the predetermined number;
there is
The display means is
displaying the first pitch display on the main display screen;
displaying the second pitch display across the main display screen and the sub display screen;
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-1, characterized by:
[Aspect D5-3]
The display means is
It is possible to simultaneously display the first pitch display and the second pitch display,
When displaying the first display of the number of put-out balls and the second display of the number of put-out balls at the same time, the second display of the number of put-out balls is displayed larger than the first display of the number of put-out pitches.
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-2, characterized by:
[Aspect D5-4]
The sub display screen is
a left sub-display screen adjacent to the left of the main display screen;
a right sub-display screen adjacent to the right of the main display screen;
there is
The display means is
displaying the second number-of-balls-out display across the main display screen, the left sub-display screen, and the right sub-display screen;
displaying all or part of the leading number of the second pitch display on the left sub-display screen;
displaying all or part of the last number of the second pitch display on the right sub-display screen;
displaying all or part of the numbers other than the first and last numbers of the second pitch display on the main display screen;
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-2 or aspect D5-3, characterized by:
[Aspect D5-5]
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
a jackpot game executing means for executing the jackpot game by changing the game state to a jackpot when the symbols variably displayed by the pattern display means are jackpot patterns;
with
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second effect is a effect of displaying game information related to the jackpot game,
The display means is
When displaying the second number-of-balls-out display during the jackpot game, displaying the second number-of-balls-out display behind the display of the game information;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-2 to D5-4, characterized by:
[Aspect D5-6]
The display of the game information is a round display indicating a round of the jackpot game,
The round display is
a first round display in characters;
a second round display that is displayed in a predetermined figure;
there is
The display means is
The first round display and the second round display can be displayed simultaneously,
When displaying the second number-of-balls-out display during the jackpot game, the second number-of-balls-out display is displayed behind the first round display and the second round display,
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-5, characterized by:

159 to 162, the number-of-balls-out movement display effect will be described below. This ball number moving display effect is a effect that is executed in relation to the winning of game balls, and is particularly during a big win, at the end of a big win, during a short-time game from after a big win game to the next big win, or during a small win rush. (RUSH) may be performed during the period.

[Pitch number movement display effect A]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls-out movement display effect A. FIG.
In the number-of-balls-moving display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 159(A), the main display screen 7a executes a big win confirmation effect as the first win. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the game has stopped at the jackpot pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot, the game state becomes a time-saving state (high-probability high base state), and during the time-saving state, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened. By making the game ball enter the second starting port 21 (electric sapo) which is easier to win, it becomes a small hit rush (RUSH) period in which small hits occur frequently. During the small winning rush period, the small winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is frequently opened, and by allowing the game ball to enter the opened large winning opening, the player can easily The number of game balls can be increased. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the game state becomes a time-saving state (low-probability base state), but a small hit rush does not occur. In the example shown in FIG. 159(A), the jackpot pattern array shows the probability variable jackpot "777", and above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "big hit!" It has become so. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(B), on the main display screen 7a, a big hit number display effect is executed. In this jackpot ball number display effect, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game, the number of balls played) is displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot number display DE to be displayed is displayed. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won". Also, in the jackpot number display DE, numbers and kanji characters are displayed in the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(C), a big hit number icon display effect is executed. In this jackpot number icon display effect, the screen of the jackpot number display effect shown in FIG. 159(B) is switched, and the jackpot number icon DI is displayed on the main display screen 7a. This jackpot number-of-balls icon DI is a variation of the display mode of the number of jackpot-balls display DE, and displays the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game in the same way as the number of jackpot-balls display DE. . The jackpot number icon DI is formed by displaying a number indicating the number of jackpot game balls in a substantially polygonal frame, and is displayed so as to be positioned substantially on the lower right side of the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(D), the big hit number icon display change effect is executed. In this performance of changing the icon display of the number of balls put out for a big win, the number icon DI for the number of balls put out for a big win changes to a moving display body HT whose number of balls put out is difficult to read on the main display screen 7a. Then, the moving display body HT once moves in an arcuate direction diagonally upward to the left on the main display screen 7a so as to face the left sub-display screen 64L, and then reverses to move the main display body HT so as to face the right sub-display screen 64R. It moves in an arcuate direction diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a, and then stops when it reaches a predetermined position above the right sub-display screen 64R. In other words, in this performance of changing the icon display of the number of hit balls, the icon of the number of hit balls DI changes to the moving display body HT, and the changed moving display body HT becomes the left moving display body LHT shown in FIG. 159(D). Like the right-moving display body RHT, it moves on the main display screen 7a while leaving a trail like a shooting star, and then reaches the right sub-display screen 64R and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(E), a jackpot number icon display return effect is executed. In this jackpot number icon display restoration effect, the moving display body HT that has reached the right sub-display screen 64R and stopped is returned to the original jackpot number icon DI and displayed.

[Ball number movement display effect B]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls-out movement display effect B. FIG.
In the number-of-putting-balls movement display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 160(A), the main display screen 7a executes a big win confirmation effect as a first win. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the game has stopped at the jackpot pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns as specific patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot, the game state becomes a time-saving state (high-probability high base state), and during the time-saving state, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened. By making the game ball enter the second starting port 21 (electric sapo) which is easier to win, it becomes a small hit rush (RUSH) period in which small hits occur frequently. During the small winning rush period, the small winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is frequently opened, and by allowing the game ball to enter the opened large winning opening, the player can easily The number of game balls can be increased. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the game state becomes a time-saving state (low-probability base state), but a small hit rush does not occur. In the example shown in FIG. 160(A), the jackpot pattern array shows the probability variable jackpot "777", and above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "big hit!" It has become so. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(B), the main display screen 7a displays the number of balls put out for a big hit. In this jackpot ball number display effect, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game, the number of balls played) is displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot number display DE to be displayed is displayed. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 hits won". Also, in the jackpot number display DE, numbers and kanji characters are displayed in the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), a jackpot number icon display effect is executed. In this jackpot ball count icon display effect, the screen of the jackpot ball count display effect shown in FIG. 160(B) is switched, and the jackpot ball count icon DI is displayed on the main display screen 7a. This jackpot number-of-balls icon DI is a variation of the display mode of the number of jackpot-balls display DE, and displays the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game in the same way as the number of jackpot-balls display DE. . The jackpot number icon DI is formed by displaying a number indicating the number of jackpot game balls in a substantially polygonal frame, and is displayed so as to be positioned substantially on the lower right side of the main display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(D), the big hit number icon display change effect is executed. In this performance of changing the icon display of the number of balls put out for a big win, the number icon DI for the number of balls put out for a big win changes to a moving display body HT whose number of balls put out is difficult to read on the main display screen 7a. Then, the moving display body HT once moves in an arcuate direction diagonally upward to the left on the main display screen 7a so as to face the left sub-display screen 64L, and then reverses to move the main display body HT so as to face the right sub-display screen 64R. It moves in an arcuate direction diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a, and then stops when it reaches a predetermined position above the right sub-display screen 64R. That is, in this performance of changing the icon display of the number of hit balls, the icon of the number of hit balls DI changes to the moving display body HT, and the changed moving display body HT becomes the left moving display body LHT shown in FIG. 160(D). Like the right-moving display body RHT, it moves on the main display screen 7a while leaving a trail like a shooting star, and then reaches the right sub-display screen 64R and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(E), a jackpot number-of-balls-out icon display restoration effect is executed. In this jackpot number icon display restoration effect, the moving display body HT that has reached the right sub-display screen 64R and stopped is returned to the original jackpot number icon DI and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(F), a time saving (electrical support) start effect is executed. When this time-saving (electric sapo) start effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays the characters "Time-saving start!" A right arrow YR is displayed to prompt A message MU consisting of characters "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YR. The player is urged by the display of this right-handed arrow YR to hit right-handedly, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball is easily thrown into the second starting port 21 (electrical sapo) where winning is facilitated. can be made to win a prize, and small wins can be generated frequently.
It should be noted that, during the small hit rush period, unlike general time saving without a small hit rush, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of game balls on hand. In other words, the number of game balls on hand gradually decreases during the general time saving without the small hit rush, while the number of game balls on hand gradually increases during the time saving of the small hit rush. Therefore, the longer the small win rush lasts, in other words, the less the next big win (usually a big win) is drawn, the more profitable the player is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(G), a rush total number of pitches displayed effect is executed. In this rush total number of balls display effect, the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this variable display of decorative patterns, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the right pattern display area. A symbol 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 160(G) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward). In addition, when this rush total number of balls display effect is executed, the current rush period (big hit and short time (small hit rush A rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed, which displays the number of balls won by the player during the period in which ) continues. In this example, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is displayed as "total 2430 shots". Also, in the rush total number of balls displayed SDE, numbers are displayed larger than kanji characters.
Here, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE and the above-mentioned jackpot number of balls displayed DE are the same number of balls. This is because the display of In other words, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE here is displayed after 2430 balls are released in the first big hit and before the next game ball wins. It should be noted that if the current big win is the second big win during the rush, in the rush total ball count display effect shown in FIG. The total number of balls played in the rush added to the number of balls won in the second jackpot will be displayed. If the second big hit is 2430 shots, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is 4430 shots).
Also, in this rush total number of pitches display effect, the jackpot number icon DI returned from the moving display body HT in the jackpot number of pitches icon display restoration effect is displayed as the set number of pitches display icon SI shown in FIG. 160(E). Similarly, it is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. This will be explained later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(H), the main display screen 7a executes the effect of counting up the total number of balls put out. This total number of put-out ball count-up effect is an effect that is performed when a game ball enters one of the winning holes and the game ball is paid out after the start of time saving. In this example, the most probable variation result of decorative symbols is a small win, and the game ball enters the big winning hole and is paid out. In addition, in this example, the small winning (small winning pattern arrangement) is displayed in a mode in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are all stopped at probability variable patterns (odd numbered patterns) (except for the probability variable big winning pattern arrangement). Then, when the small winning pattern array (in this example, the small winning pattern array "135") stops on the main display screen 7a, the total number of pitches counted up effect is executed, and the rush total number of pitches display SDE increases to the number of pitches. counted up accordingly. That is, when game balls are paid out as prize balls during time saving (small win rush), the total number of rush balls displayed SDE is counted up by the number of game balls paid out. In this example, the total number of rush balls put out SDE is displayed as "total winning 2445 shots". This is a value obtained by adding 15 game balls paid out by a small hit to the "total winning 2430 shots" shown in FIG. 160(G).
Furthermore, when a game ball is paid out as a prize ball during a short time (small winning rush), the set ball number display icon SI displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R also displays the total number of rush balls. As with SDE, the number of game balls paid out is counted up, and the number indicating the number of balls put out is displayed as "2445". That is, the total number of rush balls displayed SDE and the number of set balls displayed icon SI display the same number of balls in the time-saving game after the first big win. That is, the set number-of-balls display icon SI displays the number of balls of the jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game in the rush period) and the number of balls of the time-saving game (small win rush) until the next jackpot. The added number of balls is displayed as one set. As is clear from this explanation, the difference between the number-of-balls-out-for-jackets DI and the number-of-set-balls-indicating-icon SI is that the While the number of balls is displayed, the set ball number display icon SI is designed to display the number of game balls paid out in one big win and the time-saving game until the next big win. .

[Pitch number movement display effect C]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls-out movement display effect C. FIG.
In the number-of-balls-out movement display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. Although illustration is omitted, effects shown in FIGS. 160(A) to 160(H) are performed until this rush total number of balls display effect is executed. In the rush total ball number display effect shown, the rush total ball number displayed on the main display screen 7a displays the number of balls won by the player during the current rush period (the period in which the big win and the short time (small win rush) continue). The number-of-balls display SDE is displayed as "total 3680 shots". In addition, the number of balls in the jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game in the rush period) displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is added to the number of balls in the time-saving game (small win rush) until the next jackpot. The number of put-out balls display icon SI for displaying the number of put-out balls added as one set is also displayed as "3680". That is, the total number of rush balls displayed SDE and the number of set balls displayed icon SI display the same number of balls in the time-saving game after the first big win. It should be noted that the main display screen 7a indicates that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(B), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This big hit confirmation effect indicates that the second big win (variable probability big win) has been counted from the first big win (variable probability big win). In this example, the jackpot pattern array for the second jackpot indicates "777", and this jackpot pattern array "777" is a variable jackpot with 16 rounds (16R) as described above. . Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a character "Big Win!" is displayed, and on the right side thereof, a character "Second Time" indicating that this is the second big win in this rush. is displayed larger. By this big win fixing performance, the player is convinced of the probability variable big win and grasps that the current rush is the second big win. Also, due to this second big win, the number of put-out balls "3680" of the set put-out number display icon SI displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is fixed. In other words, "3680" indicated by the set ball number display icon SI is the number of balls in the first big win "2430" and the number of balls in the time-saving game (small win rush) until the second big win. A value obtained by adding "1250" is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(C), an effect for displaying the number of balls put out during the round is executed. This effect of displaying the number of balls put out during the round is an effect performed during the big win game related to the big win symbol arrangement "777" shown in FIG. 161(B). When the jackpot game is started, 16 round games are performed, and in this round game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) during the round. When a prize is won, the game is shifted to the next round game. The presentation of the number of balls put out during a round shown in FIG. 161(C) shows the display mode of the main display screen 7a when the number of rounds is 2 (2R). On the main display screen 7a, a round display RSH that displays the number of rounds of the jackpot game in characters is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The main display screen 7a also displays a rush total number of balls displayed SDE. The rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the number of game balls (balls played) acquired by the player from the first big win to the present, “3850 total wins”. The jackpot ball count display DE displays the number of game balls (ball count) "170" that the player has acquired so far in the second jackpot game. The total number of rushed balls displayed SDE is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a, and the number of displayed big hits DE is displayed substantially below the center of the main display screen 7a and displayed in parallel with the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE. be. Note that the set number of pitches display icon SI indicates "3680" on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(D), the main display screen 7a displays the number of hit balls displayed. In this jackpot number display effect, the jackpot number display DE and the rush total number of balls display SDE are displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. The rush total number of put-out balls display SDE is displayed below the number of put-out big hits display DE and is larger than the number of put-out big hits display DE. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won", and the rush total number display SDE is displayed as "total 6110 shots won". In other words, this "total winning 6110 shots" is obtained by the second jackpot game in addition to the "total winning 3680 shots" obtained before the second jackpot game shown in Fig. 161 (B) is started. It is a value obtained by adding "2430 shots acquired".

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(E), a jackpot number icon display effect is executed. In this jackpot number icon display effect, the screen of the jackpot number display effect shown in FIG. 161(D) is switched, and the jackpot number icon DI is displayed on the main display screen 7a. This jackpot number-of-balls icon DI is a variation of the display mode of the number of jackpot-balls display DE, and, like the number of jackpot-balls display DE, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game is ``2430''. is displayed. Further, the main display screen 7a displays "6110 shots in total" as the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE. The jackpot ball number icon DI is displayed so as to be positioned substantially on the lower right side of the main display screen 7a, and the rush total ball number display SDE is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a. Note that the set number of pitches display icon SI indicates "3680" on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(F), the big hit number icon display change effect is executed. In this performance of changing the icon display of the number of balls put out for a big win, the number icon DI for the number of balls put out for a big win changes to a moving display body HT whose number of balls put out is difficult to read on the main display screen 7a. Then, the moving display body HT once moves in an arcuate direction diagonally upward to the left on the main display screen 7a so as to face the left sub-display screen 64L, and then reverses to move the main display body HT so as to face the right sub-display screen 64R. It moves in an arcuate direction diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a, and then stops when it reaches a predetermined position above the right sub-display screen 64R. In other words, in this performance of changing the icon display of the number of hit balls, the icon of the number of hit balls DI changes to the moving display body HT, and the changed moving display body HT becomes the left moving display body LHT shown in FIG. 161(F). Like the right-moving display body RHT, it moves on the main display screen 7a while leaving a trail like a shooting star, and then reaches the right sub-display screen 64R and stops. Thus, when the moving display body HT reaches the right sub-display screen 64R and stops, the set pitch display icon SI displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R slides downward on the right sub-display screen 64R. to change the display position. It should be noted that on the main display screen 7a, the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE indicates "6110 total wins".

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(G), a jackpot number-of-balls-out icon display return effect is executed. In this jackpot number icon display restoration effect, the moving display body HT that has reached the right sub-display screen 64R and stopped is returned to the original jackpot number icon DI and displayed. Then, when the moving display body HT returns to the original jackpot number icon DI, the set number-of-balls display icon SI shrinks and changes its display position so that it is located on the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R. . That is, the jackpot number-of-balls icon DI is displayed at a predetermined position on the right sub-display screen 64R where the set number-of-balls display icon SI has been displayed until now. As a result, on the right sub-display screen 64R, the jackpot ball number icon DI is displayed above the set ball number display icon SI (slightly upper left), and the set ball number display icon SI and the jackpot ball number icon DI are displayed. are displayed in a substantially vertical column. It should be noted that on the main display screen 7a, the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE indicates "6110 total wins".

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(H), a rush total number of pitches display effect is executed. In this rush total number of balls display effect, the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the main display screen 7a. In addition, when this rush total number of pitches display effect is executed, the rush total number of pitches display SDE "total winning 6110 shots" is displayed on the lower center of the main display screen 7a (below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R). is displayed. The display size of the rush total number of balls displayed SDE in this rush total number of balls displayed is displayed larger than the display during the above-described big win game. That is, when the rush total ball number display SDE is displayed on the main display screen 7a, it is displayed during the time-saving game when it is displayed during the big win game and when it is displayed during the time-saving game (during the small win rush). The case is displayed larger.
Here, in this rush total number of pitches display effect, the jackpot number icon DI returned from the moving display body HT in the jackpot number of pitches icon display restoration effect is used as the set number of pitches display icon SI as described above. It is displayed on the sub display screen 64R. That is, on the right sub-display screen 64R, the newly generated set number of pitches display icon SI is displayed above the previously generated set number of pitches display icon SI. More specifically, on the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of balls put out by adding the number of balls put out in the time-saving game (small win rush) up to the second big win to the number of balls put out in the first big win game during the rush period is set to 1. A set number-of-balls display icon SI showing the number of balls put-out of the second jackpot game in the rush period of "2430" is displayed above the set number-of-balls-of-balls display icon SI that is reduced and displayed as a set of "3680". . The set ball number display icon SI indicating "2430" is counted up each time the number of ball balls is played in the time-saving game (small win rush) until the third big win, and the number of ball balls changes. When a big hit occurs, the number of balls is fixed.

[Pitch number movement display effect D]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-balls-out movement display effect D. FIG.
In the put-out ball number moving display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 162(A), a rush total put-out ball display effect is executed. Although illustration is omitted, the effects shown in FIGS. 160(A) to 160(H) are repeated until the rush total number of balls display effect is executed. In the rush total ball number display effect shown in , a rush that displays the number of balls won by the player during the current rush period (a period in which the big hit and the short time (small hit rush) continue) is displayed on the main display screen 7a. The total number of pitches displayed SDE is displayed as "26846 shots won in total". In addition, the number of balls in the jackpot game (here, the 9th jackpot game in the rush period) displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is added to the number of balls in the time-saving game (small win rush) until the next jackpot. is displayed as one set. A total of 9 set pitch display icons SI are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. 2430" and "3680" are displayed. The set number of pitches displayed icon SI "2677" located at the top displays the number of pitches that have not yet been fixed and can be counted up. showing the number.
The set ball number display icon SI "2677" positioned at the top indicates the number of balls paid out in the ninth jackpot game during the rush period and the subsequent time-saving game as described above. The set number display icon SI "3335" indicates the number of balls paid out in the eighth jackpot game during the rush period and the subsequent time saving game, and the set number display icon SI "3335" located below it 4310" indicates the number of balls paid out in the seventh jackpot game and the subsequent time-saving game during the rush period, and the set ball number display icon SI "2403" positioned below it indicates the sixth time during the rush period. Shows the number of balls paid out in the jackpot game and the subsequent time-saving game, and the set ball number display icon SI “1998” located below it is the fifth jackpot game in the rush period and the subsequent time-saving game. The number of put out balls is shown, and the set number of put out display icon SI "3125" positioned below it shows the number of put out balls in the fourth jackpot game during the rush period and the subsequent time-saving game. , and the set-ball number display icon SI "2888" located below it indicates the number of balls paid out in the third jackpot game during the rush period and the subsequent time-saving game. The number display icon SI "2430" indicates the number of balls paid out in the second jackpot game and the subsequent time-saving game during the rush period, and the set ball number display icon SI "3680" positioned below It shows the number of balls put out in the first jackpot game and the subsequent time-saving game in the rush period. That is, on the right sub-display screen 64R, when a plurality of set pitch display icons SI are displayed, each set is arranged in a column (zigzag column) with the newly generated set pitch display icon SI facing upward. It is designed to display. "Total winning 26846 shots" indicated by the rush total number of pitches display SDE indicates a value obtained by adding all the number of pitches indicated by these set number of pitches display icons SI. It should be noted that the main display screen 7a indicates that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(B), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This jackpot fixed effect indicates that the 10th jackpot (variable probability jackpot) has been counted from the first jackpot (variable probability jackpot). In this example, the jackpot pattern array for the 10th jackpot shows "777", and this jackpot pattern array "777" is a variable jackpot with 16 rounds (16R) as described above. . Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Jump!" are displayed, and further to the right of them, the characters "10th time" indicating that this is the 10th big win in this rush. is displayed larger. By this big win fixing performance, the player is convinced of the probability variable big win and grasps that the current rush is the 10th big win. In addition, due to this tenth big win, the number of put-out balls "2677" of the set number of put-out display icon SI displayed at the top of the right sub-display screen 64R is fixed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(C), an effect for displaying the number of balls put out during the round is executed. This effect of displaying the number of balls put out during the round is an effect performed during the big win game related to the big win symbol arrangement "777" shown in FIG. 162(B). When the jackpot game is started, 16 round games are performed, and in this round game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) during the round. When a prize is won, the game is shifted to the next round game. The presentation of the number of balls put out during a round shown in FIG. 162(C) shows the display mode of the main display screen 7a when the number of rounds is 2 (2R). On the main display screen 7a, a round display RSH that displays the number of rounds of the jackpot game in characters is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The main display screen 7a also displays a rush total number of balls displayed SDE. The rush total number of balls displayed SDE displays the number of game balls (balls played) acquired by the player from the first big win to the present, “27016 total wins”. The jackpot ball count display DE displays the game ball count (ball count) "170" that the player has acquired so far in the tenth jackpot game. The total number of rushed balls displayed SDE is displayed at the lower left of the main display screen 7a, and the number of displayed big hits DE is displayed substantially at the lower center of the main display screen 7a and displayed in parallel with the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE. be. The right sub-display screen 64R displays the above-described 9 set pitch display icon SI.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(D), on the main display screen 7a, a big hit number display effect is executed. In this jackpot number display effect, the jackpot number display DE and the rush total number of balls display SDE are displayed on the ending screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game. The rush total number of put-out balls display SDE is displayed below the number of put-out big hits display DE and is larger than the number of put-out big hits display DE. In this example, the jackpot number display DE is displayed as "2430 shots won", and the rush total number display SDE is displayed as "total 29276 shots won". In other words, this "total winning 29276 shots" is the "total winning 26846 shots" acquired before the tenth jackpot game shown in FIG. It is a value obtained by adding "2430 shots acquired".

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(E), a jackpot number icon display effect is executed. In this jackpot number icon display effect, the screen of the jackpot number display effect shown in FIG. 162(D) is switched, and the jackpot number icon DI is displayed on the main display screen 7a. This jackpot number-of-balls icon DI is a variation of the display mode of the number of jackpot-balls display DE, and, like the number of jackpot-balls display DE, the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game is ``2430''. is displayed. Further, the main display screen 7a displays "29276 shots in total" as the total number of rush balls displayed SDE. The jackpot ball number icon DI is displayed so as to be positioned substantially on the lower left side of the main display screen 7a, and the rush total ball number display SDE is displayed at the lower right of the main display screen 7a. The display positions of the jackpot number icon DI and the rush number of total number of balls displayed SDE shown in FIG. 162E are different from those shown in FIG. The right sub-display screen 64R displays the above-described 9 set pitch display icon SI.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(F), the big hit number icon display change effect is executed. In this performance of changing the icon display of the number of balls put out for a big win, the number icon DI for the number of balls put out for a big win changes to a moving display body HT whose number of balls put out is difficult to read on the main display screen 7a. Then, the moving display body HT once moves in an arcuate direction diagonally upward to the right on the main display screen 7a so as to face the right sub-display screen 64R, and then reverses to move the main display body HT so as to face the left sub-display screen 64L. It moves on the display screen 7a obliquely upward to the left in an arc, and then stops when it reaches a predetermined position above the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, in this performance of changing the icon display of the number of balls put out for a big win, the number icon DI for the number of balls put out for a big win changes to the moving display body HT, and this changed moving display body HT becomes the right moving display body RHT shown in FIG. 162(F). Like the left-moving display body LHT, it moves on the main display screen 7a leaving a trail like a shooting star, and then reaches the left sub-display screen 64L and stops.
Here, the jackpot ball number icon display change effect shown in FIG. 162(F) is different from the jackpot ball number icon display change effect shown in FIG. Conversely, in the effect of changing the display of the number of hit balls icon shown in FIG. 162(F), the moving display body HT eventually stops at the left sub-display screen 64L. This is because the right sub-display screen 64R already displays the set number of pitches display icon SI of 9, and it becomes difficult to display the set number of pitches display icon SI on the right sub-display screen 64R. because In other words, in this jackpot number icon display change effect, the moving display body HT has priority over the right sub-display screen 64R and stops moving. When a predetermined number of SIs (9 in this example) are displayed, the display stops moving to the left sub-display screen 64L. Therefore, the movement of the moving display body HT is symmetrical between the icon display change effect for the number of balls put out for a big win shown in FIG. There is. For the same reason, the big winning ball number icon display effect shown in FIG. 162(E) and the big winning ball number icon display effect shown in FIG. The display positions of the number icon DI and the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE are symmetrical. It should be noted that on the main display screen 7a, the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE indicates "29276 shots in total".

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(G), a jackpot number icon display return effect is executed. In this jackpot number icon display restoration effect, the moving display body HT that has reached the left sub-display screen 64L and stopped is returned to the original jackpot number icon DI and displayed. It should be noted that on the main display screen 7a, the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE indicates "29276 shots in total".

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(H), a rush total number of pitches displayed effect is executed. In this rush total number of balls display effect, the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the main display screen 7a. In addition, when this rush total number of pitches display effect is executed, the rush total number of pitches display SDE "total winning 29276 shots" is displayed on the lower center of the main display screen 7a (below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R). is displayed. The display size of the rush total number of balls displayed SDE in this rush total number of balls displayed is displayed larger than the display during the above-described big win game. That is, when the rush total ball number display SDE is displayed on the main display screen 7a, it is displayed during the time-saving game when it is displayed during the big win game and when it is displayed during the time-saving game (during the small win rush). The case is displayed larger.
Here, in this rush total number of pitches display effect, the jackpot number icon DI returned from the moving display body HT in the jackpot number of pitches icon display restoration effect is left as the set number of pitches display icon SI as described above. It is displayed on the sub display screen 64L. That is, the right sub-display screen 64R displays the set number of pitches displayed until the previous time, and the left sub-display screen 64L displays the set number of pitches displayed this time. be. Then, the set ball number display icon SI indicating "2430" is counted up each time the number of balls is played in the time-saving game (small win rush) until the 11th big win, and the number of the ball is changed. When a big hit occurs, the number of balls is fixed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the number-of-balls-moving display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot game ends, the display of the number of balls played for the jackpot is displayed on the main display screen, and then moved to the sub display screen. It's becoming According to this configuration, the player does not overlook the display of the number of balls put out for a big win, and thus can easily grasp the number of game balls paid out in the big win game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, the display of the number of balls put out for a big win is temporarily changed to a predetermined display body that makes it difficult to read the number of balls put out on the main display screen. The display body is moved to the sub-display screen and displayed, and then, on the sub-display screen, the display body is returned to the original display of the number of balls released for the jackpot and displayed. According to this configuration, the player's interest can be attracted by the display body in which the display of the number of put-out balls for the big win has been changed, thereby preventing the player from overlooking the display of the number of put-out balls for the big win. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, when the display body is moved from the main display screen to the sub display screen, the display body is moved to the left sub display screen or the right sub display screen on the main display screen. After once moving in the direction toward the sub-display screen, it is configured to reverse and move to the right sub-display screen or the left sub-display screen. According to this configuration, the tricky movement of the display body makes it possible to strongly impress the display of the number of hit balls. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, when the total number of rush balls put out is displayed on the main display screen, it is displayed during a jackpot game and during a time-saving game. Then, when displaying during the time saving game, it is configured to be displayed larger. According to this configuration, it is possible to strongly appeal to the player that the number of game balls increases during the time-saving game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the number of set balls displayed is the number of balls put out by adding the number of balls put out in the time-saving game up to the next big hit to the number of balls put out in the jackpot game. It is displayed as a set and counted up by the number of balls every time there is a number of balls in the time-saving game. According to this configuration, the number of game balls paid out in one set can be easily grasped. In addition, since the number of set balls displayed is counted up during the time-saving game (small winning rush), the player can confirm that the game balls in hand are increasing due to the small winning rush. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, when displaying a plurality of display sets of the number of put-out balls, the newly generated set display of the number of put-out balls is displayed one by one on the sub display screen. It is configured to be displayed in a vertical column. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a large number of displayed pitches on the sub display screen without interfering with the effect on the main display screen. In addition, by displaying a large number of displayed balls, the number of discharged balls can be appealed not only to the player playing the game machine, but also to the surrounding players, giving the player a sense of superiority. be able to. Furthermore, the number of balls put out in each set can be compared, and the transition of the number of put out balls can be easily grasped. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the number-of-balls-out movement display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, the sub display screen includes a jackpot number icon DI that displays the number of balls in the jackpot game, and the number of balls in the jackpot game. The set ball number display icon SI, which displays the number of ball balls added to the number of ball balls in the time-saving game (small win rush) up to the big win as one set, is displayed in the same display mode. It is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot number icon DI and the jackpot number icon DI may have different display modes. For example, they may have different colors and shapes.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 160 to 162, the rush total number of balls displayed SDE is horizontally displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the total number of rushed balls displayed SDE may be displayed obliquely (upward to the right or upward to the left). In this case, the size may be changed one digit at a time and displayed (for example, when the number is rising to the right, the numbers to the right may be displayed larger).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 160 to 162, the moving display body HT is moved from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the moving display HT may move from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, then return to the main display screen 7a, move to the left sub-display screen 64L, and stop displaying. Alternatively, the moving display body HT may move sub-display screens sequentially from the main display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R→the upper sub-display screen 64U→the left sub-display screen 64L, and stop displaying. .

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the set ball number display icon SI is counted up according to the number of balls paid out during the time reduction (small win rush). , the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the set number of put-out display icon SI may be displayed by summing up the number of put-out balls (for example, when the current display of the number of put-out balls is 1000, 15 are put out). switch from 1000 to 1015).

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162, when a predetermined number of set-ball display icons SI are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, they are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the set pitch display icon SI may be alternately displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. Alternatively, when a predetermined number of icons are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the icon SI may be deleted in order from the oldest set number of pitches displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D6-1]
main display screen and
a display unit provided with a sub display screen adjacent to the main display screen and capable of executing a plurality of display effects on the main display screen and the sub display screen;
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
a jackpot game executing means for executing the jackpot game by changing the game state to a jackpot when the symbols variably displayed by the pattern display means are jackpot patterns;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a jackpot number display indicating the number of balls put out in the jackpot game,
The display means displays the number of balls put out for a jackpot on the main display screen at the end of the jackpot game, and then moves to the sub display screen for display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D6-2]
The display means is
After changing the display of the number of hit balls on the main display screen to a predetermined display that makes it difficult to read the number of hit balls, the display is moved to the sub-display screen and then displayed. On the sub-display screen, the display body is returned to the original display of the number of balls played for the jackpot and displayed;
The gaming machine according to D6-1, characterized by:
[Aspect D6-3]
The sub display screen is
a left sub-display screen adjacent to the left of the main display screen;
a right sub-display screen adjacent to the right of the main display screen;
there is
The display means is
When moving the display from the main display screen to the sub display screen,
After once moving the display in a direction toward the left sub-display screen or the right sub-display screen on the main display screen, the display is reversed and moved to the right sub-display screen or the left sub-display screen.
The gaming machine according to D6-2, characterized by:
[Aspect D6-4]
a time-saving game executing means for executing the time-saving game by changing the game state after the big-hit game executed by the jackpot game executing means to a time-saving game;
a small winning game executing means for executing the small winning game by setting the game state to a small winning when the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display means are small winning symbols;
with
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second effect is a effect of displaying a rush ball number display indicating the number of balls played during a rush period in which the jackpot game and the time-saving game continue,
The display means is
The display of the number of balls played in the rush can be displayed on the main display screen during the rush period,
When the display of the number of balls played in the rush is displayed on the main display screen, the display during the time-saving game is displayed larger than the display during the big-win game and the time-saving game. to be
The gaming machine according to any one of D6-1 to D6-3, characterized by:
[Aspect D6-5]
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined third effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third effect is an effect of displaying a set number of put-out balls display in which the number of put-out balls obtained by adding the number of put-out balls in the time-saving game up to the next big win to the number of put-out balls in the jackpot game is displayed as one set. ,
When the display means executes the third effect,
The number of balls displayed on the display of the number of balls put out for a big hit displayed after moving to the sub-display screen is changed by the number of balls put out every time there is a number of balls put out in the time-saving game until the next big win. displayed by adding only
When the next big win occurs, the display of the set number of put-out balls is displayed by fixing the number of put-out balls of the display of the number of put-out balls displayed when the next big win occurs,
The gaming machine according to any one of D6-1 to D6-4, characterized by:
[Aspect D6-6]
The display means is
When displaying a plurality of set pitches displayed, each set is displayed on the sub-display screen in a vertical column with the newly generated set pitches displayed at the top.
The game machine according to D6-5, characterized by:

163 to 166, the number of consecutive wins display effects A to D will be described below. This display performance of the number of consecutive wins can be executed by the image control microcomputer 101 during the variation performance of the decorative symbols or during the jackpot game. This display effect of the number of consecutive wins is a effect of displaying an image on the main display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64. FIG.

[Consecutive chan number display effect A]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the display effect A for the number of consecutive wins. In the consecutive winning number display effect A, after the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, as shown in FIG. 163(A), the big hit notification effect is performed on the main display screen 7a. In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern array. In the example of FIG. 163(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(B), a round game display effect A is performed. This round game display effect A is an effect performed during a round game during a jackpot game (in this case, during the first round game). A number display X12B1, a right-handed hitting display X12C, and a winning ball number display X12D are displayed. The round display X12A is displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a. The first consecutive win count display X12B1 is displayed below the round display X12A. The indication X12C suggesting hitting to the right is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a. The winning ball number display X12D is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a. The round display X12A is a display showing the number of round games played during the jackpot game, that is, the number of rounds.

The first number of consecutive games display X12B1 is a display showing the first number of consecutive games (first number of RUSH). The number of first consecutive wins represents the number of big wins (including the first win) at the present time (at the time of the big win game) during the consecutive wins. During consecutive chan, the game state becomes a non-time-saving state when the special symbol changes Until then (when the special symbol changes during consecutive chan, the game state is a time saving state). For example, after the first win, the number of consecutive wins at the time of the next big win in the time-saving state is two. In the example of FIG. 163(B), the first consecutive chance number display X12B1 is represented as "RUSH 2 times", and the first consecutive chance number (first RUSH number) is two times. is shown. Therefore, this round game display effect A is performed during a jackpot game (during the first round game) that is performed when a jackpot is achieved in a time-saving state after the first hit.

The right-handed suggestion display X12C is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to turn the handle 60 clockwise to eject the game ball to the right of the game board 2, that is, to hit right. It is a display that suggests (prompts) to Acquired ball number display X12D is a display showing the number of game balls acquired during a consecutive game. In addition to the number of balls acquired during the jackpot game (also called the number of balls acquired by the jackpot), the number of balls acquired during the small win game (small win Also called number of balls). In addition to this, the number of winning balls in the winning ball display X12D indicated by the winning ball number display X12D is not limited to the number of winning balls and the number of winning small winning balls, but also the general winning opening, the first starting opening, and the second starting opening. It may include the number of balls acquired by winning a prize. In addition, in the round game, the first big winning hole 30 closes when the specified number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30, but the number of jackpot winning balls is the specified number in the first big winning hole 30 in the round game. Also includes game balls acquired when game balls win over (so-called over win). Similarly, the number of winning small winning balls includes game balls acquired when game balls enter the second big winning hole 35 in excess of a prescribed number (so-called over winning).

In the example of FIG. 163(B), the round display X12A is displayed as "1R", indicating that the round game is 1R (first round game). The right-handed suggestion display X12C shows a display of "right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed as "1720", which indicates that 1720 game balls have been acquired during consecutive games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(C), a round game display effect B is performed. This round game display effect B is an effect performed during the round game during the jackpot game (in this case, during the 15th round game). The number-of-times display X12B1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D are continuously displayed from the round game display effect A. The round display X12A and the acquired ball number display X12D change as the round game progresses. In the example of FIG. 163(C), the round display X12A is displayed as "15R", indicating that the round game is 15R (15th round game). The first number of consecutive chances display X12B1 is continuously represented as "RUSH 2 times", that is, the first number of consecutive chances (first number of RUSH) is two times. . The right-handed suggestion display X12C shows a display of "right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed as "3200", indicating that 3200 game balls have been acquired during the consecutive game.
Similarly, in the second to fourteenth round games (2R to 14R round games), the round display X12A, the number of first consecutive wins display X12B1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D are displayed in the round. It is continuously displayed from the game display effect A, and the round display X12A and the winning ball number display X12D change as the round game progresses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(D), a round game end display effect is performed. This round game end display effect is an effect performed during the ending effect during the jackpot game, and on the main display screen 7a, the second consecutive chance number display X12B2, the right hitting indication display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D. , and a consecutive game continuation display X12E suggesting the continuation of the consecutive game is displayed. The indication X12C for suggesting hitting to the right and the indication X12D for the number of winning balls are displayed continuously from the round game display effect B in the same manner. In other words, the display position and size of the right-handed hitting indication X12C and the acquired ball number display X12D are not changed.

The second display of the number of consecutive games X12B2 is displayed in the same position and in the same size as the first display of the number of consecutive games X12B1 on the main display screen 7a. At this time, the first consecutive win count display X12B1 is not displayed. The second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 is a display representing the second number of consecutive wins (second RUSH number). The second number of consecutive chances represents the number obtained by adding 1 to the number of jackpots (including the first win) at the current time (at the time of the jackpot game) during the consecutive chances. That is, the second number of consecutive wins is the number of times including the current number of big wins during the consecutive wins and the next big win (once). In other words, the second number of consecutive games is the number of times including the number of times of consecutive games scheduled in the future in addition to the current number of times of consecutive games. Therefore, it is preferable to display the second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 indicating the second number of consecutive wins in a variable probability state in which the next big win is relatively likely to come. In the example of FIG. 163(D), the second consecutive chance count display X12B2 is expressed as "RUSH 3rd time", and the second consecutive chance count (second RUSH count) is 3 times. is shown.
Also, in the example of FIG. 163(D), the continuous game continuation display X12E is displayed as "RUSH" continuation, suggesting the continuation of RUSH, that is, the continuation of the continuous game.

[Consecutive chance number display effect B]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the display effect B for the number of consecutive wins. In the number of consecutive wins display effect B, after the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, as shown in FIG. 164(A), the big hit notification effect is performed on the main display screen 7a. In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 164(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(B), a round game display effect A is performed. This round game display effect A is an effect performed during a round game during a jackpot game (in this case, during the first round game). A number display X12B1, a right-handed hitting display X12C, and a winning ball number display X12D are displayed. The round display X12A is displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a. The first consecutive win count display X12B1 is displayed below the round display X12A. The indication X12C suggesting hitting to the right is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a. The round display X12A is a display showing the number of round games played during the jackpot game, that is, the number of rounds.

The first number of consecutive games display X12B1 is a display showing the first number of consecutive games (first number of RUSH). The number of first consecutive wins represents the number of big wins (including the first win) at the present time (at the time of the big win game) during the consecutive wins. During consecutive chan, the game state becomes a non-time-saving state when the special symbol changes Until then (when the special symbol changes during consecutive chan, the game state is a time saving state). For example, after the first win, the number of consecutive wins at the time of the next big win in the time-saving state is two. In the example of FIG. 164(B), the first consecutive chance count display X12B1 is represented as "RUSH 2 times", and the first consecutive chance count (first RUSH count) is two times. is shown. Therefore, this round game display effect A is performed during a jackpot game (during the first round game) that is performed when a jackpot is achieved in a time-saving state after the first hit.

The right-handed suggestion display X12C is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to turn the handle 60 clockwise to eject the game ball to the right of the game board 2, that is, to hit right. It is a display that suggests (prompts) to Acquired ball number display X12D is a display showing the number of game balls acquired during a consecutive game. In addition to the number of balls acquired during the jackpot game (also called the number of balls acquired by the jackpot), the number of balls acquired during the small win game (small win Also called number of balls). In addition to this, the number of winning balls in the winning ball display X12D indicated by the winning ball number display X12D is not limited to the number of winning balls and the number of winning small winning balls, but also the general winning opening, the first starting opening, and the second starting opening. It may include the number of balls acquired by winning a prize. In addition, in the round game, the first big winning hole 30 closes when the specified number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30, but the number of jackpot winning balls is the specified number in the first big winning hole 30 in the round game. Also includes game balls acquired when game balls win over (so-called over win). Similarly, the number of winning small winning balls includes game balls acquired when game balls enter the second big winning hole 35 in excess of a prescribed number (so-called over winning).

In the example of FIG. 164(B), the round display X12A is displayed as "1R", indicating that the round game is 1R (first round game). The right-handed suggestion display X12C shows a display of "right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed as "1720", which indicates that 1720 game balls have been acquired during consecutive games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(C), a round game display effect B is performed. This round game display effect B is an effect performed during the round game during the jackpot game (in this case, during the 15th round game). The number-of-times display X12B1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D are continuously displayed from the round game display effect A. The round display X12A and the acquired ball number display X12D change as the round game progresses. In the example of FIG. 164(C), the round display X12A is displayed as "15R", indicating that the round game is 15R (15th round game). The first number of consecutive chances display X12B1 is continuously represented as "RUSH 2 times", that is, the first number of consecutive chances (first number of RUSH) is two times. . The right-handed suggestion display X12C includes a display of "right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed as "3200", indicating that 3200 game balls have been acquired during the consecutive game.
Similarly, in the second to fourteenth round games (2R to 14R round games), the round display X12A, the number of first consecutive wins display X12B1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D are displayed in the round. It is continuously displayed from the game display effect A, and the round display X12A and the winning ball number display X12D change as the round game progresses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(D), a round game end display effect is performed. This round game end display effect is a effect performed during the ending effect during the jackpot game, and on the main display screen 7a, the second consecutive chance number display X12B2, the right hitting indication display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D. , and a consecutive game continuation display X12E suggesting the continuation of the consecutive game is displayed. The indication X12C for suggesting hitting to the right and the indication X12D for the number of obtained balls are displayed continuously from the round game display effect B in the same manner.

The second consecutive-champ count display X12B2 has the same size as the first consecutive-champ count display X12B1, but is displayed at a different position from the first consecutive-champ count display X12B1 on the main display screen 7a. Specifically, the second consecutive game number display X12B2 is displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a and below the consecutive game continuation display X12E. At this time, the first consecutive win count display X12B1 is not displayed. The second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 is a display representing the second number of consecutive wins (second RUSH number). The second number of consecutive chances represents the number obtained by adding 1 to the number of jackpots (including the first win) at the current time (at the time of the jackpot game) during the consecutive chances. That is, the second number of consecutive wins is the number of times including the current number of big wins during the consecutive wins and the next big win (once). In other words, the second number of consecutive games is the number of times including the number of times of consecutive games scheduled in the future in addition to the current number of times of consecutive games. Therefore, it is preferable to display the second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 indicating the second number of consecutive wins in a variable probability state in which the next big win is relatively likely to come. In the example of FIG. 164(D), the second consecutive chance count display X12B2 is expressed as "RUSH 3rd time", and the second consecutive chance count (second RUSH count) is 3 times. is shown.
Further, in the example of FIG. 164(D), the consecutive-champing continuation display X12E is displayed as "RUSH" continuation, suggesting the continuation of the RUSH, that is, the continuation of the consecutive-champing.

[Consecutive chan number display effect C]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the display effect C for the number of consecutive wins. In the consecutive winning number display effect C, after the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, as shown in FIG. 165(A), the big hit notification effect is performed on the main display screen 7a. In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern array. In the example of FIG. 165(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(B), a round game display effect A is performed. This round game display effect A is an effect performed during a round game during a jackpot game (in this case, during the first round game). A number display X12B1, a right-handed hitting display X12C, and a winning ball number display X12D are displayed. The round display X12A is displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a. The first consecutive win count display X12B1 is displayed below the round display X12A. The indication X12C suggesting hitting to the right is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a. The round display X12A is a display showing the number of round games played during the jackpot game, that is, the number of rounds.

The first number of consecutive games display X12B1 is a display showing the first number of consecutive games (first number of RUSH). The number of first consecutive wins represents the number of big wins (including the first win) at the present time (at the time of the big win game) during the consecutive wins. During consecutive chan, the game state becomes a non-time-saving state when the special symbol changes Until then (when the special symbol changes during consecutive chan, the game state is a time saving state). For example, after the first win, the number of consecutive wins at the time of the next big win in the time-saving state is two. In the example of FIG. 165(B), the first consecutive chance count display X12B1 is represented as "RUSH 2 times", and the first consecutive chance count (first RUSH count) is two times. is shown. Therefore, this round game display effect A is performed during a jackpot game (during the first round game) that is performed when a jackpot is achieved in a time-saving state after the first hit.

The right-handed suggestion display X12C is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to turn the handle 60 clockwise to eject the game ball to the right of the game board 2, that is, to hit right. It is a display that suggests (prompts) to Acquired ball number display X12D is a display showing the number of game balls acquired during a consecutive game. In addition to the number of balls acquired during the jackpot game (also called the number of balls acquired by the jackpot), the number of balls acquired during the small win game (small win Also called number of balls). In addition to this, the number of winning balls in the winning ball display X12D indicated by the winning ball number display X12D is not limited to the number of winning balls and the number of winning small winning balls, but also the general winning opening, the first starting opening, and the second starting opening. It may include the number of balls acquired by winning a prize. In addition, in the round game, the first big winning hole 30 closes when the specified number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30, but the number of jackpot winning balls is the specified number in the first big winning hole 30 in the round game. Also includes game balls acquired when game balls win over (so-called over win). Similarly, the number of winning small winning balls includes game balls acquired when game balls enter the second big winning hole 35 in excess of a prescribed number (so-called over winning).

In the example of FIG. 165(B), the round display X12A is displayed as "1R", indicating that the round game is 1R (first round game). The right-handed suggestion display X12C shows a display of "right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed as "1720", which indicates that 1720 game balls have been acquired during consecutive games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(C), a round game display effect B is performed. This round game display effect B is an effect performed during the round game during the jackpot game (in this case, during the 15th round game). The number-of-times display X12B1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D are continuously displayed from the round game display effect A. The round display X12A and the acquired ball number display X12D change as the round game progresses. In the example of FIG. 165(C), the round display X12A is displayed as "15R", indicating that the round game is 15R (15th round game). The first number of consecutive chances display X12B1 is continuously represented as "RUSH 2 times", that is, the first number of consecutive chances (first number of RUSH) is two times. . The right-handed suggestion display X12C includes a display of "right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed as "3200", indicating that 3200 game balls have been acquired during the consecutive game.
Similarly, in the second to fourteenth round games (2R to 14R round games), the round display X12A, the number of first consecutive wins display X12B1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D are displayed in the round. It is continuously displayed from the game display effect A, and the round display X12A and the winning ball number display X12D change as the round game progresses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(D), a round game end display effect is performed. This round game end display effect is a effect performed during the ending effect during the jackpot game, and on the main display screen 7a, the second consecutive chance number display X12B2, the right hitting indication display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D. , and a consecutive game continuation display X12E suggesting the continuation of the consecutive game is displayed. The indication X12C for suggesting hitting to the right and the indication X12D for the number of obtained balls are displayed continuously from the round game display effect B in the same manner.

The second display of the number of consecutive games X12B2 is displayed in a different size and position on the main display screen 7a than the first display of the number of consecutive games X12B1. Specifically, the second display of the number of consecutive games X12B2 is displayed in a larger size than the first display of the number of consecutive games X12B1, and is displayed near the center of the main display screen 7a and below the continuous game display X12E. . At this time, the first consecutive win count display X12B1 is not displayed. The second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 is a display representing the second number of consecutive wins (second RUSH number). The second number of consecutive chances represents the number obtained by adding 1 to the number of jackpots (including the first win) at the current time (at the time of the jackpot game) during the consecutive chances. That is, the second number of consecutive wins is the number of times including the current number of big wins during the consecutive wins and the next big win (once). In other words, the second number of consecutive games is the number of times including the number of times of consecutive games scheduled in the future in addition to the current number of times of consecutive games. Therefore, it is preferable to display the second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 indicating the second number of consecutive wins in a variable probability state in which the next big win is relatively likely to come. In the example of FIG. 165(D), the second consecutive chance count display X12B2 is expressed as "RUSH 3rd time", and the second consecutive chance count (second RUSH count) is 3 times. is shown. Note that the continuous-challenging continuation display X12E is displayed in the same size as the second continuous-challenging number display X12B2.
Also, in the example of FIG. 165(D), the consecutive game continuation display X12E is displayed as "RUSH" continuation, suggesting the continuation of the RUSH, that is, the continuation of the consecutive game.

[Consecutive chan number display effect D]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the display effect D for the number of consecutive wins. In the consecutive winning number display effect C, after the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, as shown in FIG. 166(A), the big hit notification effect is performed on the main display screen 7a. In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern array. In the example of FIG. 166(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(B), a round game display effect A is performed. This round game display effect A is an effect performed during a round game during a jackpot game (in this case, during the first round game). A number display X12B1, a right-handed hitting display X12C, and a winning ball number display X12D are displayed. The round display X12A is displayed at the upper left corner of the main display screen 7a. The first consecutive win count display X12B1 is displayed below the round display X12A. The indication X12C suggesting hitting to the right is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a. The winning ball number display X12D is displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a. The round display X12A is a display showing the number of round games played during the jackpot game, that is, the number of rounds.

The first number of consecutive wins display X12B1 is a display representing the first number of consecutive wins (first number of RUSH). The number of first consecutive wins represents the number of big wins (including the first win) at the present time (at the time of the big win game) during the consecutive wins. During consecutive chan, the game state becomes a non-time-saving state when the special symbol changes Until then (when the special symbols fluctuate during consecutive chan, the game state is a time saving state). For example, after the first win, the number of consecutive wins at the time of the next big win in the time-saving state is two. In the example of FIG. 166(B), the first consecutive chance number display X12B1 is represented as "RUSH 2 times", and the first consecutive chance number (first RUSH number) is two times. is shown. Therefore, this round game display effect A is performed during a jackpot game (during the first round game) that is performed when a jackpot is achieved in a time-saving state after the first hit.

The right-handed suggestion display X12C is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to turn the handle 60 clockwise to eject the game ball to the right of the game board 2, that is, to hit right. It is a display that suggests (prompts) to Acquired ball number display X12D is a display showing the number of game balls acquired during a consecutive game. The number of acquired balls in the winning ball display X12D indicates the number of acquired balls acquired during the jackpot game (also called the number of acquired balls acquired by the jackpot), as well as the number of acquired balls acquired during the small winning game (small winning Also called number of balls). In addition to this, the number of winning balls in the winning ball number display X12D in the winning ball number display X12D is not limited to the number of winning balls and the number of winning small winning balls, but also the general winning opening, the first starting opening, and the second starting opening. It may include the number of balls acquired by winning a prize. In addition, in the round game, the first big winning hole 30 closes when the specified number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30, but the number of jackpot winning balls is the specified number in the first big winning hole 30 in the round game. Also includes game balls acquired when game balls win over (so-called over win). Similarly, the number of winning small winning balls includes game balls acquired when game balls enter the second big winning hole 35 in excess of a prescribed number (so-called over winning).

In the example of FIG. 166(B), the round display X12A is displayed as "1R", indicating that the round game is 1R (first round game). The right-handed suggestion display X12C shows a display of "right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed as "1720", which indicates that 1720 game balls have been acquired during consecutive games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(C), a round game display effect B is performed. This round game display effect B is an effect performed during the round game during the jackpot game (in this case, during the 15th round game). The number-of-times display X12B1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D are continuously displayed from the round game display effect A. The round display X12A and the acquired ball number display X12D change as the round game progresses. In the example of FIG. 166(C), the round display X12A is displayed as "15R", indicating that the round game is 15R (15th round game). The first number of consecutive chances display X12B1 is continuously represented as "RUSH 2 times", that is, the first number of consecutive chances (first number of RUSH) is two times. . The right-handed suggestion display X12C shows a display of "right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. The acquired ball number display X12D is displayed as "3200", indicating that 3200 game balls have been acquired during the consecutive game.
Similarly, in the second to fourteenth round games (2R to 14R round games), the round display X12A, the number of first consecutive wins display X12B1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D are displayed in the round. It is continuously displayed from the game display effect A, and the round display X12A and the winning ball number display X12D change as the round game progresses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(D), a round game end display effect is performed. This round game end display effect is a effect performed during the ending effect during the jackpot game, and on the main display screen 7a, the second consecutive chance number display X12B2, the right hitting indication display X12C, and the winning ball number display X12D. , and a consecutive game continuation display X12E suggesting the continuation of the consecutive game is displayed. The indication X12C for suggesting hitting to the right and the indication X12D for the number of obtained balls are displayed continuously from the round game display effect B in the same manner.

The second display of the number of consecutive games X12B2 is displayed in a different size and position from the first display of the number of consecutive games X12B1. Specifically, the second display of the number of consecutive games X12B2 is displayed larger than the first display of the number of consecutive games X12B1, and is displayed near the approximate center of the right sub-display screen 64R. At this time, on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64, the first consecutive winning number display X12B1 is not displayed. The second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 is a display representing the second number of consecutive wins (second RUSH number). The second number of consecutive chances represents the number obtained by adding 1 to the number of jackpots (including the first win) at the current time (at the time of the jackpot game) during the consecutive chances. That is, the second number of consecutive wins is the number of times including the current number of big wins during the consecutive wins and the next big win (once). In other words, the second number of consecutive games is the number of times including the number of times of consecutive games scheduled in the future in addition to the current number of times of consecutive games. Therefore, it is preferable to display the second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 indicating the second number of consecutive wins in a variable probability state in which the next big win is relatively likely to come. In the example of FIG. 166(D), the second consecutive chance count display X12B2 is expressed as "RUSH 3rd time", and the second consecutive chance count (second RUSH count) is 3 times. is shown. It should be noted that the continuous-challenging continuation display X12E is displayed larger than the second continuous-challenging number display X12B2.
Also, in the example of FIG. 166(D), the continuous-challenging continuation display X12E is displayed as "RUSH" continuation, suggesting the continuation of RUSH, that is, the continuation of the continuous-challenging.

[Modification]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the second consecutive win count display X12B2 represents the number of jackpot hits (including the first hit) at the current time (at the time of the jackpot game) during the consecutive wins plus 1, that is, , The second number of consecutive wins is the number of times including the current number of jackpots during the consecutive wins and the next jackpot (once), but is not limited to this, and the current number of consecutive wins (the jackpot It represents the number of jackpots (including the first hit) at the time of game play) plus 2 or more. times or more).

In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the number of consecutive wins display effect A, the position and size of the winning ball number display X12D may differ between the round game display effect and the round game end display effect. For example, the acquired ball number display X12D during the round game end display effect may be displayed in a smaller size at a position different from the acquired ball number display X12D during the round game display effect, or the acquired ball number display during the round game end display effect. The display X12D may be displayed in a larger size than the acquired ball number display X12D during the round game display effect, and the acquired ball number display X12D during the round game end display effect may be the acquired ball number display X12D during the round game display effect. It may be displayed small at the same position as the number display X12D, or the acquired ball number display X12D during the round game end display effect may be displayed large at the same position as the acquired ball number display X12D during the round game display effect. .

In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the second consecutive-challing number display X12B2 is displayed on the sub-display screen 64 in the consecutive-challenging number display effect D, but the first consecutive-challing number display X12B1 is also displayed on the sub-display screen 64. may be displayed in

In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the consecutive winning number display effects B to D, the winning ball number display X12D is not displayed in the round game end display effect. can be

In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the first consecutive-chance number display X12B1 and the second consecutive-chance number display X12B2 are not displayed at the same time in the consecutive-chance number display effects A to D, but not limited to this. They may be displayed simultaneously. In this case, the first display of the number of consecutive games X12B1 and the second display of the number of consecutive games X12B2 may have different sizes or may have the same size.

In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the number of consecutive chance display effects A to D, an image (text) suggesting the game state may be displayed in the round game end display effect. In this case, the image (words) suggesting the gaming state may be displayed larger than the second display of the number of consecutive wins X12B2.

In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the consecutive-champing number display effects A to D, the first consecutive-champing number display X12B1 and the second consecutive-champing number display X12B2 are displayed during the jackpot game. It is not limited, and may be displayed during the time saving game.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of displaying the number of consecutive wins will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the first display of the number of consecutive games X12B1 (for example, RUSH 2 times) representing the first number of consecutive games is displayed. number of consecutive wins X12B2 (for example, RUSH 3rd time) is displayed. According to this configuration, after the display of the first number of consecutive wins display X12B1, the second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 is performed, so that the player can be given a feeling of anticipation for the next big win. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, during the jackpot game, the display of the first number of consecutive chances X12B1 (for example, RUSH 2 times) indicating the number of times of the first consecutive chances is displayed, and then the second consecutive chances are displayed. A second consecutive win count display X12B2 (for example, RUSH 3rd time) is displayed. According to this configuration, during the jackpot game, the second consecutive win count display X12B2 is performed after the display of the first consecutive win count display X12B1, so that the player can receive the next jackpot after the jackpot game. It can improve the sense of anticipation for coming. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, during the jackpot game, the display of the first number of consecutive chances X12B1 (for example, RUSH 2 times) indicating the number of times of the first consecutive chances is displayed, and then the second consecutive chances are displayed. A second consecutive-champ count display X12B2 (for example, RUSH 3rd) is displayed, but the display positions of the first consecutive-champ count display X12B1 and the second consecutive-champ count display X12B2 are different. According to this configuration, during the jackpot game, after the display of the first number of consecutive chances X12B1, the second number of consecutive chances display X12B2 is performed, and the first number of consecutive chances display X12B1 and the second number of consecutive chances display X12B1 are displayed. Since the display position is different from the display position of the number of consecutive chances display X12B2, the player who sees the second number of consecutive chances display X12B2 feels that something expected for the player will occur, so that the second consecutive number of chances display X12B2 is displayed. In relation to this, it is possible to imagine consecutive wins after a big winning game and increase expectations for the coming of the next big winning. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, during the jackpot game, the display of the first number of consecutive chances X12B1 (for example, RUSH 2 times) indicating the number of times of the first consecutive chances is displayed, and then the second consecutive chances are displayed. A second consecutive-champ count display X12B2 (for example, RUSH 3rd) is displayed, but the second consecutive-champ count display X12B2 is displayed larger than the first consecutive-champ count display X12B1. According to this configuration, during the jackpot game, after the display of the first number of consecutive chances display X12B1, the second number of consecutive chances display X12B2 is performed, and the second number of consecutive chances display X12B2 is the first consecutive number of times display X12B2. Since it is displayed larger than the number-of-chance display X12B1, the player who sees the second number-of-success-chance display X12B2 feels that something expected for the player will occur, and the second number-of-success-chance display X12B2 is displayed. In relation to this, it is possible to imagine consecutive wins after a big winning game and increase expectations for the coming of the next big winning. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the first number of consecutive games display X12B1 (for example, RUSH 2 times) indicating the first number of consecutive games is displayed, and then the first number of consecutive games display X12B1 is erased. After that, a second number of consecutive wins display X12B2 (for example, RUSH 3rd time) indicating the second number of consecutive wins is performed. According to this configuration, during the jackpot game, after the display of the first number of consecutive chances display X12B1, the first number of consecutive chances display X12B1 is erased, and then the second number of consecutive chances display X12B2 is performed. , the second display of the number of consecutive wins X12B2 can be emphasized to the player. In connection with the display of the number of consecutive wins X12B2, it is possible to imagine consecutive wins after a big win game and increase the expectation for the next big win. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the obtained ball number display X12D is performed while the first consecutive winning number display X12B1 and the second consecutive winning number display X12B2 are being displayed. According to this configuration, the display of the different numbers of consecutive wins can give a sense of anticipation for the next big win, and the winning ball number display X12D can increase the player's desire to play to increase the number of winning balls. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X12-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect for displaying the first number of consecutive wins representing the first number of consecutive wins,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second number of consecutive games representing a second number of consecutive games different from the first number of consecutive games,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X12-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X12-1,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are both performed during the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X12-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X12-2,
In the combination effect, the first display effect displays the first display of the number of consecutive wins at a first position, and the second display effect displays the second display of the number of consecutive wins at the first position. display at a second location that is different from the location of
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X12-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect X12-2 or aspect X12-3,
In the combination effect, the first display effect displays the first display of the number of consecutive games in a first size, and the second display effect displays the second display of the number of consecutive games in the second size. display at a second size that is greater than the first size;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X12-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects X12-2 to X12-4,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of erasing the display of the number of consecutive wins,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the third display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X12-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X12-5,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying the number of acquired game media representing the number of game media acquired during the jackpot game,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the first display effect and the second display effect are being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The directions and place suggestion display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170. FIG. This direction-place suggestion display effect can be executed by the image control microcomputer 101 during a variation effect of decorative symbols or during a jackpot game. This direction-place suggestion display effect is a effect of displaying an image on the main display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Direction and location suggestion display effect A]
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the direction/place suggestion display effect A. FIG. In the direction place suggesting effect A, after the variable effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed on the main display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. be In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern array. In the example of FIG. 167(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(B), a display effect suggesting hitting to the right is performed. In this right-handed hitting display effect, a direction suggesting display X13A is displayed on the main display screen 7a. This direction suggesting display X13A is a display indicating to the player that the direction in which the game ball is shot and aimed is the right direction, that is, a display suggesting hitting to the right. In the example of FIG. 167(B), the direction suggesting display X13A includes the text "Hit right!" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(C), a place-suggestion display effect is performed. In this place-suggestion display effect, a place-suggestion display X13B is displayed on the main display screen 7a. In this place-suggestion display effect, the direction-suggestion display X13A is not displayed. The place suggesting display X13B is a display indicating a place to be aimed at by shooting a game ball to the player. This is a display that suggests aiming for 17. In the example of FIG. 167(C), as the location suggestive display X13B, the characters "Aim here" and the enlarged view of the area X14 (see FIG. 1) including the actual big winning opening opening start opening 17 are shown. , and an arrow pointing from the characters "Aim here" toward the opening start opening 17 for the big prize opening.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(D), a round game display effect is performed. In this round game display effect, a direction suggestion display X13A and a round game display X13D are displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the location suggestion display X13B is not displayed. The direction suggesting display X13A is different in both display position and size from those of the right-handed hitting suggesting display effect. That is, the direction suggesting display X13A is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a, and is displayed smaller than in the right-handed hitting suggesting display effect. The round game display X13D represents information related to the round game, and displays a round display, consecutive chance number display, and winning ball number display. Descriptions of these displays are omitted here because they are shown in the above-described record update display effect and the number of consecutive wins display effect. In the example of FIG. 167(D), the direction suggesting display X13A displays the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow indicating that the direction in which the game ball is aimed is the right direction (arrow indicating right-handed). It is Further, the round game display X13D shows "1R" as a round display, suggesting that the round game is 1R (first time), and shows "RUSH 2 times" as the number of consecutive wins, indicating the number of consecutive wins. is 2 times, and "1720 won" is shown as the display of the number of won balls, suggesting that the number of game balls won during the consecutive win is "1720".

In addition, the large winning opening opening start opening 17 is a starting opening for opening the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening 30) to start the round game when entering the big winning game. Even if the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the main display screen 7a and the jackpot game state is entered, the round game is not started unless the game ball enters the jackpot opening start opening 17.例文帳に追加
Further, the above-mentioned right-throw suggesting display effect, place suggesting display effect, and round game display effect are effects when the game state is the jackpot game state. In particular, the round game display effect is an effect during the round game (during the big winning opening open game).

[Direction and location suggestion display effect B]
FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining the direction/place suggestion display effect B. FIG. In the direction place suggesting effect B, after the variable effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed on the main display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. be In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 168(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(B), a display effect suggesting hitting to the right is performed. In this right-handed hitting display effect, a direction suggesting display X13A is displayed on the main display screen 7a. This direction suggesting display X13A is a display indicating to the player that the direction in which the game ball is to be shot and aimed is the right direction, that is, a display suggesting hitting to the right. In the example of FIG. 168(B), the direction suggesting display X13A includes the text "Right hit!" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(C), a place-suggestion display effect is performed. In this place suggestive display effect, the direction suggestive display X13A is continuously displayed and the place suggestive display X13B is displayed on the main display screen 7a. The place suggesting display X13B is a display indicating a place to be aimed at by shooting a game ball to the player. This is a display that suggests aiming for 17. In the example of FIG. 168(C), as the location suggesting display X13B, the characters "Aim here" and the enlarged view of the area X14 (see FIG. 1) including the actual big winning opening opening start opening 17 are shown. , and an arrow pointing from the characters "Aim here" toward the opening start opening 17 for the big prize opening.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(D), a round game display effect is performed. In this round game display effect, a direction suggestion display X13A and a round game display X13D are displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the location suggestion display X13B is not displayed. The direction suggesting display X13A is different in both display position and size from those of the right-handed hitting suggesting display effect. That is, the direction suggesting display X13A is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a, and is displayed smaller than in the right-handed hitting suggesting display effect. The round game display X13D represents information related to the round game, and displays a round display, consecutive chance number display, and winning ball number display. Descriptions of these displays are omitted here because they are shown in the above-described record update display effect and the number of consecutive wins display effect. In the example of FIG. 168(D), the direction suggesting display X13A displays the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow indicating that the direction in which the game ball is aimed is the right direction (arrow indicating right-handed). It is Further, the round game display X13D shows "1R" as a round display, suggesting that the round game is 1R (first time), and shows "RUSH 2 times" as the number of consecutive wins, indicating the number of consecutive wins. is 2 times, and "1720 won" is shown as the display of the number of won balls, suggesting that the number of game balls won during the consecutive win is "1720".

Further, the above-mentioned right-throw suggesting display effect, place suggesting display effect, and round game display effect are effects when the game state is the jackpot game state. In particular, the round game display effect is an effect during the round game (during the big winning opening open game).

[Direction and Place Suggestion Display Effect C]
FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the direction/place suggestion display effect C. FIG. In the direction place suggestion effect C, after the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed on the main display screen 7a, the big hit notification effect is performed on the main display screen 7a as shown in FIG. be In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern array. In the example of FIG. 169(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(B), a display effect suggesting hitting to the right is performed. In this right-handed hitting display effect, a direction suggesting display X13A is displayed on the main display screen 7a. This direction suggesting display X13A is a display indicating to the player that the direction in which the game ball is shot and aimed is the right direction, that is, a display suggesting hitting to the right. In the example of FIG. 169(B), the direction suggesting display X13A includes the text "Hit right!" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(C), a place suggestive display effect is performed. In this place suggestive display effect, the direction suggestive display X13A is continuously displayed and the place suggestive display X13E is displayed on the main display screen 7a. The place suggesting display X13E is a display indicating a place to be aimed at by shooting a game ball to the player. This is a display that suggests aiming for 17. In the example of FIG. 169(C), as the location suggestion display X13B, "Aim for the GO on the right" is indicated, and the "GO" (see FIG. 1) attached to the front of the opening start opening 17 for the big prize opening is aimed. is suggested, that is, it is suggested to aim at the big winning opening opening start opening 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(D), a round game display effect is performed. In this round game display effect, a direction suggestion display X13A and a round game display X13D are displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the location suggestion display X13B is not displayed. The direction suggesting display X13A is different in both display position and size from those of the right-handed hitting suggesting display effect. That is, the direction suggesting display X13A is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a, and is displayed smaller than in the right-handed hitting suggesting display effect. The round game display X13D represents information related to the round game, and displays a round display, consecutive chance number display, and winning ball number display. Descriptions of these displays are omitted here because they are shown in the above-described record update display effect and the number of consecutive wins display effect. In the example of FIG. 169(D), the direction suggesting display X13A displays the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow indicating that the direction in which the game ball is aimed is the right direction (an arrow indicating right-handed). It is Further, the round game display X13D shows "1R" as a round display, suggesting that the round game is 1R (first time), and shows "RUSH 2 times" as the number of consecutive wins, indicating the number of consecutive wins. is 2 times, and "1720 won" is shown as the display of the number of won balls, suggesting that the number of game balls won during the consecutive win is "1720".

Further, the above-mentioned right-throw suggesting display effect, place suggesting display effect, and round game display effect are effects when the game state is the jackpot game state. In particular, the round game display effect is an effect during the round game (during the big winning opening open game).

[Direction and Place Suggestion Display Effect D]
FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining the direction/place suggestion display effect D. FIG. In the direction place suggesting effect D, after the variable effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed on the main display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. be In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot pattern array. In the example of FIG. 170(A), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are the same "7" design. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with double eyes. After this big win notification effect, a big win game is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(B), a display effect suggesting hitting to the right is performed. In this right-handed hitting display effect, a direction suggesting display X13A is displayed on the main display screen 7a. This direction suggesting display X13A is a display indicating to the player that the direction in which the game ball is shot and aimed is the right direction, that is, a display suggesting hitting to the right. In the example of FIG. 170(B), the direction suggesting display X13A includes the characters "Hit right!" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(C), a place suggestive display effect is performed. In this place suggestive display effect, the direction suggestive display X13A is continuously displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the place suggestive display X13F is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. The place suggesting display X13F is a display indicating a place to be aimed at by shooting a game ball to the player. This is a display that suggests aiming for 17. In the example of FIG. 170(C), as the location suggestive display X13F, the characters "Aim here" and the enlarged view of the area X14 (see FIG. 1) including the actual big winning opening opening start opening 17 are shown. , and an arrow pointing from the characters "Aim here" toward the opening start opening 17 for the big prize opening.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(D), a round game display effect is performed. In this round game display effect, a direction suggestion display X13A and a round game display X13D are displayed on the main display screen 7a. Here, the location suggestion display X13F is not displayed. The direction suggesting display X13A is different in both display position and size from those of the right-handed hitting suggesting display effect. That is, the direction suggesting display X13A is displayed at the upper right end of the main display screen 7a, and is displayed smaller than in the right-handed hitting suggesting display effect. The round game display X13D represents information related to the round game, and displays a round display, consecutive chance number display, and winning ball number display. Descriptions of these displays are omitted here because they are shown in the above-described record update display effect and the number of consecutive wins display effect. In the example of FIG. 170(D), the direction suggesting display X13A displays the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow indicating that the direction in which the game ball is aimed is the right direction (arrow indicating right-handed). It is Further, the round game display X13D shows "1R" as a round display, suggesting that the round game is 1R (first time), and shows "RUSH 2 times" as the number of consecutive wins, indicating the number of consecutive wins. is 2 times, and "1720 won" is shown as the display of the number of won balls, suggesting that the number of game balls won during the consecutive win is "1720".

Further, the above-mentioned right-throw suggesting display effect, place suggesting display effect, and round game display effect are effects when the game state is the jackpot game state. In particular, the round game display effect is an effect during the round game (during the big winning opening open game).

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction/location indication display effect, the location indications X13B, X13E, and X13F are indications that indicate the location to be aimed at by shooting the game ball to the player. to aim at the big winning opening start opening 17 arranged on the upper right of the game board 2, but not limited to this, the place suggesting display is to shoot a game ball and play a game. The display may be a display suggesting that the player should aim for the big winning hole arranged at the bottom right of the board 2, or a display suggesting that the player should aim for the first starting hole arranged substantially in the center of the game board 2. Alternatively, the location suggesting display may be a display suggesting that the user should aim for the second starting hole arranged substantially in the center of the game board 2, or a general winning hole arranged in various places on the game board 2. It may be a display suggesting aiming, or a display suggesting aiming at a start opening for moving a predetermined driving device. Even in this case, the location-suggestion display may display an image containing the actual location indicating these locations.

In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, before the location suggestion display X13B is displayed in the location suggestion display effect, even if the game ball enters the big prize opening start opening 17, the game ball is not detected and the big prize is won. mouth is not open. In other words, after the location suggestion display X13B is displayed in the location suggestion display performance, when a game ball enters the big winning opening opening start opening 17, the game ball is detected and the big winning opening is opened. be.

In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the location suggestion display effect, after the direction suggestion display X13A is displayed, the location suggestions X13B, X13E, and X13F are displayed. After X13E and X13F are displayed, the direction suggesting display X13A may be displayed.

In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, either one or both of the direction suggesting display X13A and the place suggesting displays X13B, X13E, and X13F may be displayed on the sub display screen 64 in the place suggesting display effect. Alternatively, the direction suggesting display X13A may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L and the location suggesting displays X13B, X13E, and X13F may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, or the direction suggesting display X13A may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. , and the location suggestion displays X13B, X13E, and X13F may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the direction/place suggestion display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction/place suggestion display effect, a direction suggestion display X13A indicating the direction in which the game ball is shot and aimed is displayed, and a location suggestion display X13B indicating the place in which the game ball is shot and aimed is displayed. be done. According to this configuration, since the direction suggesting display X13A and the place suggesting display X13B are displayed, the player can grasp the timing of shooting the game ball, the direction of shooting, and the location of shooting. It is possible to prevent people from being disadvantaged. As a result, the player can enjoy playing the game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction/place suggestion display performance, when the direction suggestion display X13A indicating the direction in which the game ball is shot and aimed is displayed, the direction suggestion display X13A indicating the direction in which the game ball is shot and aimed is displayed. Display X13B is displayed. According to this configuration, when the direction suggesting display X13A is displayed, the location suggesting display X13B is displayed, so that the player can simultaneously determine the timing, the direction, and the place of ejection of the game ball. It is possible to grasp the situation and prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible. As a result, the player can enjoy playing the game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction-suggestion display effect, the direction-suggestion display X13A is displayed before the location-suggestion display X13B is displayed, and then the direction-suggestion display X13A is performed. , the location suggestion display X13B is displayed. According to this configuration, the direction-suggesting display X13A is displayed before the location-suggesting display X13B is displayed, so the player can roughly adjust the shooting direction based on the direction-suggesting display X13A. After that, when the direction suggesting display X13A is displayed, the location suggesting display X13B is displayed, so that the player can simultaneously grasp the timing of shooting the game ball, the direction of shooting, and the place of shooting. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible. As a result, the player can enjoy playing the game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction-suggestion display effect, the direction-suggestion display X13A is displayed before the location-suggestion display X13B is displayed, and then the direction-suggestion display X13A is performed. Then, the location suggesting display X13B is displayed, and thereafter, the direction suggesting display X13A continues to be displayed even when the display of the place suggesting display X13B ends. According to this configuration, the direction-suggesting display X13A is displayed before the location-suggesting display X13B is displayed, so the player can roughly adjust the shooting direction based on the direction-suggesting display X13A. After that, while the direction suggesting display X13A is being displayed, the location suggesting display X13B is displayed, so the player can simultaneously grasp the timing of shooting the game ball, the direction of shooting, and the place of shooting. After that, even when the display of the location suggesting display X13B ends, the display of the direction suggesting display X13A is continued, so that the player is prevented from stopping the ejection of the game ball. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible. As a result, the player can enjoy playing the game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction suggestive display effect, the direction suggestive display X13A suggesting a right-handed shot is displayed before the place suggestive display X13B is displayed, and then the direction suggestive display X13A is displayed. During this time, the location-suggestion display X13B is displayed, and thereafter, the direction-suggestion display X13A continues to be displayed even when the display of the location-suggestion display X13B ends. According to this configuration, the direction suggesting display X13A is displayed before the location suggesting display X13B is displayed. After that, while the direction suggesting display X13A is being displayed, the location suggesting display X13B is displayed, so the player can simultaneously grasp the timing and the place to shoot the game ball. Since the direction suggesting display X13A continues to be displayed even when the display of the location suggesting display X13B ends, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping right-handed hitting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible. As a result, the player can enjoy playing the game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction/place suggestion display effect, the display of the place suggestion display X13B is a display that suggests a place different from the big winning opening where the player is aimed at. According to this configuration, the large winning opening is usually a place recognized by the player, but when it is necessary to enter the game ball at another location (for example, the large winning opening opening start opening 17), The player can prevent the game ball from entering the place, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged as much as possible. As a result, the player can enjoy playing the game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X13-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a direction indication display indicating the direction in which the game ball is aimed,
The second display effect is a effect of performing a place suggestive display representing a place to be aimed at by shooting a game ball,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X13-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X13-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X13-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X13-2,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed before the second display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is performed. to be
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X13-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X13-3,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed before the second display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is performed. After that, the first display effect is continued even when the second display effect is finished.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X13-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X13-4,
The direction suggesting display is a display suggesting that the direction in which the game ball is aimed is the right direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X13-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect X13-4 or aspect X13-5,
The location-suggesting display is a display that suggests a location different from the big winning opening where the game ball is aimed at.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Direction suggesting display change effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 171 to 174. FIG. This direction-suggestion display change effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a direction-suggestion display change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the case of a big win in which the V flag is not turned ON during the big win (for example, a 16R non-V passing scheduled big win), the V flag is OFF, and the game state setting process (FIG. 32 ) turns on the time-saving flag and sets 100 to the time-saving counter. That is, in this case, after the jackpot game, until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times (more specifically, until the operation from the start of the special symbol to stop is repeated 100 times), the non-variable state and time saving state (below , also referred to as a normal time saving state) is continued. Below, the 100th variation of the special symbol in the normal time saving state is also referred to as "time saving final variation".

[Direction Suggestion Display Change Effect A]
FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the direction suggesting display change effect A. FIG.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time saving flag is turned off when the time saving counter reaches 100 in the game state management process (FIG. 28) of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 27). That is, in the time-saving final variation, the game state is changed from the normal time-saving state to the normal state (non-probability variable state and non-time-saving state) at the time of stopping the special symbol variation, but may be controlled as follows. That is, in the time-saving final variation, the control A may be executed to change the game state from the normal time-saving state to the normal state (non-probability variable state and non-time-saving state) at the start of the special symbol variation. This direction-suggestion display change effect A is a effect executed at the time of such control A. This direction-suggestion display change performance A is a performance that is performed from the variation immediately before the time-saving final variation to the time-saving final variation.

In the direction-suggesting display change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. This decorative symbol variation pre-start effect is an effect representing a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped in the variation immediately before the time saving final variation. In the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed substantially in the center of the main display screen 7a, and the right-handed hitting indication X14A is displayed at the upper right position. This right-handed suggestion display X14A is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to shoot the game ball rightward (toward the right side of the game board 2). In the example of FIG. 171(A), the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed at "4" design, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed at "3" design, and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed at "5" design. ing. In addition, the right-handed suggestion display X14A shows the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction (rightward direction) of the game ball. A pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns. In addition, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the game state is the normal time-saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171(B), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. This decorative pattern variation start production is a production performed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate in the time saving final variation. In the decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary approximately in the center of the main display screen 7a, and the left-handed hitting indication X14B is displayed at the upper right position. This left-handed suggestion display X14B is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to shoot the game ball in the left direction (to the left of the game board 2). The display of this left-handed suggestive display X14B is displayed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to fluctuate. The start of movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is a concept including the state before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start moving and the time when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start moving from the stopped state. be. In the example of FIG. 171(B), the left-handed hitting suggestion display X14B shows the characters "left-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction (leftward direction) of the game ball. In addition, in this decorative design variation start effect, the game state has shifted from the normal time saving state to the normal state at the start of the variation of the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R. In subsequent effects, the game state is the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171(C), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the main display screen 7a, and the left-hand hitting suggestion display X14B is continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 171(C), the ready-to-win state is formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R with the same "7" pattern and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171(D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the left-hand hitting suggestion display X14B is continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 171(D), the decorative design 8L is stop-displayed at "7" design, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed at "6" design, and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed at "7" design. there is

Next, as shown in FIG. 171(E), a result display effect is performed. In this result display effect, the result display X14C is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the left-hand hitting suggestion display X14B is continuously displayed. The result display X14C displays the number of consecutive wins and the number of winning balls during the consecutive wins. In the example of FIG. 171(E), the result display X14C shows "Number of consecutive wins: 3" and "Number of balls won: 4200". is suggested to be 4200 balls.
After that, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the next variation is started.

[Direction Suggestion Display Change Effect B]
FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining direction suggesting display change effect B. FIG.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time saving flag is turned off when the time saving counter reaches 100 in the game state management process (FIG. 28) of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 27). That is, in the time-saving final variation, the game state is changed from the normal time-saving state to the normal state (non-probability variable state and non-time-saving state) at the time of stopping the special symbol variation, but may be controlled as follows. That is, in the time saving final variation, the control B may be executed to change the game state from the normal time saving state to the normal state (non-probability variable state and non time saving state) when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped. This direction-suggesting display change effect B is a effect executed at the time of such control B. FIG. This direction-suggestion display change effect B is a effect performed in the time-saving final variation.

In the direction suggesting display change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 172(A), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. This decorative pattern variation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary in the time saving final variation. In the decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary approximately in the center of the main display screen 7a, and a right-handed hitting indication X14A is displayed at the upper right position. This right-handed suggestion display X14A is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to shoot the game ball rightward (toward the right side of the game board 2). The display of this right-handed suggestion display X14A continues from the previous variation. In the example of FIG. 172(B), the right-handed suggestion display X14A shows the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction (rightward) of the game ball. A pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation start production, the game state is a normal time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the main display screen 7a, and the right-hand hitting suggestion display X14A is continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 172(B), the ready-to-win state is formed by temporary stop display of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R with the same "7" pattern and high speed fluctuation of the middle decorative pattern 8C. In this ready-to-win production, the game state is the normal time-saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172(C), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the left-hand hitting suggestion display X14B is displayed. This left-handed suggestive display X14B is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to shoot the game ball in the left direction (toward the left side of the game board 2), and replaces the right-handed suggested display X14A on the main display screen 7a. displayed in the upper right position of In the example of FIG. 172(C), the decorative design 8L is stop-displayed at "7" design, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed at "6" design, and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed at "7" design. there is In addition, the left-handed suggestion display X14B shows the characters "left-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction (leftward direction) of the game ball. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation stop effect, the game state is shifted from the normal time-saving state to the normal state when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172(D), a result display effect is performed. In this result display effect, the result display X14C is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the left-hand hitting suggestion display X14B is continuously displayed. The result display X14C displays the number of consecutive wins and the number of winning balls during the consecutive wins. In the example of FIG. 172(D), the result display X14C shows "Number of consecutive wins: 3" and "Number of balls won: 4200". is suggested to be 4200 balls.
After that, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the next variation is started.

[Direction Suggestion Display Change Effect C]
FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining the direction suggesting display change effect C. FIG.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time saving flag is turned off when the time saving counter reaches 100 in the game state management process (FIG. 28) of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 27). That is, in the time-saving final variation, the game state is changed from the normal time-saving state to the normal state (non-probability variable state and non-time-saving state) at the time of stopping the special symbol variation, but may be controlled as follows. That is, in the time-saving final variation, control C may be executed to change the game state from the normal time-saving state to the normal state (non-probable variable state and non-time-saving state) at the time of the result performance after stopping the variation of the decorative symbols. This direction-suggestion display change effect C is an effect executed at the time of such control C. This direction-suggestion display change effect C is a effect performed in the time-saving final variation.

In the direction suggesting display change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 173(A), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. This decorative pattern variation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary in the time saving final variation. In the decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary approximately in the center of the main display screen 7a, and a right-handed hitting indication X14A is displayed at the upper right position. This right-handed suggestion display X14A is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to shoot the game ball rightward (toward the right side of the game board 2). The display of this right-handed suggestion display X14A continues from the previous variation. In the example of FIG. 173(B), the right-handed suggestion display X14A shows the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction (rightward) of the game ball. A pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation start production, the game state is a normal time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the main display screen 7a, and the right-hand hitting suggestion display X14A is continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 173(B), the ready-to-win state is formed by the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R being temporarily stopped and displayed with the same "7" pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuating at high speed. In this ready-to-win production, the game state is the normal time-saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(C), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the right-hand hitting suggestion display X14A is continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 173(C), the decorative design 8L is stop-displayed at "7" design, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed at "6" design, and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed at "7" design. there is In addition, in this decorative symbol variation stop effect, the game state is a normal time-saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(D), a result display effect is performed. In this result display effect, the main display screen 7a displays the result display X14C and the left-hand hitting suggestion display X14B. This left-handed suggestive display X14B is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to shoot the game ball in the left direction (toward the left side of the game board 2), and replaces the right-handed suggested display X14A on the main display screen 7a. displayed in the upper right position of The result display X14C displays the number of consecutive wins and the number of winning balls during the consecutive wins. In the example of FIG. 173(D), the result display X14C indicates "Number of consecutive wins: 3" and "Number of balls won: 4200". is suggested to be 4200 balls. In addition, the left-handed suggestion display X14B shows the characters "left-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction (leftward direction) of the game ball. In addition, in this result display effect, the game state has shifted from the normal time-saving state to the normal state.
After that, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the next variation is started.

[Direction Suggestion Display Change Effect D]
FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining the direction indication display change effect D. FIG.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time saving flag is turned off when the time saving counter reaches 100 in the game state management process (FIG. 28) of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 27). That is, in the time-saving final variation, the game state is changed from the normal time-saving state to the normal state (non-probability variable state and non-time-saving state) at the time of stopping the special symbol variation, but may be controlled as follows. That is, in the time-saving final variation, control C may be executed to change the game state from the normal time-saving state to the normal state (non-probable variable state and non-time-saving state) at the time of the result performance after stopping the variation of the decorative symbols. This direction-suggestion display change effect C is an effect executed at the time of such control C. This direction-suggestion display change effect C is an effect performed in the time-saving final variation and the subsequent variation.

In the direction suggesting display change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 174(A), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. This decorative pattern variation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary in the time saving final variation. In the decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary approximately in the center of the main display screen 7a, and a right-handed hitting indication X14A is displayed at the upper right position. This right-handed suggestion display X14A is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to shoot the game ball rightward (toward the right side of the game board 2). The display of this right-handed suggestion display X14A continues from the previous variation. In the example of FIG. 174(B), the right-hand hitting indication X14A shows the characters "Right-hand hitting" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction (right direction) of the game ball. A pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation start production, the game state is a normal time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the main display screen 7a, and the right-hand hitting suggestion display X14A is continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 174(B), the ready-to-win state is formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R with the same "7" pattern, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuating at high speed. In this ready-to-win production, the game state is the normal time-saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(C), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the right-hand hitting suggestion display X14A is continuously displayed. In the example of FIG. 174(C), the decorative design 8L is stop-displayed at "7" design, the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed at "6" design, and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed at "7" design. there is In addition, in this decorative symbol variation stop effect, the game state is a normal time-saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(D), a result display effect is performed. In this result display effect, the main display screen 7a displays the result display X14C and the left-hand hitting suggestion display X14B. This left-handed suggestive display X14B is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to shoot the game ball in the left direction (toward the left side of the game board 2), and replaces the right-handed suggested display X14A on the main display screen 7a. displayed in the upper right position of The result display X14C displays the number of consecutive wins and the number of winning balls during the consecutive wins. In the example of FIG. 174(D), the result display X14C indicates "Number of consecutive wins: 3" and "Number of balls won: 4200". is suggested to be 4200 balls. In addition, the left-handed suggestion display X14B shows the characters "left-handed" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction (leftward direction) of the game ball. In addition, in this result display effect, the game state has shifted from the normal time-saving state to the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(E), the next variation effect is performed. This next variation performance is the performance in the next variation of the time saving final variation, and shows the state before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to vary. In this next variation performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the decorative symbol stop performance in the time-saving final variation. A left-handed suggestive display X14D is displayed on the near side (player's side) of 8C and 8R, and a left-handed player suggested display X14B is also continuously displayed. This left-handed suggestive display X14D is a display that suggests (prompts) the player to shoot a game ball to the left (to the left of the game board 2), like the left-handed suggested display X14B. In the example of FIG. 174, the left-handed suggestion display X14D includes the characters "Let's hit back to the left!" and an arrow indicating the shooting direction (leftward) of the game ball.

[Modification]
In the direction suggestive display change effect of the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, at various timings of the time-saving final variation, the right-handed suggestion display X14A is changed to the left-handed suggestion display X14B. Time-saving final fluctuation (when the probability variable state and time-saving state (probability variable time-saving state) continue until the special design fluctuates a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game, various timings of the predetermined fluctuation of the special symbol in the probability variable time-saving state) , the right-handed hitting indication X14A may be changed to a left-handed hitting indication indication X14B. In this way, the last variation of the special symbols, which is a specific variation, is the transition from the first game state, which is a game state relatively advantageous to the player, to the second game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. , the right-handed hitting indication X14A may be changed to a left-handed hitting indication indication X14B. Further, the right-handed hitting suggestion display X14A may be changed to the left-handed hitting suggestion display X14B at various other timings, not limited to the time-saving final variation.

In the embodiment of the game machine 1, the next variation performance of the direction suggesting display change performance D is performed after the result performance of the direction suggesting display change performances A to C and following the time saving final variation. good too.

In the above-described embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction suggesting display change effect, the right-handed hitting indication X14A, the left-handed hitting indication display X14B, the result display X14C, and the left-handed hitting indication indication X14D were displayed on the main display screen 7a. It may be displayed on the display screen 64 .

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the direction indication display change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction suggestive display change effect, a specific variation of the special symbol (for example, the last variation of the time-saving game (probability variation flag OFF) (100th variation of the special symbol after the jackpot) ), a first direction suggesting display (for example, right-handed suggesting display X14A) that suggests the player to shoot the game ball in the first direction (for example, the right direction), and a game ball to the player in the first direction A second direction suggesting display (for example, a left-handed hitting display X14B) is performed to suggest that the ball should be shot in the second direction (for example, leftward). According to this configuration, a first direction suggestive display (for example, right-handed suggestive display X14A) and a second direction suggestive display (for example, left-handed suggestive display X14B) are performed in one specific variation of the special symbol. Therefore, even if the direction in which the game ball should be shot changes rapidly in one specific variation of the special pattern, the direction in which the game ball should be shot can be shown to the player, and the player does not make a mistake in the shooting direction of the game ball. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. As a result, the game can be played happily, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction suggestive display change effect, a specific variation of the special symbol (for example, the last variation of the time-saving game (probability variation flag OFF) (100th variation of the special symbol after the jackpot) ), a first direction suggesting display (for example, a right-handed suggesting display X14A) for suggesting the player to shoot the game ball in a first direction (for example, rightward) is performed, after which the player A second direction suggesting display (for example, hitting left suggesting display X14B) that suggests to shoot the game ball in the second direction (for example, leftward) is performed. According to this configuration, in one specific variation of the special symbol, the first direction suggestive display (for example, right-handed suggestive display X14A) is performed, and the second direction suggestive display (for example, left-handed suggestive display X14B) is performed. Since it is performed, it is possible to show the player the direction in which the game ball should be shot, which changes from the first direction to the second direction, in one specific variation of the special symbol, and the player makes a mistake in the shooting direction of the game ball. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. As a result, the game can be played happily, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction suggestive display change effect, a specific variation of the special symbol (for example, the last variation of the time-saving game (probability variation flag OFF) (100th variation of the special symbol after the jackpot) ), the first direction suggesting display (for example, right-handed suggesting display X14A) for suggesting the player to shoot the game ball in the first direction (for example, the right direction) is the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. , and then a second direction suggesting display (for example, left-handed) that suggests the player to shoot the game ball in a second direction (for example, leftward). Suggestion display X14B) is performed. According to this configuration, in one specific variation of the special symbol, the first direction suggestive display (for example, right-handed suggestive display X14A) is performed when the variable display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. After that, a second direction suggesting display (for example, a left-handed suggesting display X14B) is performed, so that when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the variable display effect, the game ball is ejected in the first direction. It is possible to indicate to the player that it is the right direction, and after that, it is possible to indicate that the direction in which the game ball should be ejected has changed from the first direction to the second direction by the second direction indicating display, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the player's mistake in the shooting direction of the game ball. As a result, the game can be played happily, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction suggestive display change effect, a specific variation of the special symbol (for example, the last variation of the time-saving game (probability variation flag OFF) (100th variation of the special symbol after the jackpot) ), the first direction suggesting display (for example, right-handed suggesting display X14A) for suggesting the player to shoot the game ball in the first direction (for example, the right direction) is the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. , and then a second direction suggesting display (for example, left-handed) that suggests the player to shoot the game ball in a second direction (for example, leftward). The suggestive display X14B) is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped. According to this configuration, in one specific variation of the special symbol, the first direction suggestive display (for example, right-handed suggestive display X14A) is performed when the variable display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. After that, a second direction suggesting display (for example, left-handed suggesting display X14B) is performed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stop fluctuating. , the game ball can be shown to the player that the first direction is the direction in which the game ball should be ejected. Since it is possible to indicate by the second direction suggesting display that the direction in which the ball should be shot has changed, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the player making a mistake in the shooting direction of the game ball. As a result, the game can be played happily, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effects 5 and 6]
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the direction suggestive display change effect, a specific variation of the special symbol (for example, the last variation of the time-saving game (probability variation flag OFF) (100th variation of the special symbol after the jackpot) ), the first direction suggesting display for suggesting the player to shoot the game ball in the first direction is performed while the variable display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is being performed, and then , the second direction suggesting display for suggesting the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped, and the first direction suggesting display is performed by the player. The second direction suggestion is a left-handed suggestion display X14B that suggests the player to shoot the game ball to the left. . According to this configuration, in one specific variation of the special symbols, the right-handed hitting indication X14A is performed while the variable display performance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, and then the left-handed hitting indication indication X14B is performed. is carried out when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stop fluctuating, so that when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are in the fluctuating display effect, the player can be shown that the right direction is the direction in which the game ball should be shot. After that, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop fluctuating, it is possible to indicate that the direction in which the game ball should be ejected has changed from the right direction to the left direction by the left-handed suggestion display X14B, so that the player can play the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by making a mistake in the shooting direction of the ball. As a result, the game can be played happily, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect X14-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of performing a first direction suggesting display for suggesting the player to shoot the game ball in the first direction,
The second display effect is a effect of performing a second direction suggesting display for suggesting the player to shoot the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in one specific variation of the special symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X14-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect X14-1,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed in one specific variation of the special symbol, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X14-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect X14-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of variably displaying the decorative pattern,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed in one specific variation of the special symbol, the first display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed, and the first display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed. After the first display effect, the second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X14-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect X14-3,
The fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying the decorative pattern,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed in one specific variation of the special symbol, and then the fourth display effect is performed, and the first display effect is the third display. is performed while the effect is being performed, and the second display effect is performed at the time of the fourth display effect (or after the fourth display effect);
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X14-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect X14-4,
The first direction suggesting display of the first display effect is a right-handed display suggesting the player to shoot the game ball in the right direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect X14-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect X14-5,
The second direction suggesting display of the second display effect is a left-handed display suggesting the player to shoot the game ball in the left direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character rendering will be described below with reference to FIGS. 175 to 178. FIG. This character effect can be executed in relation to the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"). For example, it can be executed at the start of the variation production of decorative symbols, during variation, at the time of reach, during reach production (super reach production), and the like.

[Character production A]
175 is a diagram for explaining the character effect A. FIG.
In the character effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 175(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 175(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(B), a fan effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This fanning effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 175(A), and the main display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the main display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This character image "Chance!" can make the player feel that the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will become ready-to-win. In other words, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(C), a zone character effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After the character image "Chance!" is displayed in the stimulating effect of FIG. 175(B), the effect of stirring up the player's expectations for the big win is subsequently executed, and at a predetermined timing, the main display screen 7a is switched. A zone character rendition is performed. When the zone character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays a zone-indicative character image MZ consisting of a character image MZ1 of "Geki-netsu ZONE" and a character image MZ2 of "red" over the entire screen. In the character image MZ1, the characters "Gekietsu" are displayed in the upper row and the characters "ZONE" are displayed in the lower row in the same red color, suggesting that the character will enter the Gekietsu ZONE from now on. On the other hand, the character image MZ2 is displayed so that the characters "red" cover the lower portions (parts) of "O" and "N" of the character image MZ1. That is, the character image MZ2 is superimposed on (in front of) the character image MZ1 and displayed in such a manner that the character image MZ1 can be read. The character image MZ2 is displayed in the same red color as the character image MZ1 (in the figure, red is indicated by hatching lines). That is, the character image MZ2 indicates the color of the character "Gekietsu ZONE" in the character image MZ1 by its own color and the meaning of the kanji. Furthermore, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 are displayed in different display modes. As shown in FIG. 175(C), the character image MZ1 is displayed so as to become larger toward the left and right, in other words, displayed so as to become smaller toward the center. MZ2 is a display mode in which characters are displayed with a uniform thickness, such as Gothic. That is, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 have different fonts. The player's expectation for a big win is further improved by this zone character effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(D), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the zone-indicative character image MZ shown in FIG. 175(C) is displayed for a predetermined period, the main display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 175(A). It shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-reach effect indicates that the player has entered a hot zone and has become a ready-to-reach zone. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Furthermore, in this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to be higher when reaching a reach with a variable probability pattern than when reaching a reach with a normal pattern. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols. In addition, in this FIG. 175(D), this reach pattern arrangement shows "7↓7" which is probability variable reach. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Then, in a state in which this reach state is maintained, a zone effect is performed by Gekietsu ZONE.

[Character production B]
176 is a diagram for explaining character effect B. FIG.
In the character effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 176(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 176(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(B), a fan effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This fanning effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 176(A), and the main display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the main display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This character image "Chance!" can make the player feel that the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will become ready-to-win. In other words, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(C), a zone character effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After the character image "Chance!" is displayed in the stimulating effect shown in FIG. 176(B), the effect to increase the player's expectation for the big win is subsequently executed, and at a predetermined timing, the main display screen 7a is switched. A zone character rendition is performed. When the zone character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays a zone-indicative character image MZ consisting of a character image MZ1 of "Geki-netsu ZONE" and a character image MZ2 of "red" over the entire screen. In the character image MZ1, the characters "Gekietsu" are displayed in the upper row and the characters "ZONE" are displayed in the lower row in the same red color, suggesting that the character will enter the Gekietsu ZONE from now on. On the other hand, the character image MZ2 is displayed so that the characters "red" cover the lower portions (parts) of "O" and "N" of the character image MZ1. That is, the character image MZ2 is superimposed on (in front of) the character image MZ1 and displayed in such a manner that the character image MZ1 can be read. The character image MZ2 is displayed in the same red color as the character image MZ1 (in the figure, red is indicated by hatching lines). That is, the character image MZ2 indicates the color of the character "Gekietsu ZONE" in the character image MZ1 by its own color and the meaning of the kanji. Furthermore, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 are displayed in different display modes. As shown in FIG. 176C, the character image MZ1 is displayed so as to become larger toward the left and right, in other words, displayed so as to become smaller toward the center. MZ2 is a display mode in which characters are displayed with a uniform thickness, such as Gothic. That is, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 have different fonts. The player's expectation for a big win is further improved by this zone character effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(D), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the zone-indicating character image MZ shown in FIG. It shows how the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-reach effect indicates that the player has entered a hot zone and has become a ready-to-reach zone. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Furthermore, in this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to be higher when reaching a reach with a variable probability pattern than when reaching a reach with a normal pattern. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols.
And, in this FIG. 176(D), this reach pattern arrangement shows "7↓7" which is probability variable reach. This is because the zone suggestive character image MZ shown in FIG. 176(C) is displayed in red. In other words, the zone suggesting character image MZ has a plurality of colors, and as shown in FIG. 176(C), the color of the zone suggesting character image MZ changes according to the zone character rendering. The zone-indicating character images MZ, which have a plurality of colors, are designed to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the difference in color. That is, the character image MZ1 is a display that suggests a predetermined zone with display of information suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win with the first character ("Gekietsu ZONE") of a predetermined color, and the character image MZ2 is a display that indicates the first It is a representation of a second character that indicates the color of the character. In this example, as will be described later, the color of the zone-indicative character image MZ includes three colors, blue and white, in addition to the red described above, and the degree of expectation for a big win is set to red>blue>white. Therefore, in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 176(D), the red zone suggesting character image MZ, which has the highest degree of expectation for a big hit, is displayed first by the zone character effect, and thus the big win is greater than the ready-to-win effect of the normal pattern. "7 ↓ 7", which is the reach of the probability variation pattern with a high probability of becoming, was displayed. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Then, in a state in which this reach state is maintained, a zone effect is performed by Gekietsu ZONE.
It should be noted that the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 176(D) is not always performed even when the red zone suggestion character image MZ is displayed in the zone character effect shown in FIG. 176(C). As shown in FIG. 176(G), which will be described later, with a predetermined probability, there may be a case where the ready-to-win performance of normal symbols having a lower probability of winning a big hit than the ready-to-win of probability variable symbols is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot finalization effect, the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 176(A) is the zone character effect shown in FIG. After passing through, FIG. 176 (D) shows that the probability variable hits after becoming the probability variable reach. In this example, "777" is shown as the probability variable jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.
It should be noted that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 176(E) is not always performed even when the red zone suggested character image MZ is displayed in the zone character effect shown in FIG. 176(C). , there may be a case where a losing symbol stop effect as shown in FIG. 176(H) described later is performed with a predetermined probability.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 176(C), on the main display screen 7a, the zone character effect shown in FIG. 176(F) may be executed. When this zone character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays a zone-indicative character image MZ consisting of a character image MZ1 of "Geki-netsu ZONE" and a character image MZ2 of "blue" over the entire screen. In the character image MZ1, the characters "Gekietsu" are displayed in the upper row and the characters "ZONE" are displayed in the lower row in the same blue color, suggesting that the game is about to enter the Gekietsu ZONE. On the other hand, the character image MZ2 is displayed so that the characters "blue" cover the lower portions (parts) of "O" and "N" of the character image MZ1. That is, the character image MZ2 is superimposed on (in front of) the character image MZ1 and displayed in such a manner that the character image MZ1 can be read. Also, the character image MZ2 is displayed in the same blue color as the character image MZ1 (in the drawing, blue is displayed in a polka dot pattern). That is, the character image MZ2 indicates the color of the character "Gekietsu ZONE" in the character image MZ1 by its own color and the meaning of the kanji. Further, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 are displayed in different display modes. As shown in FIG. 176C, the character image MZ1 is displayed so as to become larger toward the left and right, in other words, displayed so as to become smaller toward the center. MZ2 is a display mode in which characters are displayed with a uniform thickness, such as Gothic font. That is, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 have different fonts. The player's expectation for a big win is further improved by this zone character effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(G), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the zone-indicating character image MZ shown in FIG. 176(F) is displayed for a predetermined period, the main display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 176(A). It shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-reach effect indicates that the player has entered a hot zone and has become a ready-to-reach zone. Then, in FIG. 176(G), this ready-to-win pattern arrangement shows "8↓8" which is a normal ready-to-win. This is because the zone suggestive character image MZ shown in FIG. 176(F) was displayed in blue. That is, in the reach effect shown in FIG. 176 (G), due to the fact that the blue zone suggestive character image MZ with the second highest expectation for the big hit was displayed by the zone character effect earlier, than the reach of the probability variation pattern "8↓8", which is the reach of normal symbols with a low probability of winning a big hit, was displayed. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Then, in a state in which this reach state is maintained, a zone effect is performed by Gekietsu ZONE.
Note that the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 176(G) is not always performed even when the zone character effect shown in FIG. There may be a case where the ready-to-win performance of variable probability symbols having a higher probability of winning a big hit than the ready-to-win of normal symbols as shown in FIG. 176(D) is performed with a predetermined probability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(H), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this losing pattern stop effect, the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 176(A) is the zone character effect shown in FIG. After that, FIG. 176(G) shows that the player loses after becoming a normal reach. In this example, "858" is shown as the lost pattern array.
It should be noted that the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 176(H) is always performed even when the zone character effect shown in FIG. Instead, there may be a case where a big hit confirmation effect as shown in FIG. 176(E) is performed with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the character effect B shown in FIG. 176, it is possible to execute a zone character effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating. The expectation of the jackpot changes depending on the color of the . That is, the zone-suggestive character image MZ displayed in the zone character effect has the highest degree of expectation for a big win when displayed in red, and the next highest degree of expectation for a big win when displayed in blue. When it is displayed with , the jackpot expectation is the lowest. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a jackpot, the zone suggestive character image MZ has the highest probability of being displayed in red, and the second highest probability of being displayed in blue. Lowest probability to be displayed in white.

[Character production C]
FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining the character effect C. FIG.
In the character effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 177(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 177(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(B), a fan effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This fanning effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 177(A), and the main display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the main display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This character image "Chance!" can make the player feel that the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will become ready-to-win. In other words, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(C), a zone character effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After the character image "Chance!" is displayed in the stimulating effect of FIG. 177(B), the effect of stirring up the player's expectation for the big win is subsequently executed, and at a predetermined timing, the main display screen 7a is switched. A zone character rendition is performed. When the zone character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays a zone-indicative character image MZ consisting of a character image MZ1 of "Geki-netsu ZONE" and a character image MZ2 of "red" over the entire screen. In the character image MZ1, the characters "Gekietsu" are displayed in the upper row and the characters "ZONE" are displayed in the lower row in the same red color, suggesting that the character will enter the Gekietsu ZONE from now on. On the other hand, the character image MZ2 is displayed so that the characters "red" cover the lower portions (parts) of "O" and "N" of the character image MZ1. That is, the character image MZ2 is superimposed on (in front of) the character image MZ1 and displayed in such a manner that the character image MZ1 can be read. The character image MZ2 is displayed in the same red color as the character image MZ1 (in the figure, red is indicated by hatching lines). That is, the character image MZ2 indicates the color of the character "Gekietsu ZONE" in the character image MZ1 by its own color and the meaning of the kanji. Furthermore, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 are displayed in different display modes. As shown in FIG. 177(C), the character image MZ1 is displayed so as to become larger toward the left and right, in other words, displayed so as to become smaller toward the center. MZ2 is a display mode in which characters are displayed with a uniform thickness, such as Gothic. That is, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 have different fonts. The player's expectation for a big win is further improved by this zone character effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(D), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the zone-indicative character image MZ shown in FIG. It shows how the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-reach effect indicates that the player has entered a hot zone and has become a ready-to-reach zone. Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Furthermore, in this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to be higher when reaching a reach with a variable probability pattern than when reaching a reach with a normal pattern. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols.
And, in this FIG. 177(D), this reach pattern arrangement shows "7↓7" which is probability variable reach. This is because the zone suggestive character image MZ shown in FIG. 177(C) is displayed in red. In other words, the zone suggesting character image MZ has a plurality of colors, and as shown in FIG. 177(C), the color of the zone suggesting character image MZ changes according to the zone character rendering. The zone-indicating character images MZ, which have a plurality of colors, are designed to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the difference in color. That is, the character image MZ1 is a display that suggests a predetermined zone with display of information suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win with the first character ("Gekietsu ZONE") of a predetermined color, and the character image MZ2 is a display that indicates the first It is a representation of a second character that indicates the color of the character. In this example, as will be described later, the color of the zone-indicative character image MZ includes three colors, blue and white, in addition to the red described above, and the degree of expectation for a big win is set to red>blue>white. Therefore, in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 177(D), the red zone suggesting character image MZ, which has the highest degree of expectation for a big hit, is displayed first by the zone character effect, and thus the big win is greater than the ready-to-win effect of the normal pattern. "7 ↓ 7", which is the reach of the probability variation pattern with a high probability of becoming, was displayed. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Then, in a state in which this reach state is maintained, a zone effect is performed by Gekietsu ZONE.
It should be noted that the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 177(D) is not always performed even when the red zone suggestion character image MZ is displayed in the zone character effect shown in FIG. 177(C). As shown in FIG. 177(G), which will be described later, with a predetermined probability, there may be a case where a normal symbol ready-to-win effect with a lower probability of winning a big hit than a probability variable symbol ready-to-win is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. 177(A), the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 177(A) is the zone character effect shown in FIG. 177(C). After passing through, FIG. 177 (D) shows that the probability variable hits after becoming the probability variable reach. In this example, "777" is shown as the probability variable jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.
It should be noted that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 177(E) is not always performed even when the red zone suggesting character image MZ is displayed in the zone character effect shown in FIG. 177(C). , there may be a case where a losing symbol stop effect as shown in FIG. 177(H) described later is performed with a predetermined probability.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 177(C), on the main display screen 7a, the zone character effect shown in FIG. 177(F) may be executed. When this zone character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays a zone-indicating character image MZ consisting of the character image MZ1 of "Gekiatsu ZONE" on the full screen. The character image MZ1 is displayed in the same white color, with the characters "Gekietsu" in the upper row and the characters "ZONE" in the lower row (in the illustration, the white characters are displayed as white characters). It suggests rushing into the heat zone. Here, in the zone character effect shown in FIG. 177(F), like the zone character effect shown in FIG. The character image MZ2 showing the color of the character "Natsu ZONE" by its own color and the meaning of the kanji is not displayed. That is, in the zone character rendering shown in FIG. 177(F), the character image MZ2 that is superimposed on (in front of) the character image MZ1 and displayed in such a manner that the character image MZ1 can be read is not displayed, and the character image MZ1 is displayed. is displayed on the main display screen 7a. In other words, the zone suggesting character image MZ is composed only of the character image MZ1 of "Gekiatsu ZONE". This is because, as described above, the zone-indicating character images MZ in a plurality of colors suggest the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the difference in color, and the zone-indicating character image MZ displayed in white is the most expected to win. degree is low. In other words, the red zone-suggesting character image MZ with the highest jackpot expectation and the blue zone-suggesting character image MZ with the second highest jackpot expectation are always displayed as the character image MZ2. The character image MZ2 may or may not be displayed in the white zone-suggestive character image MZ with the lowest expectation for the big win, and the character image MZ2 is not displayed in the zone character effect shown in FIG. 177(F). shows an example.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(G), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the zone-indicating character image MZ shown in FIG. 177(F) is displayed for a predetermined period, the main display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 177(A). It shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-reach effect indicates that the player has entered a hot zone and has become a ready-to-reach zone. Then, in FIG. 177(G), this ready-to-win pattern arrangement shows "8↓8" which is a normal ready-to-win. This is because the zone suggestive character image MZ shown in FIG. 177(F) was displayed in white. That is, in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 177(G), the zone character effect causes the white zone suggestive character image MZ with the lowest expectation for the big hit to be displayed first, resulting in a larger hit than the reach of the probability variable pattern. "8 ↓ 8", which is the reach of normal symbols with a low probability of becoming , was displayed. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Then, in a state in which this reach state is maintained, a zone effect is performed by Gekietsu ZONE.
Note that the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 177(G) is not always performed even when the white zone suggestion character image MZ is displayed in the zone character effect shown in FIG. 177(F). There may be a case where the ready-to-win performance of variable probability symbols with a higher probability of winning a big hit than the ready-to-win of normal symbols is performed as shown in FIG. 177(D) with a predetermined probability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(H), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this losing pattern stop effect, the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 177(A) is the zone character effect shown in FIG. After that, FIG. 177(G) shows that the player loses after becoming a normal reach. In this example, "858" is shown as the lost pattern array.
It should be noted that the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 177(H) is always performed even when the white zone suggesting character image MZ is displayed in the zone character effect shown in FIG. 177(F). Instead, there may be a case where a big hit confirmation effect as shown in FIG. 177(E) is performed with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the character effect C shown in FIG. 177, it is possible to execute a zone character effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating. The expectation of the jackpot changes depending on the color of the . In other words, the zone-suggestive character image MZ displayed in the zone character effect has the highest degree of expectation for a big win when displayed in red, and the next highest degree of expectation for a big win when displayed in blue as described above, and white. When it is displayed with , the jackpot expectation is the lowest. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a jackpot, the zone suggestive character image MZ has the highest probability of being displayed in red, and the second highest probability of being displayed in blue. Lowest probability to be displayed in white.

[Character production D]
178 is a diagram for explaining the character effect D. FIG.
In the character effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 178(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 178(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(B), a fan effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This fanning effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 178(A), and the main display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the main display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This character image "Chance!" can make the player feel that the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will become ready-to-win. In other words, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(C), a zone character effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After the character image "Chance!" is displayed in the stimulating effect of FIG. 178(B), the effect of arousing the player's expectation for the big win is subsequently executed, and at a predetermined timing, the main display screen 7a is switched. A zone character rendition is performed. When the zone character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays a zone-indicative character image MZ consisting of a character image MZ1 of "Geki-netsu ZONE" and a character image MZ2 of "blue" over the entire screen. In the character image MZ1, the characters "Gekietsu" are displayed in the upper row and the characters "ZONE" are displayed in the lower row in the same blue color, suggesting that the game is about to enter the Gekietsu ZONE. On the other hand, the character image MZ2 is displayed so that the characters "blue" cover the lower portions (parts) of "O" and "N" of the character image MZ1. That is, the character image MZ2 is superimposed on (in front of) the character image MZ1 and displayed in such a manner that the character image MZ1 can be read. Also, the character image MZ2 is displayed in the same blue color as the character image MZ1 (in the drawing, blue is displayed in a polka dot pattern). That is, the character image MZ2 indicates the color of the character "Gekietsu ZONE" in the character image MZ1 by its own color and the meaning of the kanji. Further, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 are displayed in different display modes. As shown in FIG. 178(C), the character image MZ1 is displayed so as to become larger toward the left and right, in other words, displayed so as to become smaller toward the center. MZ2 is a display mode in which characters are displayed with a uniform thickness, such as Gothic font. That is, the character image MZ1 and the character image MZ2 have different fonts. In addition, as described above, the color of the zone-indicating character image MZ is three colors of red, blue, and white, and the degree of expectation for big win is set as red>blue>white. In other words, the zone character effect shown in FIG. 178(C) is the zone character effect with the second highest expectation for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(D), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the zone-indicative character image MZ shown in FIG. 178(C) is displayed for a predetermined period, the main display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 178(A). It shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-reach effect indicates that the player has entered a hot zone and has become a ready-to-reach zone. In FIG. 178(D), this ready-to-win pattern arrangement shows "8↓8" which is a normal ready-to-win. This is because the zone suggestive character image MZ shown in FIG. 178(C) was displayed in blue. That is, in the reach effect shown in FIG. 178 (D), due to the fact that the blue zone suggestive character image MZ with the second highest expectation for the big hit was displayed by the zone character effect earlier, than the reach of the probability variation pattern "8↓8", which is the reach of normal symbols with a low probability of winning a big hit, was displayed. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Then, in a state in which this reach state is maintained, a zone effect is performed by Gekietsu ZONE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(E), a cut-in effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this cut-in effect, only the upper character MZ1A of "Gekiatsu" of the character images MZ1 of "Gekiatsu ZONE" forming the zone-indicative character image MZ shown in FIG. A cut-in is displayed in Moreover, unlike the blue character image MZ1 shown in FIG. 178(C), the character MZ1A of this "rapid heat" is displayed in red (in the drawing, red is indicated by hatching lines). The cut-in of the red character MZ1A, which is the highest expectation for a big hit, ``great heat'', can make the player feel that the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal reach will develop further. In other words, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(F), a promotion effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After the character MZ1A of "Super Heat" is displayed in the cut-in effect of FIG. 177(E), the effect that raises the player's expectation for the big win is subsequently executed, and at a predetermined timing, the main display screen 7a is switched. Promotion production is executed. When the promotion effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays ``7↓7'', which is the reach of the probability variable symbol with a higher probability of winning a big hit than the reach of ``8↓8'' of the normal symbol. 178(C), the blue zone-indicating character image MZ is displayed, and once the reach "8↓8" of the normal pattern is displayed, the cut-in effect of FIG. 177(E) By displaying the red character MZ1A of "hot heat", the reach was promoted to "7↓7" which is the reach of the variable pattern with a higher probability of winning a big hit than the reach of "8↓8" of the normal pattern.
It should be noted that the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 178(F) is always performed even when the red characters MZ1A of "Super Heat" are displayed in the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 178(E). However, there may be a case where the reach of the normal symbol "8↓8" is maintained with a predetermined probability and the player is not promoted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(G), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. 178(A), the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. In the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 177(E), the characters MZ1A are displayed in red, and after the standard reach is promoted to the probability variable reach in FIG. 177(F), the probability variable hit is shown. . In this example, "777" is shown as the probability variable jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.
It should be noted that the big win finalization effect shown in FIG. 178(G) is always performed even when the characters MZ1A of red "hot heat" are displayed in the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 178(E). Instead, there may be a case where the losing symbol stop effect as shown in FIG. 177(H) is performed with a predetermined probability.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of character rendering is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, a first character image (character image MZ1) and a second character image (character image MZ2) are displayed, and a character image is displayed on the first character image. A character effect image (zone suggestive character image MZ) is displayed by superimposing the second character image. According to this configuration, the player's interest can be drawn to the character effect image in which the second character image is superimposed on the first character image. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, the character effect image (zone-indicating character image MZ) is a first character image (character image MZ1) in a manner in which the first character image (character image MZ1) can be read. A second character image (character image MZ2) is superimposed on the image and displayed. According to this configuration, the character effect image attracts the player's interest and allows the player to grasp the contents of the character effect image. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, the first character image (character image MZ1) in the character effect image (zone-suggesting character image MZ) is information suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. The display suggests a predetermined zone accompanied by a display with a first character (Geki-netsu ZONE) of a predetermined color, and a second character image (character image MZ2) is a second character (red or red) indicating the color of the first character. blue). According to this configuration, the novel image of displaying the second characters specifically indicating the display color of the first characters superimposed on the first characters displayed in a predetermined color provides the player with a character presentation. Images can be strongly appealing. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, in the character effect image (zone-suggesting character image MZ), the first character image (character image MZ1) and the first character (Gekietsu ZONE) The second character image (character image MZ2) is displayed in the same color as the second character (red or blue), but in a different display mode. According to this configuration, the character effect image can be made more conspicuous, and the character effect image can be strongly appealed to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
As shown in FIGS. 176 to 178, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by different colors of character effect images (zone-indicating character images MZ). According to this configuration, the player can easily grasp the degree of expectation for a big win. In particular, in addition to the first character image (character image MZ1), the characters of the second character image (character image MZ2) specifically notify the color of the first character image. Even if there is, it is possible to easily grasp the degree of expectation for a big hit. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 178, when displaying a character effect image (zone-suggesting character image MZ) of a color with the lowest degree of expectation for a big win, the character effect image is changed to the first character image ( It is configured so that it can be displayed only with the character image MZ1). According to this configuration, by displaying a character effect image in a display mode different from usual, the player can easily understand that the character effect image with the lowest degree of expectation for a big win has been performed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the character rendering is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, the character image MZ2 indicates the color of the character "Geki-netsu ZONE" of the character image MZ1 by its own color and the meaning of the kanji. Red" and "blue" are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, "red" may be "red", "scarlet", and "red". Also, "blue" may be "blue" or "indigo." Further, although the character image MZ2 is exemplified as "red", "blue", and "white", "green" may be added to these. In this case, "green" may be "midori" or "midori."

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, the character image MZ1 is displayed so as to increase in size toward the left and right, and the character image MZ2 is displayed with a uniform thickness. Although they are displayed in different display modes, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the character image MZ1 may be displayed in a Mincho font, and the character image MZ2 may be displayed in a Gothic font.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, when reaching reach with variable probability patterns, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when reaching reach with normal patterns. In this case, furthermore, the probability of winning a big hit may differ depending on the type of the reach symbol in the reach of the variable probability symbol. For example, among the odd-numbered ready-to-win symbols, the probability of winning the jackpot may be highest for "7↓7" and second highest for "3↓3".

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, the zone character effect is executed (the character effect image (the zone-suggesting character image MZ) is displayed) during the variation of the decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the zone character effect may be executed immediately before or immediately after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, at the ready-to-win time immediately before or after the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win, or during the ready-to-win.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 178, the character image MZ2 may or may not be displayed in the white zone-indicative character image MZ with the lowest expectation for the big win. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, for the red zone-suggesting character image MZ with the highest jackpot expectation and the blue zone-suggesting character image MZ with the second highest jackpot expectation, the character image MZ2 may or may not be displayed. You may make it so that there is a case. In this case, the degree of expectation for a big win may change depending on whether the character image MZ2 is displayed or not. For example, when the character image MZ2 is displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win may be higher than when the character image MZ2 is not displayed.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, the zone character effect is executed, the hot zone is entered, and a predetermined effect such as the ready-to-win effect is performed in the hot hot zone. However, in this case, in the zone (rapid heat zone) effect, an effect based on the color of the character image MZ1 (“rapid heat zone”) displayed in the zone text effect may be performed. For example, when the character image MZ1 is displayed in red, the subsequent zone effects are based on red.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined character effect image at a predetermined timing,
The display means displays a first character image and a second character image, and displays the character effect image by superimposing the second character image on the first character image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E1-2]
The character effect image is displayed by superimposing the second character image on the first character image in such a manner that the first character image can be read.
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-3]
The first character image is a display that suggests a predetermined zone with display of information suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win with a first character of a predetermined color,
wherein the second character image is a representation of a second character that indicates the color of the first character;
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-4]
The first character and the second character are displayed in the same color and displayed in different display modes,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-5]
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second effect is a effect in which the color of the character effect image is changed and displayed,
The display means suggests the degree of expectation for a big win by the difference in color of the character effect image.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-6]
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined third effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
the third effect is a effect of displaying the character effect image only with the first character image;
The display means can perform the third effect when displaying the character effect image in a color with the lowest degree of expectation for a big win.
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-5, characterized by:

179 to 182, the expected value suggestion effects A to C will be described below. This expected value suggesting effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the expected value suggesting effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Expected value suggestion production A]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the expected value suggestion effect A. FIG. FIGS. 179A to 179J show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the expected value suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 179(A), on the main display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used for the decorative pattern fluctuation production (variation display). is displayed. A pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated. On the right sub-display screen 64R, a count display image KHG representing the number of games (variation count) after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. The number-of-times display image KHG is equal to the number of special symbol lotteries performed after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number display image KHG is a white number image, indicating that "16" games (special symbol lottery) have been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the current variation is the 17th. It suggests.

As shown in FIG. 179(B), when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped in a failing manner, the value of the count display image KHG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is incremented by one. That is, it suggests that the 17th game (special symbol lottery) has ended. Then, as shown in FIG. 179(C), the next variable display is started along with the pending digestion. During this variable display, an effect may be performed in which the mode of the count display image KHG changes at an arbitrary timing, as shown in FIG. 179(D). Here, the number-of-times display image KHG, which was a white numeric image, changes to a red numeric image. This change suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the special symbol lottery has become higher than before the change. It should be noted that the number display image KHG may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win in the special symbol lottery by the type of color that changes. For example, the count display image KHG is set to be changeable to any one of blue, green, red, and a pattern, and the magnitude of the expectation for the big win for the changed color is blue<green<red<pattern. It may be configured as

When the number-of-times display image KHG changes to red, as shown in FIG. 179(E), a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative symbols, and a special ready-to-win effect is executed. On the right sub-display screen 64R, the count display image KHG that has changed to red is continuously displayed. In the special reach effect, as shown in FIG. 179(F), first, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reduced while forming the reach, and are displayed in reduced form on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. Also, the decorative pattern and the pending icon disappear, and the battle effect is executed. In the battle production, an image of a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 179(G), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a jackpot manner. When the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode, the value of the number display image KHG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is incremented by one. That is, it suggests that the 18th game (special symbol lottery) has ended.

After that, a jackpot game is started as shown in FIG. 179(H). During the jackpot game, the number of times display image KHG is continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R with the number of games (here, 18) at the time of winning. When the jackpot game ends and the working hours are reduced, the count display image KHG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is reset to zero, as shown in FIG. 179(I). Then, as shown in FIG. 179(J), the first variable display in the time saving state is started. At this time, the count display image KHG remains zero. That is, "0" games (special symbol lottery) have been completed since the end of the jackpot game, suggesting that the current variation is the first.

[Expected value suggestion production B]
FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining the expected value suggestion effect B. FIG. 180(A) to (J) show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the expected value suggesting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 180(A), on the main display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to perform the decorative design fluctuation production (variation display). is displayed. A pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated. On the right sub-display screen 64R, a number display image KHG representing the number of games (variation number) after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. The number-of-times display image KHG is equal to the number of special symbol lotteries performed after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number display image KHG is a white number image, indicating that "16" games (special symbol lottery) have been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the current variation is the 17th. It suggests. On the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, an image SL and an image SR showing a smiling person's face are displayed. Since the image SR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the image SL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L are the same image, they correspond to each other. Both the image SR and the image SL are changed so as to represent a state in which the face of a smiling person is rotated to the left or right.

As shown in FIG. 180(B), when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped in a lost state, the value of the count display image KHG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is incremented by one. That is, it suggests that the 17th game (special symbol lottery) has ended. Then, as shown in FIG. 180(C), the next variable display is started along with the pending digestion. During this variable display, as shown in FIG. 180(D), there is a case where a change stop effect is performed in which the change of the entire image displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is stopped. Here, the image SL showing a state in which the face of a smiling person is rotated left and right is frozen and displayed in a state where the rotation is stopped. This change stop effect suggests that the expectation of the big hit in the special symbol lottery is higher than before the change stop. The image SR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is continuously changing so as to represent the state in which the face of the smiling person is rotated left and right.

When the change stop effect of the left sub-display screen 64L is executed, as shown in FIG. 180(E), on the main display screen 7a, a reach with decorative symbols is formed and a special reach effect is executed. The change stop effect is continuously displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In the special reach effect, as shown in FIG. 180(F), first, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reduced while forming the reach, and are displayed in reduced form on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. Also, the decorative pattern and the pending icon disappear, and the battle effect is executed. In the battle production, an image of a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 180(G), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a jackpot mode. When the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode, the value of the number display image KHG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is incremented by one. That is, it suggests that the 18th game (special symbol lottery) has ended.

After that, a jackpot game is started as shown in FIG. 180(H). When the jackpot game is started, the change stop effect of the left sub-display screen 64L ends. Here, the image SL is frozen, and the image SL, which had been in a state where rotation has been stopped, changes again to represent a state in which the face of the smiling person is rotated left and right. The image SR displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is continuously changing so as to represent the state in which the face of the smiling person is rotated left and right. During the jackpot game, the number of times display image KHG is continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R with the number of games (here, 18) at the time of winning. When the jackpot game ends and the working hours are reduced, the count display image KHG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is reset to zero, as shown in FIG. 180(I). Then, as shown in FIG. 180(J), the first variable display in the time saving state is started. At this time, the count display image KHG remains zero. That is, "0" games (special symbol lottery) have been completed since the end of the jackpot game, suggesting that the current variation is the first.

[Expected value suggestion production C]
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining the expected value suggestion effect C. FIG. 181(A) to (J) show the contents displayed on the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In the expected value suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 181(A), on the main display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to perform the decorative design fluctuation production (variation display). is displayed. A pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the main display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. Here, the state where the special figure 1 reservation number is 4 is illustrated. On the right sub-display screen 64R, a number display image KHG representing the number of games (variation number) after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. The number-of-times display image KHG is equal to the number of special symbol lotteries performed after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number display image KHG is a white number image, indicating that "16" games (special symbol lottery) have been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the current variation is the 17th. It suggests. A select image KEY is also displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R adjacent to the number of times display image KHG. The select image KEY is an image representing the appearance of the select button 68, and suggests that the volume setting and effect setting of the gaming machine 1 can be performed here. An image SL showing a smiling face is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The image SL is changed so as to represent a state in which the face of a smiling person is rotated left and right.

As shown in FIG. 181(B), when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped in a lost state, the value of the count display image KHG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is incremented by one. That is, it suggests that the 17th game (special symbol lottery) has ended. Then, as shown in FIG. 181(C), the next variable display is started along with the pending digestion. During this variable display, an effect may be performed in which the state of the count display image KHG changes at an arbitrary timing, as shown in FIG. 181(D). Here, the number-of-times display image KHG, which was a white numeric image, changes to a red numeric image. This change suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the special symbol lottery has become higher than before the change. It should be noted that the number display image KHG may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for the big win in the special symbol lottery by the type of color that changes. For example, the count display image KHG is set to be changeable to any one of blue, green, red, and a pattern, and the magnitude of the expectation for the big win for the changed color is blue<green<red<pattern. It may be configured as The image SL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is continuously changing so as to represent the state in which the face of a smiling person is rotated left and right.

When the number display image KHG changes to red, as shown in FIG. 181(E), a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative symbols, and a special ready-to-win effect is executed. On the right sub-display screen 64R, the count display image KHG that has changed to red is continuously displayed. In the special reach effect, as shown in FIG. 181(F), first, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reduced while forming the reach, and are displayed in reduced form on the upper left and upper right of the main display screen 7a. Also, the decorative pattern and the pending icon disappear, and the battle effect is executed. In the battle production, an image of a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. A button image BTN and an operation prompting image RND are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed so as to be switchable between a state in which the button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. The operation prompting image RND is a character image of "Press" and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation). Here, an operation effective period suggestion image TBI, which is a timer bar indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the effect button 63, may be displayed. When the performance button 63 is operated, a battle performance result is displayed. When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 181(G), the decorative symbols are determined and stopped in a jackpot manner. When the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a jackpot manner, the value of the number display image KHG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is incremented by one. That is, it suggests that the 18th game (special symbol lottery) has ended. The select image KEY is redisplayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. The image SL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is continuously changing so as to represent a state in which the face of a smiling person is rotated left and right.

After that, a jackpot game is started as shown in FIG. 181(H). During the jackpot game, the number of times display image KHG is continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R with the number of games (here, 18) at the time of winning. When the jackpot game ends and the working hours are reduced, the count display image KHG displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R is reset to zero, as shown in FIG. 181(I). Then, as shown in FIG. 181(J), the first variable display in the time saving state is started. At this time, the count display image KHG remains zero. That is, "0" games (special symbol lottery) have been completed since the end of the jackpot game, suggesting that the current variation is the first. The image SL displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L is continuously changing so as to represent a state in which the face of a smiling person is rotated left and right.

FIG. 182 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a modified example of how the count display image KHG changes. The frequency display image KHG indicated by the expected value suggestion effects A to C described above may be modified as follows. FIG. 182(A) exemplifies the number display image KHG at normal time. Here, it is a white numeric image. As shown in FIG. 182(B), the number display image KHG may suggest that the expectation of a big win is high by changing the character style (font). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 182(C), the number-of-times display image KHG may be changed to Chinese characters to indicate that the expectation of a big win is high. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 182(D), the change in the display position of the number display image KHG (for example, displayed upward) may suggest that the expectation of a big win is high. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 182(E), the angle of the number display image KHG changes (for example, tilts) to suggest that the expectation of a big win is high. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 182(F), a change in the size of the number display image KHG (for example, a decrease in size) may indicate that the expectation of a big win is high. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 182(G), the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by changing (for example, becoming lighter) the density of the number display image KHG. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 182(H), a change in the lighting mode of the number display image KHG (for example, blinking, an effect image EF appears) may suggest that the expectation of a big win is high. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 182(I), the number-of-times display image KHG is displayed on the other screen of the sub-display screens 64 (for example, displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L) to increase the expectation of the big win. May suggest higher. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 182(J), the disappearance of the number display image KHG may indicate that the expectation of a big win is high.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the expected value suggesting effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181, and 182, the number display image KHG indicating the number of special symbol lotteries executed after a specific timing allows A first effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
As shown in FIGS. 179, 181 and 182, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a main display screen 7a and sub-display screens 64 adjacent to the main display screen 7a (a right sub-display screen 64R and a left sub-display screen 64L). ), and the number display image KHG is displayed on the sub-display screen 64 in the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181, and 182, in the first effect, the degree of expectation for winning is suggested by changing the color of the number display image KHG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 180, by stopping the change of the entire image displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (the left sub-display screen 64L), the second effect suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed. can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179-182. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, the sub-display screen 64 includes a right sub-display screen 64R and a left sub-display screen 64L. It is executed using the display screen 64R, and the second effect is executed using the left sub-display screen 64L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the expected value suggestion effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
179, 181, and 182, the number-of-times display image KHG is configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win in the special symbol lottery by the type of color that changes. may Further, the number display image KHG may change in shape, and may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win in the special symbol lottery depending on the type of changed shape.

[Modification 2]
179, 181, and 182, the number-of-times display image KHG suggests the degree of expectation for a big win in the special symbol lottery by changing the mode. However, you may suggest the magnitude|size of the expectation degree of a small hit, and you may suggest that a ready-to-win production will be performed. In addition, it is not limited to suggesting the degree of expectation of the change, and the degree of expectation after the change may be suggested as a look-ahead effect.

[Modification 3]
179, 181, and 182, the number-of-times display image KHG is displayed on any of the main display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. good. In the expected value suggesting effect B of FIG. 180, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation by stopping the change of the entire image of the sub-display screen 64 (change stop effect) is the right sub-display in which the number of times display image KHG is displayed. It may be executed on the screen 64R, or it may be executed on the left sub-display screen 64L on which the count display image KHG is not displayed. In addition, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win in the special symbol lottery by changing the mode of the number display image KHG, and an effect suggesting the degree of expectation by stopping the change of the entire image of the sub display screen 64 ( change stop effect) may be executed at the same time in the same one change.

[Modification 4]
Expected value suggestion effects A to C in FIGS. 179 to 182 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the expected value suggesting effect A of FIG. 179, a effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win in the special symbol lottery by changing the aspect of the number display image KHG, and in the expected value suggesting effect B of FIG. By stopping the change of the entire image of the screen 64, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation (change stop effect) may be simultaneously executed in the same one variation.

[Modification 5]
The expected value suggestion effects A to C in FIGS. 179 to 182 may not include some of the described effects, or may include other effects.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a number display image that suggests the number of special symbol lotteries executed after a specific timing,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a first effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning in a special symbol lottery according to the aspect of the number display image.
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
The display means includes main display means and sub-display means adjacent to the main display means,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the number display image is displayed on the sub-display means.
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the degree of expectation for winning is suggested by changing the color of the number display image.
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that a second effect suggesting the degree of expectation can be executed by stopping the change of the entire image displayed on the sub-display means.
◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-4,
The sub-display means includes first sub-display means and second sub-display means,
The first effect is executed using the first sub-display means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect is executed using the second sub-display means.
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5, further comprising:
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the count display image is displayed in proximity to the operation means image.

183 to 186, the expectation-suggesting character presentation will be described below. This expectation-suggestion character effect can be executed in relation to the variable display of the decorative design synchronized with the variation of the first special design or the second special design (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special design"). For example, it can be executed at the start of the variation production of decorative symbols, during variation, at the time of reach, during reach production (super reach production), and the like.

[Expectation Suggestion Character Effect A]
FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining the degree-of-expectation-suggesting character effect A. FIG.
In the degree-of-expectation-indicating character effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 183(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 183(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(B), a fan effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This fanning effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 183(A), and the main display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the main display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This character image "Chance!" can make the player feel that the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will become ready-to-win. In other words, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(C), an expectation-suggestion character effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After the character image "Chance!" is displayed in the stimulating effect of FIG. 183(B), the effect of stirring up the player's expectations for the big win is subsequently executed, and at a predetermined timing, the main display screen 7a is switched. An expectation-suggestion character presentation is executed. When the expectation-suggesting character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays the shoji-like left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2, the characters MG of "strong" and the characters MA of "heat". The left shoji body K1 and the characters MG are always overlapped as one set to display the left display body LH. The right shoji body K2 and the character MA always overlap as one set to display the right display body RH. When the expectation-suggesting character effect is executed, the left display body LH moves to the right on the screen, the right display body RH moves to the left on the screen, and then the screen moves as if a shoji is closed. The left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other at the center, thereby forming the completed display body CH, and the completed display body CH is displayed on the full screen as shown in FIG. 183(C). Then, in the state where the completed display body CH is displayed, the characters of the idiom "Geketsu" are displayed overlapping the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2. In other words, when the left display body LH and the right display body RH are separated from each other, the left display body K1 and the character MG of "strong", which is a part of the characters of the idiom, are displayed on the left display body LH so as to overlap each other. On the right display body RH, the right shoji body K2 and the character MA of "heat", which is a part of the characters of the idiom, are superimposed and displayed, and the left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other to complete the display. In the state in which the body CH is displayed, characters of the idiom "Gekiketsu" are displayed on the completed display body CH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(D), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the completed display object CH shown in FIG. It shows how the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-win effect indicates that the ready-to-win state has been achieved by executing the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 183(C). Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Furthermore, in this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to be higher when reaching reach with the variable probability pattern than when reaching reach with the normal pattern. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols. In addition, in this FIG. 183(D), "8↓8" which is normal reach is shown in this reach pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this big hit confirmation production, the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. , FIG. 183(D) shows that a normal jackpot is won after the normal reach. In this example, "888" is shown as the normal jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. A player is usually convinced of a big win by this big win confirmation effect.
It should be noted that the big hit confirmation effect shown in FIG. 183(E) is not always performed even when the completion display body CH is displayed in the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 183(C). There may be a case where a losing symbol stop effect as shown in FIG. 183(H) described later is performed with a predetermined probability.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 183(C), the main display screen 7a may execute an expectation level suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 183(F). When this expectation suggesting character effect is executed, the left display body LH moves to the right on the screen and the right display body RH moves to the left on the screen in the same manner as the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 183(C). However, the left display body LH and the right display body RH do not come into contact with each other, and the left display body LH and the right display body RH are separated and stopped in a state as if a shoji is half-open. Therefore, in the expectation level suggesting character presentation shown in FIG. 183(F), the completion display body CH is not displayed like the expectation level suggesting character presentation shown in FIG. The characters MG of "Geki" and the characters MA of "Heat" are displayed in a separated state. In other words, in the expectation-suggesting character presentation shown in FIG. 183(F), the characters of the idiom "Geki-netsu" are difficult to read.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(G), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation effect is performed by switching the main display screen 7a again after the left display body LH and the right display body RH which are separated and stopped as shown in FIG. 183(F) are displayed for a predetermined period. The decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 183(G) is performed in the same manner as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 183(A) described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(H), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. 183(A), the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. After the production, it shows that it was lost without becoming a reach. In this example, "858" is shown as the lost pattern array.
It should be noted that the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 183(H) is always performed even if the completed display body CH is not displayed in the expectation suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 183(F). Instead, there may be a case where a big hit confirmation effect as shown in FIG. 183(E) is performed with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the expectation level suggesting character effect A shown in FIG. 183, the left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other to complete the display body CH as in the expectation level suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 183(C). When is displayed, it usually becomes a big hit after the normal reach, and like the expectation degree suggesting character production shown in FIG. When CH is not displayed, it will be lost without becoming a reach. That is, when the completion display body CH is displayed and when it is not displayed in the expectation level suggestive character effect, the benefits that are given after that are different (differences in whether or not reach, difference in reach type ( Variable reach and normal reach), differences in the types of jackpots (variable jackpots and normal jackpots), differences in whether or not to hit, etc.). Then, when the completed display body CH is displayed by the character presentation suggesting the degree of expectation, the probability that an advantageous privilege is given is higher than when the completed display body CH is not displayed.

[Expectation Suggestion Character Effect B]
FIG. 184 is a diagram for explaining the degree-of-expectation-suggesting character effect B. FIG.
In the degree-of-expectation-indicating character effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 184(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 184(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(B), a fan effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This fanning effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 184(A), and the main display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the main display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This character image "Chance!" can make the player feel that the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will become ready-to-win. In other words, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(C), an expectation-suggesting character effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After the character image "Chance!" is displayed in the stimulating effect of FIG. 184(B), the effect of stirring up the player's expectations for the big win is subsequently executed, and at a predetermined timing, the main display screen 7a is switched. An expectation-suggestion character presentation is executed. When the expectation-suggesting character presentation is executed, the main display screen 7a displays the shoji-like left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2, and a single character HA (hereinafter referred to as the partial character HA). HA) and a single character part HB (hereinafter also referred to as part character HB) of "heat", and a left semicircle RA and a right semicircle RB are displayed. The left shoji body K1, the partial character HA, and the left semicircle RA are always superimposed as one set to display the left display body LH. The right shoji body K2, the partial character HB, and the right semicircle RB are always superimposed as one set to display the right display body RH. When the expectation-suggesting character effect is executed, the left display body LH moves to the right on the screen, the right display body RH moves to the left on the screen, and then the screen moves as if a shoji is closed. The left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other at the center, thereby forming the completed display body CH, and the completed display body CH is displayed on the full screen as shown in FIG. 183(C). In the state where the completed display body CH is displayed, a circle formed by the left semicircle RA and the right semicircle RB overlapping the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2, and a part of the circle A single character "heat" formed by the characters HA and part of the characters HB is displayed. That is, when the left display body LH and the right display body RH are separated from each other, the left display body LH displays the left shoji body K1 in which the characters HA and the left semicircle RA are partially overlapped, and the right display body RH is displayed. , a part of the characters HB and the right semicircle RB are overlapped on the right shoji K2, and in a state in which the left display LH and the right display RH are in contact with each other to display the completed display CH, the completed display CH is designed to display a single letter "heat" in a circle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(D), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the completed display body CH shown in FIG. It shows how the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-win effect indicates that the ready-to-win state has been achieved by executing the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 184(C). Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Furthermore, in this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to be higher when reaching a reach with a variable probability pattern than when reaching a reach with a normal pattern. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols. In addition, in this FIG. 184(D), "7↓7" which is probability variable reach is shown for this reach pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(E), the big win confirmation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this big hit confirmation production, the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. , FIG. 184(D) shows that the probability variable jackpot was hit after becoming the probability variable reach. In this example, "777" is shown as the probability variable jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.
It should be noted that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 184(E) is not always performed even when the completion display body CH is displayed in the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 184(C). There may be a case where a losing symbol stop effect as shown in FIG. 184(H) described later is performed with a predetermined probability.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 184(C), the main display screen 7a may execute an expectation level suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 184(F). When this expectation suggesting character effect is executed, the left display body LH moves rightward on the screen, and the right display body RH moves leftward on the screen in the same manner as the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 184(C). However, the left display body LH and the right display body RH do not come into contact with each other, and the left display body LH and the right display body RH are separated and stopped in a state as if a shoji screen is half-opened. Therefore, in the expectation-suggesting character presentation shown in FIG. 184(F), the completion display body CH is not displayed like the expectation-suggesting character presentation shown in FIG. A portion HA and a portion HB of the single character "Heat", and the left semicircle RA and the right semicircle RB are displayed in a spaced apart state. That is, in the expectation-suggesting character presentation shown in FIG. 184(F), the single character "heat" is difficult to read.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(G), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the left display body LH and the right display body RH which are separated and stopped as shown in FIG. The decorative design variation effect shown is displayed, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-win effect indicates that the ready-to-win state has been achieved by executing the expectation-suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 184(F). The reach production shown in FIG. 184 (G) is performed in the same manner as the reach production shown in FIG. 184 (D), but unlike the probability variable reach shown in FIG. be. In addition, in this FIG. 184(G), "8↓8" is shown as this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(H), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. 184(A), the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. After performing the effect, FIG. 184(G) shows that the player loses after switching to normal reach. In this example, "858" is shown as the lost pattern array.
It should be noted that the failing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 184(H) is always performed even if the completed display object CH is not displayed in the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 184(F). Instead, there may be a case where a big hit confirmation effect as shown in FIG. 184(E) is performed with a predetermined probability.

In other words, in the expectation suggesting character presentation B shown in FIG. 184, the left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other like the expectation suggestion letter presentation shown in FIG. When is displayed, it becomes a probability variable jackpot after the probability variable reach, and like the expectation degree suggestive character production shown in FIG. When CH is not displayed, it is usually lost after reach. That is, when the completion display body CH is displayed and when it is not displayed in the expectation level suggestive character effect, the benefits that are given after that are different (differences in whether or not reach is achieved, differences in reach types ( Variable reach and normal reach), differences in the types of jackpots (variable jackpots and normal jackpots), differences in whether or not to hit, etc.). When the completed display body CH is displayed by the character presentation suggesting the degree of expectation, the probability that an advantageous privilege is given is higher than when the completed display body CH is not displayed.

[Expectation Suggestion Character Effect C]
FIG. 185 is a diagram for explaining the degree-of-expectation-suggesting character effect C. FIG.
In the degree-of-expectation-indicating character effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 185(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 185(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(B), a fan effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This fanning effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 185(A), and the main display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the main display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This character image "Chance!" can make the player feel that the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will become ready-to-win. In other words, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(C), the expectation-suggesting character effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After the character image "Chance!" is displayed in the stimulating effect of FIG. 185(B), the effect of stirring up the player's expectations for the big win is subsequently executed, and at a predetermined timing, the main display screen 7a is switched. An expectation-suggestion character presentation is executed. When the expectation-suggesting character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays the shoji-like left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2, the characters MG of "strong" and the characters MA of "heat". The left shoji body K1 and the characters MG are always overlapped as one set to display the left display body LH. The right shoji body K2 and the character MA always overlap as one set to display the right display body RH. When the expectation-suggesting character effect is executed, the left display body LH moves to the right on the screen, the right display body RH moves to the left on the screen, and then the screen moves as if a shoji is closed. The left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other at the center, thereby forming the completed display body CH, and the completed display body CH is displayed on the full screen as shown in FIG. 185(C). Then, in the state where the completed display body CH is displayed, the characters of the idiom "Geketsu" are displayed overlapping the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2. In other words, when the left display body LH and the right display body RH are separated from each other, the left display body K1 and the character MG of "strong", which is a part of the characters of the idiom, are displayed on the left display body LH so as to overlap each other. On the right display body RH, the right shoji body K2 and the character MA of "heat", which is a part of the characters of the idiom, are superimposed and displayed, and the left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other to complete the display. In the state in which the body CH is displayed, characters of the idiom "Gekiketsu" are displayed on the completed display body CH.
Here, on the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2, a grid-like left grid U1 and right grid U2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 185(C). In the left display body LH in which the left shoji body K1 and the characters MG overlap and are displayed, most of the portion of the left lattice U1 overlapping the characters MG can be visually recognized. Similarly, in the right display body RH in which the right shoji body K2 and the letters MA overlap and are displayed, most of the portion of the right lattice U2 that overlaps with the letters MA can be visually recognized. That is, in the completed display body CH, as shown in FIG. 185(C), the grid-like display (the left grid U1 and the right grid U2) has a highly visible display mode. In other words, in the completed display body CH, the visibility of the character display (“Gekiketsu”) is low.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(D), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the completed display body CH shown in FIG. It shows how the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-win effect indicates that the ready-to-win state has been achieved by executing the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 185(C). Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Furthermore, in this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to be higher when reaching reach with the variable probability pattern than when reaching reach with the normal pattern. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols. In addition, in this FIG. 185(D), "8↓8" which is normal reach is shown in this reach pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this big hit confirmation effect, the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. , FIG. 185(D) shows that a normal jackpot is won after the normal reach. In this example, "888" is shown as the normal jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. A player is usually convinced of a big win by this big win confirmation effect.
It should be noted that the big hit confirmation effect shown in FIG. 185(E) is not always performed even when the completion display body CH is displayed in the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 185(C). There may be a case where the lost symbol stop effect as shown in FIG. 184(H) described above is performed with a predetermined probability.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 185(C), the main display screen 7a may execute an expectation level suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 185(F). When this expectation suggesting character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays the shoji-like left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2, and a portion of the single character "Netsu" HA (hereinafter referred to as "partial"). A partial character HB (hereinafter also referred to as a partial character HB) of a single character "Heat" and a left semicircle RA and a right semicircle RB are displayed. The left shoji body K1, the partial character HA, and the left semicircle RA are always superimposed as one set to display the left display body LH. The right shoji body K2, the partial character HB, and the right semicircle RB are always superimposed as one set to display the right display body RH. When the expectation-suggesting character effect is executed, the left display body LH moves to the right on the screen, the right display body RH moves to the left on the screen, and then the screen moves as if a shoji is closed. The left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other at the center, thereby forming the completed display body CH, and the completed display body CH is displayed on the full screen as shown in FIG. 185(F). In the state where the completed display body CH is displayed, a circle formed by the left semicircle RA and the right semicircle RB overlapping the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2, and a part of the circle A single character "heat" formed by the characters HA and part of the characters HB is displayed. That is, when the left display body LH and the right display body RH are separated from each other, the left display body LH displays the left shoji body K1 in which the characters HA and the left semicircle RA are partially overlapped, and the right display body RH is displayed. , a part of the characters HB and the right semicircle RB are overlapped on the right shoji K2, and in a state in which the left display LH and the right display RH are in contact with each other to display the completed display CH, the completed display CH is designed to display a single letter "heat" in a circle.
Here, on the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2, a grid-like left lattice U1 and a right lattice U2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 185(F). In the left display body LH in which the characters HA and the left semicircle RA are partially overlapped on the left shoji body K1, the portion of the left lattice U1 that partially overlaps the characters HA and the left semicircle RA cannot be visually recognized at all. It's like Similarly, in the right display body RH in which the characters HB and the right semicircle RB are partially overlapped on the right shoji body K2, the part of the right lattice U2 that partially overlaps the characters HB and the right semicircle RB is completely visible. It is not possible. That is, in the completed display body CH, as shown in FIG. 185(F), the visibility of the grid-like display (the left grid U1 and the right grid U2) is low. In other words, in the completed display body CH, the character display (“Heat”) has a highly visible display mode. That is, the completed display body CH shown in FIG. 185(F) has a grid-like display (left grid U1 and right grid U2) with lower visibility than the completed display body CH shown in FIG. 185(C). It's becoming In other words, the completed display body CH shown in FIG. 185(F) has a display mode in which the visibility of the display of characters is higher than that of the completed display body CH shown in FIG. 185(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(G), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the completed display object CH shown in FIG. It shows how the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-win effect indicates that the ready-to-win state has been achieved by executing the expectation-suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 185(F). The reach production shown in FIG. 185 (G) is performed in the same manner as the reach production shown in FIG. 185 (D), but unlike the normal reach shown in FIG. 185 (D), variable reach is displayed here. be. In addition, in this FIG. 185(G), "7↓7" is shown as this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(H), the big win confirmation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this big hit confirmation production, the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. , FIG. 185(D) shows that the probability variable jackpot was hit after becoming the probability variable reach. In this example, "777" is shown as the probability variable jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the probability variable big win by this big win confirmation performance.
It should be noted that the big hit confirmation effect shown in FIG. 185(H) is not always performed even when the completion display body CH is displayed with the character effect suggesting the degree of expectation shown in FIG. 185(F). There may be a case where the losing symbol stop effect as shown in FIG. 184(H) described above is performed with a predetermined probability.

In other words, in the expectation-suggesting character presentation C shown in FIG. 185, like the expectation-suggesting character presentation shown in FIG. ) is in a highly visible display mode, it usually becomes a big hit after reaching the normal reach, and like the character effect suggesting the degree of expectation shown in FIG. When the visibility of the left lattice U1 and right lattice U2) is in a display mode with low visibility, the probability variable jackpot is obtained after the probability variable reach. That is, in the expectation degree suggesting character presentation, when the completed display body CH with the grid-shaped display with low visibility is displayed and when the completed display body CH with the grid-shaped display with high visibility is displayed, The benefits that are granted after that are different (differences in whether or not it will be a reach, differences in the type of reach (variable reach and normal reach), differences in the type of jackpot (variable jackpot and normal jackpot), whether it will be a hit or not differences, etc.). When the completed display body CH with the grid-shaped display with low visibility is displayed in the expectation degree suggesting character presentation, it is more advantageous than when the completed display body CH with the grid-shaped display with high visibility is displayed. There is a high probability that you will be awarded a prize.
[Expectation Suggestion Character Effect D]
FIG. 186 is a diagram for explaining the degree-of-expectation-suggesting character effect D. FIG.
In the degree-of-expectation character effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 186(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the main display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 186(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(B), a fan effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. This fanning effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 186(A), and the main display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the main display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This character image "Chance!" can make the player feel that the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will become ready-to-win. In other words, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(C), an expectation-suggestion character effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. After the character image "Chance!" is displayed in the stimulating effect of FIG. 186(B), the effect of stirring up the player's expectation for the big win is subsequently executed, and at a predetermined timing, the main display screen 7a is switched. An expectation-suggestion character presentation is executed. When the expectation-suggesting character effect is executed, the main display screen 7a displays the shoji-like left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2, the characters MG of "strong" and the characters MA of "heat". The left shoji body K1 and the characters MG are always overlapped as one set to display the left display body LH. The right shoji body K2 and the character MA always overlap as one set to display the right display body RH. When the expectation-suggesting character effect is executed, the left display body LH moves to the right on the screen, the right display body RH moves to the left on the screen, and then the screen moves as if a shoji is closed. The left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other at the center, thereby forming the completed display body CH, and the completed display body CH is displayed on the full screen as shown in FIG. 186(C). Then, in the state where the completed display body CH is displayed, the characters of the idiom "Geketsu" are displayed overlapping the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2. In other words, when the left display body LH and the right display body RH are separated from each other, the left display body K1 and the character MG of "strong", which is a part of the characters of the idiom, are displayed on the left display body LH so as to overlap each other. On the right display body RH, the right shoji body K2 and the character MA of "heat", which is a part of the characters of the idiom, are superimposed and displayed, and the left display body LH and the right display body RH are brought into contact with each other to complete the display. In the state in which the body CH is displayed, characters of the idiom "Gekiketsu" are displayed on the completed display body CH. In addition, in the expectation level suggestion character presentation shown in FIG. 186(C), the left shoji S1 and the right shoji S2 as shoji-like displays in the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2 are displayed in blue. (in the figure, blue is indicated by polka dots).

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(D), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the blue shoji completed display body CH shown in FIG. It shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In other words, this ready-to-win effect indicates that ready-to-win has been achieved by executing the expectation level suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 186(C). Here, in this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. In other words, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are variable jackpots, and the jackpot pattern arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal jackpots. , and odd-numbered reach symbol arrays have higher expectations than even-numbered reach symbol arrays. Furthermore, in this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to be higher when reaching reach with the variable probability pattern than when reaching reach with the normal pattern. In other words, in the case of reach loss, the probability of reaching reach with normal symbols is set higher than the probability of reaching reach with probability variable symbols. In addition, in this FIG. 186(D), "8↓8" which is normal reach is shown in this reach pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(E), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this losing pattern stop effect, the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. After the display of CH, FIG. 186(D) shows that after the normal reach is reached, the player loses. In this example, "858" is shown as the lost pattern array.
It should be noted that the failing pattern stop effect shown in FIG. 186(E) is always performed even when the completion indicator CH of the blue shoji screen is not displayed in the expectation suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 186(C). There may be a case where a big win confirmation effect as shown in FIG. 186(H) described later is performed with a predetermined probability.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 186(C), the main display screen 7a may execute an expectation level suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 186(F). When this expectation suggesting character effect is executed, the left display body LH moves rightward on the screen, and the right display body RH moves leftward on the screen in the same manner as the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 186(C). , the left display body LH and the right display body RH come into contact with each other at the center of the screen, thereby forming the completed display body CH, and the completed display body CH fills the screen as shown in FIG. 186(F). to display. Then, in the state where the completed display body CH is displayed, the characters of the idiom "Geketsu" are displayed overlapping the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2. However, in the expectation-suggestion character presentation shown in FIG. 186(F), left shoji S1 and right shoji S2 as shoji-like displays in left shoji body K1 and right shoji body K2 are shown in FIG. 186(C). It is displayed in red, which is different from blue (in the figure, red is indicated by hatching lines).

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(G), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the completed display body CH of the red shoji screen shown in FIG. It shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. That is, this ready-to-win effect indicates that the ready-to-win state has been achieved by executing the expectation degree suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 186(F). The ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 186(G) is performed in the same way as the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(H), the big win confirmation effect is executed on the main display screen 7a. In this big hit confirmation effect, the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. , and FIG. 186(G) shows that a normal jackpot is won after the normal reach. In this example, "888" is shown as the normal jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. A player is usually convinced of a big win by this big win confirmation effect.
It should be noted that the big hit confirmation effect shown in FIG. 186(H) is always performed even when the completion indicator CH of the red shoji screen is displayed in the expectation-suggesting character effect shown in FIG. 186(F). However, there may be a case where the lost symbol stop effect as shown in FIG. 186(E) described above is performed with a predetermined probability.

In other words, in the expectation level suggesting character presentation D shown in FIG. 186, like the expectation level suggesting character presentation shown in FIG. When the display (left shoji S1 and right shoji S2) is blue, it usually loses after reach, and like the expected degree suggestive character production shown in FIG. When the shoji-like displays (left shoji S1 and right shoji S2) on the display body LH and the right display body RH are red, the jackpot is usually won after the normal reach. That is, in the expectation degree suggesting character presentation, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the difference in color between the left display body LH and the right display body RH. In this example, the left display body LH and the right display body RH are rendered with a higher expectation for a big win in red than in blue.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the expectation-suggesting character presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. HB, left semicircle RA, right semicircle RB) are superimposed to display the third image (left display body LH, right display body RH, complete display body CH), and the third image is displayed. In this case, a first display mode in which the visibility of the first image is high and a second display mode in which the visibility of the first image is lower than that of the first display mode are performed, and when the first display mode is performed; , the privilege given after the second display mode may be different. According to this configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the visibility of the first image. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 to 186, when the second display mode is performed, there is a probability that a more advantageous benefit is granted than when the first display mode is performed. It is highly configured. According to this configuration, the player's attention is drawn to the visibility of the first image, and when the first image is displayed in the second display mode whose visibility is lower than that in the first display mode, the player is greatly impressed. You can go into the game with anticipation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, the third image (completed display body CH) is divided into the 3A image (left display body LH) and the 3B image (right display body RH). The third image is formed and displayed by moving the 3A image and the 3B image, which are separated from each other on the screen, and bringing the 3A image and the 3B image into contact with each other. It is configured to When the third image is formed by contacting the 3A image and the 3B image, it is more advantageous than when the 3A image and the 3B image are not contacted and the third image is not formed. There is a high probability that special benefits will be granted. According to this configuration, when the third image is formed, the player can face the game with high expectations. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 183, the second images (characters MG and MA) include at least display related to predetermined characters, and the 3A image (left display body LH) and the 3B image. When the image (right display body RH) is separated from the 3A image and the 3B image, part of the idiom character (“Gekatsu”) (“Geki”, “Hetsu”) is displayed. When the 3A image and the 3B image are brought into contact with each other to form and display the 3rd image, the idiom characters are displayed in the 3rd image. According to this configuration, when the third image is formed and the idiom characters are displayed, the player can face the game with high expectations. In addition, the display of the idiom characters suggests the formation of the third image, and the player can easily grasp that the third image has been formed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184, the second image (partial characters HA, partial characters HB, left semicircle RA, right semicircle RB) displays at least predetermined characters. When the 3A image (left display body LH) and the 3B image (right display body RH) are separated from each other, the 3A image and the 3B image include part of a single character (part When the 3A image and the 3B image are brought into contact with each other to form and display the 3rd image, the 3rd image has a single character ("Heat"). configured to be displayed. According to this configuration, when the third image is formed and a single character is displayed, the player can face the game with high expectations. In addition, the display of a single character suggests the formation of the third image, and the player can easily understand that the third image has been formed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 185, the first image (left shoji body K1, right shoji body K2) includes at least grid-like displays (left grid U1, right grid U2). The two images (character MG, character MA, partial character HA, partial character HB, left semicircle RA, right semicircle RB) include at least predetermined characters, and the third image (left display LH, The right display RH and the completed display CH) include at least a display in which a lattice-like display and characters are superimposed, and the visibility of the first image in the third image is such that the characters overlapped with the characters displayed as the second image. It has a configuration that is visibility of the grid-like display of the part. According to this configuration, the grid-like display of the portion overlapping the characters is a display that is easy to see, and the player can easily determine the visibility of the first image. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 186, the first images (the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2) are provided in a plurality of colors, and the difference in the colors of the first images suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. It is configured to According to this configuration, the player's attention can be attracted to the first image, and when the first image in a color with high expectation for a big win is displayed, the player can face the game with high expectations. can. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the expectation-suggesting character presentation is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 to 186, the left display body LH and the right display body RH move on the main display screen 7a, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing For example, the left display LH may move over the left sub-display screen 64L and the main display screen 7a, and the right display RH may move over the right sub-display screen 64R and the main display screen 7a. can be

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 to 186, the first image (left shoji body K1, right shoji body K2) and the second image (characters MG, characters MA, some characters HA, Partial characters HB, left semicircle RA, right semicircle RB) are superimposed to display the third image (left display body LH, right display body RH, complete display body CH), the visibility of the first image However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the third image is displayed, the privilege given thereafter may differ depending on the visibility of the second image.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 to 186, the characters of the second image (characters MG, characters MA, partial characters HA, partial characters HB) are “extreme heat”, “heat , but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the characters in the second image may be characters such as "probability variation" and "probability", which suggest benefits to be given later. Note that the idiom ``definite change'' may be a single character ``definite'', and the idiom ``totsu definite'' may be a single character ``tsu''. Alternatively, the second image may be a pattern, a symbol, a character, or the like instead of characters.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 186, the first images (the left shoji body K1 and the right shoji body K2) are provided in a plurality of colors, and the difference in the colors of the first images suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, second images (characters MG, characters MA, partial characters HA, partial characters HB, left semicircle RA, right semicircle RB) are provided in a plurality of colors, and the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the difference in color of the second image. You may make it

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 185, the first image (left shoji body K1, right shoji body K2) includes grid-like displays (left grid U1, right grid U2), and the third image The visibility of the first image in is the visibility of the grid-like display of the portion superimposed on the characters displayed as the second image, but this includes the predetermined display other than the grid-like display in the first image. Alternatively, the visibility of the first image may be the visibility of a predetermined display of the portion overlapping the characters displayed as the second image. However, it is preferable that the predetermined display has a display mode in which the characters are easy to read when overlapping.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 to 186, the first image (left shoji body K1, right shoji body K2) and the second image (characters MG, characters MA, some characters HA, Partial characters HB, left semicircle RA, right semicircle RB) are superimposed to display the third image (left display body LH, right display body RH, complete display body CH), the visibility of the first image However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the third image is displayed, the second image may be superimposed from above (in front of) the first image, and different benefits may be given thereafter depending on the difference in transparency of the second image. In this case, when the transparency of the second image is low (corresponding to when the visibility of the first image is low, when the visibility of the characters in the second image is high), when the transparency of the second image is high The probability that an advantageous privilege is granted may be set higher than (corresponding to when the visibility of the first image is high, when the visibility of the characters in the second image is low).

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 to 186, the first image (left shoji body K1, right shoji body K2) and the second image (characters MG, characters MA, some characters HA, Partial characters HB, left semicircle RA, right semicircle RB) are superimposed to display the third image (left display body LH, right display body RH, complete display body CH), the visibility of the first image 183 (C) (F), 184 (C) (F), 185 (C) (F), and 186 (C) (F), but this is an example, The visibility of the first image is not limited to these illustrations.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E3-1]
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns according to the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects in relation to the variable display of the decorative symbols,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined third image by overlapping a predetermined first image and a predetermined second image,
The display means, when displaying the third image, has a first display mode in which the visibility of the first image is high and a second display mode in which the visibility of the first image is lower than the first display mode. and,
done in
When the first display mode is performed and when the second display mode is performed, the benefits granted after that may be different.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E3-2]
When the second display mode is performed, there is a high probability that a privilege that is more advantageous than when the first display mode is performed is given,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-3]
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects in relation to the variable display of the decorative symbols,
the second effect is a effect in which the third image is divided into a 3A image and a 3B image and displayed;
The display means forms and displays the third image by moving the 3A image and the 3B image, which are separated from each other, and bringing the 3A image and the 3B image into contact with each other. do,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1 or aspect E3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-4]
the second image includes at least a display related to a predetermined character;
When the 3A image and the 3B image are separated from each other, part of the idiom characters are displayed in the 3A image and the 3B image,
When the 3A image and the 3B image are brought into contact with each other to form and display the 3rd image, the characters of the idiom are displayed in the 3rd image.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-5]
the second image includes at least a display related to a predetermined character;
in a state in which the 3A image and the 3B image are spaced apart, a part of a single character is displayed in the 3A image and the 3B image;
When the third image is formed and displayed by contacting the third A image and the third B image, the single character is displayed in the third image.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-6]
The first image includes at least a grid representation,
the second image includes at least a display related to a predetermined character;
The third image includes at least a display in which the grid-like display and the characters overlap,
The visibility of the first image in the third image is the visibility of the grid display of the portion overlapping the character displayed as the second image,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-5, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-7]
The first image is provided in a plurality of colors,
The display means suggests the degree of expectation for a big win based on the difference in color of the first image.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-6, characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 186, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses display devices (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined.
For example, among the pending icon-linked effects in the same effect group, the suspended icon-linked effect A in FIG. 51 and the suspended icon-linked effect B in FIG. 52 may be combined, or the suspended icon-linked effect in FIG. D and the pending number display effect D of FIG. 86 may be combined, or the pending icon interlocking effect C of FIG. 53 and the expectation degree suggesting character effect B of FIG.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 includes a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a). The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from its spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (suspended icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 17 Large winning opening opening start port 18 Third movable accessory 20 First start port (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
64 Sub display screen 66 Frame lamp 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Effect control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A game machine having a first display screen and a second display screen, and comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects on the first display screen and the second display screen ,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined first specific image,
the second effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined second specific image related to the first specific image;
The display means displays the second specific image by adding a predetermined third specific image to the first specific image,
the first effect is a effect in which the second specific image is not displayed;
In the second effect, the second specific image is moved to a predetermined position on the first display screen by moving the first specific image and the third specific image on the first display screen in the first direction . While the first specific image is moved and stopped at the predetermined position, the third specific image is displayed in such a manner that it continues to move in the first direction and moves to a predetermined position on the second display screen. may be
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images